JP7517673B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the above gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that represents the same shape as the shape represented by the hold icon,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed in the display means;
a second effect in which the specific image is displayed at a predetermined display position of the display means after the first effect;
a third effect in which the specific image moves in a predetermined direction within the display means and becomes invisible after the second effect;
and a fourth performance in which, after the third performance, the specific image that has become invisible becomes visible in a different display mode from that in the third performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. An explanatory diagram showing details of the second large prize device. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. A diagram for explaining a special pattern winning determination table, etc. FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a hit type determination table. FIG. 2 is a second diagram for explaining the hit type determination table. 13 is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram for explaining the normal pattern winning determination table, etc. A diagram to explain the electric chute opening pattern determination table. A diagram to explain the large prize opening pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol winning determination process. This is a first flowchart of the special symbol change pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the special pattern change pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. This is a flowchart of special electric feature processing 1. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a setting table of a time-saving counter. This is a first flowchart of special electric feature processing 2. This is a second flowchart of special electric feature processing 2. 13 is a flowchart of a V opening/closing member control process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance end processing. 13 is a flowchart of an ending performance pattern determination process. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a mode status setting table. A diagram for explaining a time-saving performance scenario determination table. A diagram for explaining the specific contents of a time-saving performance scenario. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected performance of V. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game presentation when Special Chart 2 is won. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the changing effects that occur when Special Chart 2 is drawn. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time crying performance. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable part 14 in the forward direction. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating a combination of the first movable prop 14 and an image. An explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the first light-emitting mode of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second light-emitting mode of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the first combination performance of the first and second movable parts. An explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination presentation of the first and second movable parts. An explanatory diagram illustrating a change in timing effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a pattern direction change effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating a pattern direction change effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a pattern direction change effect C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a combination of reel symbols A. An explanatory diagram illustrating a combination of reel symbols B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a combination of reel symbols C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern linkage performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern linkage performance B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern linkage performance C. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern mode change performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern mode change presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern mode change presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern changing area presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern changing area presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern changing area presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating operation promotion presentation A. An explanatory diagram illustrating operation promotion presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating operation promotion presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating the winning/losing announcement performance A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the winning/losing announcement presentation B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the winning/losing announcement display C. An explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display effect A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display presentation B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating the appearance and disappearance of a performance button A. An explanatory diagram illustrating the appearance and disappearance of a performance button B. An explanatory diagram illustrating the appearance and disappearance of a performance button C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect A. An explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect B. An explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification display C. An explanatory diagram illustrating the outer perimeter presentation A of a stereoscopic image. An explanatory diagram illustrating the outer perimeter presentation B of a stereoscopic image. An explanatory diagram illustrating the outer perimeter rendering C of a stereoscopic image. An explanatory diagram illustrating the selective display blocking presentation A of presentation mode. An explanatory diagram illustrating the selective display prevention presentation B of presentation mode. An explanatory diagram illustrating the selective display prevention presentation C of the presentation mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image presentation A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image presentation B. FIG. An explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image presentation C. An explanatory diagram illustrating a specific end surface presentation A of a stereoscopic image. An explanatory diagram illustrating a specific end surface presentation B of a stereoscopic image. An explanatory diagram illustrating a specific end surface presentation C of a stereoscopic image. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination performance A of movable parts. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination performance B of movable parts. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination performance C of movable parts. A figure illustrating the first aspect of the first movable part of another embodiment. A figure illustrating the second aspect of the first movable part of another embodiment. A figure illustrating the third aspect of the first movable part of another embodiment. A figure illustrating the fourth aspect of the first movable part of another embodiment. This is a diagram illustrating a hold number linked image display effect A. This is a diagram illustrating a hold number linked image display effect B. A figure showing an example of hold number linked image display presentation C. A figure showing an example of a hold number linked image display effect D. This is a diagram illustrating a pending number change linked presentation A. A diagram illustrating a hold number change linked presentation B. A diagram illustrating a hold number change linked presentation C. A diagram illustrating a pending number change linked presentation D. A figure showing an example of pending icon movement and change presentation A. A figure showing an example of pending icon movement and change presentation B. A figure showing an example of pending icon movement and change presentation C. A figure showing an example of pending icon movement and change presentation D. This is a diagram illustrating an example of the next mode start display effect A during fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the next mode start display presentation B during fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the next mode start display effect C during fluctuation. A figure showing an example of the next mode start display effect D during fluctuation. A figure showing an example of a specified image continuous display effect A. A figure showing an example of a specified image continuous display presentation B. A figure showing an example of a specified image continuous display presentation C. A figure showing an example of a specified image continuous display presentation D. A figure showing an example of background image switching performance A. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of background image switching performance B. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of background image switching performance C. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of background image switching performance D. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of image blurring effect A. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of image blurring effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of image blurring effect C. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image blurring effect D. A diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification display A. A figure showing an example of winning/losing notification display B. A figure showing an example of winning/losing notification display C. A figure showing an example of a winning/losing notification display D. A diagram illustrating decorative pattern display area presentation A. A figure showing an example of decorative pattern display area presentation B. A figure showing an example of decorative pattern display area presentation C. A diagram illustrating a decorative pattern display area presentation D. A figure showing an example of hold response image presentation A. A figure showing an example of hold response image presentation B. A figure showing an example of hold response image presentation C. A figure showing an example of hold response image presentation D. A figure showing an example of pending image presentation A. A figure showing an example of pending image presentation B. A figure showing an example of pending image presentation C. A figure showing an example of pending image presentation D. This is a figure showing an example of the disappearance presentation A of the pending icon. A figure showing an example of the disappearance presentation B of the pending icon. This figure shows an example of the disappearance presentation C of the pending icon. This figure shows an example of the disappearance effect D of the pending icon. A figure showing an example of pending icon image display presentation A. A figure showing an example of hold icon image display presentation B. A figure showing an example of a hold icon image display presentation C. A figure showing an example of a hold icon image display effect D. A figure showing an example of operation state suggestion presentation A. A figure showing an example of operation state suggestion presentation B. A figure showing an example of operation state suggestion presentation C. A figure showing an example of an operation state suggestion display D. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation image stock effect A. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation image stock presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation image stock effect C. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation image stock effect D. FIG. A diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement possible presentation A. A diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement possible presentation B. A diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement possible presentation C. A diagram illustrating an example of a winning/losing announcement effect D. A figure showing an example of specific target display presentation A. A figure showing an example of specific target display presentation B. A figure showing an example of specific target display presentation C. A figure showing an example of a specific target display presentation D. This is a diagram illustrating a multiple role combination performance A. This is a diagram illustrating a multiple role combination performance B. This is a diagram illustrating a multiple role combination performance C. This is a diagram illustrating a multiple role combination performance D. A diagram showing an example of the winning/losing announcement promotional effect A. A figure showing an example of the winning/losing announcement promotional effect B. A figure showing an example of the winning/losing announcement promotional effect C. A figure showing an example of a winning/losing announcement promotional effect D. A figure showing an example of character selection presentation A. A figure showing an example of character selection presentation B. A figure showing an example of character selection presentation C. A figure showing an example of character selection presentation D. A figure showing an example of starting port light-emitting effect A. A figure showing an example of starting port light-emitting effect B. A figure showing an example of starting port light-emitting effect C. A figure showing an example of starting port light-emitting effect D.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine The structure of the gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. Figure 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the details of the second big prize device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. Also, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches gaming balls based on the player's launch operation, and when the gaming balls win a specific winning device, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit that is arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, through which the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be seen.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and launches game balls with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pressed downward by the player during performances that are executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit located at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, i.e., the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation in which the entire sword member 64 is pushed downward, and a second operation in which the sword button 65 at the tip is pressed. The frame lamps 66 are arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and provide light effects during play. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a first gate (through chucker) 28, a second gate (through chucker) 29, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a normal winning port (normal winning port) 27, an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and multiple game nails are protruding to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the game area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are also provided on the inside of each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15, and the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15 are configured to be able to emit light in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also called variable display), a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area in which reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images that represent a reserved play, and are also called reserved icons. The reserved digestion image 9C is an image that represents the reserved play, and is also called the reserved icon or a variable icon. The reserved icon and the reserved icon are collectively called simply reserved icons.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays the left effect symbol 8L. The center symbol display area displays the center effect symbol 8C. The right symbol display area displays the right effect symbol 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a number of symbols, for example, numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the results of the big win/small win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by combining the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the performance symbols are displayed as random numbers such as "777". If a loss occurs, the performance symbols are displayed as random numbers such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the results of the jackpot and small jackpot lottery by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The variable display of the performance symbols may be scrolled up and down or may be in other forms. In addition, if a small jackpot is won, the performance symbols may be displayed as random numbers such as "135". The combination of performance symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the performance of displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable performance of performance symbols", or simply as "variable performance" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance is counted as one change performance (one cycle of change performance) during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it is fixed and stopped (also called the special pattern change period). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it is fixed and stopped, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also the big win performance performed in parallel with the big win game (second special game) and demo performance for waiting customers. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can suggest that the special symbol is changing or the result of the lottery for the special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols described below, and a second reserved display area that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols described below. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a described below and the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing performance pattern (performance pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a, and the display of reserved consumption image 9C can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the reserved first special symbol or reserved second special symbol is consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, there are provided first movable boards 14 (also called first movable gadgets 14), which are movable so-called gimmicks. The first movable gadgets 14 are configured with two semi-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides, respectively, that can move in the left and right directions. The first movable gadgets 14 are normally stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other, and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members of the first movable gadget 14 are combined at the advanced position, a ring-shaped decorative part is formed, which covers part of the image display device 7.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured with a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" that can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20 described below. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the play board 2 can be seen through the illumination panel 18. In other words, the illumination panel 18 is disposed in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 can be seen through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating the end surface with LED light. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in multiple colors by varying the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (a big win or small win lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a random number for a special symbol and the determination of a big win, etc.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and is provided with a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a second special symbol (a lottery for a big win or a small win). The electric chute 22 is provided with a movable member 23 that can move back and forth, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24. The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state (advancing state). It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 makes it easier for a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when the movable member 23 is in a closed state (retreating state), and it may be possible for a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in a closed state.

The first gate (through chucker) 28 is located to the right of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is located to the left of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and each is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gates (first gate 28 and second gate 29) triggers the drawing of a normal symbol that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through gates 28, 29 triggers the acquisition of a random number for a normal symbol win and a win determination, etc.

Here, the "lottery for special symbols" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "big win" or "small win" to determine whether or not the game has won a big win or a small win. The lottery results for the "big win" and "small win" are not immediately notified to the player, but rather the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result for the big win.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to a process in which a random number for determining the normal pattern is obtained when the gaming ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, and this obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. Instead, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 42 described below, and after a predetermined fluctuating time has passed, the normal pattern corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is disposed below the first gate 28 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first large prize winning opening (first special prize winning opening) 30. The first large prize winning opening 30 is equipped with an opening/closing member (first special prize winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning opening solenoid 33. Game balls can enter the first large prize winning opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is disposed below the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is provided with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that prevents or allows the acceptance of game balls by a shutter-like opening and closing action. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38. Game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The second large prize winning device 36 is provided with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a, a second large prize winning port sensor 35a, a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 inside. The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas inside the second large prize winning device 36 through which a game ball that has passed through the second large prize winning port 35 can pass. The second large prize winning port sensor 35a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize winning port 35. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70, and detects the passage of a game ball into the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the second large winning opening 35 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening/closing member 71. The V-opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates clockwise from the origin position to distribute the game balls to the V region 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in a second state (stopped state) located at the origin to distribute the game balls to the non-V region 70. Note that the V-opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, for example, as long as it has the function of distributing the game balls that have passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. In other words, when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retracted state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V region 39, and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advanced state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70.

2(A) shows the state when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (first state) that allows the passage of the game ball to the V area 39. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35 passes through the second large prize opening sensor 35a and then passes through the V area 39 (route A in FIG. 2(A)). This route of the game ball is called the "first route." FIG. 2(B) shows the state when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (second state) that prevents the passage of the game ball to the V area 39. When the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 35 passes through the second large winning opening sensor 35a, then rolls on the upper surface of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 and passes through the non-V area 70 (route B in FIG. 2B). This route of the game ball is called the "second route." In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 triggers the execution of a jackpot game (second special game) described below. In other words, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the game ball has successfully passed through the V area 39. A jackpot won by the lottery for the first special pattern or the lottery for the second special pattern described above is also called a "type 1 jackpot," and a jackpot won by the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is also called a "type 2 jackpot."

Returning to FIG. 1, two regular winning holes 27 are provided at the bottom of the game area 3. The number of regular winning holes 27 can be set as desired. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the game area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning holes out of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are located at the bottom right of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim to pass through the second gate 29 and win at the first start port 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim to pass through the first gate 28 and win at the second start port 21, the first large prize port 30, and the second large prize port 35.

Figure 3 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special pattern display 41 variably displays (varies) the special pattern (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of a lottery (special pattern winning lottery, big win/small win lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The special pattern (stopped pattern, special pattern derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special pattern selected from a plurality of types of special patterns by the special pattern lottery. If the stopped pattern is a special pattern (jackpot pattern) with a predetermined big win stopping mode, a big win game (second special game) is played in which the first big win port 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the stopped and displayed big win pattern (type of big win won). In addition, if the stopped symbol is a special symbol (small win symbol) with a predetermined small win stopping mode, a small win game (first special game) is played in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of small prize symbol (type of small win won) that has stopped and been displayed. The opening patterns of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 30 and second large prize opening 35) in the first special game or second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). If a small win (one of the multiple types of small wins described below) is won, the small win symbol is displayed with the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "●●●●○○●●". If a loss occurs, a loss symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a loss symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The manner of the variable display is not limited to the above manner and can be any lighting manner as long as the LEDs are not displayed as stopped (illuminated in a specific manner). For example, the manner of the variable display may be that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the random number for winning the special pattern obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 6). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 6) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 6) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and one for the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when the variable display of the special pattern based on that special pattern reservation becomes possible. "Consumption of special reserved symbols" refers to judging the random number of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol, and executing the variable display of the special symbol to show the judgment result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbol or during the special game (big prize game or small prize game), the right to the big prize and small prize lottery for the winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second reserved special symbol display 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it as a stopped symbol to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The stopped normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol (a normal symbol with a predetermined stop mode, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, the first and second LEDs from the left are lit, as in "○○●" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern is displayed with only the right LED lit, as in "●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the normal pattern is displayed in a predetermined change time. The mode of the change display may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The mode of the change display is not limited to the above mode, and can be any lighting mode, as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the mode of the change display may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the normal symbol winning random number acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86 (FIG. 6). There is an upper limit to the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is one. The normal symbol reserve stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve. The consumption of the normal symbol reserve means determining the normal symbol winning random number corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing the variable display of the normal symbol to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal symbol based on the game ball passing through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal symbol for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved maps is displayed on the reserved map display 44. The reserved map display 44 is, for example, composed of one LED, and displays the number of reserved maps by lighting up the LEDs corresponding to the number of reserved maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 4 and 5. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Fig. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Fig. 4), a sub-control board 90 (Fig. 5), an image control board 100 (Fig. 5), a lamp control board 107 (Fig. 5), a sound control board 106 (Fig. 5), and a payout control board 110 (Fig. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win/small win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured by at least including the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the first gate sensor 28a, the second gate sensor 29a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V-area sensor 39a, the non-V-area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensor 27a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V-opening member solenoid 73. The first start hole sensor 20a is provided inside the first start hole 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start hole 20. The second start hole sensor 21a is provided inside the second start hole 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start hole 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first large prize hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize hole 30. The second large prize hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize hole 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize hole 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize opening device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize opening device 36. The V-opening member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening member 71 of the second large prize opening 35.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling the display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on a command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, and the second movable role 15, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (including the lamps of the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15) via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15, and controls the operation of these movable parts according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable parts based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, the sub-control board 90 can cause the performance button 63 and the select button 68 to perform light-emitting performances via the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 6(B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 7(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 7(B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a special symbol winning judgment table T1, a reach judgment table T2, a special symbol winning type judgment table T3, a special symbol change pattern judgment table T4, a normal symbol winning judgment table T5, a normal symbol winning type judgment table T6, a normal symbol change pattern judgment table T7, an electric chute opening pattern judgment table T8, and a large prize opening pattern judgment table T9. These judgment tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each judgment table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special pattern reserved memory area 85, and a normal pattern reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub-control unit side in the main control main processing (described later) are set, and a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a pre-determination command, a customer waiting standby command, a reserved ball number command, a normal pattern fluctuation start command, a normal pattern fluctuation stop command, a normal pattern opening command, a normal pattern ending command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a big win flag, a big win end flag, a small win flag, a small win end flag, a V flag, a time reduction flag, a V opening and closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process (FIG. 20) described later is set. The special chart reserved memory area 85 includes a first special chart reserved memory area 85a in which the first special chart reserved is stored, and a second special chart reserved memory area 85b in which the second special chart reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing a random number group (reserved information) such as a random number for a special pattern corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special pattern reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area for storing a random number group (reserved information) corresponding to the first piece of the second special pattern reserved. The normal pattern reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area for storing a random number group (reserved information) such as a random number for a normal pattern corresponding to the first piece of the normal pattern reserved. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special pattern stop pattern data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 7(A)) stores a variable performance pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time-saving performance scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T55. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 7B) includes a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-determination information memory area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit in the sub-control main process (described later) are stored, and includes a start command, stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, pre-determination command, customer waiting standby command, reserved ball count command, normal symbol change start command, normal symbol change stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. are stored. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and a variable performance start command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, a normal pattern variable performance start command, a normal pattern variable performance end command, a normal pattern opening performance start command, a normal pattern ending performance start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c is a sub-control main processing (described later) in which pre-determination information is stored. The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special pattern reserved performance counter, a second special pattern reserved performance counter, a normal pattern reserved performance counter, a first time-saving performance counter, a second time-saving performance counter, and the like are set. The mode status set area 94e is where the mode status (described below) is set, indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (whether the game is in a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state, described below).

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 8 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 8 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire the "special symbol winning random number", the "special symbol winning type random number", the "reach random number", the "variable pattern random number", the "normal symbol winning random number", and the "normal symbol winning type random number" at the timings described below. The "special symbol winning random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a big win or a small win (big win/small win lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol winning type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of big win or small win (win type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the big win/small win judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed in a stopped state, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a big win or small win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern hit random number" is a random number used in a hit lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "normal symbol winning type random number" is a random number used to determine the type of winning (winning type determination) in the normal symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol winning random number", "special symbol winning type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting hole 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b. The "normal symbol winning random number" and "normal symbol winning type random number" are obtained based on the passage through the gate (first gate 28 or second gate 29). The obtained normal symbol winning random number value and normal symbol winning type random number value are stored in the normal symbol reserved memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "variable performance pattern random number", a "time-saving performance scenario random number", and a "preview performance random number" at the timing described below. The "variable performance pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variable performance pattern, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "time-saving performance scenario random number" is a random number used to determine the change scenario of the remaining number of time-saving times (displayed remaining number of time-saving times) displayed on the image display device 7 during the time-saving state, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "preview performance random number" is a random number used to determine the preview performance during the variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "variable performance pattern random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control unit side to the sub-control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "time-saving performance scenario random number" is acquired based on the output of an ending command from the main control unit side to the sub-control unit side. The "pre-reading performance random number" is obtained based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. Figure 9(A) shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and Figure 9(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

The special symbol winning judgment table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired special symbol winning random number value (any value between 0 and 65535) corresponds to a "big win," a "small win," or a "miss." Figure 9 (A) shows that in the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the special symbol winning random number value is "0 to 210," it is judged to be a "big win," if the special symbol winning random number value is "10,000 to 10,500," it is judged to be a "small win," and if the special symbol winning random number value is any value between 0 and 65,535 other than the above, it is judged to be a "miss." Also, in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the random number value for the special symbol is between 0 and 210, it is determined to be a "big win," if the random number value for the special symbol is between 10,000 and 16,500, it is determined to be a "small win," and if the random number value for the special symbol is any number between 0 and 65,535 other than the above, it is determined to be a "lose."

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". In FIG. 9 (B), in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, it is more difficult to reach when losing in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in the time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The special symbol win type determination table T3 will be explained with reference to Figures 10 and 11. Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol win type determination table T3 in the drawing of special symbol 1. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol win type determination table T3 in the drawing of special symbol 2. The special symbol win type determination table T3 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "big win type" or "small win type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the special symbol win type random number value (any one of 0 to 127) acquired. In FIG. 10, when a "jackpot is won" in the lottery for special symbol 1 in the "non-time-saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number value is "0 to 15", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot A" and the special symbol 1 stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a (special symbol 1 stopping pattern) is determined to be "time-saving pattern 1". If the special symbol winning type random number value is "16 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot B" and the special symbol 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 2". If the special symbol winning type random number value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot A" and the special symbol 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 3". On the other hand, if a "small win" is won in the lottery for special chart 1 during "non-time-saving mode", regardless of the special pattern win type random number value (any value between 0 and 127), the small win type is determined to be "16R normal small win A (effectively 5R/V passing effectively impossible)" and the special chart 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "non-time-saving small win pattern 1".

When a "jackpot win" occurs in the drawing of special chart 1 during "time-saving mode", if the special pattern win type random number value is "0-63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot C" and the special chart 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 4". If the special pattern win type random number value is "64-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot B" and the special chart 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 5". On the other hand, if a "small jackpot win" occurs in the drawing of special chart 1 during "time-saving mode", regardless of the special pattern win type random number value (0-127), the small jackpot type is determined to be "16R normal small jackpot B (effectively 5R/V passing effectively impossible)" and the special chart 1 stopping pattern is determined to be "no time-saving small jackpot pattern 2".

In FIG. 11, when a "jackpot is won" in the lottery for special symbol 2 during "non-time-saving state", if the special symbol hit type random number value is "0-63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot C" and the special symbol 2 stopped symbol (special symbol 2 stopping symbol) displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be "time-saving symbol 6". If the special symbol hit type random number value is "64-95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot A" and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol is determined to be "time-saving symbol 7". If the special symbol hit type random number value is "96-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot D" and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol is determined to be "time-saving symbol 8". On the other hand, when a "small win" is won in the lottery for special chart 2 in the "non-time-saving state", if the special pattern win type random number value is "0-63", the small win type is determined to be "16R time-saving 5 times small win A (effectively 15R/V can be passed)" and the special pattern 2 stop pattern on the second special pattern display 41b is determined to be "time-saving small win pattern 1". If the special pattern win type random number value is "64-127", the small win type is determined to be "16R time-saving 99 times small win A (effectively 15R/V can be passed)" and the special pattern 2 stop pattern is determined to be "time-saving small win pattern 2".

When a "jackpot" is won in the lottery for special chart 2 during "time-saving mode," if the special pattern hit type random number value is "0-79," the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot D" and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 9." If the special pattern hit type random number value is "80-95," the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot B" and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 10." If the special pattern hit type random number value is "96-127," the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot E" and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving pattern 11." On the other hand, when a "small win" is won in the lottery for special chart 2 during "time-saving state", if the special pattern win type random number value is "0-63", the small win type is determined to be "16R time-saving 5 times small win B (effectively 15R/V can be passed)" and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving small win pattern 3". If the special pattern win type random number value is "64-95", the small win type is determined to be "16R time-saving 10 times small win (effectively 15R/V can be passed)" and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving small win pattern 4". If the special pattern win type random number value is "96-111", the small win type is determined to be "16R time-saving 15 times small win (effectively 15R/V can be passed)" and the special chart 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving small win pattern 5". If the special symbol winning type random number value is "112-127", the small win type is determined to be "16R time-saving 99 times small win B (effectively 15R/V can be passed)" and the special symbol 2 stopping pattern is determined to be "time-saving small win pattern 6". By referring to the special symbol winning type determination table T3, it is possible to specify the "special symbol stopping pattern data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping patterns (special symbol 1 stopping patterns and special symbol 2 stopping patterns), as well as the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" of the special game. The specific contents of each big win and each small win will be described later.

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). In Figure 12, for example, when the first start hole 20 is won in a non-time-saving state, the special symbol hit determination table T1 is determined as a "big win", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "111 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P2". Also, for example, when the first start hole 20 is won in a non-time-saving state, the special symbol hit determination table T1 is determined as a "miss", the reach determination table T2 is determined as "no reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", the fluctuation pattern is determined as "P6" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value (even if it is 0 to 127). Also, for example, if a winning symbol enters the second starting hole 21 during time-saving mode and is determined to be a "small win" in the special symbol winning determination table T1, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P17" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value (any value between 0 and 127). As shown in FIG. 12, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, if a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). In addition, if a super reach occurs, it is also determined whether there will be a pseudo-consecutive win or not.

Figure 13 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol winning judgment table T5, Figure 13 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol winning type judgment table T6, and Figure 13 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol change pattern judgment table T7. The normal symbol winning judgment table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to judge whether the acquired normal symbol winning random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "lose". Figure 13 (A) shows that in both the "non-time-saving state" and the "time-saving state", in the lottery for the normal symbol (normal symbol), if the normal symbol winning random number value is "0 to 254", it is judged to be a "win", and if the normal symbol winning random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is judged to be a "lose".

The normal symbol winning type determination table T6 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "winning type" and "type of normal symbol" according to the acquired normal symbol winning type random number value (any one of 0 to 65535). In FIG. 13 (B), when a normal symbol is selected in the lottery during the "non-time-saving state", if the normal symbol winning type random number value is "0 to 30", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 1", and the normal symbol stopping pattern (normal symbol stopping pattern) displayed on the normal symbol display 42 is determined to be "winning symbol 1". If the normal symbol winning type random number value is "100 to 170", the winning type is determined to be "short opening 1", and the normal symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "winning symbol 2". When the normal symbol winning type random number is a number between 0 and 65535 other than the above, the winning type is determined to be "short opening 2" and the normal symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "winning pattern 3". On the other hand, when the normal symbol is selected in the lottery during the "time-saving state", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 2" and the normal symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "winning pattern 4" regardless of the normal symbol winning type random number (any number between 0 and 65535). By referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table T6, the "normal symbol stopping pattern data" (not shown) corresponding to the normal symbol stopping pattern can be identified.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation time of the normal symbol depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol and the type of win. In FIG. 13(C), for example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving state is "win" and the win type is "long opening 1", it is shown that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Also, for example, when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the time-saving state is "lose", it is shown that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second".

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 according to the normal stop pattern (normal stop pattern data). Figure 14 (A) shows that, for example, when the normal stop pattern is "win pattern 1", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and when the normal stop pattern is "win pattern 4", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 14". Figure 14 (B) shows the contents of each opening pattern 11 to 14. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second. In opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chute 22 opens once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In opening pattern 14, the electric chute 22 opens once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls win (prescribed winning number, maximum 2 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open.

Figure 15 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T9. The large prize opening pattern determination table T9 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stopping pattern (special symbol stopping pattern data). In Fig. 15(A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "16H", "21H", "22H", "23H", "31H", "32H" or "33H", the opening pattern of the first large winning hole 30 and the second large winning hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H" or "17H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "24H", "25H", "34H", "35H", "36H" or "37H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In Fig. 15(B), the contents of each opening pattern 21 to 23 are shown. In opening pattern 21, after a 6-second opening (OP), the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 15. In opening pattern 22, after a 4-second opening (OP), the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.6 seconds in round 1, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 2 to 6, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in rounds 7 to 16. In opening pattern 23, after an opening (OP) of 0.01 seconds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once in the first round for an opening time of 1.6 seconds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once in the second through sixteenth rounds for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (a prescribed number of winning balls, up to a maximum of nine), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots,""smalljackpots," and "losses" as the results of the special symbol lottery (jackpot/small jackpot lottery). In the case of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small jackpot," a "small jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss," a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game (second special game)" is executed in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. When a small jackpot is won, a "small jackpot game (first special game)" is executed in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened once in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of small jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second large prize opening 35 during the execution of the small prize game, a "large prize game (second special game)" is executed in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the small prize that has been won. The large prize game executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a large prize winning is also called a "type 1 large prize game". The large prize game executed based on the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is also called a "type 2 large prize game". The large prize game and the small prize game are also called a "special game". This special game may include a round in which the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round.

The big win game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games) that open the first big win opening 30, an opening (OP) before the first round of play starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play. The time (interval time) that the first big win opening 30 is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round play before that closure. The small win game includes a small win opening game that opens the second big win opening 35, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small win opening game starts, and an ending (post-closing interval) after the small win opening game ends.

There are several types of jackpots. Here, the types of jackpots are "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot A-E", "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot A, B", and "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot A-D". All of these jackpots are jackpots that control the game state to the "time-saving state and high base state" described below after executing a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) that opens the first major prize winning port 30 for 15R. On the other hand, these jackpots have different times of time-saving at which the "time-saving state and high base state" after the jackpot game ends. Here, the "time-saving number of times" refers to the number of times of variable display (variable display) of the special pattern that can be executed in the "time-saving state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is set in advance for each jackpot type. For example, in the "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot A-E", the number of time-saving times is 99 times, and in the "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot A, B", the number of time-saving times is 15 times. In addition, the "time-saving state and high base state" ends if a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is played, even if the time-saving count has not been reached.

There are several types of small wins. Here, the types of small wins are set as "16R normal small win A, B", "16R time-saving 5 times small win A, B", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win A, B". In these small wins, a small win game is first executed, and if the game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passing), a big win game (two types of big win game) is executed. Therefore, in a small win, the opening of the second big winning hole 35 as a small win game corresponds to the 1st round, and the big win game that opens the first big winning hole 30 for 15R, which is executed after the V passing, corresponds to the 2nd round to the 16th round. If there is no V passing in the small win game, the big win game is not executed. Here, the "16R (effectively 5R) normal small win" is a small win in which V passing is practically impossible. On the other hand, the "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win" are small wins that allow V passage.Whether or not V passage is possible during a small win game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 of the second large winning device 36.Specifically, it is as follows.

In each of the above small wins, the second large winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small win game after winning (Figure 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small win game differs depending on the type of small win. Specifically, the opening time of the "16R normal small win" (opening pattern 22) is 4 seconds, while the opening time of the "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small win game differs depending on the type of small win is to change the opening timing of the second large winning opening 35 with respect to the V-shaped opening and closing member 71, which moves in a constant motion from the start of this opening. Here, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened for 0.01 seconds when the small win game starts, and then opened for 4 seconds. In the opening pattern 22, the second large winning opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the small winning game starts, and the V opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is opened. Therefore, in the "16R normal small winning", it is practically impossible to pass through the V during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second large winning opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the small winning game starts, both openings continue for 1.6 seconds, and the V opening/closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is closed. Therefore, in the "16R 5-times short-time small winning", "16R 10-times short-time small winning", "16R 15-times short-time small winning", and "16R 99-times short-time small winning", it is possible to pass through the V during the small winning game.

"16R 5 times short-time small win", "16R 10 times short-time small win", "16R 15 times short-time small win", and "16R 99 times short-time small win" are wins that control the game state after the jackpot game to the "time-shortened state and high base state" described below when a jackpot game is played after a small win game. "16R 5 times short-time small win", "16R 10 times short-time small win", "16R 15 times short-time small win", and "16R 99 times short-time small win" have different numbers of time-shortened times in the "time-shortened state and high base state". For example, in "16R 10 times short-time small win", the number of time-shortened times is 10, and in "16R 15 times short-time small win", the number of time-shortened times is 15. On the other hand, "16R normal small win" is a win that controls the game state after the jackpot game to the "non-time-shortened state and low base state" described below when a jackpot game is played. However, since the "16R normal small win" is a small win in which it is virtually impossible to pass through the V, it is almost impossible to play a big win.

In addition, all small wins in the special chart 1 lottery when the time is not shortened are "16R normal small wins" that are practically impossible to pass V. On the other hand, the distribution rate of small wins in the special chart 2 lottery when the time is shortened is 50% for "16R 5 times small win", 25% for "16R 10 times small win", 12.5% for "16R 15 times small win", and 12.5% for "16R 99 times small win", which does not include "16R normal small win". Since the probability of winning a big win does not change between the special chart 1 lottery and the special chart 2 lottery, the probability of winning either a "big win" or a "small win where a big win game (2 types of big win game) is executed" is higher in the special chart 2 lottery when the time is shortened than in the special chart 1 lottery when the time is not shortened. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that it is more advantageous for the player to hit the ball from the right during the time-saving state and have the ball enter the second starting hole 21 than to hit the ball from the left during the non-time-saving state and have the ball enter the first starting hole 20.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "wins" and "losses" as the results of the normal symbol lottery (win lottery). In the case of a "win", a "win symbol" is displayed frozen on the normal symbol display 42. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed frozen on the normal symbol display 42. When a win is won, a "win game (normal game)" is executed as an auxiliary game in which the electric chute 22 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of normal symbol (type of win) that is frozen and displayed. In this win game (normal game), the electric chute may be opened multiple times during one round. The win game (normal game) includes one round game (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. There are multiple types of wins. Here, "long opening 1", "long opening 2", "short opening 1", and "short opening 2" are set as the win types. These winnings have different fluctuation times, opening times, release times, and ending times.

5. Description of the Game State The game control microcomputer 81 of the game machine 1 can execute "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs the variation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is called the "time reduction state", and the state in which the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply called the "non-time reduction state". In the time reduction state, the variation time of the special symbols (the time from the start of the variation display to the derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the variation pattern determination using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) that is determined so that the variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more often selected in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a shorter variable time is likely to be selected as the variable time of the variable display of the special symbol, compared to when the variable time shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the reserved special symbol is quickened, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as reserved special symbol) at the starting hole is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under the smooth progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the time-shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the time-shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the time-shortening control for the normal symbols in the time-shortening state, and does not execute it in the non-time-shortening state. In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the normal symbols is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the variation pattern using the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) that is determined so that in the time-shortening state, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than in the non-time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the time-shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the normal symbols, compared to when the time-shortening control is not executed.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving state (Figure 13). Even in the non-time-saving state, if "long opening 1" is won in the normal pattern lottery, the opening pattern of the electric chute becomes "opening pattern 11", and the opening time is long, 5 seconds, but the probability of being assigned to "long opening 1" as a winning type is low at 31/65536, and in most cases, even if you win, the opening time will be 0.02 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute is always 3 seconds if you win, so in effect, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. When the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 opens more frequently and game balls enter the second starting hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state," and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a big win without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state does not have to execute all of the above controls. In other words, by executing one or more controls of the variable time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and the open time extension control for the electric chute 22, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed. In addition, the high base state may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game is executed by winning "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot A-E", "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot A, B", "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot A-D", "16R time-saving 99 times small jackpot", "16R time-saving 15 times small jackpot", "16R time-saving 10 times small jackpot", or "16R time-saving 5 times small jackpot" is "time-saving state and high base state". The "time-saving state and high base state" ends when a variable display (variable display) of the special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times, 10 times, 15 times, or 99 times), or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. The game state after a jackpot game is executed by winning "16R normal small jackpot" is "non-time-saving state and low base state". This game state is also called "normal game state". When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after powering on is this normal gaming state. Here, the "time-saving state and high base state" is also simply called the "time-saving state," and the "non-time-saving state and low base state" is also simply called the "non-time-saving state."

In the high base state (time-saving state), the game can be more advantageously advanced by hitting the ball to the right play area 3B (Fig. 1) with a right hit. This is because the electric chute 22 is easier to open than in the low base state (non-time-saving state), and it is easier to win the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in the high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the first gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (wins at the start hole) to be obtained than by hitting to the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can be more advantageously advanced by hitting the ball to the left play area 3A (Fig. 1) with a left hit. This is because the electric chute 22 is harder to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first starting hole 20 than in the second starting hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the player hits left to make the game ball pass through the second gate 29, which triggers the normal pattern lottery, and enter the first starting hole 20. This allows more start wins to be obtained than by hitting right. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time-saving state), if the game ball passes through the second gate 29 and "long opening 1" is won, the electric chute 22 is opened for 5 seconds, so the player hits right to make the game ball enter the second starting hole 21. After the electric chute 22 closes, the player hits left again.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 16 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As described below, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a win/loss determination means, a pattern control means, a winning game execution means, a game state control means, and a winning type selection means by reading out programs stored in the main ROM 83 (see, for example, Figures 22, 27 to 29, 31, and 32).

[Main control main processing]
16 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). In the initial settings, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial settings are performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (special symbol random number, special symbol type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number, normal symbol type random number) shown in FIG. 8 (A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Also, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, and the normal winning hole sensor 27a (Figure 4).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V opening and closing member control process (step S106), and the V area sensor detection process (step S107) in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V area sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the reserved ball number process (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal patterns stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal patterns. After setting the reserved ball count command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After the reserved ball count process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above-mentioned processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S110). In other processing, for example, based on the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 described below, the second special chart reserved indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing that number, and based on the number of reserved balls for special chart 1, the first special chart reserved indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode showing that number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the start-hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This judgement is made based on whether the game ball has been detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "1 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved balls for normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved balls for normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "0" (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for normal symbols (step S203), and then a process for obtaining a random number for normal symbols is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the random number counter for normal symbols (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-H) and the value of the type counter for normal symbols (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-HS), and stores the obtained random number group in the first memory area of the reserved normal symbol memory area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "1 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "1" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0" (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 (step S207), and then a process for acquiring random numbers related to special chart 2 is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the special pattern random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the special pattern type random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variable pattern random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserved storage area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). In the special chart 2 pre-determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of whether or not there is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value that it refers to. If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot", the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination. In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (the jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a jackpot), and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, similar to the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter for the special pattern hit, the value of the random number counter for the type of special pattern hit, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variable pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserve storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reserve storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The special chart 1 pre-determination process is the same as the special chart 2 pre-determination process described above.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S540. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal symbol is being displayed as stopped (whether the fluctuation stop time has elapsed) (step S502). If the normal symbol is being displayed as stopped (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S531. If the normal symbol is not being displayed as stopped (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal symbol is being changed (step S503). If the normal pattern is changing (step S503: YES), the process proceeds to step S521. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" or not (step S504). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S504: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 with the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern being "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 18), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S505 and the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern immediately becomes "0". This is also the same for the number of reserved balls of the special pattern. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the reserved number of special symbols becomes "1", and then in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21) described later, the reserved number of special symbols becomes "0". Note that the decrement of the reserved number of normal symbols (reservation of normal symbols) is performed together with a clearing process that clears the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first memory area of the normal symbol reservation memory area 86.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win determination by referring to the normal symbol win determination table T5 (FIG. 13(A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol win random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 as a determination value. Then, it determines whether or not there is a win using the normal symbol win random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win determination table T5. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol win random number value is between "0" and "254", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol win random number value is otherwise, such as "255", it is determined to be a "lose" (FIG. 13(A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table T6 (FIG. 13(B)) to determine the type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) (step S507). Specifically, if the winning determination in the above (step S506) is a win, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol winning type random number stored in the first memory area of the normal symbol reserve memory area 86. Then, the winning type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined using the normal symbol winning type random number, the game state (time-saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning type determination table T6. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol winning type random number value is "0" to "30", the winning type is determined to be "long opening 1" and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 1". If the normal pattern winning type random number value is between "100" and "170", the winning type is determined to be "Short Open 1" and the normal pattern is determined to be "Winning Pattern 2". If the normal pattern winning type random number value is anything else, the winning type is determined to be "Short Open 2" and the normal pattern is determined to be "Winning Pattern 3" (Figure 13 (B)). On the other hand, if the above winning determination is "Miss", the "Missing Pattern" is set as the normal pattern.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal pattern variation pattern judgment table T7 (FIG. 13(C)) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal pattern variation pattern using the game state (whether or not the time-saving state), the winning judgment result, the winning type, and the normal pattern variation pattern judgment table T7. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the winning type is "long opening 1", the normal pattern variation time is judged to be "30 seconds". Also, for example, in the time-saving state, if the winning judgment is "miss", the normal pattern variation time is judged to be "1 second" (FIG. 13(C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal pattern variation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal pattern variation and the variation time (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information about normal stop symbol data and information about normal symbol variation patterns. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts displaying the normal symbol variations and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol variation time is the variation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13 (C)). If the variation time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol variation display continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the normal symbol variation display at the normal symbol (the winning normal symbol stop symbol or the losing normal symbol stop symbol) specified in step S507 (step S522). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to inform the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol variation stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stop time of the normal symbol and ends this process (step S524). Here, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal symbol variation stop time has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol stop display continues. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process if the hit determination in the above (step S506) is "miss" (step S532: NO). On the other hand, if the hit determination is "win" (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol opening command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the opening of the winning game (normal game) (step S533). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined above (step S507) and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T8. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "win symbol 1", "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "win symbol 4", "opening pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chute operation according to the selected opening pattern (step S535) and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is met (step S540). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (e.g., 2 balls), or the opening time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it is time to close the electric chute 22. The opening time of the electric chute 22 is the opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not met (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the electric chute 22 is met (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol ending command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the ending of the winning game (normal game) (step S541). The game control microcomputer 81 also closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is called "special operation status""1","2","3","4", and "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a special symbol hit determination and a special symbol change pattern selection are performed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a big win or a small win occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), a special electric device process 1 (big win game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process 1, a big win game (second type special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), a special electric device process 2 (small win game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric device process 2, a small win game (first type special game) is executed. Details of each process will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 20: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 21 (special symbol 2 reserved) is "0" or not (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning in the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a special symbol winning judgment process (step S1402) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area 85b (step S1405). By the above step, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. This allows the player to recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 variation start process (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variation display of the second special symbol and set the special operation status to "2". In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the special pattern hit determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 20 (special symbol 1 reserved) is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning in the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a special symbol winning judgment process (step S1408) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the special variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of reserved information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). For example, when reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and when reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the first special chart reserved is consumed in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. In addition, if there is reserved information in the second to fourth storage areas of the first special symbol reserved storage area 85a, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the right among the four reserved images 9A) are shifted one to the right. This allows the player to recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start the variable display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process includes information about the special chart stop pattern data set in the special pattern hit determination process (step S1408) and information about the fluctuation pattern set in the special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". In other words, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed before the consumption of the first reserved special chart.

[Special symbol winning determination process]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart of the special symbol winning judgment process (FIG. 21: steps S1402, S1408). The special symbol winning judgment process (step S1402) and the special symbol winning judgment process (step S1408) are similar in flow of processing, so they will be described together. In the special symbol winning judgment process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a winning judgment by referring to the special symbol winning judgment table T1 (FIG. 9 (A)) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol winning random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the special symbol winning judgment process, the special symbol winning random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first one of the second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is read out. In the winning judgment process of the special symbol 1, the special symbol winning random number stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first reserved special symbol) of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not it is a big win and whether or not it is a small win using the special symbol winning judgment table T1 that it refers to and the read special symbol winning random number value. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win/lose judgment means".

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is "jackpot" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1505) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol hit type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for special symbol 2, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special symbol reserve storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process for special symbol 1, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special symbol reserve storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read out special symbol hit type random number value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win type selection means". After determining the type of jackpot, the special stop pattern data (jackpot pattern) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol winning judgment is not a "big win" (step S1503: NO) but a "small win" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small win flag (step S1512) and judges the type of small win (step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol winning type random number value as a judgment value, similar to the judgment of the big win type. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges the type of small win based on the read out special symbol winning type random number value and the special symbol winning type judgment table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After the judgment of the small win type, the special symbol stop pattern data (small win pattern) corresponding to the specified small win type is set in the win type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process ends.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit" or "small hit" but a "miss" (steps S1503, S1510: NO), the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the miss symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1518), and this process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flow charts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process for special symbol 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state jackpot among the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for non-time-saving state jackpots, the portion of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 that corresponds to a jackpot in a non-time-saving state (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" and "P2" in special symbol 1, and the portion with fluctuation pattern "P14" in special symbol 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special symbol 1, and "P14" is selected in special symbol 2 regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value.

In step S1602, if the big win flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the small win flag is ON or not (step S1604). If the small win flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state small win in the special pattern change pattern judgment table T4 (FIG. 12) to select a change pattern (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the change pattern random number value as a judgment value, as in step S1603 above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a change pattern using the part of the special pattern change pattern judgment table T4 that corresponds to the small win in the non-time-saving state and the change pattern random number value. Here, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to the small win in the non-time-saving state is the part with the fluctuation pattern "P3" in special symbol 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" in special symbol 2, so these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random number value.

In step S1604, if the small win flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 9 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of a reach and miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach and miss in the non-time-saving state in the special pattern change pattern determination table T4 and selects the change pattern (step S1607). Here, as the table for reach and miss in the non-time-saving state, the part of the special pattern change pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 that corresponds to reach and miss in the non-time-saving state (the part with the change pattern "P4" and "P5" in special pattern 1, and the part with the change pattern "P14" in special pattern 2) is referred to. In special pattern 1, either "P4" or "P5" is selected as the change pattern from the read change pattern random number value. In special pattern 2, "P14" is selected as the change pattern regardless of the read change pattern random number value.

If the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (step S1606: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in a non-time-saving state in the special pattern change pattern determination table T4 and selects a change pattern (step S1608). Here, as a table for a miss without a reach in a non-time-saving state, the part of the special pattern change pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. 12 that corresponds to a miss without a reach in a non-time-saving state (the part with the change pattern "P6" or "P7" in the special pattern 1, and the part with the change pattern "P15" in the special pattern 2) is referred to. In the special pattern 1, either "P6" or "P7" is selected as the change pattern from the read-out change pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special pattern 1 (1 to 4). In the special pattern 2, "P15" is selected as the change pattern regardless of the read-out change pattern random number value. In Special Chart 1, the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so a shortened variation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is between "3" and "4" in Special Chart 1, more variation patterns with shorter variation times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is between "1" and "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 24: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 described above, except for the following points, so an explanation will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1608 is that the part of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 referenced in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618 is different from that of the already-described steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time-saving state in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is referenced, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the table for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a small win in the time-saving state (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P9" in special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P17" in special chart 2) is referenced. Also, for example, in the case of step S1617, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a reach miss in the time-saving state (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P10" in special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P18" in special chart 2) is referenced.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 17: step S109). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 25 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 20: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23, 24) (see FIG. 12). If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). The game control microcomputer 81 also performs other processes associated with the stopping of the variation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of the special symbol), etc. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "symbol control means." The stop display time of the special symbol can be set arbitrarily according to the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the lottery result of the special symbol 2, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time-saving state, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is judged whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the jackpot opening according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the jackpot opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the jackpot opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. Here, regardless of the type of jackpot (whether the special symbol stop pattern data is 11H-13H, 15H, 16H, 21H-23H, or 31H-33H), "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the winning hole. In addition to setting the opening pattern of the jackpot opening, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) performed during the jackpot game. Here, regardless of the type of jackpot, the round counter is set to "15" (Figure 15 (B)).

After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES), it switches it to OFF (step S1805). This results in a non-time-saving state during the execution of the type 1 jackpot game. After that, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, an opening command for the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and this process ends. By setting the special operation status to "4", the process moves to special electric device process 1 (jackpot game).

In step S1802, if the big win flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small win flag is ON (step S1810). If the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big win opening according to the type of the small win that was won (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, like the above-mentioned step S1803, refers to the big win opening opening pattern determination table T9, determines the opening pattern of the big win opening from the special chart stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. Here, for example, when the small win type is "16R normal small win A" (the special chart stop pattern data is "14H"), "opening pattern 22" is set as the opening pattern of the winning opening. Also, for example, if the small prize type is "16R time-saving 5 times small prize A" (special chart stop pattern data is "24H"), "opening pattern 23" is set as the prize opening pattern. In conjunction with the setting of the large prize opening pattern, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of small prize that was won. Here, regardless of the type of small prize, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 15 (B)).

After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening/closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is a period in which the V opening/closing member 71 is operated. In the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening/closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed as an opening for 0.01 seconds after the small win game in any small win game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. Note that when the small win flag is ON, unlike when the big win flag is ON, the time-saving flag is not switched to OFF even if it is ON. After that, in order to start the small win game, a small win opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small win game is started (step S1814). After that, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and this process is terminated. When the special operation status is set to "5", processing transitions to special electric device processing 2 (small win game).

In step S1810, if the small win flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820) and ends this process. As a result, neither the big win game nor the small win game is started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process again (FIG. 20: step S1302), where a special symbol win determination for the next reserved symbol is performed, etc.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 26: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, in the non-time-saving state, the process skips to step S2040. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the change is a change of the second special pattern (step S2010). If the change is a change of the second special pattern (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2015). The "first time-saving counter C1" counts the number of times the second special symbol changes during the time-saving state. The "second time-saving counter C2" counts the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving state (the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the number of times the second special symbol changes). The initial values set in the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table in FIG. 30 in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later. On the other hand, if the change is a change of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time-saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2020).

The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not at least one of the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 has become "0" as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step S2030). If neither the value of the first time-saving counter C1 nor the value of the second time-saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. If at least one of the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). This switches the game state from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. That is, when the number of times the special pattern has changed in the time-saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 30, the game state is switched to the non-time-saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the current game state that has just been set (whether or not the game is in a time-saving state, the respective values of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter, etc.).

[Special Electric Device Processing 1 (Big Win Game)]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the special electric device process 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the first big winning device 31 based on the opening pattern has all ended in the currently executed big win game. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first big winning port 30 is open or not (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the first large prize opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30 (step S2203). The time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30 includes, for example, when the opening time of the large prize game has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the first large prize opening 30, which was temporarily closed after opening, has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large prize opening opening process (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first large prize opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) corresponding to the winning type (large prize type or small prize type). When a type 1 large prize game is being played, the first large prize opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the type of large prize. When a type 2 large prize game is being played, the first large prize opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 according to the type of small prize. After the large prize opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game (small win game and big win game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. This allows the sub-control board 90 to be notified of the number of rounds of the special game. In this embodiment, the first large prize winning hole 30 is not opened multiple times during one round of play. However, in another embodiment, when the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the opening of the first large prize winning hole 30 is the first opening in one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the first large prize opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the first large prize opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the first large prize opening 30 in that round game has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the first large prize opening 30 has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (e.g., 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first large prize opening 30 was opened) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the first large prize opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the first large prize opening 30 is met (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the first large prize opening 30 (step S2211) and then ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S2203, if it is not the time (timing) to open the first large prize opening 30, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since the first large prize opening 30 was closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the first large prize opening 30 to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round play has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first large prize opening 30 was closed. If the round play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter value by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value has become "0" (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0" (step S2226: YES), as a jackpot end process that ends the jackpot game, an ending command for the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227), and the ending of the jackpot is started (step S2228). The ending command contains information about the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After the jackpot ending begins, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game state setting process (step S2234) described below and ends this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state after the big win (time-saving state or non-time-saving state), and in the time-saving state, sets the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 to initial values (time-saving count) according to the type of win.

[Game Status Setting Process]
29 is a flow chart of the game status setting process (FIG. 28: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "game status control means" by executing the above-mentioned game status management process (FIG. 27) and this game status setting process. The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the jackpot game executed this time is a jackpot game executed as a result of a time-saving hit (i.e., "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot", "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot", "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot", "16R time-saving 5 times small hit", "16R time-saving 10 times small hit", "16R time-saving 15 times small hit", "16R time-saving 99 times small hit") (step S2301). If the time-saving hit is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current jackpot game is triggered by a normal hit (i.e., "16R normal small hit"), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, if the current jackpot game is triggered by a time-saving hit (step S2301: YES), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 to the setting values shown in the setting table (FIG. 30) described later (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game is set to "time-saving state and high base state". This "time-saving state and high base state" ends when either of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special pattern is performed a predetermined number of times, or the next jackpot (1st type jackpot or 2nd type jackpot) is won. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information about the currently set game state (whether the game state is in the time-saving state, the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2, etc.).

Figure 30 is a diagram for explaining the setting table of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the game state setting process (Figure 29) described above. In Figure 30, for example, if the currently executed jackpot game is triggered by a "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot" or a "16R time-saving 99 times small win" (when the special chart stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", "15H", "25H", or "37H"), the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 are set to "99". Also, for example, if the currently executed jackpot game is triggered by a "16R time-saving 10 times small win" (when the special chart stop pattern data is "35H"), the first time-saving counter C1 is set to "10" and the second time-saving counter C2 is set to "15".

[Special Electric Device Processing 2 (Small Win Game)]
31 and 32 are flow charts of the special electric device processing 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "win game execution means" by executing the above-mentioned special electric device processing 1 (big win game: FIG. 28) and the special electric device processing 2 (small win game). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the small win end flag is ON or not (step S2400). The "small win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the second large winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small win game being executed. If the small win end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process proceeds to step S2420. If the small win end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second large winning port 35 is open or not (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2410.

If the second large prize opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the second large prize opening 35 (step S2404). The time (timing) to open the second large prize opening 35 is when the opening time for the small prize has elapsed and it is time to start opening. The opening time for the small prize is 4 seconds for opening pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds for opening pattern 23. If it is not time (timing) to open the second large prize opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. If it is time (timing) to open the second large prize opening 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the large prize opening process (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second large prize opening 35 according to an opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) corresponding to the type of small prize. After the large prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. This makes it possible to notify the sub-control board 90 of the number of rounds of the special game. After the round designation command has been set, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2402, if the second large prize opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the second large prize opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the second large prize opening 35 has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 10), or the time to close the second large prize opening 35 has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the second large prize opening 35 was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the second large prize opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the second large prize opening 35 is met (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large prize opening closing process to close (block) the second large prize opening 35 (step S2412). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 also sets an ending command for the small prize game in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small prize ending process to end the small prize game. After the large prize opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small prize game corresponds to the first round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small prize ending flag to ON (step S2416) and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S2400, if the small win end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the interval time after closing (ending time) has elapsed (step S2420). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small win end flag to OFF (step S2422) and switches the small win flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the V flag is ON (step S2430). The "V flag" is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed through the V area 39 during the execution of a small win game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34) described later. If the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute a double jackpot game, so it sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432), sets the special action status to "1" (step S2434), and ends this process. As a result, the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 20: step S1302) is executed again in the next special action process.

In the above-mentioned step S2430, if the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag OFF (step S2436), switches the jackpot flag ON to execute the 2nd type jackpot game (step S2437), and sets the special operation status to "4" (step S2438). By setting the special operation status to "4", the processing moves to the special electric device processing 1 (jackpot game) in the next special operation processing (FIG. 20). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), switches it to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the time-saving state is not activated during the execution of the 2nd type jackpot game. After that, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command for the type 2 jackpot game (step S2444) and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). This transitions from the small jackpot game in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a short period of time to the type 2 jackpot game.

[V opening/closing member control process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 17: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON or not (step S2500). If the V opening/closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process is terminated. If the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), a "V opening/closing member operation process" is performed to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern (step S2502), and a "V effective period setting process" is performed to consider the V passage of the game ball in a predetermined period (timing) as effective (step S2504). If the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small win game is started (FIG. 26: steps S1812, S1814), so the V opening/closing member operation process and the V effective period setting process are performed in accordance with this small win game.

In the V opening/closing member operation process, a timer is set to measure the operation time of the V opening/closing member 71, and based on that timer, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned ON when the timing for the V opening/closing member 71 to open is reached, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned OFF when the timing for the V opening/closing member 71 to close is reached. This causes the V opening/closing member 71 to move in a constant manner from the start of the opening of the small win game. Specifically, the V opening/closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage-blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then controlled to a passage-permitting state (open state) for 4 seconds, and then controlled to a passage-blocking state (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period is set for a certain operation of the V opening/closing member 71 as described above. The "V effective period" is a period during which, when a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a, the detection is considered valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V effective period is from the start of opening the V area 39 (the point at which the V opening/closing member 71 is started to be controlled to the passing-permitting state) until a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time is set to a time (here, the opening time of the V area 39 + 1 second) that is longer than the opening time of the V area 39 (the time during which the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to the passing-permitting state). This is because the time lag until the game ball that has passed the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 reaches the V area 39 is taken into consideration. In the V effective period setting process, a timer for measuring the V effective period is set, and the V effective flag is turned ON when the timing to enable the V area 39 is reached based on the timer, and the V effective flag is turned OFF when the timing to disable the V area 39 is reached. In addition, in the V region sensor detection process (Figure 34) described later, whether or not the V valid period is in progress is determined by whether or not this V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening/closing member operation process and the V effective period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening/closing member operation process (step S2502), it determines whether the total operating time (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) from when the V opening/closing member 71 starts to when it ends a certain operation has elapsed. If the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has not ended (step S2506: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508) and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 in the small win game and the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 35 (opening/closing member 32) will be explained. As described above, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In the "16R normal small win" (opening pattern 22), the second large winning opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 4.41 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of the "16R normal small win", the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is opened, making it substantially impossible for the game ball to pass through the V during the small win game. On the other hand, in the "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win" (opening pattern 23), the second large winning opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second large winning opening 35 and the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 are simultaneously opened 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, both openings continue for 1.6 seconds, and the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is closed 2.4 seconds after the second large winning opening 35 is closed. Therefore, no matter what the winning timing is when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V-shaped area 39. Here, the various devices such as the second large prize device 36 are arranged so that if the game ball is continuously shot from the right, the game ball will always enter the second large prize opening 35 while it is open. Also, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the second large prize opening 35 to reach the position of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. For this reason, in the "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win", if the game ball is continuously shot from the right during a small win game, the game ball will always pass through the V.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 17: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (step S2504) of the V-opening/closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V-effective period is set for several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed. Here, one second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not in the V-effective period (step S2602: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is during the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2604), and ends this process. The "V pass command" is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of V pass.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 43. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94. As will be described below, the performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a performance execution means by reading out programs stored in the sub-ROM 93.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8 (B) by incrementing them by 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Also, the random number value may be incremented by 2 or more, instead of incrementing by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100, which has received the various commands, uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. The voice control board 106, which has received the various commands, executes a voice effect of outputting sound from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107, which has received the various commands, executes a lamp effect of controlling the emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. The other processes include, for example, random number update processing.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If the command has been received (step S4415: YES), a look-ahead performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "look-ahead performance determination process" is a process for determining whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern if executed. In the look-ahead performance determination process, a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance and a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub-ROM 93. When it is determined that a look-ahead performance is to be executed, the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in a pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, if a pre-judgment command has not been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect determination process is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the reserved ball number of the special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of the special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a change start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a change performance start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). The "change performance start process" is a process for selecting a change performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern change. The details of the change performance start process will be described later.
On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variable performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a fluctuation stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a fluctuation performance end process (Figure 39) is performed (step S4470). The "fluctuation performance end process" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance, and will be described in detail later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation performance end process has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance end process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data set at the time of winning judgment of a big win or small win, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the large prize winning port or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game or small prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special symbol stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a performance pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not an ending command for a big win game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If so (step S4495: YES), the ending performance pattern determination process (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a big win game. The details of the ending performance pattern determination process will be described later. If the performance control microcomputer 91 receives an ending command for a small win game from the main control board 80, it performs a process different from the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process. Note that, if an ending command for a big win game has not been received in step S4495 (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), the normal symbol variation performance start process is performed (step S4510). The "normal symbol variation performance start process" is a process for selecting a normal symbol variation performance pattern (content) to be executed during normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation performance start process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first sets information on the normal symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol variation start command and information on the normal symbol variation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, and symbol information indicating the symbol as the judgment result of the normal symbol hit judgment process. The game status information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91. The performance control microcomputer 91 selects a normal symbol variation performance pattern that is preset in response to the normal symbol variation pattern, and sets a normal symbol variation performance start command for starting the selected normal symbol variation performance in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the normal symbol variation performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined normal symbol variation performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, if the winning type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" during the non-time-saving state, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the "V expectation performance" (FIG. 44) described later. In addition, if the normal symbol variation start command is not received in step S4505 (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a normal pattern change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), a normal pattern change performance end process is performed (step S4520). The "normal pattern change performance end process" is a process for stopping the normal pattern change performance. In the normal pattern change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal pattern change stop command and sets a normal pattern change performance end command for ending the normal pattern change performance in the performance command set area 94b. Note that if the normal pattern change stop command has not been received in step S4515 (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal pattern change performance end process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it has been received (step S4525: YES), a normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4530). The "normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting a normal game performance pattern (contents) to be executed during a winning game (normal game) associated with a normal symbol winning. The normal game performance selected here includes an opening performance executed during the opening and an open game performance executed while the electric chute 22 is open. In the normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command and sets information about the normal symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the winning determination of the normal symbol, which is included in the normal symbol opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a preset opening performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data is selected, and a normal symbol opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the normal symbol opening performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that in step S4525, if the normal symbol opening command has not been received (step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it has been received (step S4535: YES), a normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4540). The "normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a winning game (normal game) associated with a normal symbol winning. In the normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command and sets information regarding the normal symbol stop pattern data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a performance pattern of the ending performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the normal symbol stop pattern data is selected, and a normal symbol ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the normal symbol ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that in step S4535, if the normal symbol ending command has not been received (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (whether the game state is in a time-saving state, the values of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter, etc.) in the sub-RAM 94. Also, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores information about V-pass in the RAM 94. Also, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting command, advance judgment command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing. The performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "performance execution means" by executing a variable performance end process (step S4470) and an opening performance pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variable performance start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special symbol stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, and pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). "Mode status M" indicates the performance mode to be executed. The performance mode here refers to the form of the performance on the image display device 7, and when the performance mode is different, the image (appearing characters, items, background image, etc.) displayed on the image display device 7 is different, and the variable performance is also executed in a form corresponding to the performance mode. Here, the mode status M is set to "1" and "2", with "1" corresponding to the non-time-saving state and "2" corresponding to the time-saving state. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is "1" or "2".

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, when the game is in the time-saving state, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the game refers to the time-saving game scenario (step S5025). The "time-saving game scenario" indicates a change scenario of the remaining number of time-saving times (hereinafter, "remaining number of time-saving times displayed") displayed on the image display device 7 in the "countdown game" (FIG. 47) described later that is executed in the time-saving state after the big win game. The time-saving game scenario is determined in the ending game pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. Here, the "remaining number of time-saving times" refers to the remaining number of times that the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in the time-saving state after the big win game, and is the remaining number of times until the number of times that the variable display of the second special symbol has already been executed in the time-saving state reaches the number of time-saving times set according to the type of win. The remaining number of time-saving times corresponds to the value of the first time-saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the remaining number of time-saving times becomes "0", the game state switches from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state (FIG. 27: steps S2030, S2035). The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment performs an effect in which the displayed remaining number of time-saving times displayed on the image display device 7 is made different from or equal to the actual remaining number of time-saving times based on the time-saving performance scenario. A specific aspect will be described later. Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 specifies the displayed remaining number of time-saving times to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time-saving performance scenario. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 specifies the displayed remaining number of time-saving times to be displayed this time from the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the time-saving performance scenario described later. Note that when the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is, when the game machine 1 is in the non-time-saving state, the performance control microcomputer 91 skips referring to the time-saving performance scenario.

Next, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance performs a variable performance pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable performance pattern determination process, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance first obtains a variable performance pattern random number value for determining the performance. Then, from the variable performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93, the microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance pattern corresponding to the mode status M, the variable performance pattern indicated by the variable start command, the variable performance pattern random number value, the remaining number of times of the display time reduction specified during time reduction, and the ON/OFF of the special performance flag. The "special performance flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "one-time tear performance" (FIG. 48) described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub-RAM 94. When the special performance flag is ON, the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance switches it to OFF and executes the "one-time tear performance" as the variable performance. On the other hand, when the special effect flag is OFF and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, when the second special symbol is fluctuating in a non-time-saving state, the "V card shuffle effect" (Fig. 44 (G)) described below is performed. When the mode status M is "2", the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a "countdown effect" (Fig. 47) described below. The effect control microcomputer 91 functions as a "countdown effect execution means" by performing this countdown effect.

The microcomputer 91 for controlling the effects further determines the content of the preview effects, such as the so-called step-up preview effect and the chance-up preview effect, based on the random number value of the variable effect pattern, and further determines the combination of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed in the stopped state by referring to the stopping pattern determination table T52. Based on these, the type of variable effect to be displayed is determined.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in step S5015 above is realized (step S5020), and ends this process. When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a specified variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Variable performance end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart of the variable performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). If the mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. If the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the change is a change of the second special symbol (step S5115). The performance control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the change is a change of the first special symbol or a change of the second special symbol from the information on the change pattern set in the sub-RAM 94. If the change is the change of the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 by 1 (step S5120). The "first time-saving effect counter JC1" counts the number of changes of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state on the sub-controller side, and corresponds to the "first time-saving counter C1" on the main controller side. The "second time-saving effect counter JC2" counts the number of changes of the special symbol executed during the time-saving state (the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) on the sub-controller side, and corresponds to the "second time-saving counter C2" on the main controller side. The initial values set in the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 are determined by the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, if the change is a change of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time-saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not at least one of the values of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 has become "0" as a result of step S5120 or step S5125 (step S5130). If neither the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 nor the value of the second time-saving performance counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. If at least one of the values of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S5135). When the mode status M is switched to "1", the performance control microcomputer 91 also judges whether or not there is a special chart 2 reserved, and if there is a special chart 2 reserved, switches the special performance flag to ON. As a result, if there is a special symbol 2 reserved when the time-saving state is changed to the non-time-saving state, the "crying one-time effect" (FIG. 48) described later is executed as the first variable effect in the non-time-saving state. Note that the effect control microcomputer 91 may be configured to determine whether the state is in the time-saving state or the non-time-saving state from the information on the game state stored in the sub-RAM 94 in step S5130, and to switch the mode status M to "1" in the non-time-saving state in S5135. The information on the game state stored in the sub-RAM 94 is updated when a game state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect end command to end the variable effect. This causes the decorative symbol being changed to stop being displayed. After that, this process ends.

[Ending performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart of the ending performance pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4500). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a mode status setting process (step S5505). The "mode status setting process" is a process for determining the performance mode after a big win game. In the mode status setting process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using a setting table for the mode status M described below.

Figure 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table that is referenced to determine the mode status M according to the type of win (special symbol stop pattern data). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special symbol stop pattern data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending performance pattern of a type 2 jackpot game after winning a "16R normal small win A", the special symbol stop pattern data included in the ending command is 14H, so "1" is selected as the mode status M. Also, for example, when determining the ending performance pattern of a type 1 jackpot game after winning a "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot E", the special symbol stop pattern data included in the ending command is 33H, so "2" is selected as the mode status M.

Returning to FIG. 40, if the mode status M set in step S5505 is "1" (step S5510: NO), the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance skips to step S5525. On the other hand, if the mode status M set is "2" (step S5510: YES), the microcomputer 91 for controlling the performance sets the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 to setting values according to the winning type (special stop pattern data) (step S5515). The setting value set in the first time-saving performance counter JC1 is the same as the value set in the first time-saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Also, the setting value set in the second time-saving performance counter JC2 is the same as the value set in the second time-saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to that of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub-ROM 93, and the performance control microcomputer 91 can specify the setting values to be set in the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 by referring to the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command and this setting table. For example, when the special chart stop pattern data is "11H", the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 are set to "99". Also, when the special chart stop pattern data is "35H", the first time-saving performance counter JC1 is set to "10", and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 is set to "15". After setting the setting values in the time-saving performance counters JC1 and JC2, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a time-saving performance scenario determination process (step S5520). The "time-saving performance scenario determination process" is a process for determining a change scenario for the remaining number of time-saving times (displayed remaining number of time-saving times) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the "countdown performance" (FIG. 47) described later that is executed in the time-saving state after a jackpot game. In the time-saving performance scenario determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the time-saving performance scenario using the time-saving performance scenario determination table T54 described below.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving performance scenario determination table T54. The time-saving performance scenario determination table T54 is a table that is referenced to determine the time-saving performance scenario according to the winning type (special chart stop pattern data) and the time-saving performance scenario random number value. The performance control microcomputer 91 first obtains the time-saving performance scenario random number value. Then, the time-saving performance scenario is determined from the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command, the obtained random number value, and the time-saving performance scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of a two-type jackpot game after winning "16R time-saving 99 times small win A" (special chart stop pattern data 25H), if the obtained time-saving performance scenario random number value is "0 to 63", "scenario B" is selected as the time-saving performance scenario, if the time-saving performance scenario random number value is "64 to 95", "scenario C" is selected as the time-saving performance scenario, and if the time-saving performance scenario random number value is "96 to 127", "scenario D" is selected as the time-saving performance scenario. Also, for example, if the ending of a type 1 jackpot game is after winning the "15R time-saving 5-time jackpot D" (special chart stop pattern data 31H), "Scenario H" is selected as the time-saving performance scenario regardless of the acquired time-saving performance scenario random number value.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time-saving performance scenario. In each time-saving performance scenario (scenarios A to H), Figure 43 shows the correspondence between the remaining number of time-saving times (displayed remaining number of time-saving times) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the "countdown performance" (Figure 47) executed during the time-saving state after a big win game and the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1. For example, in "scenario A", the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the same value as the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 on the display screen 7a as the displayed remaining number of time-saving times. In "scenario B", when the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the displayed remaining number of time-saving times, and thereafter, the displayed remaining number of time-saving times is decreased as the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 decreases until the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 becomes "96". That is, when the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 becomes "96" from "99", the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed becomes "5" to "2". Then, when the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "95", the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed becomes "1" and a display indicating that the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed increases by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, until the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 becomes "1" from "94", the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed. In "Scenario E", when the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed, and thereafter, the remaining number of times of time-saving displayed decreases with the decrease in the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 until the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 becomes "12". That is, when the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 goes from "15" to "12", the displayed number of remaining time-saving times goes from "5" to "2". Then, when the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is "11", the displayed number of remaining time-saving times is set to "1" and a display is made suggesting that the displayed number of remaining time-saving times will increase by 10, for example, "+10". Then, until the first time-saving effect counter JC1 goes from "10" to "1", the same value as the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the displayed number of remaining time-saving times. In this way, by making the displayed number of remaining time-saving times different from the actual number of remaining time-saving times, i.e., the value of the first time-saving effect counter JC1, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the displayed number of remaining time-saving times may increase along the way.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending performance pattern (step S5530). Multiple ending performance patterns are prepared, and the ending performance pattern is determined based on the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command. The performance control microcomputer 91 sets the ending performance start command in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94 so that an ending performance based on the determined ending performance pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this process.

8. Example of the performance of this embodiment [Expected performance of V (when winning a normal pattern in a non-time-saving state)]
44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the V expectation performance. This V expectation performance is executed when a normal pattern is won during the fluctuation or stop of the special chart 1 in a non-time-saving state, and the winning type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" (see FIG. 13). The V expectation performance suggests whether or not the electric chute 22 will be long-opened, and further suggests the result of the special chart 2 win/loss judgment when the game ball enters the electric chute 22.

The V expectation performance is executed when, during a left hit in a non-time-saving state, a normal pattern is won by the passage of the game ball through the second gate 29 during the special pattern 1 variation performance (here, during a reach state using a decorative pattern) using the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in Fig. 44 (A) and the winning type is selected as "long opening 1" or "short opening 1". That is, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a normal pattern variation start command from the main control board 80 (Fig. 37: step S4505: YES), and in the normal pattern variation performance start process (Fig. 37: step S4510), it is determined that the winning type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" from the information on the normal stop pattern data contained in this command, and the variation pattern corresponding to the V expectation performance is selected, thereby executing the performance. As the V expectation performance, first, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the display area of the variable performance corresponding to the special chart 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the area in which the variable performance of the special chart 1 was performed until then is used to execute the V expectation cut-in performance, which displays the image GA1 suggesting that the V expectation performance will start. The display area HR1 is provided in one corner of the display screen 7a. The performance of the display area HR1 is executed when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a variable start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES) and sets the variable performance start command (FIG. 38: step S5020) in the variable start processing (FIG. 37: step S4460).

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(C), a V-level challenge effect is executed, which displays an image GA2 that prompts the player to press the effect button 63, and an image GA3 that shows an indicator that can express an increase in points. In this V-level challenge effect, the player can increase the points of the indicator in image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63, thereby increasing the V-level. Note that in this V-level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44(C), a variable effect corresponding to special chart 1 is also displayed in the display area HR1.

When the winning type of the normal pattern is "Short Open 1", the electric chute 22 opens for 0.02 seconds (Figure 14), and then, as shown in Figure 44 (D), a V-level down effect is executed in which the indicator point is lowered and an image GA4 indicating that the V-level has dropped and has not reached a certain level, and an image GA5 indicating that the V-level has dropped and a jackpot cannot be expected this time, are displayed. In addition, in this V-level down effect, as shown in Figure 44 (D), a variable effect corresponding to the special symbol 1 is displayed in the display area HR1.

On the other hand, if the winning type of the normal pattern is "Long Open 1", then, as the electric chute 22 is long opened for 5 seconds (Fig. 14), a V level up effect is executed, as shown in Fig. 44 (E), in which the indicator point is raised and the V level is raised, and an image GA6 is displayed indicating that the V level has reached a certain level or higher, and an image GA7 is displayed indicating that the V level has raised and moved to the next stage, and that a jackpot can be expected. Note that in this V level up effect, as shown in Fig. 44 (E), a variable effect corresponding to the special chart 1 is subsequently displayed in the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(F), in order to move to the next stage, a right-hit suggestion effect is executed, which displays image GA8 to encourage the player to hit to the right in order to get the game ball into the electric chute 22. Note that in this right-hit suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44(F), the special chart 1 variation effect continues to be displayed in the display area HR1. This right-hit suggestion effect is executed until the variation effect corresponding to the special chart 1 displayed in the display area HR1 ends. This right-hit suggestion effect is executed based on the normal symbol opening command (FIG. 37: step S4525) that the effect control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80.

If no balls land in the electric chute 22, the V level down effect shown in FIG. 44 (D) is executed after the right hit suggestion effect. This V level down effect is executed based on the normal pattern ending command (FIG. 37: step S4535) received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80. On the other hand, if one or more balls land in the electric chute 22, after the right hit suggestion effect, the V card shuffle effect is executed as a special chart 2 variation effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), which displays an image GA9 of shuffling face-down cards including V cards and losing cards. In this case, the display area HR2 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a shows the variation state of the decorative pattern. The V card shuffle effect and the display area HR2 effect are executed based on the variation start command received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80 upon winning in the second starting hole 21.

If the result of the judgment of whether or not the special chart 2 is a big win or a small win, after the V card shuffle performance, as shown in FIG. 44(H), a V card selection performance is executed in which one of the three cards shuffled in the V card shuffle performance is selected and turned over, and an image GA10 indicating that the turned over card is a V card is displayed. In the display area HR2, after a reach state using decorative patterns is displayed, a pattern arrangement of repeated numbers suggesting a small win or a type 1 big win is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(I), a V expectation success performance is executed, which displays an image GA11 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed and a right-hit suggestion image GA12 encouraging a right hit. This V expectation success performance is a performance that suggests that the V expectation performance is successful and that the expectation of a jackpot (a type 1 jackpot or a type 2 jackpot) is high, in other words, that the expectation of a jackpot game is high. This V expectation success performance is started a predetermined time (e.g., 0.01 seconds) after the pattern arrangement of the double numbers is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. In other words, the timing (time) from the small win pattern is displayed on the special pattern display 41 to the start of the V expectation success performance is configured to be equal to the timing (time) from the jackpot pattern is displayed to the start of the V expectation success performance. Here, "equal" does not mean that they are completely the same, and there may be an error in the timing as long as the player feels that they are equal. An example of the error is about ±2 seconds. In the case of a small win, after this V expected success performance, a small win game is executed, and when the player passes through the V by hitting the right side, it becomes a type 2 jackpot, and the game moves to a jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of a small win, the variable performance is stopped, and a performance (FIG. 44 (I)) that suggests that a jackpot (type 2 jackpot) game will be executed is started even though the V has not been passed. Then, during the small win game, no performance is performed that suggests a small win game or a performance that suggests passing the V. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game, and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Also, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 44 (I)) is started in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers displayed in the display area HR2 in the case of a jackpot and a small win are different, these are naturally included in the same performance. Furthermore, in the case of a big win or a small win, the V expected success effect may start before the small win or big win symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of special chart 2 is a miss, then after the V card shuffle performance, as shown in FIG. 44(J), a miss card selection performance is executed in which one of the three cards shuffled in the V card shuffle performance is selected and turned over, and an image GA13 is displayed indicating that the turned over card is a miss card. Note that a reach state using a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area HR2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(K), a V failed expectation performance is executed, which displays image GA14, indicating that the V expectation performance has failed and that it has not resulted in a big win or small win, resulting in a miss and that the big win game will not be executed. In this case, a pattern arrangement suggesting a miss is displayed in display area HR2 using decorative patterns. Note that if special chart 2 is reserved, after this V failed expectation performance, the game will transition again to a V card shuffle performance (see FIG. 44(G)). If special chart 2 is not reserved, the game will transition to a performance corresponding to the normal special chart 1.

The special chart 2 variation presentation shown in Figures 44 (G), (H), and (I) is an example of a presentation that is executed when variation pattern "P13" (Figure 12) is selected. The special chart 2 variation presentation shown in Figures 44 (G), (J), and (K) is an example of a presentation that is executed when variation pattern "P14" (Figure 12) is selected.

In addition, in the V-level challenge effect (Figure 44 (C)), V-level down effect (Figure 44 (D)), V-level up effect (Figure 44 (E)), and right-hit suggestion effect (Figure 44 (F)), the display area HR1 shows the change effect of special chart 1 shown in Figure 44 (A), but if the change effect corresponding to that special chart 1 has ended and there is a reserved special chart 1, the change effect corresponding to the next special chart 1 will continue to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the V expectation effect shown in Figure 44, the display of reserved images 9A, 9B, and reserved consumption image 9C is omitted. Similarly, in the effects shown in Figures 45 to 48 and 50 described below, the display of reserved images 9A, 9B, and reserved consumption image 9C is omitted.

[Winning game performance]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game presentation when the special drawing 2 is won. This winning game presentation is executed when a big win or a small win is obtained in the drawing of the special drawing 2. Specifically, the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives an opening command for a big win game or a small win game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4475: YES), and in the opening presentation pattern determination process (FIG. 37: step S4480), when it is determined that the special drawing 2 is a big win or a small win from the information on the special drawing stop pattern data included in this command, the corresponding opening presentation start command is set and executed. This winning game presentation: FIG. 45 (A) is executed, for example, following a presentation that suggests that a big win game will be executed (V expected success presentation: FIG. 44 (I), V roulette success presentation: FIG. 46 (C), target hit success presentation: FIG. 48 (C)).

First, at the start of a big win game associated with a type 1 big win, or at the start of a small win game associated with a small win, as shown in FIG. 45(A), an image GB1 suggesting that the big win game will be played by the actions of a specific character, and a right-hit suggestion image GB2 are displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 45(B), an image GB3 suggesting that the big win game will be played using a specific character, etc., and a right-hit suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

The effects in Figures 45(A) and 45(B) continue in a type 1 jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter also referred to as the "first game period") has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game. Also, in a small jackpot game, they continue from the start of the small jackpot game until the first game period has elapsed. That is, in both type 1 jackpot game and small jackpot game, the same (similar) effects are performed during the first game period. Note that this first game period is at least the total time (1.61 seconds) of the opening time of the small jackpot game (opening pattern 23) (here, 0.01 seconds) and the opening time of the second large prize opening 35 (here, 1.6 seconds). Here, the first game period is set to 4.61 seconds, which is the period from the start of the small win game to the end of the small win game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second large winning port 35 (1.6 seconds) + ending time (3 seconds)). When the first game period has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game associated with a type 1 jackpot, or when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small win game and a type 2 jackpot has been confirmed by passing the V, as shown in FIG. 45(C), an image GB4 that clearly indicates that a jackpot game is in progress and a right-hit suggestion image GB2 are displayed. In other words, when a type 2 jackpot is won after a small win game, the effects of FIG. 45(A), (B), and (C) are executed in the same way as when a type 1 jackpot is won.

On the other hand, when the first play period has elapsed since the start of the small win game associated with the small win and the non-execution of the big win game has been confirmed by the non-passage of the V, an image GB5 is displayed instead of image GB4, as shown in FIG. 45(D), indicating that the big win game will not be executed.

In the present embodiment, the performance during the first-type jackpot game is configured to be similar to the performance during the small win game and the second-type jackpot game (FIG. 45 (A), (B), (C)). In other words, the performance from the start of the first-type jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game is configured to be similar to the performance from the start of the small win game to the end of the second-type jackpot game. Even if the second-type jackpot game is not executed after the small win game associated with the small win, the performance similar to that of the first-type jackpot game (FIG. 45 (A), (B)) is performed at least during the small win game, and after the first game period has elapsed, a performance different from that of the first-type jackpot game (FIG. 45 (D)) is performed. The "similar (same) performance" here means that the content is close enough that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the performance of the jackpot and the performance of the small win, and the performance does not have to be completely the same. For example, when some characters are different, when some aspects of a certain character (for example, clothing, color of clothing, equipment) are different, or when the appearance timing of a certain character is slightly different, it is naturally included in the similar performance. Also, in the winning game performance in this embodiment, when a type 2 jackpot occurs after a small winning game, the jackpot game performance (FIG. 45 (A), (B)) is not started based on passing V by the small winning game, but is configured to start the jackpot game performance at the start of the small winning game (i.e., based on the confirmation display of the small winning pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, when a small winning is achieved, a performance suggesting a small winning game during the small winning game (for example, a performance instructing the player to aim for V) is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small winning, the player does not notice the small winning game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing (time) from when the small win symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the small win game performance (FIGS. 45(A), (B), (C)) starts is configured to be equal to the timing (time) from when the big win symbol is displayed to when the big win game performance (FIGS. 45(A), (B), (C)) starts. As is clear from the above, the series of performances (V's expected success performance: FIG. 44(I)→FIG. 45(A)→FIG. 45(B)) that suggest the big win game will be executed will have the same content (similar performance) for a predetermined period from the start of the series of performances in the case of a small win and in the case of a type 1 big win. The predetermined period is a period equal to or longer than the period from when the V's expected success performance starts to when the small win game ends when the small win is won. For example, when the V's expected success performance time is 5 seconds and the small win game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. In addition, the series of effects that suggest that a big win game will be played may be a V roulette success effect (FIG. 46(C) or a target hit success effect (FIG. 48(C)) instead of the V expected success effect (FIG. 44(I)). Here, the V roulette success effect time and the target hit success effect time are both 5 seconds.

[Special chart 2 lottery variation effect (time-saving mode)]
46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation performance when the special chart 2 is drawn. This variation performance when the special chart 2 is drawn is executed in the time-saving state when the special chart 2 is a small win, when the special chart 2 is a big win, or when the special chart 2 is a miss. Specifically, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), when it is determined that the variation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (FIG. 12) from the information on the variation pattern contained in this command, the corresponding variation performance start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: step S5020).

In the variation presentation when the special symbol 2 is drawn, first, as shown in FIG. 46(A), a V roulette presentation is executed, which displays an image GC1 showing a roulette with a losing zone and a V zone spinning. In this case, the variation state of the decorative symbol is displayed in a display area HR3 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a.

If the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special chart 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V roulette performance, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the roulette that was spinning in the V roulette performance stops, and a V-zone selection performance is executed in which an image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is a V-zone is displayed. In the display area HR3, after a reach state using decorative symbols is displayed, a pattern arrangement of repeated numbers that suggests a small hit or a type 1 big hit is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(C), a V roulette success effect is executed, which displays an image GC3 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed and a right-hit suggestion image GC4. This V roulette success effect is an effect that suggests that the V roulette effect is successful and that the expectation of a jackpot (a type 1 jackpot or a type 2 jackpot) is high, in other words, that the expectation of a jackpot game is high. As with the V expectation success effect (FIG. 44(I)), this V roulette success effect starts a predetermined time (e.g., 0.01 seconds) after the double-digit pattern arrangement is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. That is, the timing (time) from when the small jackpot pattern is displayed on the special pattern display 41 to when the V roulette success effect starts is configured to be equal to the timing (time) from when the jackpot pattern is displayed to when the V roulette success effect starts. In the case of a small win, after this V roulette success performance, a small win game is executed, and when the player passes through the V by hitting the right side, it becomes a type 2 jackpot, and the game moves to a jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the variable performance is stopped, and a performance (FIG. 46(C)) that suggests that a jackpot (type 2 jackpot) game will be executed is started regardless of whether the V has been passed. Then, during a small win game, a performance that suggests a small win game or a performance that suggests V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game, and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Also, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, a similar performance (FIG. 46(C)) is started in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers displayed in the display area HR2 in the case of a jackpot and a small win are different, these are naturally included in the same performance. Furthermore, in the case of a big win or a small win, the V expected success effect may start before the small win or big win symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special chart 2 is a miss, after the V roulette performance, as shown in FIG. 46(D), the roulette that was spinning in the V roulette performance stops, and a miss zone selection performance is executed in which an image GC5 is displayed indicating that the stop zone is a miss zone. In the display area HR3, a reach state using a decorative pattern is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(E), a V Roulette failure effect is executed, which displays image GC6, indicating that the V Roulette effect has failed and that a miss will occur and a jackpot game will not be played. In the display area HR3, a pattern arrangement indicating a miss is displayed using decorative patterns. Note that if special pattern 2 is reserved, after this V Roulette failure effect, the game will transition again to the V Roulette effect (see FIG. 46(A)).

In addition, in the time-saving state, a hit/miss determination is performed on special chart 1, and if a big hit occurs (Fig. 12: when variation pattern "P8" is selected) or if a small hit occurs (Fig. 12: when variation pattern "P9" is selected), the effects in Fig. 46 (A) to (C) are executed in the same way as in the case of a big hit or small hit on special chart 2. In addition, a hit/miss determination is performed on special chart 1, and if a miss occurs (Fig. 12: when variation pattern "P10" is selected), the effects in Fig. 46 (A), (D), and (E) are executed in the same way as in the case of a miss on special chart 2. In addition, in the time-saving state, if the hit/miss determination on special chart 2 results in a miss (Fig. 12: when variation pattern "P19" is selected) or if the hit/miss determination on special chart 1 results in a miss (Fig. 12: when variation pattern "P11" is selected), a variation effect is executed to quickly notify the miss using a decorative pattern.

[Countdown effect (when time-saving state is in effect)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown performance. This countdown performance is a performance in which a time-saving remaining number image is displayed on the display screen 7a during each variation performance in the time-saving state. The countdown performance starts from the first variation of the special pattern when the time-saving state is entered after a big win game. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), when the mode status M is "2", the corresponding variation performance start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: step S5020). The "displayed time-saving remaining number" indicated by the time-saving remaining number image of the countdown performance is determined by referring to the time-saving performance scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time-saving performance scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" shown by the remaining number of time-saving times image is the same as the actual remaining number of time-saving times (actual remaining number of fluctuations) until the time-saving state ends, or is shown as a pseudo remaining number of time-saving times that is less than the actual remaining number of time-saving times. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of an effect corresponding to "Scenario C".

In the countdown performance based on "Scenario C," first, countdown performance A is displayed as shown in FIG. 47(A). In this countdown performance A, in the first change after the time-saving state is entered, a time-saving remaining number image GDA is displayed with the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" set to 5, and from the second change to the fifth change, a time-saving remaining number image GDA is displayed that indicates the number of time-saving remaining times subtracted by 1 from the display remaining number of time-saving times shown in the previous change. For example, in countdown performance A, in the second change, a time-saving remaining number image GDA is displayed with the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" set to 4, and in the fifth change, a time-saving remaining number image GDA is displayed with the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" set to 1.

When the display of the remaining time-saving count image GDA for the fifth change in countdown performance A has finished, then, as shown in FIG. 47(B), a charge performance A is executed during the fifth change. In this charge performance A, a charge image CHA is displayed, suggesting that the "displayed remaining time-saving count" will be charged (increased) by about 10 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), countdown performance B is executed. In this countdown performance B, in the sixth change, which is the next change after charge performance A, a time-saving remaining number image GDB is displayed in which the number (0 times) obtained by subtracting one from the remaining number (1 time) in the previous change (fifth change) and increasing the number (10 times) by the amount of charge (10 times) is set as the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times", and from the seventh change to the fifteenth change, a time-saving remaining number image GDB is displayed that indicates the remaining number obtained by subtracting one from the remaining number shown in the previous change. For example, in countdown performance B, in the sixth change, a time-saving remaining number image GDB is displayed in which the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" is 10, in the seventh change, a time-saving remaining number image GDB is displayed in which the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" is 9, and in the fifteenth change, a time-saving remaining number image GDB is displayed in which the "displayed remaining number of time-saving times" is 1.

When the display of the remaining time-saving count image GDB for the 15th change in countdown performance B is completed, then, as shown in FIG. 47(D), a charge performance B is executed during the 15th change. In this charge performance B, a charge image CHB is displayed, suggesting that the "displayed remaining time-saving count" will be charged (increased) by about 84 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(E), countdown performance C is executed. In this countdown performance C, at the 16th change, which is the next change after charge performance B, a time-saving remaining number image GDC is displayed in which the "displayed remaining number of times" is the number (84 times) obtained by subtracting one from the remaining number (1 time) at the previous change (15th change) (0 times) and increasing it by the amount of charge (84 times), and from the 17th change to the 99th change, a time-saving remaining number image GDC is displayed that indicates the remaining number obtained by subtracting one from the remaining number shown at the previous change. For example, in countdown performance C, at the 16th change, a time-saving remaining number image GDC is displayed in which the "displayed remaining number of times" is 84, and at the 17th change, a time-saving remaining number image GDC is displayed in which the "displayed remaining number of times" is 83.

The countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing for each variable effect in the time-saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start of each variable effect, or at the end of each variable effect. Also, the image of the remaining number of times the time-saving effect remains may be displayed continuously during each variable effect.

[One-time crying performance (first change after the time-saving state ends (special chart 2)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time tear performance. This one-time tear performance is a variation performance executed in the next variation of the last variation in the time-saving state when the special chart 2 is reserved, that is, the first variation after the time-saving state and the variation performance of the special chart 2 in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: step S4455: YES), and in the variation performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460, FIG. 38), if the special performance flag is ON, the corresponding variation performance start command is set, and the variation performance is executed (FIG. 38: step S5020).

In the "One Cry" performance, first, as shown in FIG. 48(A), a target shooting start performance is executed, which displays image GE1 showing a rotating "target" consisting of a winning zone and a losing zone, and image GE2 showing that the player is in the final advantageous state. In this case, the changing state of the decorative pattern is displayed in display area HR4 provided in one corner of the display screen 7a.

If the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special chart 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the target hit start performance, a target hit performance is executed in which an image GE3 indicating that the arrow has hit the hit zone of the target is displayed, as shown in FIG. 48(B). In the display area HR4, after a reach state using decorative patterns is displayed, a pattern arrangement of repeated numbers indicating a small hit or a type 1 big hit is displayed frozen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), an image GE4 suggesting that a big win game will be played and a right-hit suggestion image GE5 encouraging a right hit are displayed, suggesting that the target hit is successful and that the expectation of a big win (type 1 big win or type 2 big win) is high, in other words, a target hit success performance is performed suggesting that the expectation of a big win game is high. As with the V expectation success performance (FIG. 44(I)), this target hit success performance starts a predetermined time (e.g., 0.01 seconds) after the pattern arrangement of the repeated numbers is stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. In other words, the timing (time) from the small win pattern being displayed on the special pattern display 41 to the target hit success performance starting is configured to be equal to the timing (time) from the big win pattern being displayed to the target hit success performance starting. In the case of a small win, after this target hit success performance, a small win game is played, and when the player hits the right and passes V, it becomes a type 2 big win, and the game transitions to a big win game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small win occurs, the variable presentation is stopped, and a presentation (FIG. 48(C)) is started that suggests that a big win (type 2 big win) game will be played, regardless of whether or not the V has passed. Then, during a small win game, a presentation suggesting a small win game or a presentation suggesting V passing is not performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player does not notice the small win game, and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 big win. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable presentation is stopped, a similar presentation (FIG. 48(C)) is started in the case of a big win and in the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 big win and a type 2 big win. Note that even if the numbers displayed in the display area HR2 in the case of a big win and a small win are different, these are naturally included in the same presentation. Note that the V expectation success presentation in the case of a big win and in the case of a small win may start before the small win pattern or the big win pattern is displayed as determined.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special chart 2 is a miss, after the target shooting start performance, a target miss performance is executed in which an image GE6 is displayed indicating that the arrow has hit the miss zone of the target, as shown in FIG. 48(D). In the display area HR4, a reach state is displayed using a decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), a failed target hit effect is executed, which displays image GE7, indicating that the target hit has failed and that the big win or small win has not been achieved, resulting in a miss and that the big win game will not be executed. In the display area HR4, a pattern arrangement that suggests a miss is displayed using decorative patterns.

The effects shown in Figures 48 (A) to (C) in the above crying one-time effect are examples of effects that are executed when fluctuation pattern P13 (see Figure 12) is selected in the first fluctuation after transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, and the effects shown in Figures 48 (A), (D), and (E) above are examples of effects that are executed when fluctuation pattern P14 (see Figure 12) is selected in the first fluctuation after transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state.

9. Operation of the board movable body The operation of the board movable body (the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15) will be described using Figures 49 to 58. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs display and light emission control to display a specific image on the image display device 7 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on, and to light the first movable role 14 and the second movable role 15 in a specific manner.

The operation of the first movable part 14 will be explained using Figures 49 to 54. Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable part 14 in the advancing direction (advancing direction movement). Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. Figure 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination performance of the first movable part 14 and the image display device 7. Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the first movable part 14. Figures 53 and 54 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the light-emitting state of the first movable part 14.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable part 14 includes a left movable part 14L and a right movable part 14R. The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the ring-shaped decorative part (left decorative part and right decorative part) is attached to the tip side. In other words, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable part 14 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) where the left movable part 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right movable part 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each partially visible. The first movable role 14 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 to the center of the display screen 7a (in the direction approaching each other) as shown in FIG. 49, and the left and right decorative parts are combined at the advance position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50 to form one decorative member (combined role) (second mode). Here, the combined role forms the outline of a face. In this second mode, the combined role, in which the left and right decorative parts are combined, covers a part of the center of the display screen 7a in front of the image display device 7, and stops in a state in which the display screen 7a can be seen from the opening formed in the center. In other words, the combined role forms only the outline of a face, does not have a central part of the face, and is configured so that the display screen 7a can be seen instead. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, an image of a face is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined role, completing a human face as a whole. That is, a combination of the parts and the image can be performed to complete one object (for example, a human face) by displaying the missing part (for example, the center part of the face) in the combined part as an image on the display screen 7a. Note that the object completed by the first movable part 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to a human face. For example, it may be the entire human body or a robot. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed by the combined part, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable part 14 can move (retract) from the advanced position in Figures 50 and 51 through the state in Figure 49 to the retracted position shown in Figure 1, and can stop there.

As shown in Figure 52, this combined role can rotate vertically in front of the display screen 7a. In other words, the combined role can rotate around an axis that is parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a, and can stop at any tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the combined role gradually becomes an ellipse that narrows vertically when viewed by the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the person's face displayed is deformed in accordance with the deformation of this opening into an ellipse. This makes it possible, for example, to create the effect of a person's face bowing using the first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figures 53 and 54, the first movable part 14 is configured to be able to emit light. Specifically, multiple LEDs are arranged in a row on the surface of the combined part (decorative member), and each is configured to be able to be switched on and off. For example, as shown in Figure 53, the right movable part 14R can be made to emit light in conjunction with (correspondence to) the light emitted by the frame lamp 66. Also, as shown in Figure 54, the right movable part 14R and the left movable part 14L can be made to emit light in conjunction with each other.

The operation of the second movable part 15 will be described using Figures 55 and 56. Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable part 15. Figure 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational operation of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable part 15 can stop at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable part 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable part 15 can move downward from the state of Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stop at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 55 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops so as to cover the area slightly above the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the image display device 7. Also, as shown in FIG. 56, this decorative part can rotate right and left (right rotation in the figure) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any tilted angle. The second movable part 15 can move upward (retract) from the advanced position in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, where it can stop.

Using Figures 57 and 58, the combination performance of the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 will be explained. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination performance by the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15. Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination performance by the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15. As shown in Figure 57, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can execute the first combination performance by both being in the second state. That is, by both the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 moving to the advanced position, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable part 14. In other words, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can be stopped in a partially overlapping and combined state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 58, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can perform a second combination performance in which the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are tilted at a predetermined angle with the second movable part 15 covering a part of the upper side of the first movable part 14. This second combination performance can be formed by the two movable parts rotating (tilting) together after the first combination performance, or by the two movable parts moving to the advance position in a tilted state and overlapping, directly performing the second combination performance without going through the first combination performance.

10. Other examples of performance, effect, modification, and mode of this embodiment Each example of performance (display performance example, role-moving performance example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, effect examples, modification, and mode examples for the performance examples will also be described. The performance described below is a performance realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. Note that the following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

The following describes the timing change effects A to C using Figures 59 to 61. These timing change effects can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the start command for the change effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a timing change effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The lamp control board 107 also analyzes the start command for the change effect received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a timing change effect, it drives the first movable role piece 14 and the second movable role piece 15.

[Variable Timing Change Presentation A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variation timing change performance A. In the variation timing change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), two sets of decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a variable manner. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a win has been made by the combination of these stopped symbols. The second decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not a win has been made by the combination of these stopped symbols. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Three reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position. A black spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position on the far right. A star-shaped reserved icon 9A is displayed at the second reserved display position, which is the second from the right. A white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the third reserved display position, which is the third from the right (the leftmost in this case). Here, reserved icons of the same color and shape are displayed at the third reserved display position and the reserved display position. The difference in the shape and color of the reserved icon represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to that reserved icon. Here, of the three reserved icons 9A, the star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in the variation where the white ball reserved icon is in the reserved display position, two decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) start to change and display at the same time when the white ball reserved icon reaches the reserved display position from the first reserved display position. In other words, when the reserved icon reaches the reserved display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached reserved icon (reserved icon) starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time, the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears) at the same time. In other words, in the lottery corresponding to the white ball reserved icon 9C, which has a relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) start to change and are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the black ball reserve icon 9A that was in the first reserve display position moves toward that reserve display position. At this time, the two decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) remain stationary. As shown in FIG. 59(D), at the same time that the black ball reserve icon 9A reaches that reserve display position, the two decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern) begin to change display. In other words, when the reserve icon reaches that reserve display position, a change performance corresponding to the reserve icon that has reached (that reserve icon) begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the first decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r is displayed as stopped while the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R continues to be displayed as changed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed as stopped. That is, when the reserved icon 9C is a reserved icon of a black ball, the two decorative patterns are not displayed simultaneously, but are displayed at different timings. In this embodiment, the first decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r is displayed as stopped before the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R, but the opposite is also possible. In addition, which one is displayed first may change each time it changes (may be random). In this way, in a lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C of a black ball with a relatively medium expectation of winning, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to change at the same time, while the display is not displayed simultaneously but at different timings. As shown in FIG. 59 (F), at the same time as the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the star-shaped reserved icon 9A that was in the first reserved display position moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), the second decorative pattern starts to change. The first decorative pattern is maintained in a stationary display. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to change before the reserved icon 9A that was in the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the first decorative pattern starts to change at the same time as the star-shaped reserved icon 9A reaches the reserved display position. In this embodiment, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change before the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r, but the opposite may be true. Also, which one starts to change first may change each time it changes (may be random).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a stopped state while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed in a changed state. After that, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a stopped state before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, but the opposite is also possible. In addition, which one is displayed first may change each time there is a change (may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C of the star shape, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, the timing of the start of the change of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the timing of the stopped display are shifted from each other. After FIG. 59(J), the reserved icon 9A of a white ball that was in the first reserved display position moves toward the reserved display position. When the white ball reserved icon changes to the reserved display position, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to change display at the same time as the white ball reserved icon reaches the reserved display position from the first reserved display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r and the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at the same time. At the same time, the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Variable Timing Change Presentation B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the variation timing change performance B. In the variation timing change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), three sets of decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are displayed. The first decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stop symbols. The second decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stop symbols. The third decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8ml, a middle decorative pattern 8mc, and a right decorative pattern 8mr, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Three reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position. A black spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position on the far right. A star-shaped reserved icon 9A is displayed at the second reserved display position from the right. A white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the third reserved display position from the right (here, the leftmost). Here, reserved icons of the same color and shape are displayed at the third reserved display position and the reserved display position. The difference in shape and color of the reserved icon represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. Here, among the three reserved icons 9A, namely, a star-shaped reserved icon, a black spherical reserved icon, and a white spherical reserved icon, the star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in the variation where the white ball reserved icon is in the reserved display position, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) start to change and display when the white ball reserved icon reaches the reserved display position from the first reserved display position. In other words, when the reserved icon reaches the reserved display position, the variation effect corresponding to the reached reserved icon (reserved icon) starts. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, and 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time, the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears) in the lottery. In other words, in the lottery corresponding to the white ball reserved icon 9C, which has a relatively low expectation of winning, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) start to change and are stopped and displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the black ball reserve icon 9A that was in the first reserve display position moves toward that reserve display position. At this time, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) remain stationary. As shown in FIG. 60(D), at the same time that the black ball reserve icon 9A reaches that reserve display position, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) begin to change display. In other words, when the reserve icon reaches that reserve display position, a change performance corresponding to the reserve icon that has reached (that reserve icon) begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the first decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r is stopped and displayed while the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative pattern 8ml, 8mc, 8mr continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative pattern 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed simultaneously. That is, when the reserved icon 9C is a reserved icon of a black ball, the three decorative patterns are not stopped and displayed simultaneously, and the timing of the first decorative pattern is configured to be shifted from the timing of the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed before the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern, but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time the variation occurs (may be random). Furthermore, the timing of the three decorative patterns to stop may be different from each other. Thus, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C, which is a black sphere with a relatively medium probability of winning, the three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start to change at the same time, but the stopped display is not all simultaneous, but at least some of them are out of sync. As shown in FIG. 60(F), at the same time as the stopped display of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the star-shaped reserved icon 9A at the first reserved display position moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, of the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern), two decorative patterns (second decorative pattern and third decorative pattern) start to change. The first decorative pattern is maintained as a stationary pattern. That is, the two decorative patterns (second decorative pattern and third decorative pattern) start to change before the reserved icon 9A at the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the first decorative pattern starts to change at the same time as the star-shaped reserved icon 9A reaches the reserved display position. In this embodiment, the two decorative patterns (second decorative pattern and third decorative pattern) start to change before the first decorative pattern, but the opposite may be true. Also, which one starts to change first may change each time it changes (may be random). Furthermore, the timing at which each of the three decorative patterns begins to change may be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a stopped state while the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a changed state. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a stopped state. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a stopped state before the two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol), but the opposite may be true. In addition, which one is displayed in a stopped state first may change each time the symbol changes (may be random). Furthermore, the timing at which the three decorative symbols stop may be different from each other. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon 9C in the shape of a star, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, the timing at which the symbol changes and the timing at which the symbol stops are shifted from each other in at least some of the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol).
After Fig. 60(J), when the white ball reserved icon reaches the reserved display position from the first reserved display position, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) start to change. After that, as shown in Fig. 60(B), the first decorative symbol 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbol 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time, the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears) as a performance.

[Variable Timing Change Presentation C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the change timing change performance C. FIG. 61(A) and FIG. 61(B) of the change timing change performance C are the same as FIG. 60(F) and FIG. 60(G) of the change timing change performance B. That is, before FIG. 61(A) of the change timing change performance C, FIG. 60(A) to FIG. 60(E) are executed. In FIG. 61(A), the first decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r is stopped, and then the second decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative pattern 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are stopped and displayed at the same time with a delay. The first decorative pattern includes the left decorative pattern 8l, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can inform whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stop patterns. The third decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8ml, a middle decorative pattern 8mc, and a right decorative pattern 8mr, and is a set of patterns that can inform whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stop patterns. At this time, at the same time, the black spherical reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears). Two reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position. A star-shaped reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position on the rightmost side. A white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the second reserved display position from the right (here, the leftmost). The difference in shape and color of the reserved icon represents the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon. Here, among the three reserved icons 9A, namely, a star-shaped reserved icon, a black spherical reserved icon, and a white spherical reserved icon, the star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the star-shaped reserved icon 9A at the first reserved display position moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, of the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern), two decorative patterns (second decorative pattern and third decorative pattern) start to change. The first decorative pattern is maintained as a stopped pattern. That is, the two decorative patterns (second decorative pattern and third decorative pattern) start to change before the reserved icon 9A at the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the second movable role object 15 advances downward and stops in the second mode, and then moves to the retreat position (first mode). The first decorative pattern disappears from the display with the movement of the second movable role object 15 without starting to change. This suggests that the pseudo consecutive performance will begin. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a temporary stop. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the first decorative symbol is displayed in a temporary stop again. The two decorative symbols (the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the first decorative symbol starts to change again, and all three decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the winning number "555". The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(J), the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed at the same winning number as the second decorative pattern.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the timing change effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 59(D)-(H), 60(D)-(H), and 61(D)-(H), it is possible to execute a first effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the first decorative symbol is stopped, and a second effect in which the second decorative symbol starts its next variable display after the first effect, when the first decorative symbol has not yet started its next variable display. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the interest of the game.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 59 (G), in the second performance, before the reserved icon arrives at the reserved display position by shifting, the second decorative pattern starts to change corresponding to the reserved icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 60 and Fig. 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 60(D)-(H) and 61(D)-(H), in the first performance, after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the third decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second performance, the third decorative symbol starts its next variable display before the first decorative symbol starts its next variable display. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 59(H)-(J), (A) and 61(H)-(J), (A), after the first performance, the third performance can be executed in which the first and second decorative symbols start the next variable display simultaneously without executing the second performance. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 59(D)-(H), 60(D)-(H), and 61(D)-(H), when the reserved icon is a star, the first effect is followed by the second effect, and when the reserved icon is a white sphere, the first effect is followed by the third effect. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, variations of the timing change effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The first variation in Fig. 59 (A) and (B), the second variation in Fig. 59 (C) to (F), and the third variation in Fig. 59 (G) to (J) may be executed in any order. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in that order. Also, the same type of variation may be executed repeatedly. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in that order. The same applies to Fig. 60 and Fig. 61. The types of the reserved icon are not limited to those in the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. As long as the first decorative pattern 2l, the second decorative pattern 8L, and the third decorative pattern 8ml are patterns displayed on the image display device 7, the type, shape, and display method of the patterns are not limited to the above.

[Modification 3]
The manner of the change display indicating that the first decorative pattern 2l, the second decorative pattern 8L, and the third decorative pattern 8ml are not limited to the above. For example, the change display may be in a manner that is not displayed on the image display device 7. Also, the numbers may be displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to distinguish the numbers by moving at a high speed, or may move at a speed that makes it possible to distinguish the numbers. Also, the change speed may change midway.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative pattern starts to change when the reserved icon reaches the reserved display position. However, it may start to change just before or just after that. Just before or just after that is, for example, within a range of 2 to 3 seconds before or after.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative symbols capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative symbols capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
A first effect in which the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed;
A second performance in which the second decorative pattern starts the next variable display after the first performance, in a state in which the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second performance, before the reserved icon arrives at the reserved display position by shift movement, a change corresponding to the reserved icon is started in the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1 or A1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative symbols capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
In the first performance, after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
In the second performance, the third decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first performance, a third performance can be executed in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display without executing the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4 dependent on Aspect A1-2,
When the hold icon is in a first mode, the second performance is performed after the first performance,
When the hold icon is in the second mode, the third performance is performed after the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pattern direction change performances A to C are explained below using Figures 62 to 64. This pattern direction change performance can be executed during the decorative pattern change performance, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pattern direction change performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pattern direction change performance, it drives the first movable role piece 14 and the second movable role piece 15.

[Pattern direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the pattern direction change performance A. In the pattern direction change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not visible. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the orientation (posture) of the number tilted to the right. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the changing direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of progress (lower left direction). The speed of the changing display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiling face. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. The specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (posture) like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned in orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), a bouncing effect is performed on the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downwards while maintaining their orientation vertically, and are displayed stopped at a third position. The third position is located vertically below the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner while the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a stationary manner. At this time, the center decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, the center decorative pattern 8C is changing, but is not visible. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed in a variable manner in a direction different from the variable direction of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the orientation (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the variable direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward and right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the bottom right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, but it may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers part of the top of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (G), a bouncing effect is performed on the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA. This causes the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA to change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). Then, as shown in Figure 62 (H), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downwards while maintaining their orientation vertically, and are displayed stopped at that position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stationary, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably. In other words, the variability of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C frames in from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves vertically downward. That is, it is displayed variably in a different variability direction from the variability direction of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, each number constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C moves with the orientation (posture) of the number along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the variability direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variability display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the bottom center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and it is displayed stationary. This causes the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R to be displayed as fixed and stopped.

[Pattern direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the pattern direction change performance B. In the pattern direction change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a variable manner. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not visible. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the orientation (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the changing direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of progress (downward right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiling face. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. The specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (posture) like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned in orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a bouncing effect is performed on the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation vertically, and are displayed stopped at a third position. The third position is located vertically below the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, it is not displayed as the center decorative pattern 8C. In other words, the center decorative pattern 8C is changing, but is not visible. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed in a variable manner in the same variable direction as the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with its orientation (posture) tilted to the left. That is, it moves with the same degree of tilt as the number when the left decorative pattern 8L changes. Each number is tilted in the direction of the change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of progress (downward and rightward). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the bottom right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, but it may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a portion of the top of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), a performance is performed in which the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation in the vertical direction, and are displayed stationary at that position. With the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed stationary, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably. In other words, the variability of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C frames in from near the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the display changes in the same direction as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, each number that makes up the center decorative pattern 8C moves with its orientation (posture) tilted to the left. That is, it moves with the same degree of tilt as the numbers when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change. Each number is tilted in the direction of the change, and is displayed with its bottom facing the direction of movement (downward and to the right). The speed of the display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, but it may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers part of the upper part of the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C), making part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (posture) like the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA and the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(I), a bouncing effect is performed on the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(J), the specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation in the vertical direction, and are displayed stopped at that position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as fixed stops.

[Pattern direction change effect C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the pattern direction change performance C. In the pattern direction change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a variable manner. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not visible. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the orientation (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted in the direction along the changing direction, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of progress (downward right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a specific image CHA is displayed below the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiling face. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes any manner in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects. The specific image CHA covers a portion of the bottom of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a portion of the specific number difficult to see. The specific image CHA is also tilted in orientation (posture) like the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) are aligned in orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), a bouncing effect is performed on the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). The second position is located vertically above the first position. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation vertically, and are displayed stopped at a third position. The third position is located vertically below the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, it is not displayed as the center decorative pattern 8C. In other words, the center decorative pattern 8C is changing, but is not visible. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed in a variable manner in the same variable direction as the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with its orientation (posture) tilted to the left. That is, it moves with the same degree of tilt as the number when the left decorative pattern 8L changes. Each number is tilted in the direction of the change, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of progress (downward and rightward). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the bottom right of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, but it may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a portion of the bottom of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in the same direction as the specific number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a performance is performed in which the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their relative positions. Specifically, the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move to the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, while their orientation becomes vertical (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(H), they are displayed stationary at that position. After that, as shown in FIG. 64(I), the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stationary. In other words, the variability of the center decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves vertically downward. That is, it is displayed in a different direction from the direction of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, each number constituting the middle decorative pattern 8C moves with the orientation (posture) of the number along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of the movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of movement (downward). The speed of the display gradually slows down, and when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a, it temporarily stops. Next, as shown in FIG. 64(J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (middle decorative pattern 8C) and it is displayed stationary. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stationary.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effect of changing the direction of the patterns.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 62(A) and (B), a first effect is executed in which the left decorative pattern is displayed variably in a direction along the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right) and, after the first effect, a second effect is executed in which the left decorative pattern is displayed stationary in a direction along a second direction (for example, vertical) different from the first direction, as shown in Figures 62(C) to (E). This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player and increase the interest. The same applies to Figures 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 62(A), in the second performance, the left decorative pattern reaches the first position in a direction along the first direction (e.g., diagonal right direction), then moves toward the second position located vertically above the first position as shown in Fig. 62(C), and then moves toward the third position located vertically below the second position while maintaining the second direction as shown in Fig. 62(D). This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game and improves the interest. The same applies to Figs. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 62 (B) and (C), in the second performance, when the left decorative pattern reaches the first position and moves toward the second position, a part of the left decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the specific image CHA. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player and increase the interest. The same is true in Fig. 63 and Fig. 64.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 63(D), after the second performance, the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variably manner along the first direction (for example, a right diagonal direction) from a non-displayed state, as a third performance, and as shown in Fig. 63(G), after the third performance, the right decorative pattern is displayed in a stationary manner along the second direction, as a fourth performance. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 64 (I), after the fourth performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the central decorative pattern is variably displayed in a direction along a third direction (for example, vertical direction) different from the first direction. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a direction along the vertical direction. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pattern direction change presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. They may be character graphic symbols. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, multiple sets of decorative patterns may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a varying direction, and then bounds to a vertical direction, but may be displayed in a direction other than the vertical direction as long as it is different from the varying direction. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed tilted to the left side after bounding, or may be displayed tilted sideways. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed in a varying direction without bounding.

[Modification 3]
In the pattern direction change performances A, B, and C, the right decorative pattern may become visible (the change display is displayed) before the left decorative pattern stops, or the change may become visible (the change display is displayed) after the left decorative pattern stops. The same applies to the center decorative pattern.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the pattern direction change performances A, B, and C may be appropriately combined. For example, in the pattern direction change performances A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be made to be like the pattern direction change performance C. Also, for example, in the pattern direction change performances A and B, the change direction and stopping mode of the central decorative pattern may be made to be like the pattern direction change performance C.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the first decorative pattern is displayed variably in a direction along a first direction;
A second effect in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction after the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
In the second performance, the first decorative pattern reaches a first position in an orientation along the first direction, and then moves toward a second position located on one side of the first position in a vertical direction while changing its orientation to an orientation along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, moves toward a third position located on the other side of the second position in a vertical direction while maintaining the orientation along the second direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or A2-2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image;
In the second performance, when the first decorative pattern moves toward the second position after reaching the first position, a part of the first decorative pattern is made difficult to see by the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern that, together with the first decorative pattern, constitutes a set of decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
After the second performance, the second decorative pattern is changed from a non-displayed state to a new display in a direction along the first direction, and a third performance is displayed in the direction along the first direction.
A fourth effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a direction along the second direction after the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern that, together with the first decorative pattern, constitutes a set of decorative patterns capable of informing whether or not a win has been obtained,
After the fourth performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the third decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a direction along the third direction different from the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
the first direction is a direction oblique to the display means,
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the reel symbol linkage performances A to C using Figures 65 to 67. These reel symbol linkage performances can be executed during the decorative symbol variable performance, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reel symbol linkage performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the reel symbol linkage performance, it drives the first movable reel 14 and the second movable reel 15.

[Gem symbol linkage performance A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the role symbol linkage performance A. The role symbol linkage performance A is one of the variation pattern performances including the pseudo consecutive performance, and FIG. 65 (A) to (J) are executed in one variation. In the role symbol linkage performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The decorative patterns include the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped (including temporary stop), and then the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, the second movable role 15 moves (advances) downward from the upper retreat position (FIG. 1) of the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stops at a forward advance position covering a part of the display screen 7a. As the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position, the shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a changes (deforms). Here, the shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapses in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so as to be crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15. The player realizes that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed as still symbols are crushed and distorted by the second movable device 15, and that the symbols that are displayed as still symbols are not finalized, but will be changed again, i.e., a pseudo consecutive combination will be performed. This can increase the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" on the decoration of the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, when the second movable role 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (i.e., "OARO") identical to the decoration of the second movable role 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image related to a specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) represented on the decoration of the second movable role 15, and does not need to be exactly the same color or shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decoration of the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which gives the player an impression that it is a special performance and increases interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), the variable display starts again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped (including temporary stop), and then the pseudo consecutive succession suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65(G) is executed. The pseudo consecutive succession suggestion effect is the same as the pseudo consecutive succession start suggestion effect described above. That is, the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position. With this movement to the advance position, the shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a changes (deforms). Here, the shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapses in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable role 15. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed so that they are crushed and distorted by the second movable role 15. Note that the manner of deformation may be different from that of the pseudo consecutive succession start suggestion effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), an image corresponding to the letters "OARO" on the decorative part of the second movable part 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, when the second movable part 15 is stationary in the advanced position, multiple letters (i.e., "OARO") that are the same as those on the decorative part of the second movable part 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image that is related to a specific object (letters, figures, symbols, etc.) shown on the decorative part of the second movable part 15, and does not need to be the exact same color or shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), the variable display starts again. After that, as shown in FIG. 65(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stop symbols. Here, they are displayed as if they are a big win.

[Gem symbol combination performance B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the combination of symbols B. The combination of symbols B is one of the variation pattern variations including the pseudo consecutive variations, and FIGS. 66(A)-(B) are the previous variation, and FIGS. 66(C)-(J) are the next variation including the pseudo consecutive variations. First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), two sets of decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stopped symbols. The second decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stopped symbols. A white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as stopped (including a confirmed stopped display). At the same time, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the reserved icon 9A that was in the first reserved display position moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r start to change. The first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are maintained in a stopped display. In other words, the second decorative pattern starts to change before the reserved icon 9A that was in the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position.

Next, the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance shown in FIG. 66 (D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, first, while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display the variable numbers, the display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which continue to stop at the result "123" displayed in the previous fixed stop display, temporarily disappears, and instead, the pseudo consecutive start suggestion display "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the second movable role 15 moves (advances) downward from the retreat position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stops at the forward advance position covering a part of the display screen 7a. After the pseudo consecutive start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change (deform) in shape as the second movable role 15 moves to the advance position. Here, the shapes of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become crushed in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable part 15. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are deformed as if they are being crushed and distorted by the second movable part 15. The player can realize that the stopped and displayed first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not finalized because they are being crushed and distorted by the second movable part 15, and that a change will be performed again, i.e., a pseudo consecutive reel will be performed. This can increase the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" of the decoration part of the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, when the second movable role 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (i.e., "OARO") identical to the decoration part of the second movable role 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image related to a specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) represented on the decoration part of the second movable role 15, and does not have to be exactly the same color or shape. At this time, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decoration part of the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the player can be impressed that it is a special performance and the interest can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed to be displayed to be changed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(H), while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed to be changed, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed to be stopped (including a temporary stop display), and then, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to be displayed to be changed again. That is, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66(J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed to be stopped to be confirmed. Here, they are displayed to be stopped in the form of a big win.

[Gem symbol linkage performance C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the combination of symbols C. The combination of symbols C is one of the variation pattern variations including the pseudo consecutive variations, and FIGS. 67(A)-(B) are the previous variation, and FIGS. 67(C)-(J) are the next variation including the pseudo consecutive variations. First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), two sets of decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variation mode in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. The first decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stopping symbols. The second decorative symbols include the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred depending on the combination of these stopping symbols. A white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed as stopped (including a confirmed stopped display). At the same time, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the reserved icon 9A that was in the first reserved display position moves toward the reserved display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r start to change. The first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are maintained in a stopped display. In other words, the second decorative pattern starts to change before the reserved icon 9A that was in the first reserved display position starts to move and reaches the reserved display position.

Next, the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance shown in FIG. 67 (D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, first, while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display the variable numbers, the display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which continue to stop at the result "123" displayed in the previous fixed stop display, temporarily disappears, and instead, the pseudo consecutive start suggestion display "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the second movable role 15 moves (advances) downward from the retreat position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7 toward the center of the display screen 7a, covering a part of the display screen 7a, and performs a rotational movement at that position. As a result, after the pseudo consecutive start suggestion display, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change (deform) in shape with the downward movement and rotational movement of the second movable role 15. Here, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R crack in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable part 15, and their shapes gradually become distorted. That is, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable part 15, distorted, and deformed as if cracked. The player can realize that the stopped and displayed first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable part 15, distorted, and cracked, so this does not mean that the stopped and displayed symbols have been finalized, but rather that a change will be performed again, i.e., a pseudo consecutive reel will be performed. This can increase the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), an image corresponding to the character "OARO" of the decoration part of the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, when the second movable role 15 is returned to the retreat position, the same character (i.e. "OARO") as the decoration part of the second movable role 15 is displayed large in one piece near the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image related to a specific object (character, figure, symbol, etc.) represented in the decoration part of the second movable role 15, and does not need to be exactly the same color or shape. At this time, both the first decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed. Here, both the first decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative pattern 2l, 8c, 8r are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decoration part of the second movable role 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which gives the player an impression that it is a special performance and increases interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r start to change again. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(H), while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r continue to change, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as stopped (including provisionally stopped), and then, as shown in FIG. 67(I), the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change again. That is, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(J), both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r are displayed as fixed stops. Here, they are displayed as stopped in the form of a big win.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the linked symbol effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 65(F), a first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and as shown in Fig. 65(G), after the first effect, the second movable gadget 15 moves to an advanced position that covers a part of the display screen 7a, and the shape of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same applies to Figs. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 65(G), in the second performance, the shape of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is distorted with the movement of the second movable role object 15. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game and improves the interest. The same is true in Figs. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 65(G), the second movable gadget 15 has a decorative part represented as "OARO", and as shown in Fig. 65(H), after the second performance, a third performance in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest of the game. The same applies to Figs. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 66(C)-(J) and 67(C)-(J), the first and second effects are executed during one variation, and in the first effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a state where they are displayed frozen after the variation immediately before the variation in which the first effect is executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 66(G)-(J) and 67(G)-(J), after the third performance, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 66(C) and 67(C), one of the multiple types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the linked role symbol performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the role symbol linkage performance A, Fig. 65 (A) to (J) are executed in one change. However, Fig. 65 (A) to (B) and Fig. 65 (C) to (J) may be different changes. Also, in the role symbol linkage performance B and C, Fig. 66 (A) to (B) and Fig. 67 (A) to (B) are one change, and Fig. 66 (C) to (J) and Fig. 67 (C) to (J) are the next one change. However, Fig. 66 (A) to (J) and Fig. 67 (A) to (J) may be executed in one change.

[Modification 2]
The deformation of the decorative pattern exemplified in the combination performances A to C of the role pattern is one example, and is not limited to these. That is, the deformation of the decorative pattern when the second movable role 15 advances is not limited to the deformation. For example, the decorative pattern may be broken into pieces, or may be reduced in size while maintaining the same shape.

[Modification 3]
In the role symbol linkage performance A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. They may be character graphic symbols. Although only one set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, multiple sets of decorative symbols may be displayed. The display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may disappear temporarily while they are changing, or they may not be displayed continuously. Here, the display of the change refers to a state in which the changing state is displayed visibly.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the role symbol linkage performances A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, in the role symbol linkage performance B of FIG. 66 (E), the role symbol linkage performance C of FIG. 67 (E) may be performed. Also, for example, in the pseudo consecutive performance of the role symbol linkage performance B of FIG. 66 (G) to (J), the pseudo consecutive performance of the role symbol linkage performance A may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable part that can be moved in front of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first performance, the movable role moves to the advance position covering a part of the display means, and a second performance in which the shape of the decorative pattern changes is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
In the second performance, the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted as the movable role object moves.
◇[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
The movable prop has a decorative part that represents a specific object,
After the second performance, a third performance in which the specific target is displayed on the display means can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-3,
After the third performance, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
The first performance and the second performance are executed during one change,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state after a change immediately before the change in which the first performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern,
In the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The specific image pattern linked performances A to C are explained below using Figures 68 to 70. These specific image pattern linked performances can be executed during the decorative pattern variable performance, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image pattern linked performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image pattern linked performance, it drives the first movable role piece 14 and the second movable role piece 15.

[Specific image pattern linkage performance A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the specific image pattern linkage performance A. In the specific image pattern linkage performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(B), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped (including provisionally stopped) at the off-number "123". Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped and lined up horizontally. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only symbols strictly lined up horizontally, but also symbols lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art would recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in symbols lined up horizontally.

Then, the pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion effect, a specific image CHA is newly displayed by framing in from the top of the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiling face. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of specific objects in which the number of specific objects can be determined when there are multiple specific objects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA moves to a position where it overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state, and then moves back and forth along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only strictly horizontal movement, but also roughly horizontal movement. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the left and right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the horizontal movement. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed in a stopped state are aligned along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it means that when two images are displayed overlapping, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (forward side), and specifically, it means that the image is displayed without missing in the overlapping part of the two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed overlapping, and one image is displayed as if it is positioned at the back (rear), and part of the image is missing from the overlapping area, the image is said to be "displayed behind" the other image.

The specific image CHA moves back and forth in the horizontal direction, and repeats a mode in which it overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and is displayed on the front side of them, as shown in FIG. 68(D), and a mode in which it overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the front side of them, as shown in FIG. 68(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on these back sides. As a result of the back and forth movement on the back sides of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a performance is performed in which it overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and is displayed on the back side of them, as shown in FIG. 68(F), and a performance in which it overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the back side of them, as shown in FIG. 68(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA become gradually more difficult to see (fade out) as the images gradually fade away with the specific image CHA positioned behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, the player can realize that the stopped and displayed outlier decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually becoming more difficult to see, and that this does not mean that the stopped and displayed patterns have been finalized, but rather that a change will be made again, i.e., a pseudo consecutive combination will be performed. This can increase the player's interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed stops. Here, they are displayed as if they were a big win.

[Specific image pattern linkage performance B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the specific image pattern linkage performance B. In the specific image pattern linkage performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the variable display are displayed (including the provisional stop display) at the miss number "789" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The decorative patterns include the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a row along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up in the horizontal direction" includes those that are lined up strictly in the horizontal direction as well as those that are lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, all of the patterns that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a are included in those that are lined up in the horizontal direction. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area to the left of the hold display position.

Then, the pseudo consecutive suggestion performance shown in Figure 69 (B) (C) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 68 (C) of the specific image pattern linkage performance A, a specific image CHA is newly displayed by framing in from the top of the display screen 7a and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiling face. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, creatures, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all forms in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the specific image CHA moves to a position where it overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state, and then moves back and forth along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only strictly horizontal movement, but also roughly horizontal movement. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the left and right direction of the display screen 7a is included in the horizontal movement. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed in a stopped state are aligned along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it means that when two images are displayed overlapping, it is displayed as if it is located on the front side (forward side), and specifically, it means that the image is displayed without missing in the overlapping part of the two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed overlapping, and one image is displayed as if it is positioned at the back (rear), and part of the image is missing from the overlapping area, the image is said to be "displayed behind" the other image.

The specific image CHA moves back and forth in the horizontal direction, and repeats the mode of overlapping both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and displaying them in front of each other as shown in FIG. 69(B), and the mode of overlapping both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and displaying them in front of each other as shown in FIG. 68(E) of the specific image pattern linkage performance A. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on the back side of each of these. As a result of the back and forth movement of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, a performance is performed in which the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and displaying them in the back of each of these as shown in FIG. 69(C), and the mode of overlapping both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and displaying them in the back of each of these as shown in FIG. 68(F) of the specific image pattern linkage performance A.

Next, as shown in Figure 68 (H) of the specific image symbol linkage effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA become gradually more difficult to see (fade out) as the image gradually fades with the specific image CHA positioned behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As a result, the player can realize that the stopped and displayed outlier decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually becoming more difficult to see, and that this does not mean that the stopped and displayed symbols have been finalized, but rather that a change will be made again, i.e., a pseudo consecutive combination will be performed. This can increase the player's interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which they move up and down at high speed. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as fixed and stopped. Here, they are displayed as if they were a big win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(F), the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, and here, the word "Yay!" is displayed. Here, two jackpot confirmation suggestion images CHB are displayed. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are both newly displayed by framing in from the top of the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB move to a position where they overlap with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed by the jackpot. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are both displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is further displayed in front of the specific image CHA. In this way, multiple images can be overlapped to create a sense of depth, enhancing the sense of interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the big win confirmation suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed are aligned along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA continues to be displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. As the specific image CHA moves back and forth in the horizontal direction, a performance is performed in which it overlaps both the center decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the front side of these, as shown in FIG. 69(G), and overlaps both the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and is displayed on the front side of these, as shown in FIG. 69(B). Thereafter, as shown in Fig. 69(H), the specific image CHA is displayed behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed, and moves back and forth horizontally behind them. The back and forth movement behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R creates an effect in which the specific image CHA overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed behind them, as shown in Fig. 69(H), and overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed behind them, as shown in Fig. 69(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(I) of the specific image pattern linkage performance A, a fade-out performance is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA become gradually more difficult to see (fade out) as the image gradually fades with the specific image CHA positioned behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This allows the player to notice that the jackpot game will start after this, as the stopped and displayed jackpot decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become more difficult to see. This can increase the player's interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the right-hit image MGU is displayed and then the jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image pattern linked performance C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image pattern linkage performance C. In the specific image pattern linkage performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position. A specific image CHA is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed variably. The specific image CHA is newly displayed by framing in from above the display screen 7a, and moves to a position on the display screen 7a where it overlaps with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiling face. Note that the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the horizontal direction while overlapping with the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only strictly horizontal movement, but also movement that is roughly horizontal. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving to the left and right of the display screen 7a is included in horizontal movement. At this time, the specific image CHA that is moving is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed on the front side" with respect to another image, it means that when two images are displayed overlapping, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side), and more specifically, it means a state in which the image is displayed without any missing part in the overlapping part of the two images. Conversely, when two images are displayed overlapping, it is displayed as if it is located on the far side (rear side), and a state in which the image is displayed with some missing part in the overlapping part of the two images is said to be "displayed on the back side" with respect to the other image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the speed of change of the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers begin to move (move) vertically while being visible. As the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth horizontally, it overlaps with the multiple moving number images that make up the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the specific image CHA is also displayed in front of the number images that make up the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the speed of change of the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers begin to move (move) up and down while being visible. Meanwhile, the speed of change of the left decorative pattern 8L further slows down, and it is displayed stopped at a specific number (here, "1"). As the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with the multiple number images that make up the right decorative pattern 8R while they are moving. It also overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L that is displayed stopped. At this time, the specific image CHA is also displayed in front of the number images that make up the right decorative pattern 8R. It is also displayed in front of the left decorative pattern 8L that is displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the speed of change of the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and the numbers begin to move (move) up and down while being visible. Meanwhile, the speed of change of the right decorative pattern 8R further slows down, and it is displayed stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). As the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with the multiple number images that are moving and that make up the middle decorative pattern 8C. It also overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed stopped. At this time, the specific image CHA is also displayed in front of the number images that make up the middle decorative pattern 8C. It is also displayed in front of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), after the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the deviating number "167", a change effect is executed in which the shape of the specific image CHA changes. Here, as one of the change effects, a change effect is performed in which the specific image CHA becomes larger, but the change mode is not limited to this. For example, the image content of the specific image CHA may change to a different content. Even during the change effect, the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. This change effect makes the player expect that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed at the deviating number will change again, which can increase the interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a multiplexing effect is executed in which a specific image CHA is displayed multiple times. Here, as one type of multiplexing effect, a specific image CHA is additionally displayed, but the multiplexing mode is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific images CHA may be additionally displayed. Even during the multiplexing effect, the specific image CHA before it is added continues to move back and forth in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed. The newly added specific image CHA moves back and forth behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed. This multiplexing effect can further heighten expectations that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are still displayed as outliers will change again, improving interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(H), an effect is performed in which the two specific images CHA frame out. Here, one of the two specific images CHA moves upward and the other moves downward, and they simultaneously frame out. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(I), a pseudo-consecutive suggestion image NKM is displayed, indicating that the decorative pattern will start to change again (start of pseudo-consecutive). Here, the pseudo-consecutive suggestion image NKM displays the words "2nd time!!" indicating the number of pseudo-consecutives. At this time, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(J), when the pseudo-consecutive suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed again.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of specific image pattern linkage presentations.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 68(D) to (E), a first effect can be executed in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and as shown in Figures 68(F) to (G), after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 68(D) to 68(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped symbols in the first and second effects. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 68, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R include the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained, and in the first performance, as shown in Fig. 68(D), the specific image CHA is displayed overlapping one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and then, as shown in Fig. 68(E), it is displayed overlapping one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 68 (B) to (G), in the first performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary in a horizontal line, and the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the horizontal direction.This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 68(B), the first effect includes an effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed while the specific image CHA is not displayed, and then the specific image CHA is newly displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R by framing in, as shown in Fig. 68(C)-(D). This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 68 (H), after the second performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA fade out and become difficult to see. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific image pattern linkage performances are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific image symbol linking performances A and B, the specific image CHA is overlapped with two symbol images at the same time. However, the specific image CHA may be overlapped with only one symbol image in sequence, or may be overlapped with three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol combination performances A to C, the specific image CHA moves horizontally. However, the specific image CHA may be arced or meandering. It may also move left and right while swaying up and down. It may also stop midway.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image pattern linkage performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specific numbers, but they do not have to be numbers. They may be character graphic symbols. Although only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, multiple sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may disappear temporarily while they are changing, or they may not be displayed continuously. Here, the display of the change refers to a state in which the changing state is displayed visibly.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image pattern linkage performances A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, after Fig. 68 (A) to (I), Fig. 70 (A) to (J) may be executed. Also, for example, after Fig. 70 (A) to (J), Fig. 69 (D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
A first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern;
A second effect in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern after the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
In the first and second effects, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
The decorative pattern includes a plurality of pattern images capable of informing whether or not a winning combination has been made,
In the first performance, the specific image is displayed overlapping one or more of the plurality of pattern images, and then the specific image is displayed overlapping one or more of the other of the plurality of pattern images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
In the first performance, the symbol images are displayed in a stopped state in a first direction, and the specific image moves back and forth along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first effect includes an effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a state in which the specific image is not displayed, and then the specific image is newly displayed in front of the decorative pattern by framing in.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
After the second performance, the decorative pattern and the specific image are faded out to become difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern mode change effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 71 to 73. These decorative pattern mode change effects can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the decorative pattern mode change effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Decorative pattern change performance A]
Fig. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change performance A. In the decorative pattern mode change performance A, first, as shown in Fig. 71 (A), a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a high speed change manner so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After being displayed in a high speed change manner, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may disappear once, or may not disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed variably, moving at a slower moving speed along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, curving to the right from the front side of the display screen 7a toward the back side. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L appears gradually smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the movement speed of the left decorative pattern 8L further slows down, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, an image of the number "9") rotates horizontally at the stopped display position where the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to horizontal, but may be vertical or diagonal. In addition, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one or multiple times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), the left decorative pattern 8L rotates horizontally at the stopped display position, and then the appearance of the previous image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the appearance of the image of the number "9" to an appearance in which the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9". The left decorative pattern 8L is then displayed stopped in the changed state at the stopped display position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stopped display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed variably while moving along an arc-like curved trajectory, curving leftward from the back of the display screen 7a to the front, while its moving speed slows down. In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed variably while moving in a different direction from the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves closer to the front of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the movement speed of the right decorative pattern 8R further slows down, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, an image of the number "5") rotates horizontally at the stopped display position where the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to horizontal, but may be vertical or diagonal. In addition, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one or multiple times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), the right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally at the stopped display position, and then the appearance of the previous image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R changes from the appearance of the image of the number "5" to an appearance in which the image of the number "5" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5". The right decorative pattern 8R is then displayed stopped in the changed state at the stopped display position. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R other than the right decorative pattern 8R at the stopped display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while its moving speed slows down. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while moving in a direction different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C further slows down, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, an image of the number "3") rotates horizontally at the stopped display position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or a diagonal direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one time or multiple times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), the central decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally at the stop display position, and then the appearance of the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, the central decorative pattern 8C changes from the appearance of the image of the number "3" to an appearance in which the image of the number "3" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3". Then, the central decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a state in which the appearance has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the central decorative pattern 8C other than the central decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the central decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a losing appearance (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the central decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a stopped state may be in the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, or may be in different positions.

[Decorative pattern change performance B]
Fig. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change performance B. In the decorative pattern mode change performance B, first, as shown in Fig. 72 (A), a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a high speed change manner so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After being displayed in a high speed change manner, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may disappear once, or may not disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed variably, moving along a straight trajectory diagonally upward to the left from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while slowing down its moving speed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the movement speed of the left decorative pattern 8L further slows down, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, an image of the number "9") rotates horizontally at the stopped display position where the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to horizontal, but may be vertical or diagonal. In addition, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one or multiple times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), the left decorative pattern 8L rotates horizontally at the stopped display position, and then the appearance of the previous image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the appearance of the image of the number "9" to an appearance in which the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9". The left decorative pattern 8L is then displayed stopped in the changed state at the stopped display position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stopped display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed variably while moving along a linear trajectory in a downward left direction from the back side to the front side of the display screen 7a while its moving speed slows down. In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed variably while moving in a different direction from the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the movement speed of the right decorative pattern 8R further slows down, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, an image of the number "5") rotates horizontally at the stopped display position where the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped. The direction of rotation of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to horizontal, but may be vertical or diagonal. In addition, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one or multiple times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), the right decorative pattern 8R rotates horizontally at the stopped display position, and then the appearance of the previous image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R changes from the appearance of the image of the number "5" to an appearance in which the image of the number "5" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5". The right decorative pattern 8R is then displayed stopped in the changed state at the stopped display position. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R other than the right decorative pattern 8R at the stopped display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while its moving speed slows down. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while moving in a direction different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C further slows down, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, an image of the number "3") rotates horizontally at the stopped display position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or a diagonal direction. In addition, the number of rotations of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be one or multiple times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), the central decorative pattern 8C rotates horizontally at the stopped display position, and then the appearance of the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, the central decorative pattern 8C changes from the appearance of the image of the number "3" to an appearance in which the image of the number "3" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3". Then, the central decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a changed state at the stopped display position. At this time, the central decorative pattern 8C other than the central decorative pattern 8C at the stopped display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the central decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing state (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the central decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be in the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern change performance C]
Fig. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change performance C. In the decorative pattern mode change performance C, first, as shown in Fig. 73 (A), a decorative pattern change performance (change display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a high speed change manner so that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. After being displayed in a high speed change manner, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once, or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed variably, moving at a slower moving speed along a curved trajectory that draws an arc, curving to the right from the front side of the display screen 7a toward the back side. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L appears gradually smaller as it moves toward the back side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the movement speed of the left decorative pattern 8L further slows down, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, an image of the number "9") changes appearance at the stopped display position where the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped. Specifically, the image of the number "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from blue to red. Note that the color of the left decorative pattern 8L may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), the left decorative pattern 8L changes the appearance of the previous image of the red number "9". Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the appearance of the red number "9" image to an appearance in which the image of the red number "9" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the red number "9". The left decorative pattern 8L is then displayed in a stopped state with the changed appearance at the stopped display position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stopped display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed variably while moving along an arc-like curved trajectory, curving leftward from the back of the display screen 7a to the front, as its moving speed slows. In other words, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed variably while moving in a different direction from the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves closer to the front of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the movement speed of the right decorative pattern 8R further slows down, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, an image of the number "5") changes appearance at the stopped display position where the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped. Specifically, the image of the number "5" of the right decorative pattern 8R changes from blue to red. Note that the color of the right decorative pattern 8R may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in Figure 73 (G), the right decorative pattern 8R changes the appearance of the previous image of the red number "5". Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R changes from the appearance of the red number "5" image to an appearance in which the image of the red number "5" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the red number "5". The right decorative pattern 8R is then displayed in a stopped state with the changed appearance at the stopped display position. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R other than the right decorative pattern 8R at the stopped display position disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), an effect is performed in which the middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while its moving speed slows down. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably while moving in a direction different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the moving speed of the middle decorative pattern 8C further slows down, and one of the middle decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, an image of the number "3") changes appearance at the stopped display position where the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped. Specifically, the image of the number "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from blue to red. Note that the color of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the state of the image of the red number "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. Specifically, the state of the image of the red number "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from the state of the image of the red number "3" to a state in which the image of the red number "3" becomes slightly smaller and a character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the red number "3". Then, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a state in which the state has changed at the stopped display position. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C other than the middle decorative pattern 8C at the stopped display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a losing state (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are displayed as a losing state (losing pattern) may be in the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, or may be in different positions.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of changing the decorative pattern appearance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 71 to 73, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variably manner in a first manner (e.g., numbers, etc.), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed changing from the first manner to a second manner (e.g., numbers + characters, etc.), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary in the second manner. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first state to the second state at the stopped display position as shown in Figures 71 to 73. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first state to the second state while rotating horizontally at the stopped display position, as shown in Figures 71 and 72. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is variably displayed while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving along a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed variably while moving along a curved track like an arc, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed variably while moving along a curved track like an arc, as shown in Figures 71 and 73. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves, as shown in Figures 71 to 73. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern change presentations are shown.
[Modification 1]
71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed while moving in different directions, but the moving direction of two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be the same. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed while moving in the same direction, and the center decorative pattern 8C may be displayed while moving in a direction different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R.
[Variation 2]
In Figures 71 to 73, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped at the stop display position, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R other than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at the stop display position are made to disappear, but for example, after the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at the stop display position, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position may be made to remain displayed without disappearing.
[Variation 3]
In Fig. 71 to Fig. 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably in a first mode (e.g., numbers, etc.), change from the first mode to a second mode (e.g., numbers + characters, etc.), and are displayed stationary in the second mode. The mode here includes various modes, such as the type, color, and shape of the image representing the decorative pattern. The pattern may change from any mode to any mode. The number of changes may be one or more times.
[Variation 4]
In Figures 71 to 73, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed in this order, change from the first state to the second state, and are displayed stationary, but the order of the display, change in state, and stationary display, etc. is not limited to this and may be in any order.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a first manner;
A second effect in which the decorative pattern is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect and displayed;
and a third effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern changes from the first aspect to the second aspect at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or A5-2,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern changes from the first state to the second state while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stopped display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The decorative pattern includes a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
In the first performance of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a first direction,
In the first performance of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
In the first performance of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed while moving along a curved track like an arc,
In the first performance of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved track like an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or A5-5,
In the first performance of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed gradually smaller as it moves,
In the first performance of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is gradually enlarged as it moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern variable area effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 74 to 76. These decorative pattern variable area effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variable effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the decorative pattern variable area effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Decorative Pattern Variable Area A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variable area performance A. In the decorative pattern variable area performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state (missed pattern) on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a stopped state may be the same or different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed changing at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R1, disappear from the first display area R1, and the variable displays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), an effect is performed in which the once-disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3") slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a performance is performed in which the once-disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (the number "3") slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a reach-teasing performance is performed to see whether or not it will form a reach state by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (the number "3")

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3") does not stop at the vertical center position of the second display area R2, but moves downward. In other words, it does not form a reach state by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3"). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the right edge part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. Note that if the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3") is displayed at the vertical center position of the second display area R2 and forms a reach state by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3"), another reach performance may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4") slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is displayed stopped at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). In other words, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped in the second display area R2. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper right part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), a performance is performed in which the once-disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (number "2") slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually become smaller (shrink) as they move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move further from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (shrinking). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within (return to) the first display area R1. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern) in the first display area R1.

[Decorative Pattern Variable Area Production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variable area performance B. In the decorative pattern variable area performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state (missed pattern) on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a stopped state may be the same or different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed changing at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R1, disappear from the first display area R1, and the variable displays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), an effect is performed in which the once-disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so that it can be seen through the transparent left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a performance is performed in which the once-disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (the number "3") slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a reach-teasing performance is performed to see whether or not a reach state will be formed by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (the number "3")

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3") does not stop at the vertical center position of the second display area R2, but moves downward. In other words, it does not form a reach state by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3"). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the right edge part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. Note that if the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3") is displayed at the vertical center position of the second display area R2 and forms a reach state by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3"), another reach performance may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4") slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is displayed stopped at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). In other words, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped in the second display area R2. Also, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper right part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed visible through the transparent right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), a performance is performed in which the once-disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so that it can be seen through the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has transparency.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a stopped state in the second display area R2, disappear from the second display area R2, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that had disappeared again reappear. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a reduced state within the first display area R1. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern) in the first display area R1.

[Decorative Pattern Variable Area Production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variable area performance C. In the decorative pattern variable area performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state (missed pattern) on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in a stopped state may be the same or different in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed changing at such a high speed that the numbers cannot be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R1, disappear from the first display area R1, and the variable displays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all become difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), an effect is performed in which the once-disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3") slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a performance is performed in which the once-disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (the number "3") slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a reach-teasing performance is performed to see whether or not it will form a reach state by combining with the left decorative pattern 8L (the number "3")

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) and the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) form a reach state. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). In other words, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper right part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. Note that after the reach state is formed, another reach performance may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a performance is executed in which the once-disappeared middle decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the middle decorative pattern 8C (number "2") slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and is stopped and displayed at the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part of it overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually become smaller (shrink) as they move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move further from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (shrinking). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed (returned) within the first display area R1. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern) in the first display area R1.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the decorative pattern changing area presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 to 76, a first effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed in the first display area R1 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7, and after the first effect, a second effect is executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed larger than in the first effect in the second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest of the player.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 to 76, in the second performance, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are enlarged and variably displayed is displayed overlapping the first display area R1. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 to 76, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variably manner in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear from the first display area R1. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 to 76, in the second selection, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are performed to determine whether or not they will form a reach state. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
76, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second performance, a third performance can be further executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 and 75, after the second performance, a fourth performance can be further executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as losing symbols without forming a ready-to-win state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 74 and 75, after the fourth effect, a fifth effect can be executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed moving from the second display area R2 to the first display area R1 while shrinking. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern variable area presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In Fig. 74 to Fig. 76, in the decorative pattern variable area performances A to C, the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is rectangular, but is not limited thereto and may be circular, elliptical, square, etc. In addition, the shape of the second display area R2 can also be various shapes. In addition, the second display area R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part of it.
[Modification 2]
74 to 76, in the decorative pattern variable area performances A to C, at least a part of the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is displayed overlapping the first display area R1, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap the first display area R1. For example, they may be displayed so as to fit within the second display area R2.
[Modification 3]
In Figures 74 to 76, in the decorative pattern changing area performances A to C, in the reach encouraging performance to determine whether or not a reach state will be formed, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and displayed in a changing manner, but in various other performances, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be enlarged and displayed in a changing manner.
[Modification 4]
In Figures 74 to 76, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed in this order, but the order of the displayed symbols is not limited to this and may be any order.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
A first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a first area of the display means;
and a second performance in which, after the first performance, the decorative pattern is displayed in a second area including the first area on the display means in a larger scale than that in the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to A6-1,
In the second performance, at least a part of the decorative pattern which is enlarged and variably displayed is displayed overlapping the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or A6-2,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the first area of the display means, and then the decorative pattern disappears from the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the second selection, a performance is performed as to whether or not the decorative symbol forms a reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second performance, a third performance in which the decorative symbols form a reach state can be further executed in the second area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second performance, a fourth performance can be further executed in which the decorative symbols do not form a ready-to-win state and are stopped and displayed as a losing symbol in the second area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-6,
After the fourth performance, a fifth performance can be further executed in which the decorative pattern is displayed moving from the second area to the first area while shrinking.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Operation promotion effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 77 to 79. These operation promotion effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the operation promotion effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Operation Promotion Presentation A]
Figure 77 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 77(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in Fig. 77(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the friendly character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. At this time, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 77(D), a size change effect is executed. The size change effect is an effect in which the button image BG is displayed in a larger size. This indicates the expectation of a big win. In this case, the ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in Fig. 77(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect in which a button image BG, which is an image simulating the effect button 63 as seen from a direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around an axis perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that it does not entirely fit on the display screen 7a. As a result, there are parts of the edge of the button image BG that are not displayed. The button image BG continues to rotate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), a press prompting effect is executed. In the press prompting effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and as it rotates around the left-right axis, the top surface that was facing forward gradually faces upward. Then, the button image BG is placed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed, as shown in Figure 77 (H). In a confirmed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7". A message image MG saying "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has defeated the enemy character CRB.

[Operation Promotion Presentation B]
Figure 78 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion presentation B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in Fig. 78(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the friendly character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. At this time, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 78(D), a button movement effect is executed. The button movement effect is an effect in which the button image BG moves at high speed. The button image BG moves from one edge of the display screen 7a to the other edge thereof, so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, the ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in Fig. 78(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation effect is an effect in which a button image BG, which is an image simulating the effect button 63 as seen from a direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around an axis perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that it does not entirely fit on the display screen 7a. As a result, there are parts of the edge of the button image BG that are not displayed. The button image BG continues to rotate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), a press prompting effect is executed. In the press prompting effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and as it rotates around the left-right axis, the top surface that was facing forward gradually faces upward. Then, the button image BG is placed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed, as shown in Figure 78 (H). In a confirmed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7". A message image MG saying "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has defeated the enemy character CRB.

[Operation Promotion Presentation C]
Figure 79 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. A reserved image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play. Also, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 79(B), the reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown to have stopped at "7". In addition, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 79(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start effect, a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the friendly character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. In addition, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 79(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG is changed. For example, the white upper surface is changed to blue, green, and red. This indicates the expectation of a big win. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in Fig. 79(E), a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG that is an image simulating the effect button 63 as seen from a direction perpendicular to the top surface is displayed, and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around an axis perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged so that it does not entirely fit on the display screen 7a. As a result, there are parts of the edges of the button image BG that are not displayed. The button image BG continues to rotate.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a press promotion effect is executed, as shown in Figure 79 (G). In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right axis, the top surface that was facing forward gradually faces upward. The button image BG is then positioned in the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In the confirmed stop effect (miss), the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R both stop at "7", and the center effect pattern 8C stops at "8". A message image MG saying "Defeat" is also displayed, indicating that the friendly character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. There may also be a transition from the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) to the confirmed stop effect (miss) of FIG. 79(H).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effectiveness of the operation promotion effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 seen from a direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed, and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the axis perpendicular to the top surface (FIGS. 77(E), 78(E), and 79(E)). This configuration contributes to promoting the operation of the effect button 63, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entirety does not fit on the display screen 7a, and there are parts at the edge that are not displayed (FIGS. 77(F), 78(F), and 79(F)). This configuration further contributes to promoting the operation of the effect button 63, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button moving effect is executed. The button moving effect is an effect in which the button image BG moves at high speed. The button image BG moves from one edge of the display screen 7a to the other edge thereof, so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78(D)). This configuration further contributes to promoting the operation of the effect button 63, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a press promotion effect is executed. In the press promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and rotates around the left-right axis so that the top surface that was facing forward gradually faces upward. Then, the button image BG is placed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "press" is also displayed (FIG. 77(G), FIG. 78(G), FIG. 79(G)). This configuration further contributes to promoting the operation of the effect button 63, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of displaying the button image BG is performed first (FIGS. 77(C)(D), 78(C), 79(A)-(D)). With this configuration, the player can pay attention to the effect button 63 before operating the effect button 63, which contributes to increasing the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there is a case where the color change effect shown in Fig. 79(D) is changed to the fixed stop effect (miss) shown in Fig. 79(H). In other words, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button fixed effect, and the push prompt effect may not be executed. This configuration expands the range of effects, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of the operation prompting display.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects, but it is also possible to execute either one of the button rotation effect or the button enlargement effect.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of the changes that occur during time-saving play, but it may also be applied to changes that occur during normal play, which is played from the left.

[Modification 3]
In the above, following the battle start effect, a size change effect (Fig. 77(D)) or a color change effect (Fig. 79(D)) was performed. Such a size change effect or color change effect may be performed, for example, when a game ball enters the game. For example, it may be performed at the timing when the number of reserved second special charts increases. Also, it may be performed at the timing of an over-winning.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation unit,
The operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of the operation unit includes a rotation effect in which an operation unit image simulating the operation unit is displayed on a display screen as an image of the operation unit seen from a predetermined direction and rotated around an axis of the predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The operation promotion effect includes an enlargement effect in which the entire operation unit image does not fit on the display screen and the end portion is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or B1-2,
The operation promotion effect includes a movement effect in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral portion to the other peripheral portion across the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The operation prompting performance includes a performance of displaying the operation unit image and prompting the user to press the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
The operation unit image is displayed on the display screen, and then the operation prompting effect is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
Even if the display effect is executed, the display effect may not be changed to the operation prompt effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5 or B1-6,
In the display performance, the probability of a jackpot is suggested when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-5 to B1-7,
The display performance is executed from the start of the variation of the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing notification effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 80 to 82. These winning/losing notification effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Winners announcement performance A]
Figure 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing announcement presentation A.
First, the change start effect is executed to start changing the effect pattern, and then, as shown in Fig. 80 (A), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle effect. The acquired button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been acquired.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, a performance is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The acquired button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG have been acquired, and a total of five button images BG are stocked. The number of stocked button images BG indicates the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a press prompting effect (initial stage) is executed. In the press prompting effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. In addition, stocked button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player presses the effect button 63 here, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (F), a press prompting effect (end) is executed. In the press prompting effect (end), a large button image BG is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. In addition, stocked button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player presses the effect button 63 here, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top. The press prompting effect (end) indicates that only a few button images BG are left stocked on the right side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. In the jackpot confirmation effect, an ally character CRA appears against a rainbow background RB that is displayed in the seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background that confirms a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 80 (H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop on the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop on "7".

[Winners announcement performance B]
Figure 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification presentation B.
First, the change start effect is executed to start changing the effect pattern, and then, as shown in Fig. 81 (A), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the above-mentioned battle effect, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle effect. The acquired button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are acquired.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, a performance is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The acquired button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, one button image BG has been acquired, and a total of three button images BG are stocked. The number of stocked button images BG indicates the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), a press prompting effect (initial stage) is executed. In the press prompting effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. In addition, stocked button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player presses the effect button 63 here, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (F), a press prompting effect (end) is executed. In the press prompting effect (end), a large button image BG is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. In addition, stocked button images BG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player presses the effect button 63 here, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are consumed in order from the top. The press prompting effect (end) shows a state in which only a few button images BG are left stocked on the right side. Here, it shows the state in which the stocked button images BG have been used up.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (G), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In the confirmed stop effect (miss), the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R both stop at "7", and the center effect pattern 8C stops at "8".

[Winners announcement performance C]
Figure 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification presentation C.
First, a change start effect is executed to start changing the effect pattern, and then a battle effect is executed as shown in Fig. 82 (A). The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (B). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle effect. The acquired button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. In this case, two button images BG have been acquired.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, a performance is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (D). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The obtained button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG have been obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, a performance is performed in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82 (F). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG is the reward for the battle effect. The acquired button images BG are displayed (stocked) in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG have been acquired, and a total of eight button images BG are stocked. The number of stocked button images BG indicates the likelihood of a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. In the jackpot confirmation effect, an ally character CRA appears against a rainbow background RB that is displayed in the seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background that confirms a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 82 (H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effectiveness of the winning/losing announcement presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect is performed in which button images BG are stocked (Figs. 80(B)(D), 81(B)(D), 82(B)(D)(F)), and then when the player presses the effect button 63, a press prompt effect is performed in which the stocked button images BG are consumed (Figs. 80(E)(F), 81(E)(F)), and a jackpot confirmation effect is performed in the middle of the press prompt effect (Fig. 80(G)). With this configuration, the result of winning or losing a jackpot is announced by pressing the effect button 63, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button get effect in which the button images BG are stocked is performed multiple times. Also, one or more button images BG are stocked in one button get effect (FIGS. 80(B)(D), 81(B)(D), 82(B)(D)(F)). According to this configuration, the stock of button images BG that can be operated by the effect button 63 increases stepwise, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect indicates the expectation of a big win. According to this configuration, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect becomes an important factor, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a big win confirmation effect that notifies the player that a big win has been confirmed (FIG. 80(G), FIG. 82(G)). With this configuration, when the big win confirmation effect is executed, the player can feel a sense of superiority, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the button get effect is executed, the big win confirmation effect can be executed without pressing the effect button 63 (FIG. 82 (B) (D) (F) (G)). This configuration can give a surprise to the player and increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the winning/losing announcement presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the ally character CRA appears against a rainbow background RB as the big win confirmation effect. In contrast, any effect may be used to notify the confirmation of the big win. For example, a full rotation effect may be performed in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R rotate in a so-called repeated number state. In addition, a premium effect may be used in which a premium image indicating that the big win has been confirmed is displayed. For example, the effect button 63 may be vibrated, air may be sent to the player, or a specific lamp may be turned on.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the effect button 63 during the press prompt effect, an effect is performed in which the button images BG stored on the right side are consumed in order from the top (FIG. 81(F)). If the big win confirmation effect is not executed and the stocked button images BG are used up, the player loses (FIG. 81(G)). In response to this, an effect may be performed in the middle of the press prompt effect to clearly indicate that the player has lost.

[Modification 3]
The above was an example of notifying the winner of a jackpot lottery, but it is also possible to notify the winner of the lottery for the number of rounds when a jackpot is reached, or the winner of the lottery for transition to a high probability state after a jackpot is reached.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation unit,
It is possible to execute a winning/losing notification performance including a first performance in which an operation unit image resembling the operation unit is stored on a display screen, a second performance in which the operation unit image stored by the first performance is consumed by operating the operation unit, and a third performance in which the winning/losing result of a specific lottery can be notified during the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The first effect is an effect in which one or more of the operation unit images are stocked multiple times.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or B2-2,
The number of stocks of the operation unit images in the first performance indicates an expectation of winning in the specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
The specific drawing in the third performance is a big win drawing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The third performance is a confirmation performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
The second performance is not executed, and the third performance is executed after the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The determination effect includes a full rotation effect that changes when the effect patterns are aligned,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation unit image display effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 83 to 85. These operation unit image display effects can be executed during various effects, such as during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the operation unit image display effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
83 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display performance A. In the operation unit image display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), during a round of play after a big win is confirmed, A performance (MAX acquisition challenge performance) is performed to determine whether or not the upper limit of the total number of rounds can be acquired. In this case, when 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the big win, This is an effect (round promotion effect) aiming to be promoted to the upper limit of 16 rounds. A text image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. MAX means It indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in the current big win (for example, 16R). The MAX acquisition challenge presentation may be performed during or before the round play.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and in this case, a text image MG2 of "One shot!" is displayed. This suggests that an effect will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be acquired in one operation. In addition, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG that the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Fig. 83(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a text image MG3 saying "Please!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the character is praying to obtain the MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see.
Furthermore, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 83(C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the sword image KG. Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a remain displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in Figure 83 (E), the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Also, the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in Figures 83 (C) and (D). Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 83(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a remain displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in Figure 83 (G), the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Also, the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in Figures 83 (E) and (F). Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 83(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a remain displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB and an operation prompting image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period for the sword component 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation prompting image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword component 64, and in this case, a text image MG4 saying "PUSH IT IN!!!" is displayed. The operation prompting image SG is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the upper part of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player pushes in the sword member 64 and the acquisition of the MAX is confirmed, a text image MG5 saying "MAX Acquired!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation unit image display effect B]
84 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display performance B. In the operation unit image display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), during a round of play after a big win is confirmed, A performance (MAX acquisition challenge performance) is performed to determine whether or not the upper limit of the total number of rounds can be acquired. In this case, when 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the big win, This is an effect (round promotion effect) aiming to be promoted to the upper limit of 16 rounds. A text image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. MAX means It indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in the current big win (for example, 16R). The MAX acquisition challenge presentation may be performed during or before the round play.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and here, a text image MG2 of "One shot!" is displayed. This suggests that an effect will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be acquired in one operation. In addition, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG, except for the size. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the part of the button image BG that the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a text image MG3 saying "Please!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the character is praying to obtain the MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is in a state where it can be just about seen through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. Furthermore, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 84(C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a remain displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (E), the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Also, the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in Figures 84 (C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and the text image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 84(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a remain displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in Figure 84 (G), the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Also, the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in Figures 84 (E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and the text image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 84(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. Note that the character images CG and text images MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a remain displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation prompting image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period for the sword component 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation prompting image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword component 64, and in this case, a text image MG4 saying "PUSH IT IN!!!" is displayed. The operation prompting image SG is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the upper part of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player pushes in the sword member 64 and the acquisition of the MAX is confirmed, a text image MG5 saying "MAX Acquired!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation unit image display effect C]
85 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect C. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), during a round of play after a big win is confirmed, A performance (MAX acquisition challenge performance) is performed to determine whether or not the upper limit of the total number of rounds can be acquired. In this case, when 4R has already been acquired as the number of rounds for the big win, This is an effect (round promotion effect) aiming to be promoted to the upper limit of 16 rounds. A text image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. MAX means It indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in the current big win (for example, 16R). The MAX acquisition challenge presentation may be performed during or before the round play.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed below the character image CG, and in this case, a text image MG2 of "One shot!" is displayed. This suggests that an effect will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be acquired in one operation. In addition, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap the front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG that the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a text image MG3 saying "Please!" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the character is praying to obtain the MAX. Then, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed lightly and is just barely visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is just barely visible through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. Furthermore, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is just barely visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is just barely visible through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. The button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B). Note that the character image CG and the text image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed lightly and is just barely visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is just barely visible through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. The button image BG and sword image KG are also displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and the text image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is just barely visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is just barely visible through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. The button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(C) and (D). Note that the character images CG and the text images MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), the button image BG and sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed lightly and is just barely visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The portion of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is just barely visible through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. The button image BG and sword image KG are also displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and the text image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed lightly and is just barely visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG that the button image BG overlaps is just barely visible through the button image BG. In other words, the button image BG is a transparent image. The button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and the text image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (I), a button image BG, a timer bar TB, and an operation prompting image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is larger than the button images BG in FIG. 85 (B) to (H). The timer bar TB indicates the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the button image BG, overlapping the lower part of the button image BG. The operation prompting image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63, and in this case, a text image MG6 saying "PRESS!!!" is displayed. The operation prompting image SG is displayed in front of the button image BG, overlapping the upper part of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in Figure 85 (J), if the player presses the effect button 63 and is unable to obtain the MAX, a text image MG7 stating "Failed to obtain MAX!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the image display on the operation panel.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 83 to 85, it is possible to execute a first effect in which a button image BG (first operation section image) and a sword image KG (second operation section image) are displayed so as to overlap, and a second effect in which either the button image BG or the sword image KG is displayed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG, as shown in Figures 83 to 85. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 83 to 85, in the first performance, the part of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is displayed so as to be visible through the button image BG. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 83 to 85, a third effect can be executed before the first effect, in which a sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the button image BG. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, thereby enhancing the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 83 to 85, in the third effect, the part of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see because of the sword image KG. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first effect is different from the size of the button image BG displayed in the third effect, as shown in Figures 83 to 85. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the image display presentation on the operation unit.
[Modification 1]
In Figures 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed during a round of play, but are not limited to this. For example, they may be performed during normal play, before a round of play, during a big win, etc.
[Modification 2]
In Figures 83 to 85, the operation unit image display effects A to C are performed in the effect (MAX acquisition challenge effect) that determines whether or not the upper limit number of rounds can be acquired as the total number of rounds for the jackpot, but are not limited to this. For example, they may be performed in the effect that determines whether a specific effect will be successful, the effect that determines whether or not there is a jackpot, the effect that determines whether or not there is a normal jackpot or a special jackpot, etc.
[Modification 3]
In Figures 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display performances A to C, the button image BG and the sword image KG gradually increase in size each time they are displayed, but for example, they may also become smaller each time they are displayed, or they may be displayed at the same size.
[Modification 4]
In Figures 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display performances A to C, the button image BG used is the same image as the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the performance button 63 or the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end part of the sword member 64, but the operation unit image can be any image representing the appearance of the performance button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, or various other operation units.
[Modification 5]
83 to 85, a background image may be displayed behind the button images BG and the sword images KG, and the button images BG and the sword images KG may be displayed in front of the background image. Also, the portions of the background image where the button images BG and the sword images KG overlap may be made visible through the button images BG and the sword images KG.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
a first operation unit and a second operation unit operable by a player;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a first operation part image representing the first operation part;
one of the plurality of types of images is a second operation part image representing the second operation part;
a first effect in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed so as to overlap each other;
A second performance in which either the first operation unit image or the second operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the first performance, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to be overlapped on the front side of the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the first performance, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is displayed so as to be visible through the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or B3-3,
A third performance may be further executed before the first performance, in which the second operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the third performance, a portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to see due to the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or B3-5,
The size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first performance is different from the size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, the appearance and disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons are explained using Figures 86 to 88. In Figures 86 to 88, the first movable parts 14 and the second movable parts 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, the various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing, and some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing.

This appearance and disappearance effect of the effect button can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to vary to when it stops), during a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which the player is awarded a benefit, etc., and can reflect the player's intention to operate (press) the effect button 63 in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-determination command, various jackpot game opening commands, a jackpot game round designation command, and a jackpot game ending command), and if an instruction to execute the appearance and disappearance effect of the effect button is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain the appearance and disappearance of the effect button A, then explain the appearance and disappearance of the effect button B, and finally explain the appearance and disappearance of the effect button C.

[Button appearance and disappearance effect A]
First, the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button. The appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button is selected from among a plurality of types of reach performances when a reach is formed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern. In the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. When the variation display of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and becomes a display mode in which it varies at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is varying at high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, and change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and are displayed as stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as the same symbol (number) as a temporary stop (here, the number "7"), and the center decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When a reach is reached, a first effect button image BTN that resembles the effect button 63 is placed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. The part of the first effect button image that corresponds to the press operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. The "predetermined light-emitting state" is set based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable effect start command), for example, in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of jackpot)).

When a reach is formed, the period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed is reached, timing begins, and the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed until the end of the period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed. In other words, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button execution period determines the effective period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed, and is a period during which the player's intention to operate (press) the effect button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button. In this embodiment, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds).

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in an appearance manner on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as an image identical to the first effect button image BTN (an image in which all characteristic information such as the button shape, size, and light emission mode are the same) or a similar image (an image similar in part or in whole to the characteristic information (the light emission mode may be the same or different)), and in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is placed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed with a predetermined light emission mode continuing.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears (disappears), as shown in Figure 86 (C). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the specified light emission mode continuing.

Furthermore, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in an appearing manner on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is positioned at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed with a predetermined light emission mode continuing.

When the player further operates (depresses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears (disappears), as shown in Figure 86 (E). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the specified light emission mode continuing.

After that, when the period during which the effect button appears and disappears is over, that is, when the valid period during which the effect button can appear and disappear is over, as shown in FIG. 86(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "7", and a miss is confirmed. In this embodiment, in this effect button appearance and disappearance effect A, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "7" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a miss is confirmed. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (for example, the number "7") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) is played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player.

In addition, when the reach shown in Figure 86 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 at all, the effect button appearance and disappearance effects shown in Figures 86 (B) to 86 (E) that are performed during the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period will not be performed, and when the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period ends, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in Figure 86 (F) will be displayed as stopped.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a random position (any position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first effect button image BTN.

[Button appearance and disappearance effect B]
Next, the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance button will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance button. The appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance button is selected from among a plurality of reach performances when a reach is formed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern. In the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance button, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. When the variation display of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and becomes a display mode in which it varies at a high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is varying at a high speed. The decorative symbols slow down just before stopping, changing from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as stopped. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed as the same symbol (number) as a temporary stop (here, the number "7"), and the center decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach.

When a reach is reached, a first effect button image BTN that resembles the effect button 63 is placed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. The part of the first effect button image that corresponds to the press operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. The "predetermined light-emitting state" is set based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable effect start command), for example, in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of jackpot)).

When a reach is formed, the period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed is reached, timing begins, and the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed until the end of the period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed. In other words, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button execution period determines the effective period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed, and is a period during which the player's intention to operate (press) the effect button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button. In this embodiment, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button execution period is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (for example, 4 seconds) or longer (for example, 8 seconds).

When the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the player operates (depresses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87(B), hole images MH imitating a mole's hole are displayed on the left and right sides near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hole image MH imitating a mole's hole is formed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and hole images MH imitating a mole's hole are displayed on the left and right sides near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and five hole images MH imitating mole's holes are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the five hole images MH have the same shape, size and color.

An image of a mole with a smiling face (hereinafter referred to as the "smiling mole image") MCH1 is displayed peeking out from the hole image MH on the left side near the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed above the head of the smiling mole image MCH1 in a manner that it appears arranged as an image identical to the first effect button image BTN (an image in which all characteristic information such as the button shape, size, and light emission mode are the same) or a similar image (an image similar in part or in whole to the characteristic information (light emission mode may be the same or different)). At this time, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN that resembles the effect button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed with a predetermined light emission mode continuing.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the second effect button image BTN2 that was displayed to the left of the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears (disappears). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state in which it has changed from the smiling mole image MCH1 to an image imitating a mole with a dizzy and dizzy face (hereinafter referred to as the "dizzy mole image") MCH2. Note that while the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the specified light emission mode continuing.

Furthermore, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image resembling a mole with a face wearing colored glasses (e.g., black glasses) (hereinafter referred to as the "spectacled mole image") MCH3 appears from the hole image MH on the right side near the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(D). At this time, in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN resembling the effect button 63 is placed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed with a predetermined light emission mode continuing. Note that there may also be a case where a second effect button image BTN2 appears above the head of the spectacled mole image MCH3 together with the spectacled mole image MCH3.

When the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 multiple times (here, three times), the image is displayed in a changed state from the spectacled mole image MCH3 to the clown mole image MCH2, as shown in Figure 87 (E). The spectacled mole image MCH3 is tougher than the smiling mole image MCH1, and when the spectacled mole image MCH3 appears, the image will not change from the tough spectacled mole image MCH3 to the clown mole image MCH2 unless the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) multiple times (here, three times). The first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the specified light emission mode continuing. Also, if the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed above the head of the spectacled mole image MCH3 together with the spectacled mole image MCH3, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 multiple times (here, three times), the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a manner that changes from the spectacled mole image MCH3 to the clown mole image MCH2.

When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 87(F), a smiling mole image MCH1 is displayed peeking out from the hole image MH on the right side near the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed above the smiling mole image MCH1. At this time, to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN modeled after the effect button 63 is placed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed with a predetermined light emission mode continuing.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, the second effect button image BTN2 that was displayed on the right side near the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears (disappears), as shown in Figure 87 (G). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state in which it has changed from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the clingy mole image MCH2. Note that while the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the specified light emission mode continuing.

When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, a smiling mole image MCH1 is displayed peeking out from the hole image MH in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(H). At this time, to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, a first effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 is placed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed with a predetermined light emission mode continuing.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, the smiling mole image MCH1 is changed to the Claw Mole image MCH2, as shown in FIG. 87(I). Note that the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while continuing to emit light in a specified manner.

After that, when the execution period for the appearance and disappearance of the effect button comes to an end, that is, when the valid period during which the appearance and disappearance of the effect button can be performed ends, as shown in Figure 87 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L will stop displaying the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C will stop displaying the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop displaying the number "7", and a miss will be confirmed.

In this embodiment, in the appearance and disappearance performance B of this performance button, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a miss is confirmed. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as the same pattern (for example, the number "7") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player.

In addition, when the reach shown in Figure 87 (A) is formed and the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 at all, the effect button appearance and disappearance effects shown in Figures 87 (B) to 87 (I) that are performed during the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period will not be performed, and when the effect button appearance and disappearance effect execution period ends, the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in Figure 87 (J) will be displayed as stopped.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears in a fixed position where the smiling mole image MCH1 and the spectacled mole image MCH3 appear.

[Button appearance and disappearance effect C]
Next, the appearance and disappearance performance C of the performance button will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the appearance and disappearance performance C of the performance button. The appearance and disappearance performance C of the performance button is performed during a big win game (big win performance) in which a player is given a profit, and is performed when a predetermined condition is met (for example, it is not performed when there is a so-called "reserved consecutive" in which there is a ball that will become a big win in the reserved ball before the big win performance ends). The presence or absence of this reserved consecutive is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (the jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a big win) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command. In addition, when the reserved consecutive performance is not performed, in other words, there is no ball that will become a big win in the reserved ball before the big win performance ends.

In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a display mode selection screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which allows the player to select the effect mode to be used after the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) during a specific period from the start to the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game). The specific period is made up of a first period (effect mode selection period) for selecting the effect mode, and a second period (effect mode confirmation notification period) for informing the player of the mode transition to the effect mode selected after the first period (effect mode selection period) has elapsed. In this embodiment, during a specified period (e.g., 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) (i.e., during a specified period (e.g., 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game)), a catchy message presentation in which a catchy message from the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed and an addiction prevention presentation in which a warning against addiction to the game is displayed are performed, so the start of this specified period coincides with the end of the specific period.

When the selection screen for the presentation mode is displayed, a first presentation button image BTN that imitates the presentation button 63 is positioned at the center of the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner to prompt the player to select a presentation mode by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. The part of the first presentation button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the presentation button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. The "predetermined light-emitting manner" is, for example, a flashing white light.

The presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), a selection section SEL is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the presentation mode that has reached a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode. Note that when the presentation mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is arranged in the specific area as the default, but the next time the presentation mode selection screen is displayed, the default (i.e. A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the presentation mode selected the previous time the presentation mode selection screen was displayed may be arranged in the specific area.

To the right of the selection section SEL, a demo area DS that explains the currently selected presentation mode using various images and text is displayed in a rectangular area extending from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the letters "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the presentation mode are displayed in the upper left corner.

In A mode, a performance with a "sun" theme progresses, and a theme image PM modeled after the "sun" is animatedly displayed on the left side of the demo area DS, and a second performance button image BTN2 is displayed at the bottom right of the demo area DS as an image identical to the first performance button image BTN (an image in which all characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission pattern is the same) or a similar image (an image similar in part or in whole to the characteristic information (light emission pattern may be the same or different)). An explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in A mode is displayed at the top right of the demo area DS.

When A mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 88(B), A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing D mode located below A mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode located above A mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In B mode, a "cloud"-themed presentation is performed, with a theme image PM modeled after a "cloud" being animatedly displayed in the center of the demo area DS, and explanatory text MME about the progress of the presentation in B mode being displayed in the upper right corner of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while B mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(C), B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing A mode located below B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and C mode located above B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is performed, with a theme image PM that resembles "rain" displayed as a moving image in the center of the demo area DS, and explanatory text MME about the progress of the presentation in C mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while C mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(D), C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode located below C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode located above C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, with a theme image PM modeled after "snow" being animatedly displayed in the center of the demo area DS, and explanatory text MME about the progress of the presentation in D mode being displayed in the upper right corner of the demo area DS.

When D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 88(E), D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing C mode located below D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, when the A mode is displayed in a specific area of the selection section SEL, the first period (presentation mode selection period) for selecting a presentation mode has elapsed, and the second period (presentation mode confirmation notification period) for informing the user of the transition to the selected presentation mode has begun. As shown in FIG. 88(F), the four corners of the rectangular demo area DS are displayed in a manner in which they expand (are enlarged) toward the four corners of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" that progresses the presentation with the theme of the "sun" of A mode is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a message MG that informs the user that the selected presentation mode is A mode is displayed large from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the right side to the right of the theme image PM, and the second presentation button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the second period (performance mode confirmation notification period) passes, and during the specified period (e.g., 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), when the start of this specified period arrives (i.e., when the start of the specified period (e.g., 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) arrives), a catchphrase performance in which the gaming machine manufacturer's catchphrase is displayed, and an addiction prevention performance in which a warning against addiction to the game is displayed, are performed, and when the specified period ends, that is, the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), as shown in FIG. 88 (G), a theme image PM that imitates the "sun" that progresses the performance with the theme of "sun" in A mode is displayed large on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second performance button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, the entry of a game ball into the second start port (second start winning port, second ball entry port, variable start port) 21), the display of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") starts to change in front of the theme image PM in a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. When the display of the decorative patterns starts to change, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the theme image PM, which is a background image arranged behind the decorative patterns, to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, and change from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state and are displayed as stopped.

In this way, in the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C, each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the effect modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and the effect mode that reaches a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other effect modes. At this time, when A mode reaches the specific area in the demo area DS, the second effect button image BTN2 appears (disappears) from the demo area DS, and when B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the demo area DS. In other words, in the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears and disappears (disappears) on the display screen 7a (demo area DS) of the image display device 7.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the appearance and disappearance of the performance buttons.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance effect A of the effect button, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with an effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by a player, and an image display device 7 (display means) that can display various images, and when a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) that imitates the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the effect button 63 (operation means) being operated (pressed), at least one of the following can be executed: a first effect in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) that imitates the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). According to this configuration, based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means)), so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased. The same applies to the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in Fig. 87(A) to Fig. 87(I) and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C in Fig. 88(A) to Fig. 88(E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 86(A) to 86(E) of the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed at a position different from that of the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) in the first performance in which the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). For example, the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 or at the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) so that they are arranged differently, thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing the player's interest.
In the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance buttons in Figures 87 (A) to 87 (I), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means), while the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) or the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means), which is similar.
In the appearance and disappearance performance C of the performance buttons in Figures 88 (A) to 88 (E), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means), while the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed within the demo area DS (lower right side of the demo area DS) which is arranged on the rectangular area side from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means), so it is similar.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 86 (A) to 86 (E) of the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button, when a reach is formed during the decorative pattern variation performance (during a specified performance), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed after the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed during the variation of the decorative symbols (during a predetermined performance), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and then the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). Therefore, when the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) after the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears, which visually entertains the player and increases the interest. The same applies to the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance buttons in Figures 87(A) to 87(I).
In the appearance and disappearance of the effect button effect C of FIG. 88(A) to FIG. 88(E), during a specific period from the start to the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), when an effect mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) (during a specified effect), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and then, when the A mode is selected, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed. Therefore, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), when the A mode is actually selected and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode that can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 86(A) to Fig. 86(E) of the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button, the image display device 7 (display means) can display the reach performance in the variable performance display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the predetermined performance in which the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the reach performance. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be the period during which the reach performance is being performed, and in addition to the image by the reach performance, after the appearance of the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image), the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be further displayed, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same is true for the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance button in Fig. 87(A) to Fig. 87(I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 88(A) to 88(E) of the appearance and disappearance of the effect button C, the image display device 7 (display means) can display a big win effect (a winning game effect), and the predetermined effect in which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is the big win effect (a winning game effect). According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be a specific period during the period in which the big win effect (a winning game effect) is performed, and in addition to the image of the big win effect (a winning game effect), after the appearance of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be further displayed, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 86(A) to Fig. 86(E) of the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button, the color of the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) and the color of the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) and the color of the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for the appearance and disappearance performance B of the performance button in Fig. 87(A) to Fig. 87(I) and the appearance and disappearance performance C of the performance button in Fig. 88(A) to Fig. 88(E).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the appearance and disappearance of the effect buttons are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the appearance and disappearance of the effect button A in Fig. 86, the appearance and disappearance of the effect button B in Fig. 87, and the appearance and disappearance of the effect button C in Fig. 88, either one of the first effect in which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) that the player can operate is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and based on the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 (operation means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), or the second effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. However, instead of the effect button 63 (operation means), a sword member 64 or a sword button 65 may be used. In this case, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) on the image display device 7 (display means) are images imitating the sword member 64 and the sword button 65.

[Variation 2]
In the appearance and disappearance performance A of the performance button in Fig. 86, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), and when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed) again, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). However, after the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the performance button 63 may be operated (pressed) a plurality of times (for example, a predetermined fixed number of times among 2 times, 3 times, ..., 9 times, 10 times, or a random number of times set in real time by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) among 2 times to 10 times). This can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) being erased (disappeared) or displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) every time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), and therefore the player himself can discover the correspondence of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) being erased (disappeared) or displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, and therefore can contribute to suppressing a decrease in motivation to play by making the act of operating (pressing) the effect button 63 less monotonous.

[Modification 3]
In the appearance and disappearance of the effect button A in FIG. 86 and the appearance and disappearance of the effect button B in FIG. 87, the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be increased stepwise toward the maximum size each time the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means) and is displayed (appears). In this case, the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be increased stepwise toward the maximum size each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), or may be stopped at a certain size just before the maximum size (a size (halfway) several steps before the maximum size). In this way, the expectation of a big win game (big win effect) that gives a profit to the player by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 can be increased, and it can contribute to making the player less likely to be passive about operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

[Variation 4]
In the appearance and disappearance of the effect button A in Fig. 86 and the appearance and disappearance of the effect button B in Fig. 87, each time the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means) and is displayed (appears), the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be changed stepwise to a color that enhances the expectation of a big win game (big win effect) that gives a profit to the player. For example, the color changes stepwise from white to blue to green to red to gold to seven colors (rainbow colors). This can contribute to making the player less likely to be reluctant to operate (press) the effect button 63.

[Variation 5]
In the effect button appearance and disappearance effect C in Fig. 88, a theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed on the left side of the demo area DS as a moving image. Such a moving image is a moving image that explains the flow of the effect of each mode, the characters, the background, the scene, etc., and may be a moving image using three-dimensional CG, a moving image using animation, or a scene from a movie. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Variation 6]
In the effect button appearance and disappearance effect A of Figure 86, the effect button appearance and disappearance effect B of Figure 87, and the effect button appearance and disappearance effect C of Figure 88, when a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the effect button 63 (operation means) being operated (pressed), a first effect can be executed in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect can be executed in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). However, in a state in which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), each time the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed), a first effect is executed in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and, for example, when the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) ten times, a second effect may be executed in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is accordingly hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). In addition, in a state where the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), each time the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed), a second effect is executed in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). For example, when the effect button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) ten times, a first effect may be executed in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Variation 7]
In the appearance and disappearance of the effect button C in Fig. 88, during the big win effect (the effect of the winning game), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and then the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as the effect of the winning game, in addition to the big win effect, during the effect of the small win game, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and then the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or during the effect of the small win game instead of the big win effect, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and then the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Variation 8]
The appearance and disappearance performance A of the effect button in Figure 86, the appearance and disappearance performance B of the effect button in Figure 87, and the appearance and disappearance performance C of the effect button in Figure 88 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect B4-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of displaying various images,
When a first operation means image simulating the operation means is displayed on the display means, the operation means is operated.
a first effect in which a second operation means image simulating the operation means is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the second operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
At least one of the following can be executed:
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
the second operation means image is displayed at a position different from that of the first operation means image in the first performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or B4-2,
the first operation means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined performance,
the second operation means image can be displayed after the first operation means image is displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a reach effect in a variable effect display of a decorative pattern,
The predetermined effect is the reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a winning game effect,
The predetermined effect is the effect of the winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
The color of the first operation means image and the color of the second operation means image are the same color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning notification effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 89 to 91. These winning notification effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the changing performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a winning notification effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

All of the winning notification effects A to C are effects that execute a big win confirmation effect when the effect button 63 is activated during the battle effect and the number of times the effect button 63 is operated reaches 1, 5, 8, 12, or 14 times. If the big win confirmation effect is not executed even after 14 times, the player has lost.

[Winning Notification A]
Figure 89 is a diagram to explain the winning notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 89(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a battle performance (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big win occurs. In the battle performance (start), input of the performance button 63 is enabled. That is, although no display is provided on the display screen 7a to prompt the user to press the performance button 63, the performance control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the performance button 63 based on a signal from the performance button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a battle performance (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand, and the performance is such that the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle performance (initial stage), input of the performance button 63 is enabled. The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), the ally character CRA gains the upper hand, and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle performance (middle stage), input of the performance button 63 becomes effective. The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. In the jackpot confirmation effect, an ally character CRA appears against a rainbow background RB that is displayed in the seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background that confirms a jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "Jackpot" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In other words, the jackpot confirmation effect is executed when the effect button 63 is operated 12 times during the battle effect (middle stage).

Next, as shown in Fig. 89(G), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the winner of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and a message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 89 (H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Winning Notification Performance B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 90(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown to have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a battle performance (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is waged, and if the ally character CRA finally wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is won. In the battle performance (start), input of the performance button 63 is enabled. That is, although no display is provided on the display screen 7a to prompt the user to press the performance button 63, the performance control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the performance button 63 based on a signal from the performance button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. In the jackpot confirmation effect, an ally character CRA appears against a rainbow background RB that is displayed in the seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background that confirms a jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "Jackpot" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. In other words, the jackpot confirmation effect is executed when the effect button 63 is operated five times during the battle effect (middle stage).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a battle performance (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown to corner the ally character CRA to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), the ally character CRA gains the upper hand and corners the enemy character CRB to the left.

Next, as shown in Fig. 90(G), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and a message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in Fig. 90(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Winning Notification Performance C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a battle performance (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, a big win occurs. In the battle performance (start), input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the word "press" is displayed. The performance control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the performance button 63 based on a signal from the performance button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of five operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a battle performance (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand, and an performance is performed in which the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. In the battle performance (initial stage), input of the performance button 63 is enabled. Here, the button image BG is displayed along with the word "press." The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), the ally character CRA gains the upper hand, and an performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle performance (middle stage), input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed along with the word "press." The actual number of times the performance button 63 has been operated is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed up to this point.

Next, as shown in Fig. 91 (F), a battle effect (final stage) is executed. The battle effect (final stage) is an effect for notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center, and a message image MG saying "Defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in Figure 91 (G), a fixed stop performance (miss) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (miss), the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R both stop at "7", and the center performance pattern 8C stops at "8".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the winning notification effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the effect button 63 during the battle effect, when a predetermined number of operations is reached, it is possible to execute a big win confirmation effect (FIGS. 89(E)(F), 90(C)(D)). This configuration contributes to promoting the operation of the effect button 63, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of predetermined numbers of operations, namely, 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14, are set as the predetermined number of operations. According to this configuration, there are a plurality of timings at which the big win confirmation effect may be executed, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the big win confirmation effect is not executed after 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91(E)), the player is determined to have lost the big win lottery. This configuration eliminates unnecessary expectations and increases the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period when the effect button 63 is enabled, no effect is performed to encourage the operation of the effect button 63 (FIGS. 89(C)-(E), 90(C)). With this configuration, the effect is a kind of hidden command that is only available to players who know about it, and this can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period when the effect button 63 is active, an effect is sometimes performed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 (FIGS. 91(C)-(E)), and sometimes not (FIGS. 89(C)-(E), FIG. 90(C)). This configuration broadens the range of effects, making it possible to increase the interest of the player in the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the winning notification presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
The above has been exemplified by the operation of the effect button 63, but the same can be applied to the operation of levers, swords, and other devices.

[Modification 2]
The above is an example of notifying a win in a jackpot lottery, but it can also be applied to winning the maximum number of rounds in a lottery for the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot, or winning in a lottery for transitioning to a high probability state after a jackpot.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by a player and can execute a performance based on the operation of the operation unit,
By repeatedly operating the operation unit during a predetermined performance, when the number of operations of the operation unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify a win in a specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
A plurality of operation numbers are set as the predetermined operation number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or B5-2,
If the winning notification is not given even when the number of times the operation unit is operated exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations, the player is determined to have lost the specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
During the predetermined performance, no promotion performance is performed to prompt the user to operate the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
During the predetermined performance, a prompting performance to prompt the user to operate the operation unit may or may not be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The particular drawing is a jackpot drawing.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, we will use Figures 92 to 94 to explain the three-dimensional image outer enclosure performances A to C. In Figures 92 to 94, the first movable props 14 and second movable props 15 arranged around the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, and the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This three-dimensional image inside and outside outer periphery presentation can be executed during the decorative pattern change presentation (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing), during a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) in which a player is awarded a benefit, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a change presentation start command, various jackpot game opening commands, jackpot game round designation commands, jackpot game ending commands), and if an instruction to execute a button presentation is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain the outer boundary inside and outside effects A of the stereoscopic image, then explain the outer boundary inside and outside effects B of the stereoscopic image, and finally explain the outer boundary inside and outside effects C of the stereoscopic image.

[3D image exterior effects A]
First, the outer boundary inside and outside performance A of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the outer boundary inside and outside performance A of a stereoscopic image. In the outer boundary inside and outside performance A of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), when the number "4" of a stereoscopic image appears as a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, receding, stopping, and swaying (including rotation; the same applies below). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), with the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the boundary. In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In contrast, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it moves away, the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") later appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, or in a manner that it moves away, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 similarly increases or decreases, and accordingly the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

The inner area FRMa of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. The outer area FRMb of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") displays a first geometric pattern in which rectangles are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned in the up, down, left and right directions in a matrix pattern. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque framed three-dimensional image FRM, and when the framed three-dimensional image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the framed three-dimensional image FRM become larger or smaller. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM and an outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM, with the outline (outline) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM as the boundary. Here, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM is the background image.

After this, when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, with the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the boundary. In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, the first geometric pattern (a pattern in which squares are aligned in the up, down, left and right directions at a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix shape) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a second geometric pattern of stacked bricks displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Also, in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, a character body CRA appears and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is played.

When the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and horizontal length are increased, and the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed large, the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased, and the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed small, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is decreased. On the other hand, when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and horizontal length are decreased, and the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed small, the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is decreased, and the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed large, and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is increased.

If the framed three-dimensional image FRM subsequently appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and either or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the framed three-dimensional image FRM are increased, or either or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the framed three-dimensional image FRM are decreased, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 similarly increases or decreases, and accordingly the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from the colored, opaque, framed three-dimensional image FRM to the colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again as the predetermined image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored, opaque, framed three-dimensional image FRM to the colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, the second geometric pattern (a pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the framed three-dimensional image FRM is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from the colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to the colored, opaque, frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM again, and when the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears, it is displayed in such a way that one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM become larger or one or both become smaller.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, the second geometric pattern (a pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a third geometric pattern in the outer area FRMb of the contour (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, in which octagons are aligned in a matrix shape with a predetermined distance between each other in the up, down, left and right directions. The third geometric pattern is a still image. Also, in the inner area FRMa of the contour (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, a character body CRB appears anew and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again as the predetermined image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from a colored, opaque, frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned in the up, down, left, and right directions in a matrix pattern) that was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") to a colored, opaque, framed three-dimensional image FRM as the specified image, and when the framed three-dimensional image FRM appears, it is displayed in such a way that one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the framed three-dimensional image FRM become larger or one or both become smaller.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are aligned in the up, down, left and right directions at a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a fourth geometric pattern in which alphabetical V shapes are arranged continuously in the up, down, left and right directions in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and approach each other within the inner area FRMa, and a video of the two character bodies CRA and CRB is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the two character bodies CRA, CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action scene featuring the two character bodies CRA, CRB unfolds. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA, CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA, CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the series of effects from Figure 92 (A) to Figure 92 (G) are performed within a reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after a reach has been formed, an action effect will be developed and if the same decorative patterns are displayed stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a line, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) will be played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player, whereas if the same decorative patterns are not displayed stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a line, a miss will be displayed as a confirmed win.

In addition, if the series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect will be developed, and for example, if character body RCA wins a match against character body RCB, right-hand play will be started (or continued), whereas, for example, if character body RCA loses a match against character body RCB, left-hand play will be started (or will be returned from right-hand play to left-hand play).

Note that as one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increase, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increases, and as one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM decrease, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM decreases. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increases, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM does not increase (enlarge) accordingly, but the region around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items around the character can be seen expands. Also, as the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM does not become smaller (reduced), but the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and the area in which the character itself can be seen also becomes smaller. Of course, when a character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the character is displayed larger, whereas when the character moves away (moves away from the player), the character is displayed smaller.

[3D image exterior effect B]
Next, the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the stereoscopic image. In the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), when the number "4" of the stereoscopic image appears as a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, receding, stopping, and swinging. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), with the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the boundary. In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In contrast, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it moves away, the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") later appears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 again, and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that makes it approach, or in a manner that makes it move away, similarly, when the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases accordingly.

The inner area FRMa of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. The outer area FRMb of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") displays a first geometric pattern in which rectangles are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned in the up, down, left and right directions in a matrix pattern. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in which the plate of the stereoscopic image is displayed, and when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner in which it approaches, moves away, stops, and rotates in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and an outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, with the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as the boundary. Here, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM serves as the background image.

After this, when the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, with the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the boundary. In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, the first geometric pattern (a pattern in which squares are aligned in the up, down, left and right directions at a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a second geometric pattern of stacked bricks displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, a character body CRA appears and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is played. In addition, the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the shape of the character body CRA displayed in the inner area FRMa is also deformed depending on the angle of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in three-dimensional space.

When the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed large and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, resulting in a smaller outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In contrast, when the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it moves away, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed small and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, resulting in a larger outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM subsequently appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, or in a manner that it moves away, the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that is occupied by the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM similarly increases or decreases, and accordingly the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that is occupied by the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM increases or decreases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again as the predetermined image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, moves away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, the second geometric pattern (a pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a static image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from the colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to the colored, opaque, plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM again, and when the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, and rotates.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, the second geometric pattern (a pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a third geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, in which octagons are aligned in a matrix shape with a predetermined distance between each other in the up, down, left and right directions. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, in the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, a character body CRB appears anew and moves within the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is played. As mentioned above, the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the shape of the character body CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa is also deformed depending on the angle of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in three-dimensional space.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again as the predetermined image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM to the colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned in the up, down, left, and right directions and arranged in a matrix shape) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to a colored, opaque, plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and when the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, and rotates.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as a predetermined image, the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are aligned in the up, down, left and right directions at a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the contour (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a fourth geometric pattern in which the English letter V is arranged continuously in the up, down, left and right directions in the outer area FRMb of the contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner area FRMa of the contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and approach each other within the inner area FRMa, and a video of the two character bodies CRA and CRB is played. As mentioned above, the inner area FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is a surface, and the shapes of the two character bodies CRA, CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa are also deformed according to the angle of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM in three-dimensional space.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the two character bodies CRA, CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action scene featuring the two character bodies CRA, CRB unfolds. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA, CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer periphery (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA, CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the series of effects from Figure 93 (A) to Figure 93 (G) are performed within the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after a reach has been formed, an action effect will be developed and if the same decorative patterns are displayed stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a line, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) will be played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player, whereas if the same decorative patterns are not displayed stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a line, a miss will be displayed as a confirmed win.

In addition, if the series of effects from Figure 93 (A) to Figure 93 (G) is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect will be developed, and for example, if character body RCA wins a match against character body RCB, right-hand play will be started (or continued), whereas, for example, if character body RCA loses a match against character body RCB, left-hand play will be started (or will be returned from right-hand play to left-hand play).

Note that as the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes larger, and as the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM moves away (moves away from the player), the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM does not become larger (enlarged), but rather the area around the character in which the character, as well as the background around the character and other characters and items around the character can be seen is expanded. Also, as the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM does not become smaller (reduced), but the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and furthermore, the area in which the character itself can be seen also becomes smaller. Of course, when a character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the character is displayed larger, whereas when the character moves away (moves away from the player), the character is displayed smaller.

[3D image exterior effect C]
Next, the outer boundary inside/outside performance C of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the outer boundary inside/outside performance C of a stereoscopic image. In the outer boundary inside/outside performance C of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 94(A), when the number "4" of a stereoscopic image appears as a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, it is displayed in a manner of approaching, receding, stopping, and swinging on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), with the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary. Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), with the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the boundary. In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") becomes the background image.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In contrast, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it moves away, the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") later appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, or in a manner that it moves away, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 similarly increases or decreases, and accordingly the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

The inner area FRMa of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. The outer area FRMb of the contour (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") displays a first geometric pattern in which rectangles are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned in the up, down, left and right directions in a matrix pattern. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a stereoscopic image FRM in which the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")), and when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, and moves up, down, left, and right. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), with the outline (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as the boundary. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is partitioned into an inner area FRMa of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and an outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, with the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as the boundary. In addition, the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes the background image.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a predetermined image, the first geometric pattern (a pattern in which squares are aligned in the up, down, left and right directions at a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix shape) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a second geometric pattern of stacked bricks displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Also, in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, a character body CRB appears and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is played.

When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it approaches, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In contrast, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that it moves away, the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed smaller and occupies a smaller proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed larger and occupies a larger proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") subsequently appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that makes it approach, or the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner that makes it move away, similarly, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the contour (outline) of the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, and accordingly, the proportion of the outer region FRMb of the contour (outline) of the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again as the predetermined image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from a colored, opaque, front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, the second geometric pattern (a pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to a colored, opaque, front-view three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, and when the front-view three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, or moves up, down, left, or right.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a predetermined image, the second geometric pattern (a pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a third geometric pattern in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, in which octagons are aligned in a matrix shape spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the up, down, left and right directions. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

In addition, here, when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches and part of it protrudes (pops out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes a discontinuous area, and two independent inner areas FRMa, FRMa are formed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a new character body CRA holding a sword appears straddling these two independent inner areas FRMa, FRMa and moves within the two independent inner areas FRMa, FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is played.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, moves away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the specified image is switched from a colored, opaque, front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") back to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a specified distance and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions in a matrix pattern) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is carried over and displayed as is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern, which is a still image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to a colored, opaque, front-view three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and when the front-view three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, and moves up, down, left, and right.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a predetermined image, the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance and aligned in the up, down, left and right directions and arranged in a matrix pattern) displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is switched to a fourth geometric pattern in which the English letter V is arranged continuously in the up, down, left and right directions in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"). The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. Additionally, the character CRB appears again in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a video of the character CRB is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again as the predetermined image, and when the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, farther away, stops, and oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from a colored, opaque, front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") to a colored, opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") again, the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which the English letter V is arranged continuously in the up, down, left, and right directions) that was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the front-viewed three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is taken over and displayed as it is in the outer region FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and does not switch to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from a colored, opaque, three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") as the specified image to a colored, opaque, front-view three-dimensional image FRM (number "4"), and when the front-view three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that moves closer, moves away, stops, and moves up, down, left, and right, and stops.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, at the timing when a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a colored opaque three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a predetermined image, the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern of V-shaped letters arranged continuously in the up, down, left and right directions) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is switched to a fifth geometric pattern in which tiles are arranged in the up, down, left and right directions in the outer area FRMb of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. Also, in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character body CRA appears again and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is played.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the two character bodies CRA, CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action scene featuring the two character bodies CRA, CRB unfolds. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA, CRB that were displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the background images of the two character bodies CRA, CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the series of effects from Figure 94 (A) to Figure 94 (I) are performed within the reach effect (as part of the reach effect) after a reach has been formed, an action effect will be developed and if the same decorative patterns are displayed stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a jackpot game (jackpot effect) will be played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player, whereas if the same decorative patterns are not displayed stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a miss will be displayed as a confirmed win.

In addition, if the series of effects from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect will be developed, and for example, if character body RCA wins a match against character body RCB, right-hand play will be started (or continued), whereas, for example, if character body RCA loses a match against character body RCB, left-hand play will be started (or will be returned from right-hand play to left-hand play).

In addition, as the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player), the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, and as the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front moves away (moves away from the player), the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller, thereby causing the inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front to become smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front does not become larger (enlarged), but the region around the character in which the background around the character and other characters and items around the character can be visually recognized is enlarged. Also, as the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front does not become smaller (reduced), but the region around the character described above becomes smaller, and further the region in which the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, when a character is displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the character is displayed larger when it approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner region FRMa of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, whereas the character is displayed smaller when it moves away (moves away from the player).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the stereoscopic image's interior and exterior presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 92(B), 92(D), and 92(F) of the outer periphery inside and outside performance A of a three-dimensional image, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided, and when a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), a performance can be executed using the character body CRA or character body CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image), and a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer periphery (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image), and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect using character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first effect image) displayed in an inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer contour (outline) of a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image), and a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer contour (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image), thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing the player's interest.
In the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the three-dimensional image of Figures 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), a performance can be executed using character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (specified image), and a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (specified image).
In the outer boundary inside/outside performance C of the three-dimensional image of Figures 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), a performance can be executed using character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is formed inside the three-dimensional image FRM (specified image) viewed from the front, and a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is formed outside the three-dimensional image FRM viewed from the front, so that the performance can be executed in the same way.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the outer boundary inside and outside performance A of the three-dimensional image, the character bodies CRA and CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are different from the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. According to this configuration, character bodies CRA and CRB (first performance image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, while a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Therefore, the first performance image and the second performance image differ with the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the boundary, which provides visual entertainment to the player and increases the interest.
In the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the three-dimensional image of Figures 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first performance image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, while a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM.Therefore, the first performance image and the second performance image are different and yet similar, with the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM.
In the outer boundary inner/outer performance C of the three-dimensional image of Figures 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), character bodies CRA and CRB (first performance image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front, while a background image having various geometric patterns (second performance image) is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front, so the first performance image and the second performance image are different and yet similar, with the outer boundary being the outer boundary (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the three-dimensional image outer boundary inside and outside performance A, a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) so that when the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means), the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM is displayed small on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, a frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (a specified image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and as the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, in which the character bodies CRA and CRB (first performance image) are displayed, becomes larger, the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, in which a background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns is displayed, becomes smaller, thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing the player's interest.
In the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the three-dimensional image in Figures 93 (B), 93 (D), and 93 (F), a plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that, with the outer boundary (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM as the boundary, when the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer boundary (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, in which the character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first performance image) are displayed, becomes larger, the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer boundary (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, in which a background image having various geometric patterns (second performance image) is displayed, becomes smaller, so in a similar manner.
In the outer boundary inside/outside presentation C of the three-dimensional image of Figures 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), so that, with the outer boundary (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and in which character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first presentation image) are displayed, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer boundary (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and in which a background image having various geometric patterns (second presentation image) is displayed becomes larger, while the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer boundary (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and in which a background image having various geometric patterns (second presentation image) is displayed becomes smaller, so in the same manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 92 (B), 92 (D), and 92 (F) of the three-dimensional image outer boundary inside and outside performance A, the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is a three-dimensional image. According to this configuration, by using the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, as the boundary, the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM can be easily visually recognized as partitioned areas, which contributes to improving the visibility of the character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing the interest.
In the outer boundary inside/outside performance B of the stereoscopic image in Figures 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), by using the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is the stereoscopic image, as the boundary, the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be easily visually recognized as separate areas, which contributes to improving the visibility of the character bodies CRA and character bodies CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is similar.
In the stereoscopic image outer boundary inside/outside presentation C of FIG. 94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H), the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is used as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are viewed as partitioned areas. This is similar because it makes it easier to recognize, and contributes to improving the visibility of the character bodies CRA and CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front, and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 92(B), 92(D), and 92(F) of the outer boundary inside/outside performance A of the stereoscopic image, the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner area of the outer boundary (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the outer area of the outer boundary (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image. According to this configuration, since the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, can be used as a boundary, the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM can be more easily visually recognized as partitioned areas. This contributes to improving the visibility of the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the stereoscopic image outer boundary inside and outside performance B of Figures 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, can be used as a boundary, so that the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM can be more easily viewed as partitioned areas. This contributes to improving the visibility of the character body CRA and character body CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is the same.
In the outer boundary inside/outside presentation C of the stereoscopic image in Figures 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front can be used as the boundary, making it easier to view the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as distinct areas. This is similar in that it contributes to improving the visibility of the character bodies CRA and CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front, and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outline (contour) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") when viewed from the front.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the external and internal presentation of a stereoscopic image are shown.
[Variation 1]
In the stereoscopic image in and around the outer wall performance A of Fig. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, in the stereoscopic image in and around the outer wall performance B of Fig. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and in the stereoscopic image in and around the outer wall performance C of Fig. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. However, the predetermined image may be the title of any of the multiple pieces of music (or a characteristic word contained in the title) used to show the worldview of the performance by the gaming machine 1, or it may be a structure (which may be planar or three-dimensional) that can be associated with the title of the music.

[Variation 2]
In the outer-border inside/outside stereoscopic image performance A of Fig. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, in the outer-border inside/outside stereoscopic image performance B of Fig. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and in the outer-border inside/outside stereoscopic image performance C of Fig. 94, the predetermined image is a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). However, the predetermined image may be something written on the front of the second movable prop 15 (for example, "OARO").

[Variation 3]
In the stereoscopic image in and out of the outer boundary performance A of FIG. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, in the stereoscopic image in and out of the outer boundary performance B of FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and in the stereoscopic image in and out of the outer boundary performance C of FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). However, the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digestion image 9C may be the predetermined image. In this case, the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digestion image 9C may be divided into an inner area (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digestion image 9C and an outer area (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the reserved images 9A, 9B and the reserved digestion image 9C. A still image or a video (a video created using 3D CG, a video created using animation, or a scene from a movie) is displayed in the inner area (first area) of the outer contour (contour) of the reserved images 9A, 9B, or the reserved digestion image 9C, and a background image (a still image, a video (a video created using 3D CG, a video created using animation, or a scene from a movie)) is displayed in the outer area (second area) of the outer contour (contour) of the reserved images 9A, 9B, or the reserved digestion image 9C.

[Variation 4]
In the outer boundary inside and outside performance A of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, in the outer boundary inside and outside performance B of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and in the outer boundary inside and outside performance C of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 94, the predetermined image is a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). However, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the predetermined image. In this case, the outer boundary (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R can be used as a boundary to divide the area into an inner area (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and an outer area (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. A still image or video (a video created using 3D CG, a video created using animation, or a scene from a movie) is displayed in the inner area (first area) of the outer contours (contours) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a background image (a still image, a video (a video created using 3D CG, a video created using animation, or a scene from a movie)) is displayed in the outer area (second area) of the outer contours (contours) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 5]
In the outer-border inside-outside performance A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the predetermined image is the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer border (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image; in the outer-border inside-outside performance B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer border (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image; and in the outer-border inside-outside performance C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer border (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, which is a stereoscopic image. However, instead of a still image, the background image may be a moving image, or a mixture of a still image and a moving image. The moving image may be, for example, a moving image with various geometric patterns, a moving image with three-dimensional CG, a moving image with animation, or a scene from a movie, in addition to a moving image with various geometric patterns.

[Modification 6]
In the outer-border-inside-outside performance A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the predetermined image is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is one stereoscopic image, in the outer-border-inside-outside performance B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and in the outer-border-inside-outside performance C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), and in each performance, the predetermined image is one stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be a plurality of stereoscopic images. In this case, the outer area (second area) of the outline (contour) of each stereoscopic image may be the same image (background image) or different images. Also, one image may be displayed so that the whole image of one image can be grasped through the inner area (first area) of the outline (contour) of each stereoscopic image, or the same image may be displayed or different images may be displayed in the inner area (first area) of the outline (contour) of each stereoscopic image. In this way, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Variation 7]
In the stereoscopic image outer boundary inside/outside performance A in Fig. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image, is displayed in a manner in which one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length are increased or one or both are decreased. However, the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, it is possible to execute a performance using the character body CRA or character body CRB (first performance image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image), and the background image (second performance image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer boundary (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed outside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image), so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

[Variation 8]
In the stereoscopic image outer boundary inside and outside performance C in Fig. 94(B), Fig. 94(D), Fig. 94(F), Fig. 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), but it is not limited to being viewed from the front, and the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) may be displayed in a display mode in which it rotates in a three-dimensional space or in a display mode in which it rotates and moves. In this case, when the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in a manner in which it approaches and a part of it protrudes (pops out) from the image display device 7 (display means), it is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a plurality of stereoscopic images that are discontinuous stereoscopic images FRM (predetermined images), and a plurality of independent inner regions are formed on the image display device 7 (display means) as discontinuous regions of the inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa of the outer boundary (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). In this manner, the character bodies CRA and CRB appear across the multiple independent inner areas FRMa, ..., FRMa which are formed, and move within the multiple independent inner areas FRMa, ..., FRMa which are formed, and a moving image of the character bodies CRA and CRB is played.

[Modification 9]
Outer boundary inside and outside performance A of the stereoscopic image in Figure 92, outer boundary inside and outside performance B of the stereoscopic image in Figure 93, and outer boundary inside and outside performance C of the stereoscopic image in Figure 94 may not include some of the described performances, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying various images,
When a predetermined image is displayed on the display means, a first effect image is displayed in a first area formed inside the predetermined image, and a second effect image is displayed in a second area formed outside the predetermined image,
The predetermined image is displayed on the display means in a movable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or C1-2,
when the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means so that the first area is displayed large on the display means, the second area is displayed small on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
The predetermined image is a stereoscopic image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
the first region is an inner region of the contour of the stereoscopic image, the inner region being bounded by the contour of the stereoscopic image;
The second region is an outer region of the stereoscopic image having the boundary of the stereoscopic image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The selective display blocking effects A to C of the effect modes are explained below using Figures 95 to 97. In Figures 95 to 97, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, and the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing.

This selective display prevention effect of the effect mode can be executed during a specific period from when the decorative pattern starts to change until it stops changing, or during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a player is awarded a benefit, and can reflect the player's intention to operate (press) the effect button 63 in the progress of the effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (e.g., a variable effect start command, a pre-determination command, various jackpot game opening commands, a jackpot game round designation command, and a jackpot game ending command), and if an instruction to execute a button effect is included, the image data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain presentation mode selection display blocking effect A, then presentation mode selection display blocking effect B, and then presentation mode selection display blocking effect C.

[Selective display prevention effect A of effect mode]
First, the selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode. The selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode is performed during a specific period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation. In the selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. When the display of the decorative symbols starts, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and change at a high speed. This allows the background image (here, the image of a "cloud") arranged behind the decorative symbols to be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative symbols during the high-speed variation. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed stationary.

When the decorative pattern starts to change, a message MG saying "Change mode with effect button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the player that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

A reserved digestion image 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the digestion of the reserved special pattern is arranged and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and to the left of the reserved digestion image 9C, for example, three reserved images 9A as the three first reserved special patterns are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digestion image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digestion image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digestion image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

To the right of the reserved consumption image 9C, a selection section SEL that allows the selection of a presentation mode is located at the bottom right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed. In the selection section SEL, presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed as the reels spin, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that has reached a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode, and the theme image PM of the selected presentation mode is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, since the previously selected presentation mode was B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, an imitation of a "cloud") is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a presentation with a "sun" theme progresses, and a theme image PM that resembles the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while A mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and D mode, which is located below A mode, is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, which is located above A mode, is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In B mode, a "cloud" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image PM that resembles a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while B mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing A mode, which is located below B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and C mode, which is located above B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image PM that resembles "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while C mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode, which is located below C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode, which is located above C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, and a theme image PM that resembles "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and C mode located below D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) starts to change, there are cases where a reach is not formed and cases where a reach is formed. When a reach is formed, a reach performance is performed based on the expectation of a big win. There are multiple reach performances. When a reach is formed, following FIG. 95(A), as shown in FIG. 95(B), after the decorative pattern starts to change, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a pattern (number) (here, it is temporarily stopped with the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, four reserved images 9A are aligned and arranged in a straight line along the bottom side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special pattern reservations.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode is displayed with the reels rotating from bottom to top, and the C mode located above the B mode is displayed with the reels rotating from top to top toward the specific area. When the C mode is selected, a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(C). In addition, after the decorative patterns start to change, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3" is displayed as a temporary stop), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved first special images does not increase because the upper limit of four reserved first special images has already been reached, and the five reserved images 9A are aligned and arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and are not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode located below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from bottom to top, and the D mode located above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from top to bottom toward the specific area. When the D mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed as a provisional stop pattern (number) (here, the number "5" is provisionally stopped), and then the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "1", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "3", and the miss is confirmed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", during the period until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter referred to as the "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, during the interval, the already selected effect mode continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to change, the already selected effect mode continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, even if a demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers ends, the already selected performance mode will continue, and a theme image PM that resembles "snow" will be displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 95(E), of the four reserved images 9A aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the rightmost reserved image 9A moves to the right as a reserved consumption image 9C, and the remaining three reserved images 9A shift one by one to the right and are displayed. As the decorative pattern starts to change, a message MG saying "Change mode with effect button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the performance mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, and the performance mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from when the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) starts to change to FIG. 95(D), a reach is not formed. In contrast, when a reach is formed, following FIG. 95(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "1" is displayed as a temporary stop), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop and a reach is formed. At this point, as shown in FIG. 95(G), the selection section SEL is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL can be moved downward, and the performance mode can be selected. Note that, after the decorative pattern starts to change, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, four reserved images 9A are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special pattern reservations.

When a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 95(H), when a special image of car images GYK resembling cars runs in unison in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (so-called "group announcement" is made), the display of the special image takes priority and the selection section SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and it is not possible to select an effect mode. Even when a group announcement is made, the four reserved images 9A and reserved consumption image 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the reach effect progresses, and the left decorative symbol 8L stops to show the number "1," the middle decorative symbol 8C stops to show the number "0," and the right decorative symbol 8R stops to show the number "1," and a miss is confirmed. Even in this state, the selection section SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and it is not possible to select the effect mode.

During the period from when the group forecast is made until the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and the miss is confirmed, the player cannot select the presentation mode even if he operates (presses) the presentation button 63, and further, during the period from when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter referred to as the "interval"), the player cannot select the presentation mode even if he operates (presses) the presentation button 63. As a result, during the two periods, the already selected presentation mode continues, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the group forecast is made, the already selected presentation mode continues, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, unless the next decorative pattern starts to change. Furthermore, even if a demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers ends, the already selected presentation mode will continue, and a theme image PM that resembles a "cloud" will be displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 95(J), of the four reserved images 9A aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A located at the far right moves to the right as a reserved consumption image 9C, and the remaining three reserved images 9A are shifted one by one to the right and displayed. As the decorative pattern starts to change, a message MG saying "Change mode with effect button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the performance mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, and the performance mode can be selected.

[Selective display prevention effect B of effect mode]
Next, the selective display blocking performance B of the performance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the selective display blocking performance B of the performance mode. The selective display blocking performance B of the performance mode is performed during a specific period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation. In the selective display blocking performance B of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. When the display of the decorative symbols starts, the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and change at a high speed. This allows the background image (here, the image of a "cloud") arranged behind the decorative symbols to be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative symbols during the high-speed variation. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed stationary.

When the decorative pattern starts to change, a message MG saying "Change mode with effect button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the player that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63.

A reserved digestion image 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the digestion of the reserved special pattern is arranged and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and to the left of the reserved digestion image 9C, for example, three reserved images 9A as the three first reserved special patterns are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the reserved image 9A and the reserved digestion image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the reserved digestion image 9C is larger than the size of the reserved image 9A. The size of the reserved digestion image 9C and the size of the reserved image 9A may be the same.

To the right of the reserved consumption image 9C, a selection section SEL that allows the selection of a presentation mode is located at the bottom right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and is displayed. In the selection section SEL, presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed as the reels spin, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that has reached a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode, and the theme image PM of the selected presentation mode is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, since the previously selected presentation mode was B mode, which will be described later, the theme image PM of this B mode (here, an imitation of a "cloud") is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a presentation with a "sun" theme progresses, and a theme image PM that resembles the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while A mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and D mode, which is located below A mode, is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, which is located above A mode, is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In B mode, a "cloud" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image PM that resembles a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while B mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing A mode, which is located below B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and C mode, which is located above B mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image PM that resembles "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while C mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode, which is located below C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode, which is located above C mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, and a theme image PM that resembles "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and C mode located below D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) starts to change, there are cases where a performance suggesting that the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image 9A may contain a jackpot (so-called "pre-reading performance") is not performed, and cases where a pre-reading performance for the reserved image 9A is performed. When the pre-reading performance is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96(B) following FIG. 96(A), after the decorative pattern starts to change, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a pattern (number) (here, it is temporarily stopped with the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the four reserved images 9A are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special reserved patterns.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode is displayed with the reels rotating from bottom to top, and the C mode located above the B mode is displayed with the reels rotating from top to top toward the specific area. When the C mode is selected, a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(C). In addition, after the decorative patterns start to change, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3" is displayed as a temporary stop), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved first special images does not increase because the upper limit of four reserved first special images has already been reached, and the five reserved images 9A are aligned and arranged in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and are not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode located below the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from bottom to top, and the D mode located above the C mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from top to bottom toward the specific area. When the D mode is selected, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed as a provisional stop pattern (number) (here, the number "5" is provisionally stopped), and then the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "1", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "3", and the miss is confirmed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", during the period until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter referred to as the "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL cannot be moved downward, and the effect mode cannot be selected. As a result, during the interval, the already selected effect mode continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to change, the already selected effect mode continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, even if a demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers ends, the already selected presentation mode will continue, and a theme image PM that resembles "snow" will be displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 96(E), of the four reserved images 9A aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the rightmost reserved image 9A moves to the right as a reserved consumption image 9C, and the remaining three reserved images 9A shift one by one to the right and are displayed. As the decorative pattern starts to change, a message MG saying "Change mode with effect button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the performance mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, and the performance mode can be selected.

In the series of effects from when the decorative symbols in FIG. 96(A) start to change to FIG. 96(D), no effect (so-called "pre-reading effect") is performed that suggests that the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image 9A may contain a jackpot. In contrast, when a pre-reading effect is performed for the reserved image 9A, as shown in FIG. 96(G) following FIG. 96(A), after the decorative symbols start to change, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as a temporary stop with a symbol (number) (here, it is temporarily stopped with the number "1"), and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are changing. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the four reserved images 9A are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the four first special reserved symbols. If the reserved image 9A placed closest to the reserved consumption image 9C is the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A is placed to the left of the first reserved image 9A, the third reserved image 9A is placed to the left of the second reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9A added this time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 is placed to the left of the third reserved image 9A as the fourth reserved image 9A.

When a performance (pre-reading performance) is performed that suggests that the reserved information corresponding to this fourth reserved image 9A may contain a jackpot, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A as a special image is displayed differently from the display modes of the other reserved images 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A). For example, in the pre-reading performance that is a special image, the display mode of the reserved image 9A is set to a high expectation of a jackpot in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of jackpot)) based on the expectation of a jackpot. Here, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A is a mode in which it emits red light, and the display mode of the other reserved images 9A (first reserved image 9A, second reserved image 9A, third reserved image 9A) is a mode in which it emits white light (when the pre-reading performance is not performed, the expectation of a jackpot is the lowest).

In the special image, the look-ahead performance, the expected probability of a jackpot is set based on the expected probability of a jackpot in the order of display mode of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of jackpot)), but there are also cases where a character body is used instead of the reserved image 9A having a circular shape. In this case, when the display mode of the reserved image 9A is a character body, the expected probability of a jackpot is set to at least be higher than the expected probability of a jackpot set for the display mode of the reserved image 9A that emits red light.

When a special image, a look-ahead performance, is performed, the display of the special image takes priority and the selection section SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the performance mode cannot be selected. Even when a look-ahead performance is performed, the four reserved images 9A and the reserved consumption image 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(H), after the decorative patterns start to change, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "3"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and it is not possible to select the effect mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(I), after the decorative patterns start to change, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and then the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed as provisionally stopped patterns (numbers) (here, provisionally stopped at the number "5"), after which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C as the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R as the number "3", and a miss is confirmed.

After that, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, as shown in FIG. 96(J), of the four reserved images 9A aligned in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A located at the far right moves to the right as a reserved consumption image 9C, and the remaining three reserved images 9A are shifted one by one to the right and displayed. Although the decorative pattern starts to change, since the pre-reading performance has already been performed, even in this state, the selection section SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the bottom right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the performance mode cannot be selected.

In this way, when a look-ahead performance is performed during a specific period from when the decorative symbols start to change to when they stop changing, the performance mode can be selected during the change if it is before the look-ahead performance is performed, but when the look-ahead performance is performed, the performance mode cannot be selected during the change. Furthermore, when the look-ahead performance is performed, the reserved image 9A where the look-ahead performance was performed moves to the right as the reserved consumption image 9C, the decorative symbols start to change, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped, and the miss is displayed. During this period, during which the performance mode can be selected, from when the decorative symbols start to change to when they stop changing, the performance mode cannot be selected even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63. Furthermore, even during the period from when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the reserved image 9A where the pre-reading performance is performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative pattern starts to change (hereinafter referred to as the "interval"), the player cannot select the performance mode even if he operates (presses) the performance button 63. As a result, during such a series of periods, the already selected performance mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the pre-reading performance is performed, the reserved image 9A where the pre-reading performance is performed is consumed as the reserved consumption image 9C, and if, for example, a miss is displayed as a confirmed result and the next decorative pattern does not start to change, the already selected performance mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the reserved image 9A in which the pre-reading performance was performed is consumed as the reserved consumption image 9C and a jackpot occurs, after the jackpot performance ends, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a message MG stating "Change mode with performance button" is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the player that the performance mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, and the player can select the performance mode.

In addition, even if a demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demo screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers ends, the already selected presentation mode will continue, and a theme image PM that resembles a "cloud" will be displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Selective display prevention effect C of effect mode]
Next, the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode. The selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode is an effect that is performed during a specific period during a big win game (big win effect) in which a player is given a profit, and is not performed when a predetermined condition is met (for example, it is not performed when there is a so-called "reserved consecutive ball" in which there is a ball that becomes a big win before the big win effect ends). The presence or absence of this reserved consecutive ball is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a big win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result, which are included in the pre-determination command.

Here, we will explain the case where a player hits the ball with a right-hand shot, hits a jackpot, and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) occurs, and then continues playing with a right-hand shot after the jackpot game (jackpot effect) ends. If the effect of a reserve sequence is not performed, in other words, there will be no reserved balls that will result in a jackpot before the jackpot effect ends.

The period from the start to the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) includes a game presentation period from the start of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) until all the presentations of each round of play are completed, a notification period following this game presentation period, which informs the player of the game state after the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) (for example, the state of returning to left play, the state of continuing right play), a specific period following this notification period, during which a presentation mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game), and a predetermined period following this specific period, during which a catchy copy presentation in which the gaming machine manufacturer's catchy copy is displayed and an addiction prevention presentation in which a warning against addiction to the game is displayed.

The specific period is made up of a first period (presentation mode selection period) for selecting a presentation mode, and a second period (presentation mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the mode transition to the selected presentation mode after the first period (presentation mode selection period) has elapsed.

The end of the specified period during which the catchphrase performance in which the gaming machine manufacturer's catchphrase is displayed and the addiction prevention performance in which a warning against addiction to gaming is displayed coincides with the end of the period from the start to the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game).

In the selective display blocking performance C of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the end of the game performance period by performing the performance of each round game in the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and accordingly, when the notification period begins, a message MG "Continue right hitting" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to continue right hitting. In addition, instead of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 20 and the reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the decorative pattern, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, for example, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 has zero pieces and the number "0" is displayed on the left side, and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 has four pieces and the number "4" is displayed on the right side, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The message MG "Continue hitting right" in Figure 97 (A) is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the notification period (e.g., 3 seconds) ends. At this time, a specific period begins. In some cases, a presentation mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game), and in other cases, the presentation mode selection screen is not displayed.

When the selection screen for the presentation mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97(B), in order to encourage the player to select the presentation mode by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, a first presentation button image BTN simulating the presentation button 63 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. The part of the first presentation button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the presentation button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. The "predetermined light-emitting manner" is, for example, a white flashing light. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are continuously displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), a selection section SEL is displayed in a rectangular area extending from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the presentation mode that has reached a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode. Note that when the presentation mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is arranged in the specific area as the default, but the next time the presentation mode selection screen is displayed, the default (i.e. A mode) may always be arranged in the specific area, or the presentation mode selected the previous time the presentation mode selection screen was displayed may be arranged in the specific area.

To the right of the selection section SEL, a demo area DS that explains the currently selected presentation mode using various images and text is displayed in a rectangular area extending from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the letters "DEMO" indicating the demo screen of the presentation mode are displayed in the upper left corner.

In A mode, a performance with a "sun" theme progresses, and a theme image PM modeled after the "sun" is animatedly displayed on the left side of the demo area DS, and a second performance button image BTN2 is displayed at the bottom right of the demo area DS as an image identical to the first performance button image BTN (an image in which all characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emission mode are the same) or a similar image (an image in which the characteristic information is similar in part or in whole). An explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in A mode is displayed at the top right of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the D mode located below the A mode is displayed with the reels rotating from bottom to top, and the B mode located above the A mode is displayed with the reels rotating from top to the specific area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In B mode, a "cloud"-themed presentation is performed, with a theme image PM modeled after a "cloud" being animatedly displayed in the center of the demo area DS, and explanatory text MME about the progress of the presentation in B mode being displayed in the upper right corner of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode is displayed with the reels rotating from bottom to top, and the C mode located above the B mode is displayed with the reels rotating from top to top toward the specific area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is performed, with a theme image PM that resembles "rain" displayed as a moving image in the center of the demo area DS, and explanatory text MME about the progress of the presentation in C mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode located below the C mode is displayed with the reels rotating from bottom to top, and the D mode located above the C mode is displayed with the reels rotating from top to top toward the specific area. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first effect button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, with a theme image PM modeled after "snow" being animatedly displayed in the center of the demo area DS, and explanatory text MME about the progress of the presentation in D mode being displayed in the upper right corner of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 and B mode is positioned in a specific area of the selection section SEL, the first period (presentation mode selection period) for selecting a presentation mode has elapsed and the second period (presentation mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the transition to the selected presentation mode has begun, as shown in Figure 97 (D), the four corners of the rectangular demo area DS are displayed in a manner that expands (enlarges) towards the four corners of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a theme image PM modeled after a "cloud" that progresses the presentation with the "cloud" theme of B mode as the theme is displayed large on the right side of the theme image PM, and a message MG conveying that the selected presentation mode is B mode is displayed large from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 towards the center of the right side. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are continuously displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the second period (presentation mode confirmation notification period) passes, and a period begins in which a catchphrase presentation in which the gaming machine manufacturer's catchphrase is displayed, and an addiction prevention presentation in which a warning against addiction to gaming is displayed. When this period (for example, 5 seconds) passes and the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) comes to an end, a presentation will proceed in which a theme image PM resembling a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the theme image PM of B mode being "clouds."

When the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" in Fig. 97(A) is displayed is reached and the specific period is reached, the series of effects from Fig. 97(B) to Fig. 97(D) displays a display mode selection screen, and the effects after the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) are carried out in the selected display mode. In contrast, the first special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the first start hole 20 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is zero, which is the number "0", and the second special reserve based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 21 is four, which is the number "4". Therefore, when a jackpot is included in the reserve information corresponding to the four second special reserves based on the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 21, the display of the special image takes priority in order to perform the special image of the reserved sequence, and the display mode selection screen is not displayed. Therefore, when the selection screen for the performance mode is not displayed, following FIG. 97(A), as shown in FIG. 97(G), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are continuously displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a reserved consecutive play image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape suggesting the presence of a reserved consecutive play is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is disposed on the lower side of the first surface of the V-shaped reserved consecutive play image HRC, while a second character body HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is disposed on the upper side of the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the V-shaped reserved consecutive play image HRC. The reserved consecutive play image HRC rotates around a vertical line passing through the center of the bottom side of the reserved consecutive play image HRC as the rotation axis, resulting in a display mode in which the first surface of the reserved consecutive play image HRC and the second surface of the reserved consecutive play image HRC appear repeatedly.

When an effect (pre-reading effect) is performed that suggests that the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image 9A (for example, FIG. 1 and FIG. 96(G) to FIG. 96(J)) may contain a jackpot, for example, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A as a special image is displayed differently from the display modes of the other reserved images 9A (the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third reserved image 9A). While the display modes of the first reserved image 9A, the second reserved image 9A, and the third reserved image 9A have a circular shape, the display mode of the fourth reserved image 9A may be the first character body HRC1 or the second character body HRC2 instead of having a circular shape. In other words, the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved consecutive image HRC are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the pre-reading effect is performed.

The character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged with the reserved consecutive image HRC. Also, although the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged with the reserved consecutive image HRC, the character's orientation and posture may be different.

When the first face of the reserved consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is displayed facing forward (towards the player), it is not possible to convey the type of win, but it is possible to convey that the reserved information corresponding to the four second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 contains a jackpot, whereas when the second face of the reserved consecutive image HRC having the second character body HRC2 is displayed facing forward (towards the player), it is possible to convey that the reserved information corresponding to the four second special reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 contains a predetermined number or more (e.g., two) of jackpots of 16 rounds (maximum rounds (MAX rounds)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(I), the first face of the reserved consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is displayed stopped facing forward (towards the player), and it is communicated that the reserved information corresponding to the four second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 includes a jackpot. The first special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are continuously displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, a period of time will begin during which a catchphrase presentation in which the gaming machine manufacturer's catchphrase is displayed, and an addiction prevention presentation in which a warning against addiction to gaming is displayed, and once this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) will end. When the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) ends, a presentation will be performed in the presentation mode before the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) occurred, for example, in mode A, where a theme image PM modeled after the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the presentation taking the "sun" theme as the theme.

When the reserved consecutive presentation is performed, and then the jackpot presentation (jackpot play) ends and right-hand play begins, the presentation mode selected when the presentation mode selection screen was displayed in the previous jackpot presentation (jackpot play) is maintained, and when a jackpot play (jackpot presentation) occurs again and the presentation mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the presentation mode that was maintained is placed in the specific area, but the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63.

In this embodiment, the display prevention effect C of the presentation mode is performed during a specific period, but the display of the reserved consecutive wins is also performed during the same specific period. In other words, during the first period (presentation mode selection period), the display prevention effect C of the presentation mode allows the player to select the presentation mode, while the display of the reserved consecutive wins uses a flash image FH and a display of the reserved consecutive wins HRC. Then, during the second period (presentation mode confirmation notification period), the display prevention effect C of the presentation mode is performed to inform the player of the transition to the selected presentation mode, while the display of the reserved consecutive wins uses an image to inform the player of the presence of a jackpot, etc. The specific period during which the display prevention effect C of the presentation mode is performed and the specific period during which the display of the reserved consecutive wins are performed are the same period. As a result, the time required for the series of presentations from FIG. 97(A) to FIG. 97(B) to FIG. 97(D) is the same as the time required for the series of presentations from FIG. 97(A) to FIG. 97(G) to FIG. 97(I), so the start of the specified period in which the catchy slogan presentation in which the gaming machine manufacturer's catchy slogan is displayed and the addiction prevention presentation in which a warning against addiction to gaming is displayed is also the same, and there is no difference in the end of the jackpot presentation (jackpot game) after this specified period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the selection display prevention presentation of the presentation mode.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(H) of the selective display prevention performance A of the performance mode, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and is capable of executing at least one of a first performance in which a selection section SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one of the performance modes A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plurality of performance modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second performance in which a car image GYK (special image) resembling a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). When a reach is formed and the reach performance progresses, a performance (group preview) in which car images GYK (special images) resembling cars run in unison in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (group preview) is developed, and based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection section SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 by the first performance is prevented, and the display of the car image GYK (special image) resembling a car on the image display device 7 by the second performance can be executed. According to this configuration, even if the selection section SEL (selection image) which allows the selection of one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), when a presentation (group preview) is developed in which car images GYK (special images) resembling cars run in unison in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection section SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented, and the selection section SEL (selection image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing the interest.
In the selection display prevention presentation B of the presentation mode of Figures 96 (H) to 96 (J), even if a selection section SEL (selection image) which allows selection of one of presentation modes A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), when this pre-reading presentation is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which a pre-reading presentation, which is a special image, is performed (the establishment of a specified condition), the display of the selection section SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented, and the selection section SEL (selection image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the same is true.
In the selective display prevention presentation C of the presentation mode of Figures 97 (G) to 97 (I), even if a selection section SEL (selection image) which allows selection of one of presentation modes A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), when the presentation of the reserved series, which is a special image, is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the presentation of the reserved series is performed (the establishment of a specified condition), the display of the selection section SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented, and the selection section SEL (selection image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the same is true.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the selection display prevention performance A of the performance mode, the first performance in which a selection section SEL (selection image) which allows selection of one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple performance modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed during a specific period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing, and the second performance in which a car image GYK (special image) which resembles a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be executed during a specific period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing. According to this configuration, during a specific period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing, it is possible to execute a first effect in which a selection section SEL (selection image) which allows the player to select one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect in which a car image GYK (special image) which resembles a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing interest.
In the selection display prevention presentation B of the presentation modes of Figures 96 (A) to 96 (J), during a specific period spanning from the start of the decorative pattern change to the stop of the change, a first presentation can be executed in which a selection section SEL (selection image) which allows selection of one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second presentation can be executed in which a pre-reading presentation, which is a special image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means).
In the selection display prevention presentation C of the presentation modes of Figures 97 (A) to 97 (I), during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) in which a profit is awarded to the player, a first presentation can be executed in which a selection section SEL (selection image) which allows the selection of one of presentation modes A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second presentation can be executed in which a presentation of a reserved consecutive play, which is a special image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 95 (A) to 95 (J) of the selection display prevention presentation A of the presentation mode, the device is provided with a presentation button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65 and a select button 68 (multiple operation means) that can be operated by the player, and one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) can be selected only when the presentation button 63 (a specific operation means) of the presentation button 63, sword member 64, sword button 65 and select button 68 (multiple operation means) is operated. According to this configuration, among the effect button 63, sword member 64, sword button 65, and select button 68 (multiple operation means), the effect button 63 and the select button 68 are arranged on the front frame (front frame part) 53 and arranged around the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and since the effect button 63 is arranged in the position closest to the player and is formed larger than the select button 68, it is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple effect modes) within the limited specific period from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the stop of the change. The same applies to the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode in Figures 96 (A) to 96 (J) and the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode in Figures 97 (A) to 97 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 95(A) to 95(J) of the selective display prevention presentation A of the presentation mode, when a reach is formed and the reach presentation progresses, a presentation (group preview) is developed in which car images GYK (special images) resembling cars run in unison in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.When the car image GYK (special image) resembling a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition), before the second presentation is executed in which the car image GYK (special image) resembling a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the presentation mode already selected (here, B mode) is maintained in the first presentation in which a selection section SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one of A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (plural presentation modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when the second presentation in which a car image GYK (special image) resembling a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and completed, the presentation mode (here, B mode) that was already selected before the second presentation was executed among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is maintained, thereby providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing the player's interest.
In the selective display prevention presentation B of the presentation modes of Figures 96 (A) to 96 (J), when the second presentation in which a special image, a pre-reading presentation, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), is executed and terminated, the presentation mode that was already selected before the second presentation was executed among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) is maintained, which is similar.
In the selective display prevention presentation C of the presentation modes of Figures 97 (A) to 97 (I), when the second presentation in which a special image, a consecutive pending presentation, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), is executed and terminated, the presentation mode that was already selected among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode (multiple presentation modes) before the second presentation was executed is maintained, which is similar.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 95(A) to 95(E) of the selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode, the first performance in which the selection section SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one of the performance modes A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple performance modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is arranged in a reel-like manner and rotated, and the selected performance mode is displayed in a display mode in which it is positioned at the front. According to this configuration, since the names of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple performance modes) are arranged in a reel-like manner, it is easy to grasp the type of the selected mode displayed in rotation and the performance mode to be positioned following the one performance mode, and further, since the selected performance mode is displayed in a display mode in which it is positioned at the front, it is easy to select the performance mode, and the player can be visually entertained, thereby improving the interest. The same is true for the selective display prevention display B in the presentation mode of Figures 96 (A) to 96 (E) and the selective display prevention display C in the presentation mode of Figures 97 (B) to 97 (C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 97(G) to Fig. 97(I) of the selective display blocking effect C of the effect mode, the effect of the reserved consecutive special image (predetermined condition) includes a condition that suggests the expectation of the occurrence of a game state that gives a benefit to the player. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the expectation of the occurrence of a game state that gives a benefit to the player, in which there is a reserved ball that will become a jackpot before the jackpot effect ends by performing the reserved consecutive.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the selective display prevention presentation of the presentation mode are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode of FIG. 95 (H), when the performance (group notice) in which the car images GYK (special images) simulating cars run in unison from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 arrives (establishment of a predetermined condition) and the performance (group notice) is developed, the display of the selection section SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection section SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). However, even if the next period in which the performance (group notice) is developed arrives (even if a predetermined condition is established), the performance (group notice) is not developed and the display of the selection section SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) may continue. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to develop the performance (group notice), and if the lottery is won, the performance (group notice) is developed, whereas if the lottery is lost, the performance (group notice) is not developed. In addition, the lottery for determining whether or not to develop the performance (group preview) may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selection display blocking performance B of the performance mode of FIG. 96(G) to FIG. 96(J), when the pre-reading performance is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the pre-reading performance, which is a special image, is performed (the establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, and the selection part SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means). However, even if the next period in which the pre-reading performance is performed arrives (even if the predetermined condition is established), the pre-reading performance may not be performed, and the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) may continue. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading performance, and if the lottery is won, the pre-reading performance is performed, whereas if the lottery is lost, the pre-reading performance is not performed. The lottery to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading performance may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selective display blocking performance C of the performance mode of FIG. 97(G) to FIG. 97(I), when the performance of the reserved consecutive is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the performance of the reserved consecutive is performed (the establishment of a predetermined condition), the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). However, even if the next period in which the performance of the reserved consecutive is performed arrives (even if the predetermined condition is established), the performance of the reserved consecutive may not be performed, and the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) may continue. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the performance of the reserved consecutive, and if the lottery is won, the performance of the reserved consecutive is performed, whereas if the lottery is lost, the performance of the reserved consecutive is not performed. The lottery to determine whether or not to perform the performance of the reserved consecutive may be performed by the image control microcomputer 101 instead of the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the selective display blocking performance A of the performance mode of FIG. 95(H), when a performance is developed in which a car image GYK imitating a car as a special image runs in unison from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) in a group-like manner (when a so-called "group notice" is performed), the display of the special image is prioritized and the selection section SEL is erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image, an image inserted as a cut-in notice (additional performance) may be an image such as a full-body image of a character, an enlarged image of a part of a character, a composite image of a character or an item, or a group image of multiple characters. In addition, when an eye-catching image is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) along with the progress of the reach performance, the eye-catching image may be set as a special image, and the display of the eye-catching image as a special image may be prioritized and the selection section SEL may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when a character of the manufacturer that produced the gaming machine 1 is made to appear on the image display device 7 (display means), this manufacturer's character may be made a special image, and the display of the manufacturer's character may be prioritized, causing the selection section SEL to be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
In the presentation mode selection display prevention presentation B of Figures 96 (G) to 96 (J), if a pre-reading presentation is performed during a specific period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing, the presentation mode can be selected during the change if it is before the pre-reading presentation is performed, but once the pre-reading presentation is performed, the presentation mode cannot be selected during the change.Furthermore, even during the period (interval) from when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the reserved image 9A in which the pre-reading presentation is performed are displayed stopped to when the next decorative pattern starts to change, the presentation mode cannot be selected even if the player operates (depresses) the presentation button 63. However, it may be possible to restrict the selection of the presentation mode only during the period from when the reserved image 9A for which the pre-reading performance has been performed moves to the right as the reserved consumption image 9C, the decorative patterns start to change, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed frozen, and a miss is displayed as confirmed, or it may be possible to restrict the selection of the presentation mode only during the period from when the pre-reading performance has been performed during the specific period from when the decorative patterns start to change until they stop changing, the presentation mode can be selected during the period from when the pre-reading performance has been performed during the change of the decorative patterns to when they stop changing.

[Variation 4]
In the selective display prevention performance A of the performance mode in Fig. 95 and the selective display prevention performance B of the performance mode in Fig. 96, the already selected performance mode continues during the interval, so that the performance mode cannot be selected unless the next decorative pattern starts to change. However, it may be possible to select the performance mode only during the interval in which the decorative pattern starts to change after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a predetermined performance among the multiple types of reach performance. As the predetermined performance, there can be mentioned one that has a high expectation of a big win game (big win performance) that is advantageous to the player, and in the interval in which the decorative pattern starts to change after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the so-called normal reach, the performance mode cannot be selected.

[Modification 5]
In the selective display blocking performance C of the performance mode of FIG. 97(G) to FIG. 97(I), when the first face of the reserved consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player), it is not possible to convey the type of win, but it is possible to convey that the reserved information corresponding to the four second special pattern reserves based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 contains a jackpot, but it is not possible to convey the number of jackpots in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special pattern reserves. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be conveyed in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special pattern reserves. For example, when the number of jackpots is three in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special pattern reserves, "+3" may be displayed to the right of the first face of the reserved consecutive image HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (toward the player), or three reserved consecutive images HRC having the first character body HRC1 may be displayed arranged horizontally, vertically, or diagonally.

[Variation 6]
In the selective display blocking performance C of the performance mode in Fig. 97, a theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demo area DS. Such a moving image is a moving image that explains the flow of the performance of each mode, the characters, the background, the scene, etc., and may be a moving image using three-dimensional CG, a moving image using animation, or a scene from a movie. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Variation 7]
In the selective display blocking performance C of the performance mode in FIG. 97, the first performance in which the selection section SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one of the performance modes A, B, C, and D (multiple performance modes) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed during the big win performance (performance of the winning game). However, the selection section SEL (selection image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the performance of the small win game in addition to the big win performance (or during the performance of the small win game instead of the big win performance). In this case, the second performance in which the performance of the reserved consecutive, which is a special image, is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) may also be executed during the performance of the small win game in addition to the big win performance (or during the performance of the small win game instead of the big win performance).

[Modification 8]
The selective display blocking display A of the presentation mode of Figure 95, the selective display blocking display B of the presentation mode of Figure 96, and the selective display blocking display C of the presentation mode of Figure 97 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying various images,
A first effect is to display on the display means a selection image that allows one of a plurality of effect modes to be selected;
and a second effect of displaying a special image on the display means.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the display of the selected image on the display means by the first effect is prevented, and the display of the special image on the display means by the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The first effect and the second effect can be executed in a specific period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or C2-2,
The game machine includes a plurality of operation means operable by a player,
One of the plurality of presentation modes can be selected only when a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the presentation mode already selected in the first presentation is maintained before the second presentation is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The first effect is a display mode in which the names of the respective effect modes are arranged in a reel-like manner and rotated, and a selected one of the effect modes is displayed at the front side.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
The predetermined condition includes a condition indicating the expectation of occurrence of a gaming state that will give a player a benefit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, game ball image effects A to C are explained using Figures 98 to 100. These game ball image effects can be executed during the performance of the changing effect of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the changing effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a game ball image effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Game ball image presentation A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 98(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in Fig. 98(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. Therefore, here, the reserved images 9B are increased. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the top surface of the button image BG changes. In this example, the white top surface becomes green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. In this case, an over-entry is performed. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. In this case, the collision target is the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the color of the top surface of the button image BG changes. In this example, the green top surface becomes red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), a press prompting effect is executed. In the press prompting effect, a button image BG is displayed with the color of its top surface changed in a color change effect. In addition, a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 98 (H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Game ball image presentation B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image presentation B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), the change start effect is executed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the center effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, a reserved image 9B is displayed. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special patterns, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect pattern (8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the change is during time-saving play.

Next, as shown in Fig. 99(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. Therefore, here, the reserved image 9B is increased. Also, the game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable role 14 (left movable role 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the light emission state of the first movable part 14 (decorative member) is changed. In this case, it is assumed to be lit up in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. In this case, an over-entry is performed. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. In this case, the first movable feature (left movable feature 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the light emission state of the first movable part 14 (decorative member) is changed. In this case, it is lit up in red.

Next, as shown in Figure 99 (G), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop at the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop at "7."

[Game ball image presentation C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the reserved stock effect is executed. The reserved stock effect is an effect that makes the number of reserved second special figures in the corresponding change the maximum number of "4". Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a changing manner at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Hit right to save reserved" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The reserved image 9B is displayed according to the number of reserved second special figures, and three reserved images 9B are displayed here. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the effect pattern (effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increased. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. The panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character change effect is executed. A character change effect is an effect in which the characters in the panel image PG are changed. Here, the word "CHANCE" is changed to "BIG CHANCE."

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. In this case, an over-entry is performed. The game ball collision effect is an effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. In this case, the collision target is the panel image PG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a character change effect is executed. A character change effect is an effect in which the characters in the panel image PG are changed. Here, the characters "BIG CHANCE" are changed to "Super Hot."

Next, a battle effect is executed as shown in Fig. 100(F) The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other.
Next, as shown in Fig. 100(G), a battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory effect is an effect that notifies the player that the ally character CRA has defeated the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the background is a rainbow background RB that is displayed in the seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is the background that confirms a big win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), a fixed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (jackpot), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R stop on the same number, forming what is known as a repeat number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R all stop on "7."

[Example of effect]
Examples of the effects of game ball image presentation are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects using the gaming ball image UG are executed (FIGS. 98(C)(E), 99(C)(E), 100(B)(D)), and the expectation of transition to a big win game is suggested (FIGS. 98(D)(F), 99(D)(F), 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the effects using the gaming ball image UG can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the gaming ball image UG is collided with a collision object (FIGS. 98(C)(E), 99(C)(E), 100(B)(D)), and the color of the collision object is changed to indicate the expectation of transition to a big win game (FIGS. 98(D)(F), 99(D)(F), 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the color change caused by the collision of the gaming ball image UG can increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG (FIG. 98) that imitates the effect button 63 and a panel image PG on which characters are displayed (FIG. 100) are used as collision targets for the gaming ball image UG. This configuration allows for a unified effect on the display screen 7a, thereby improving the entertainment value of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable role 14 (the left movable role 14L) is used as the collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). This configuration enables dynamic presentation and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the gaming ball collision presentation using the gaming ball image UG is executed when the gaming ball enters the second starting hole 21 (FIGS. 98(C)(E), 99(C)(E), 100(B)(D)). With this configuration, it can be felt as if the gaming ball collision presentation is being executed by the entering gaming ball, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the game ball image presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above, one game ball is shown in the game ball image UG, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting hole 21. In contrast to this, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the game ball entering the second starting hole 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing of the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In contrast, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of over-entry after the second special chart reservation reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
While the above is an example of suggesting the likelihood of transitioning to a jackpot, it may also be applied as a presentation suggesting the likelihood of transitioning to a high or low probability time-saving game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball presentation using a game ball image which is an image imitating a game ball, and to suggest the expectation of a transition to an advantageous game which is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the game ball presentation, the game ball image is collided with a collision object, and the display color or coloring state of the collision object is changed to indicate the expectation of transition to the advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or C3-2,
The collision object is an image displayed on a display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
The collision target is a role placed in the play area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
The game ball performance is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
The advantageous game is a jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The advantageous game is a time-saving game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The predetermined ball entry port is a starting port, and the game is executed when a game ball enters the starting port after the reserved memory due to the game ball entering the starting port reaches an upper limit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The specific end surface performances A to C of stereoscopic images are explained below using Figs. 101 to 103. In Figs. 101 to 103, the various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing, and the first movable props 14 and second movable props 15 arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing.

This specific end face presentation of a three-dimensional image can be executed during the decorative pattern variation presentation (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to vary to when it stops varying). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation presentation start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific end face presentation of a three-dimensional image is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific end face presentation of a three-dimensional image is included, it changes the position, inclination, and light emission mode of the second movable role object 15.

Here, we will first explain specific end surface presentation A of a stereoscopic image, then specific end surface presentation B of a stereoscopic image, and finally specific end surface presentation C of a stereoscopic image.

[Specific end surface presentation of stereoscopic images A]
First, the specific end face performance A of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram for explaining the specific end face performance A of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face performance A of a stereoscopic image is selected from among a plurality of types of reach performances when a reach is formed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach performance. In other words, the plurality of types of reach performances includes the specific end face performance A of a stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 101(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, and change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as stopped. Here, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as tentatively stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, tentatively stopped with the number "9"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach.

When a reach is reached, the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image temporarily stops at the number "8", and the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image rotates (for example, rotates from the top side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image to the bottom side) while moving away toward the rear and gradually becoming smaller. Then, the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image switches to another rotation (for example, rotates from the right side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image to the left side) and while rotating, moves closer toward the front and gradually becomes larger. As shown in FIG. 101(C), the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is finally larger than the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rotation is stopped. This is done to display the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image divided into left and right halves, the right side of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right central decorative pattern 8CR, in a large double-door display.

Then, the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided into left and right with a vertical line (center line) passing through the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the central decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image as a boundary, and is divided into a left central decorative pattern 8CL of the three-dimensional image and a right central decorative pattern 8CR of the three-dimensional image, and as shown in FIG. 101(D), the right side of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right central decorative pattern 8CR are displayed in a double-door manner. Here, the right end face of the left central decorative pattern 8CL becomes the specific end face 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL, which is a three-dimensional image that is an open side end face, and the left end face of the right central decorative pattern 8CR becomes the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR, which is a three-dimensional image that is an open side end face.

The central decorative pattern 8C is formed as a colored opaque pattern, but when the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the right central decorative pattern 8CR are displayed in a double-door manner, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR are displayed as having transparency. Here, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR each become a transparent area.

When the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR are displayed in a double-door manner, a specific image that should not exist in the background image can be seen through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two character bodies CRA and CRB, a still image of the two character bodies CRA and CRB facing each other with swords in hand, which shows the worldview of the presentation by the gaming machine 1, and even when the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR gradually open in a double-door manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance between them and their sizes do not change either. The character body CRB can be seen on a specific end face 8CLa of the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL, and the character body CRA can be seen on a specific end face 8CRa of the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door manner, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR are small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR are transparent, but when the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL is opened, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR are small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR are transparent, As the left and right central decorative pattern 8CR are opened like double doors, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR become larger, so that part of the character body CRB can be seen from the specific end face 8CLa of the left central decorative pattern 8CL, and part of the character body CRA can be seen from the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR are opened wide in a double door manner, as shown in FIG. 101(E), the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL becomes large enough that the character body CRB can be visually recognized, and the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR becomes large enough that the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

Following Figure 101 (E), as shown in Figure 101 (F), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the centre of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in Figure 101 (G), a character body CRB viewed through the transparent area of a specific end face 8CLa of the left-side central decorative pattern 8CL and a character body CRA viewed through the transparent area of a specific end face 8CRa of the right-side central decorative pattern 8CR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two character bodies CRA, CRB unfolds. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB visible through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the character body CRA visible through the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the action presentation unfolds and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "9") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a big win will occur and a big win game (big win presentation) will be played in which the player will be awarded a profit. On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9," the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8," and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the same patterns (here, the number "9") are not displayed, a loss will be confirmed.

[Specific end surface presentation of stereoscopic images B]
Next, the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to Fig. 102. Fig. 102 is a diagram for explaining the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image. The specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image is selected from among a plurality of types of reach performances when a reach is formed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach performance. In other words, the plurality of types of reach performances includes the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, and change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as stopped. Here, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as tentatively stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, tentatively stopped with the number "9"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach.

When a reach is made, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the second movable prop 15, which has a rectangular shape and has "OARO" written on the front, advances (moves) downward from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the second movable prop 15 has completed its advance (movement) to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it rotates a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) clockwise from a horizontal state, stops, and becomes tilted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable part 15 appears as a colored, opaque, three-dimensional character string image LG of "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The appearance and color of the three-dimensional character string image LG may be the same as "OARO" written on the front of the second movable part 15, or it may have the same appearance but a different color.

After that, when the three-dimensional character string image LG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable prop 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) and stops, returning to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (performance position) to the retreat position (home position).

When the three-dimensional character string image LG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is rotated (for example, rotated from the top side of the three-dimensional character string image LG to the bottom side) and gradually gets smaller as it moves away toward the rear, it then switches to another rotation (for example, rotated from the right side of the three-dimensional character string image LG to the left side) and gradually gets larger as it rotates, until it finally becomes larger than the size of the three-dimensional character string image LG that appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the rotation stops, as shown in FIG. 102(E). This is done to display the three-dimensional character string image LG in a large double-door manner, with the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR, which are obtained by dividing the three-dimensional character string image LG left and right, as described later.

Then, the three-dimensional character string image LG is divided into left and right, into two three-dimensional character string images, with "OA" as the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR, and as shown in FIG. 102(F), the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR open in a double-door display mode. Here, the right end face of the letter "A" which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL becomes the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL which is a three-dimensional image which becomes the open side end face, and the left end face of the letter "R" which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR becomes the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR which is a three-dimensional image which becomes the open side end face.

The character string image LG is formed as a colored opaque object, but when the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are displayed in a double-door manner, a specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and a specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR are displayed as having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR each become a transparent area.

When the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are displayed in a double-door manner, a specific image that should not exist in the background image can be viewed through the transparent area of a specific end surface LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of a specific end surface LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined image" is two character bodies CRA and CRB, a still image of the two character bodies CRA and CRB facing each other with swords in hand, which shows the worldview of the presentation by the gaming machine 1, and even if the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR gradually open in a double-door manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance between them and their sizes do not change either. The character body CRB can be seen at a specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be seen at a specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR.

Shortly after the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are opened like a double door, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR are small, and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR are transparent. However, as the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are opened like a double door, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR become larger, and it becomes possible to visually recognize part of the character body CRB from the specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL, and to visually recognize part of the character body CRA from the specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR.

When the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are opened wide like a double door, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the transparent area of a specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL becomes large enough that the character body CRB can be visually recognized, and the transparent area of a specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR becomes large enough that the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102(G), as shown in FIG. 102(H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the character body CRB viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, the background image of the two character bodies CRA and CRB is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the action presentation unfolds and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "9") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a big win will occur and a big win game (big win presentation) will be played in which the player will be awarded a profit. On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9," the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8," and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the same patterns (here, the number "9") are not displayed, a loss will be confirmed.

[Specific end surface presentation of stereoscopic image C]
Next, the specific end face performance C of a stereoscopic image will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a diagram for explaining the specific end face performance C of a stereoscopic image. The specific end face performance C of a stereoscopic image is selected from among a plurality of types of reach performances when a reach is formed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach performance. In other words, the plurality of types of reach performances includes the specific end face performance C of a stereoscopic image.

In the specific end face performance C of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 103(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, and change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as stopped. Here, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as tentatively stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, tentatively stopped with the number "9"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach.

When a reach is made, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the second movable prop 15, which has a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front, advances (moves) downward from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the second movable prop 15 has completed its advance (movement) to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it rotates a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) clockwise from a horizontal state, stops, and becomes tilted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable part 15 appears as a colored, opaque, three-dimensional character string image LG of "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The appearance and color of the three-dimensional character string image LG may be the same as "OARO" written on the front of the second movable part 15, or it may have the same appearance but a different color.

After that, when the three-dimensional character string image LG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable prop 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) and stops, returning to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (performance position) to the retreat position (home position).

When the three-dimensional character string image LG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is rotated (for example, rotated from the top side to the bottom side of the three-dimensional character string image LG) and gradually becomes smaller as it moves away toward the rear, it then switches to another rotation (for example, rotated from the right side to the left side of the three-dimensional character string image LG) and gradually becomes larger as it rotates, until it finally becomes larger than the size of the three-dimensional character string image LG that appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the rotation is stopped, as shown in FIG. 103(E). This is done to enlarge the display mode in which the three-dimensional character string image LG is divided into left and right halves, with the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR facing each other and overlapping.

Then, the stereoscopic character string image LG is divided into left and right, and is divided into two stereoscopic character string images, with "OA" as the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR. As shown in FIG. 103(F), the left side of the left character string image LGL rotates forward around the vertical direction of the right side of the left character string image LGL as an axis, and the right side of the right character string image LGR rotates forward around the vertical direction of the left side of the right character string image LGR as an axis. Here, the surface of the left character string image LGL marked with "OA" just before being divided into two character string images (character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E)) is referred to as the "front surface of the left character string image LGL" after division, and the surface of the right character string image LGR marked with "RO" just before being divided into two character string images (character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E)) is referred to as the "front surface of the right character string image LGR" after division.

As the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR continue to rotate, the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR rotate so that the front of the left-side character string image LGL and the front of the right-side character string image LGR face each other and overlap (hereinafter, this will be referred to as "a display mode in which the front of the left-side character string image LGL and the front of the right-side character string image LGR face each other and close so as to overlap").

As a result, the right end face of the letter "A" which is the right end face of the left character string image LGL becomes the closed end face, and the left end face of the letter "O" which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL becomes the open end face. Also, the left end face of the letter "R" which is the left end face of the right character string image LGR becomes the closed end face, and the right end face of the letter "O" which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR becomes the open end face.

The left end face of the letter "O" which is the left end face of the left character string image LGL is an open end face, which in this case is a specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL which is a stereoscopic image, and the right end face of the letter "O" which is the right end face of the right character string image LGR is an open end face, which in this case is a specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image.

The character string image LG is formed as a colored opaque object, but when the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap in a closed display mode, a specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and a specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed as having transparency. Here, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR each become a transparent area.

When the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap, a specific image that should not exist in the background image can be seen through the transparent area of a specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of a specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined image" refers to two character bodies CRA and CRB, which are still images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB facing each other with swords in hand, and which show the worldview of the presentation by the gaming machine 1; even if the left-side character string image LGL and the right-side character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the front of the left-side character string image LGL and the front of the right-side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance dimensions and sizes between them do not change either. The character body CRB can be seen at a specific end face LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL, and the character body CRA can be seen at a specific end face LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR.

Soon after the left and right character string images LGL and LGR are closed so that the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent. Although it is difficult to notice, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR become larger, so that part of the character body CRB can be seen from the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and part of the character body CRA can be seen from the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left and right character string images LGL and LGR are closed until the front of the left and right character string images LGL and LGR face each other and overlap, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the transparent area of a specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large enough to allow the presence of the character body CRB to be visually recognized, and the transparent area of a specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR becomes large enough to allow the presence of the character body CRA to be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 103(G), as shown in FIG. 103(H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then, as shown in FIG. 103(I), the character body CRB viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two character bodies CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the character body CRA viewed through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, the background image of the two character bodies CRA and CRB is also displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the action presentation unfolds and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "9") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a big win will occur and a big win game (big win presentation) will be played in which the player will be awarded a profit. On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9," the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8," and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the same patterns (here, the number "9") are not displayed, a loss will be confirmed.

[Example of effect]
Below, examples of the effects of stereoscopic images on specific end faces are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 101 (A) to 101 (E) of the specific end face performance A of a stereoscopic image, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided, and when a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL into which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided, and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR into which the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided are represented in a transparent manner, and a first performance can be executed in which two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) are visible through the specific end face 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel presentation in which two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR, which are represented in a transparent manner, and therefore it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest. In the specific end surface presentation B of the stereoscopic image in Figures 102(A) to 102(G) and the specific end surface presentation C of the stereoscopic image in Figures 103(A) to 103(G), the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left-side character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right-side character string image LGR, which is similar.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 101(A) to 101(E) of the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image, in the first performance, the left side central decorative pattern 8CL and the right side central decorative pattern 8CR, which are formed by dividing the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, open (rotate) in a double-door manner so that the area between the specific end face 8CLa of the left side central decorative pattern 8CL, which is represented in a transparent manner, and the specific end face 8CRa of the right side central decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, is larger. According to this configuration, the left side central decorative pattern 8CL and the right side central decorative pattern 8CR open (rotate) in a double door manner, thereby increasing the area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left side central decorative pattern 8CL, which is represented in a transparent manner, and the specific end face 8CRa of the right side central decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, and thus the area in which the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) can be viewed can be increased, thereby providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing interest.
In the specific end face presentation B of the stereoscopic image of Figures 102 (A) to 102 (G), the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR open (rotate) in a double door manner, thereby enlarging the area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left side central decorative pattern 8CL, which is represented in a transparent manner, and the specific end face 8CRa of the right side central decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, and similarly, the area in which the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) can be viewed can be enlarged.
In the specific end face presentation C of the stereoscopic image of Figures 103(A) to 103(G), the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are rotated into a display mode in which the front of the left side character string image LGL and the front of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, thereby increasing the area of the specific end face 8CLa of the left side central decorative pattern 8CL, which is represented in a transparent manner, and the specific end face 8CRa of the right side central decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, and thus increasing the area in which the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) can be viewed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 101 (C) of the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image, a second performance can be executed before the first performance, in which the size of the number "8" which is the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, by displaying the size of the number "8" which is the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means) before the first performance, it is possible to contribute to directing the player's gaze to the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR before and after the specific end face 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR are displayed in a transparent manner, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face presentation B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), before the first presentation, a double-door appearance formed by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means), which similarly contributes to directing the player's gaze to the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner.
In the specific end face presentation C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103(E), before the first presentation, a display mode in which the front of the left side character string image LGL and the front of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap can be displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means), which similarly contributes to directing the player's gaze to the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 101 (C) of the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image, in the second performance, the number "8" which is the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a smaller size as it moves away in the depth direction, and then the number "8" which is the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a larger size as it moves closer in the front direction. According to this configuration, the right side of the left central decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right central decorative pattern 8CR can be displayed in a large double-door style, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
In the specific end face presentation B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), a double-door configuration can be displayed enlarged with the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR, which is similar.
In the specific end surface presentation C of the stereoscopic image of FIG. 103(E), the front of the left character string image LGL and the front of the right character string image LGR can be displayed enlarged in a closed manner so as to face each other and overlap, which is similar.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 101(C) to 101(E) of the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image, in the first performance, the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided into a left central decorative pattern 8CL and a right central decorative pattern 8CR, and the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) can be seen through the specific end face 8CLa of the divided left central decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right central decorative pattern 8CR (specific end faces in each divided stereoscopic image). According to this configuration, as a result of the central decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image being divided into a plurality of parts, the number of stereoscopic images increases, and the specific end faces in each divided stereoscopic image also increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to see the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces in each of the increased stereoscopic images, which can visually entertain the player and improve the interest.
In the specific end face presentation B of the three-dimensional image of Figures 102(E) to 102(G) and the specific end face presentation C of the three-dimensional image of Figures 103(E) to 103(G), the character string image LG is divided into two character string images, with "OA" as the left side character string image LGL and "RO" as the right side character string image LGR, and as the number of three-dimensional images increases, the specific end faces in each of the divided three-dimensional images also increase, so that the player is given many opportunities to view the two character bodies CRA, CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces in each of the increased three-dimensional images, which is similar.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 102 (C) to 102 (D) of the specific end face performance B of a stereoscopic image, a second movable part 15 (movable member) is provided which can move to an advance position (predetermined position) in front (front surface) of the image display device 7 (display means), and when a reach is formed during the variable performance of the decorative pattern, the second movable part 15 (movable member) is activated (at a predetermined timing) to execute a third performance in which the second movable part 15 (movable member) moves to the advance position (predetermined position) when a reach performance including a specific end face performance of a stereoscopic image is performed from among multiple types of reach performances, and in the second performance, the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable part 15 (movable member) is displayed as a colored, opaque, stereoscopic character string image LG of "OARO". According to this configuration, when the second movable part 15 (movable member) is operated at a predetermined timing and moves to the advance position (predetermined position), the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable part 15 (movable member) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) as a colored opaque three-dimensional image character string image LG of "OARO", so that the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable part 15 (movable member) is as if the character string "OARO" was shaken off from the second movable part 15 (movable member) to the image display device 7 (display means), which is a novel presentation, and therefore the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the specific end face presentation C of the three-dimensional image in Figures 103 (C) to 103 (D).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the specific end face presentation of a stereoscopic image are shown.
[Variation 1]
In the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the specific end face 8CLa of the left side center decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end face 8CRa of the right side center decorative pattern 8CR are transparent areas, and in the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 102 and the specific end face performance C of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 103, the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are transparent areas. However, the specific end faces 8CLa, 8CRa in the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the specific end faces LGLa, LGRa in the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 102, and the specific end faces LGLa, LGRa in the specific end face performance C of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 103 only need to have translucency, and may have translucency like frosted glass. In this way, for example, the specific end face may be expressed in a manner having translucency like frosted glass, and the specific end face may be gradually made transparent so that the specific image becomes easier to see through the specific end face as the transparency increases from a blurred state where the specific end face cannot be clearly seen through the specific end face. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Modification 2]
In the specific end face presentation A of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the specific end face presentation B of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 102, and the specific end face presentation C of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 103, the two character bodies CRA and CRB can be viewed as a predetermined image through the specific end face of the stereoscopic image, and the two character bodies CRA and CRB are still images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB facing each other with swords. However, a moving image may be used instead of a still image. The moving image may be, for example, an image explaining the flow of the two character bodies CRA and CRB facing each other with swords, a moving image using three-dimensional CG, an animated moving image, or a scene from a movie.

[Modification 3]
In the specific end face presentation A of a stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the specific end face presentation B of a stereoscopic image in Fig. 102, and the specific end face presentation C of a stereoscopic image in Fig. 103, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into three or more stereoscopic images. In this way, the number of stereoscopic images increases due to the division, and the specific end faces of each stereoscopic image also increase, so that it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to view a predetermined image through the transparent specific end faces.

[Modification 4]
In the specific end face performance A of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the left side center decorative pattern 8CL and the right side center decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double door manner, in the specific end face performance B of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are gradually opened in a double door manner, and in the specific end face performance C of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 103, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the front of the left side character string image LGL and the front of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap to form a closed display mode. However, the stereoscopic images may be rotated in the same direction or in mutually different directions. For example, in the specific end surface presentation A of the stereoscopic image in Figure 101, the left side central decorative pattern 8CL and the right side central decorative pattern 8CR may rotate in the same direction (e.g., rotating to the right, rotating to the left, rolling forward, rolling backward, etc.) without being in a double-door configuration, or they may rotate in different directions, for example, the left side central decorative pattern 8CL may roll forward while the right side central decorative pattern 8CR rolls backward, or the left side central decorative pattern 8CL may roll backward while the right side central decorative pattern 8CR rotates to the right. Furthermore, in the specific end surface presentation B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR may be rotated in the same direction (for example, rotating to the right, rotating to the left, rolling forward, rolling backward, etc.) instead of being in a double-door configuration, or they may be rotated in different directions, for example, the left side character string image LGL may be rotated forward while the right side character string image LGR rolls backward, or the left side character string image LGL may be rotated backward while the right side character string image LGR rotates to the right. Furthermore, in specific end surface presentation C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR may be rotated in the same direction (for example, rotating to the right, rotating to the left, rolling forward, rolling backward, etc.) without being closed, or may be rotated in different directions, for example, the left side character string image LGL may be rotated forward while the right side character string image LGR is rotated backward, or the left side character string image LGL may be rotated backward while the right side character string image LGR is rotated to the right.

[Variation 5]
In the specific end face presentation A of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the specific end face presentation B of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 102, and the specific end face presentation C of the stereoscopic image in Fig. 103, a world view of the presentation by the gaming machine 1 is shown as a specific image through a specific end face of the stereoscopic image. However, it may also suggest the development of the reach presentation. Since there are multiple types of development of the reach presentation, the development that can be seen through the specific end face can suggest to the player the expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot game, and can also contribute to the player finding the correlation between the specific image and the expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot game at the development destination.

[Variation 6]
In the specific end surface presentation A of a stereoscopic image in Fig. 101, the specific end surface presentation B of a stereoscopic image in Fig. 102, and the specific end surface presentation C of a stereoscopic image in Fig. 103, a predetermined image shows the world view of the presentation by the gaming machine 1. As the image showing the world view of the presentation, for example, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB holding swords, it may be an item such as a sword or a shield, or it may be a vehicle, or it may be something that can be expressed by two Chinese characters such as the characters "clash", "wild dance", and "unrivaled", which show the action of the two character bodies CRA and CRB.

[Modification 7]
Specific end surface performance A of a stereoscopic image in Figure 101, specific end surface performance B of a stereoscopic image in Figure 102, and specific end surface performance C of a stereoscopic image in Figure 103 may not include some of the described performances, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying various images,
When a stereoscopic image is displayed on the display means, a specific end surface of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a transparent manner, and a first performance in which a predetermined image is visible through the specific end surface can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first rendering, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the area of the specific end face is enlarged.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or D1-2,
A second performance is executed before the first performance, in which the size of the stereoscopic image is enlarged and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second representation, the stereoscopic image is displayed in a smaller size as it moves away in a depth direction, and then the stereoscopic image is displayed in a larger size as it moves closer in a front direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
In the first production, the stereoscopic image is divided into a plurality of parts, and a production in which the predetermined image is visible through the specific end surface of each of the divided stereoscopic images can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or D1-4,
a movable member movable to a predetermined position in front of the display means;
A third effect can be executed in which the movable member is actuated at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position,
In the second performance, the stereoscopic image in which the movable member is stereoscopically represented is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The combined performances A to C of movable props are explained below using Figures 104 to 106. In Figures 104 to 106, the decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, and the second movable prop 15 arranged around the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This combination performance of the movable parts can be executed during the decorative pattern change performance (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a command to start a change performance) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a combination performance of the movable parts is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a combined performance of movable parts is included, it changes the position, inclination and light emission mode of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2, changes the position, inclination and light emission mode of the second movable part 15 provided on the game board 2, and changes the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 located on the left periphery of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 located on the right periphery of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter referred to as the "light emission mode of the frame lamp 66").

The left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (multiple LEDs are provided), so that the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L can be a multicolor light emission mode, and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (multiple LEDs are provided), so that the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R can be a multicolor light emission mode. The second movable part 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (multiple LEDs are provided), so that the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 can be a multicolor light emission mode, and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (multiple LEDs are provided), so that the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor light emission mode.

Here, we will first explain the combination performance A of the movable parts, then explain the combination performance B of the movable parts, and finally explain the combination performance C of the movable parts.

[Movable character combination performance A]
First, the combination performance A of the movable role will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combination performance A of the movable role. In the combination performance A of the movable role, first, as shown in FIG. 104(A), the left movable role 14L advances (moves) from a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a left movable role light emission mode toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R advances (moves) from a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a right movable role light emission mode (light emission mode different from the left movable role light emission mode) toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is a right movable role light emission mode which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right movable role 14R, and is different from the left movable role light emission mode of the left movable role 14L.

The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (closer to each other) an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. 104(B), at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a smiling face with eyes wide open is displayed, and then switches to an image of a smiling face with eyes narrowed. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined part with an image expressing an emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to give the combined part emotion. This makes it possible to realize a wide variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined part.

Then, as shown in Figures 104(C) and 104(D), the combined reel tilts from the top edge to the bottom edge, toward the player, and then returns to its original position, performing a "nodding motion (as if a person's face is bowing)." At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the combined reel tilts toward the player and then returns to its original position, and the image expressing the emotion also changes, causing the facial expression of the combined reel to change three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the second movable part 15, which has a rectangular shape and has "OARO" written on the front, advances (moves) downward from a resting state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) and stops. At this time, the second movable part 15 is positioned in front of the combined left movable part 14L and right movable part 14R, covering the upper side of the left movable part 14L and a part of the upper side of the right movable part 14R. The second movable part 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable part 14L or a part of the right movable part 14R (a specific movable member).

When the second movable part 15 advances, the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled from the light emission mode for the left movable part to a light emission mode that is turned off, and the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are controlled from the light emission mode for the right movable part (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part) to a light emission mode that is turned off. In contrast, the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 is controlled to the light emission mode for the second movable part when the second movable part 15 advances. The light emission mode for the second movable part is a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part and the light emission mode for the right movable part (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part).

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled from the light emission mode in which it is turned off to the light emission mode for the left movable part again, and the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are controlled from the light emission mode in which it is turned off to the light emission mode for the right movable part again (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part). In other words, the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left movable part, the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right movable part, and the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 becomes the light emission mode for the second movable part, so that the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L, the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R (the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R), and the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 each become different light emission modes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the second movable part 15 rotates counterclockwise in the second movable part light-emitting mode by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) and stops, returning to the original horizontal state. When it has completed retreating (moving) upward from the advanced position (performance position) to the retreated position (home position), the light-emitting mode of the second movable part 15 is maintained in the second movable part light-emitting mode, or is controlled to another light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part and the light-emitting mode for the right movable part), or is controlled to a light-emitting mode that is turned off.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the left movable part to a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light emission mode for the right movable part (light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part) to a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), when the left movable part 14L completes its retreat (movement) in the light-emitting mode for the left movable part from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light-emitting mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled to a light-emitting mode in which it is turned off, and when the right movable part 14R completes its retreat (movement) in the light-emitting mode for the right movable part 14R (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light-emitting mode of the right movable part 14R is controlled to a light-emitting mode in which it is turned off, from the light-emitting mode for the right movable part (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R, and is controlled from the light emission mode for the right-side movable part (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left-side movable part) to a light emission mode that is turned off.

In this way, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R. In other words, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R.

The light emission pattern of the second movable part 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable part 15 defined in a time series, the light emission pattern of the left movable part 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable part 14L defined in a time series, the light emission pattern of the right movable part 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable part 14R defined in a time series, and the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in a time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable part 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

When the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as that of the right-side movable part 14R. Therefore, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated, light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and light emission pattern data for the right-side movable part 14R may be provided separately, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data, or the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the right-side movable part 14R instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66.

[Combined performance of movable parts B]
Next, the combination performance A of the movable role will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combination performance B of the movable role. In the combination performance B of the movable role, first, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the left movable role 14L advances (moves) from a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a left movable role light-emitting mode toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R advances (moves) from a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light-emitting mode in which the light is turned off toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is an extinguished light-emitting mode, which is exactly the same light-emitting mode as the light-emitting mode of the right movable role 14R, and is different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable role of the left movable role 14L.

The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (closer to) each other toward an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. 105(B), at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the light-emitting mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part to a light-emitting mode that is turned off, and the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a smiling face with eyes wide open is displayed, and then it switches to an image of a smiling face with eyes narrowed. The combined part can be made to have emotion by supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined part with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined part.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second movable part 15, which has a rectangular shape and has "OARO" written on the front, advances (moves) downward from a resting state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) and stops. At this time, the second movable part 15 is positioned in front of the combined left movable part 14L and right movable part 14R, covering the upper side of the left movable part 14L and a part of the upper side of the right movable part 14R. The second movable part 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable part 14L or a part of the right movable part 14R (a specific movable member).

When the second movable part 15 advances, the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L is maintained at the off state, and the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are both maintained at the off state. In contrast, the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 is controlled to the light emission mode for the second movable part when the second movable part 15 advances. The light emission mode for the second movable part is different from the light emission mode for the left movable part, and is also different from the light emission mode for the right movable part described below (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part and the light emission mode for the second movable part).

After that, as shown in Figures 105 (D) and 105 (E), the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled from the off light emission mode to the left movable part light emission mode again, and the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R is controlled from the off light emission mode to the right movable part light emission mode (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left movable part and the light emission mode for the second movable part). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes exactly the same as the light emission mode for the right movable part of the right movable part 14R, and is controlled from the off light emission state to the light emission mode for the right movable part, which is different from the light emission mode for the left movable part of the left movable part 14L and the light emission mode for the second movable part of the second movable part 15. In other words, the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left movable part, the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right movable part, and the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 becomes the light emission mode for the second movable part, so that the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L, the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R (the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R), and the light emission mode of the second movable part 15 each become different light emission modes.

The combined reel then tilts from the top edge to the bottom edge, towards the player, and then returns to its original position, acting as if it is "nodding (as if a person's face is bowing)." At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the combined reel tilts towards the player, and as it returns to its original position, the image expressing the emotion also changes, and the facial expression of the combined reel changes three-dimensionally.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the second movable part 15 rotates counterclockwise in the second movable part light-emitting mode by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) and stops to return to the original horizontal state. When it has completed retreating (moving) upward from the advanced position (performance position) to the retreated position (home position), the light-emitting mode of the second movable part 15 is maintained in the second movable part light-emitting mode, or is controlled to another light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part and the light-emitting mode for the right movable part), or is controlled to a light-emitting mode that is turned off.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light-emitting mode for the left movable part to a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the light-emitting mode for the right movable part (light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part) to a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light-emitting mode of the right movable part 14R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), when the left movable part 14L completes its retreat (movement) in the light-emitting mode for the left movable part from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light-emitting mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled to a light-emitting mode in which it is turned off, and when the right movable part 14R completes its retreat (movement) in the light-emitting mode for the right movable part 14R (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part and the light-emitting mode for the second movable part) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light-emitting mode of the right movable part 14R is controlled to a light-emitting mode in which it is turned off, from the light-emitting mode for the right movable part (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part and the light-emitting mode for the second movable part). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R, and is controlled from the light emission mode for the right-side movable part (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left-side movable part and the light emission mode for the second movable part) to a light emission mode that is turned off.

In this way, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R. In other words, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R.

The light emission mode of the second movable part 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable part 15 defined in a time series, the light emission mode of the left movable part 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable part 14L defined in a time series, the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable part 14R defined in a time series, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in a time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable part 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

When the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as that of the right-side movable part 14R. Therefore, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated, light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and light emission pattern data for the right-side movable part 14R may be provided separately, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data, or the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the right-side movable part 14R instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66.

[Combined performance of movable parts C]
Next, the combination performance C of the movable role will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combination performance C of the movable role. In the combination performance C of the movable role, first, as shown in FIG. 106(A), the left movable role 14L advances (moves) from a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a left movable role light emission mode toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R advances (moves) from a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a right movable role light emission mode (light emission mode different from the left movable role light emission mode) toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is a right movable role light emission mode which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right movable role 14R, and is different from the left movable role light emission mode of the left movable role 14L.

The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move closer to each other) toward an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. 106(B), at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a smiling face with eyes wide open is displayed, and then switches to an image of a smiling face with eyes narrowed. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined part with an image expressing an emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to give the combined part emotion. This makes it possible to realize a wide variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined part.

Then, as shown in Figures 106(C) and 106(D), the combined reel tilts from the top edge to the bottom edge, toward the player, and then returns to its original position, performing a "nodding motion (as if a person's face is bowing)." At this time, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the combined reel tilts toward the player, and as it returns to its original position, the image expressing the emotion also changes, and the facial expression of the combined reel changes three-dimensionally.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, and the left movable part 14L moves backward (moves) in the left movable part light emission mode from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the right movable part 14R moves backward (moves) in the right movable part light emission mode (light emission mode different from the left movable part light emission mode) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as the light emission mode of the right movable part 14R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), when the left movable part 14L completes its retreat (movement) in the light-emitting mode for the left movable part from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light-emitting mode of the left movable part 14L is controlled to a light-emitting mode in which it is turned off, and when the right movable part 14R completes its retreat (movement) in the light-emitting mode for the right movable part 14R (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light-emitting mode of the right movable part 14R is controlled to a light-emitting mode in which it is turned off, from the light-emitting mode for the right movable part (a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode for the left movable part). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R, and is controlled from the light emission mode for the right-side movable part (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left-side movable part) to a light emission mode that is turned off.

In this way, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R. In other words, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R in conjunction with the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R.

The light emission pattern of the left movable part 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left movable part 14L defined in a time series, the light emission pattern of the right movable part 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right movable part 14R defined in a time series, and the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in a time series. The light emission pattern data for the right movable part 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

When the right-side movable part 14R is activated (during the period from when the right-side movable part 14R advances toward the advance position and retreats to when it returns to the home position), the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is controlled to the same light emission mode as that of the right-side movable part 14R. Therefore, when the right-side movable part 14R is activated, light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and light emission pattern data for the right-side movable part 14R may be provided separately, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R may proceed according to the respective light emission pattern data, or the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the right-side movable part 14R may proceed according to the light emission pattern data for the right-side movable part 14R instead of the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66.

In addition, in movable part combination performance A of FIG. 104 and movable part combination performance B of FIG. 105, the second movable part 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front advances (moves) downward from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (advance position (performance position)) near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) and stops, and then the second movable part 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (e.g., 30 degrees) in the second movable part light-emitting mode and stops, returning to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advance position (performance position) to the retracted position (home position). In contrast, movable part combination performance C of FIG. 106 does not have a performance in which the second movable part 15 appears in front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is because the expected probability of a jackpot game (jackpot performance) occurring when executed during the decorative pattern change performance (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing) is set highest for the movable role combination performance A in FIG. 104, followed by the movable role combination performance B in FIG. 105, and lowest for the movable role combination performance C in FIG. 106.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of combining movable parts.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the combination performance A of the movable role, the game board 2 is provided with a front frame 53 on which a frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs that can emit multi-color light)) is provided, and a game area 3 that can be viewed through an opening formed in the front frame 53 is provided, and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and a right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 (multiple movable members) that can be moved to a forward position (predetermined position) in front of the image display device 7 (display means) and combined are provided on the game board 2, and the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 .... Each of the reels 14R (plural movable members) is provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), and when the left movable reel 14L of the first movable reel 14 and the right movable reel 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable reel 14 are combined, the light-emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable reel 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable reel 14, among the left movable reel 14L of the first movable reel 14 and the right movable reel 14R (plural movable members) of the first movable reel 14, is made to be the same as the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the front frame 53. According to this configuration, the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable parts) move to the advanced position and become in a state where they can be combined, which allows the player to be visually entertained, and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs that can emit multi-color light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable part) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs that can emit multi-color light)) become the same light emission mode, which allows the player to be visually entertained and improves the interest. The same applies to the combined performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combined performance C of the movable parts in Figures 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 104 (A) to 104 (H) of the movable part combination performance A, when the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R (multiple movable parts) of the first movable part 14 are combined, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light emission means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 (other movable parts excluding the right movable part 14R (specific movable part) of the first movable part 14) among the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R (multiple movable parts) of the first movable part 14) is different from the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emission means: multiple LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light)) provided on the front frame 53. According to this configuration, the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable members) move to the advance position and combine, so that the player can be visually entertained, and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light emission means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light emission means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 become different light emission modes, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combination performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105 (A) to 105 (G) and the combination performance C of the movable parts in Figures 106 (A) to 106 (F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 104 (E) to 104 (F) of the movable part combination performance A, a second movable part 15 (non-combined movable member) is provided which does not combine with the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R (multiple movable members) of the first movable part 14, and is movable so as to cover either or both of a part of the right movable part 14R (a specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and a part of the left movable part 14L (another movable member) of the first movable part 14. According to this configuration, the second movable part 15 (non-combined movable part) appears separately from the combined left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable parts), and does not combine with the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable parts), so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combined performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 104(E) to FIG. 104(F) of the combination performance A of the movable parts, a plurality of LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) are provided on the second movable part 15 (non-combined movable member), and the light-emitting state of the plurality of LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the second movable part 15 (non-combined movable member) is the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14L of the first movable part 14. When the moving parts 14R (multiple movable parts) are combined, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable part) of the first movable part 14 and the left movable part 14L (other movable part) of the first movable part 14 is different from the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light)) provided on the front frame 53. According to this configuration, a new second movable part 15 (non-combined movable part) appears separately from the combined left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable parts), and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the second movable part 15 (non-combined movable part) is different from the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable part) of the first movable part 14 and the left movable part 14L (other movable part) of the first movable part 14, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors)) provided on the front frame 53, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased. The same applies to the combination performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105 (C) to 105 (E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 104 (A) to Fig. 104 (H) of the combination performance A of the movable role, the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means) provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14, and the multiple LEDs (third light-emitting means) provided on the second movable role 15 are LEDs (light-emitting means) capable of emitting multiple colors. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means) provided on the front frame 53, the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means) provided on the left movable role 14L of the first movable role 14 and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14, and the multiple LEDs (third light-emitting means) provided on the second movable role 15 can emit multiple colors, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the combination performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105(A) to 105(G) and the combination performance C of the movable parts in Figures 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 104(A) to 104(H) of the movable part combination performance A, the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R (multiple movable parts) of the first movable part 14 can be combined before the occurrence of a jackpot game state (jackpot performance) that awards a benefit to the player is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the decorative pattern change performance (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing)). According to this configuration, before the occurrence of a jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the decorative pattern variation performance (for example, the period from the start of the decorative pattern variation to the stop of the variation)), the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable members) move to the advanced position and become combined, thereby providing the player with an impactful performance and visually entertaining the player, thereby increasing the interest. The same applies to the combined performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined performance C of the movable parts in Figures 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 104 (A) to Fig. 104 (H) of the combination performance A of the movable parts, the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable members) can be combined during the period from when the big win game state (big win performance) that gives the player a profit occurs to when it ends (that is, during the big win performance). According to this configuration, during the period from when the big win game state (big win performance) occurs to when it ends (during the big win performance), the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable members) move to the advance position and become combined, so that it is possible to provide the player with an impactful performance and visually entertain the player, thereby improving the interest. The same applies to the combination performance B of the movable parts in Figures 105(A) to 105(G) and the combination performance C of the movable parts in Figures 106(A) to 106(F).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the combined performance of movable parts are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the combination performance A of the movable parts in Fig. 104, the combination performance B of the movable parts in Fig. 105, and the combination performance C of the movable parts in Fig. 106, the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable members) are moved to the advanced position and combined. However, any or all of the movable members among the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 (multiple movable members) may return to the retreat position (home position) on the way to the advanced position, and move to the advanced position again, or may go back and forth between the retreat position (home position) and the advanced position, resulting in a combination performance of the movable parts that do not combine. Even in this case, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-colored light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multi-colored light)) are the same light emission mode, while the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-colored light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-colored light) provided on the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 are different light emission modes. In addition, even when the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R (multiple movable parts) of the first movable part 14 move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, resulting in a combination performance of movable parts that do not combine, and a new second movable part 15 (non-combined movable part) appears, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (third light-emitting means: LEDs that can emit multi-colored light) provided on the second movable part 15 (non-combined movable part) will be a light emission mode different from the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs that can emit multi-colored light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable part) of the first movable part 14 and the left movable part 14L (other movable part) of the first movable part 14, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light-emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs that can emit multi-colored light)) provided on the front frame 53.

[Modification 2]
In the combination performance A of the movable parts in FIG. 104, the combination performance B of the movable parts in FIG. 105, and the combination performance C of the movable parts in FIG. 106, two movable parts, the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14, are moved to the advance position and combined. However, it is also possible to have a mode in which three or more movable parts move to the advance position and combine. In this case, the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 may be used as a specific movable part that has the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: multiple LEDs (LEDs that can emit multi-color light)), or it may be replaced with another movable part different from the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14, or it may be a movable part selected from all the movable parts.

[Modification 3]
When the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14, which operate in the movable part combination performance A of Figure 104, the movable part combination performance B of Figure 105, and the movable part combination performance C of Figure 106, are positioned (waiting) in their respective retracted positions (home positions), a left decorative member that hides the presence of the left movable part 14L and a right decorative member that hides the presence of the right movable part 14R are provided on the game board 2, and the left decorative member may be equipped with multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light, and the right decorative member may be equipped with multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light. In this case, when the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 are positioned (standby) in the retracted position (home position), even if the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) provided on the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 are turned off, the left decorative member and the right decorative member can perform a light-emitting performance by the light-emitting full-color LEDs mounted on the left decorative member and the right decorative member. For example, the light-emitting mode of either one or both of the left decorative member and the right decorative member, the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light-emitting mode of the second movable part 15 can be the same light-emitting mode.

[Modification 4]
In the movable part combination performance A of Figure 104, the movable part combination performance B of Figure 105, and the movable part combination performance C of Figure 106, the light emission pattern of the multiple LEDs (second light emission means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable part) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 66 (first light emission means: multiple LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light)) are the same light emission pattern. However, while the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the frame lamp 66 arranged on the left periphery of the opening of the front frame 53 are the same light emission mode, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the right movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged on the right periphery of the opening of the front frame 53 may be different light emission modes. Alternatively, while the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the right-side movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 are different, the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs (second light-emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multi-color light) provided on the right-side movable part 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable part 14 and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 may be the same light emission mode.

[Modification 5]
In the combined performance A of the movable role in Fig. 104, the combined performance B of the movable role in Fig. 105, and the combined performance C of the movable role in Fig. 106, when the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable role 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable role 14R, are combined, and the left decorative part of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable role 14R form one decorative member (combined role) having a ring shape, the combined role performs a "nodding (like a person's face bowing)" action in which the left side and the right side are inclined toward the player (player side) from the upper side to the lower side, and then return to the original state. However, the combined role may perform a "face turning left and right" action in which the left side and the right side are rotated toward the player side and returned to the original state. In this case, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D may display an image expressing an emotion, such as an image with crosses for eyes (see, for example, Figure 54), which may be an image expressing a sad emotion.

[Variation 6]
The expected probability of a big win game (big win performance) occurring during the decorative pattern variation performance (for example, the period from the start of the decorative pattern variation to the stop of the variation) was set to the highest, followed by the highest, and the lowest, as the combination performance A of the movable role objects in FIG. 104, the combination performance B of the movable role objects in FIG. 105, and the combination performance C of the movable role objects in FIG. 106. However, the combination performance A of the movable role objects in FIG. 104, the combination performance B of the movable role objects in FIG. 105, and the combination performance C of the movable role objects in FIG. 106 may be executed as performances in a big win game (big win performance) in which a player is granted a profit. They may be executed based on the operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 by the player, or based on the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64 by the player (pushing operation) or based on the operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64 by the player.

[Variation 7]
The left movable role light emission mode of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role light emission mode of the right movable role 14R are completely different light emission modes, and furthermore, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the right movable role light emission mode which is the same light emission mode as the right movable role 14R, and is different from the left movable role light emission mode of the left movable role 14L. However, in the period from when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are operated to advance toward the advance position and retreat to return to the home position, if the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R are linked to have the same light emission mode, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is different from the light emission mode of the left movable role 14L. The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are linked to have the same light emission mode, for example, lighting up in red, blinking, or lighting up in gradations, while the frame lamp 66 has a light emission mode different from that of the left movable part 14L, such as being turned off, lighting up in white, or lighting up in gradations.

[Variation 8]
The combined performance A of movable parts in Figure 104, the combined performance B of movable parts in Figure 105, and the combined performance C of movable parts in Figure 106 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
a front frame on which the first light emitting means is provided;
A display means that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame;
A gaming machine including a plurality of movable members that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means and combined with each other,
Each of the plurality of movable members is provided with a second light emitting means,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, a light emission mode of the second light-emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and a light emission mode of the first light-emitting means provided on the front frame become the same light emission mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, a light emission mode of the second light-emitting means provided on the other movable members among the plurality of movable members excluding the specific movable member becomes different from a light emission mode of the first light-emitting means provided on the front frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
a non-combined movable member that is not combined with the plurality of movable members and is movable so as to cover either or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
a third light emitting means is provided on the non-combined movable member;
When the plurality of movable members are combined, the light emission mode of the third light-emitting means provided on the non-combined movable member becomes a light emission mode different from the light emission mode of the second light-emitting means provided on the specific movable member and the other movable members and the light emission mode of the first light-emitting means provided on the front frame.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
the first light-emitting means, the second light-emitting means and the third light-emitting means are light-emitting means capable of emitting multiple colors;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
Before displaying the occurrence of a winning game performance on the display means, the plurality of movable members are capable of being combined.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be combined during a period from when the performance of a winning game occurs to when it ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

11. Operation of the first movable role 14 in other embodiments When performing the performances of Figures 175 to 182 described later, the configuration of the first movable role 14 is different from that of Figures 1, 49 to 58. The configuration of the first movable role 14 when performing the performances of Figures 175 to 182 will be described. The configuration of the first movable role 14 in other embodiments for performing the performances of Figures 175 to 182 will be described using Figures 107 to 110.

Figure 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first aspect of the first movable part 14 in another embodiment. Figure 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable part 14 in another embodiment. Figure 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a third aspect of the movable part 14 in another embodiment. Figure 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a fourth aspect of the first movable part 14 in another embodiment.

In another embodiment, the first movable part 14 includes a left fixed part 14L and a right movable part 14R, as shown in Figures 107 to 110. The left fixed part 14L is not movable and is stationary in front of the display screen 7a, covering a part of the display screen 7a. The right movable part 14R is movable in the left-right direction. The left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R each have half of a ring-shaped decorative part (left decorative part and right decorative part) attached to the tip side. In other words, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have an arc shape that is half of a ring shape. The right movable part 14R can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first embodiment). When the right movable part 14R is in the retracted position, the entire part is located behind the other parts, making it difficult to see the entire part.

As shown in FIG. 107, the left fixed part 14L has a pair of movable members 14LP stored at the tip of the arc-shaped left decorative part. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the pair of movable members 14LP are stored in the left decorative part (retracted state). In other embodiments, the state in FIG. 107 is also called the first mode of the movable part 14. The movable member 14LP is a rod-shaped member and is configured to be movable in the left and right directions. When stored, the movable member 14LP is located on the back side of the left decorative part and is difficult to see, and when advanced, it protrudes to the right as shown in FIG. 108. FIG. 108 shows an advanced position (deployed position) in which the pair of movable members 14LP protrude to the right in parallel with each other. In other embodiments, the state in FIG. 108 is also called the second mode of the movable part 14.

As shown in FIG. 109, when a pair of movable parts 14LP protrude from the tip of the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R advances to the left, and the pair of movable parts 14LP come into contact with the right movable part 14R, forming a single decorative part (combined part) as a whole (third mode). Then, as shown in FIG. 110, a face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined part, completing the overall appearance of a human face. In addition, when the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 both move to the advanced position, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the first movable part 14. In other words, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 can be stationary in a partially overlapping and combined state. The state in FIG. 110 is also called the fourth mode of the movable part 14.

12. Other examples of performance, effect, modification, and mode of this embodiment Each example of performance (display performance example, role-moving performance example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, effect examples, modification, and mode examples for the performance examples will also be described. The performance described below is a performance realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (hit determination information, hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. Note that the following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

The pending number linked image display effects A to D are explained below using Figures 111 to 114. These pending number linked image display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command to execute the pending number linked image display effect is included and the pending number reaches a specified number, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending number linked image display effect A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number linked image display performance A. The reserved number linked image display performance is a performance in which, during a specific fluctuation, when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to a winning, the reserved number In the effect A, the suggestion image HSG is displayed. First, as shown in FIG. 111(A) and FIG. 111(B), the reserved number is consumed together with the confirmation and stopping of the decorative pattern, In FIG. 111(A), the game state is normal, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a miss, and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the barrage number "567". In conjunction with this confirmation stop, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (reservation is consumed). In addition, two reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern are displayed (reservation number 2).

In FIG. 111(B), the two reserved icons 9A are shifted, and the older reserved icon 9A (on the right) that was displayed first is moved to the reserved icon display area and becomes the reserved icon. Here, the reserved icon display area is arranged so that the position of the area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two reserved icons 9A (on the right) becomes the reserved icon, the decorative pattern change effect is started. The decorative pattern change shown in FIG. 111(B) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. Here, whether or not the change corresponds to the "specific change" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific change may be executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a big win game), or may be executed when the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be any condition. An image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or it may not be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(C), one reserved icon 9A is added by the winning of the first special pattern, making the total number two. Next, as shown in FIG. 111(D), the state in which the reserved icon 9A is further increased to three by the winning of the first special pattern is shown. In conjunction with this, a reserved number indication image HSG is displayed with the words "3 reserved now!!" written on it. That is, the reserved number indication image HSG is an image that notifies the fact that the reserved number is three, and is not displayed when the reserved number is two or less. Next, as shown in FIG. 111(E), the reserved number indication image HSG disappears during a specific change after a predetermined time has elapsed after display. In FIG. 111(F), the state in which one reserved icon 9A is further added by the winning of the first special pattern, making the total number four. At this time, the reserved number indication image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed for a fixed period of time only when the reserved number is 3, and is not displayed for any other reserved number. As shown in FIG. 111(G), the decorative pattern is then fixed and stopped. In other words, the specific variation ends. After this, FIG. 112(H) to FIG. 112(J), which will be described later, are executed.

Figure 111 (H) shows a state where the first special pattern has not been won after the start of the specific variation shown in Figure 111 (B). In other words, a specific time has passed after the specific variation and the decorative pattern has been confirmed and stopped. In this way, even if there is a specific variation, if the reserved number does not reach a specific value (here, 3), the reserved number indication image HSG is not displayed and the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped.

Figure 111 (I) shows a state in which, as shown in Figure 111 (C), one reserved icon 9A is added after a specific change, making the total two, and thereafter no winning first special symbol is obtained. In other words, a specific time (change time) has passed after the specific change, and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if there is a specific change, if the reserved number does not reach a specific value (here, 3), the reserved number indication image HSG is not displayed and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped.

Figure 111 (J) shows a state in which there is no winning of the first special pattern after the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed, as shown in Figure 111 (E). In other words, after the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed, a predetermined time (variation time) has passed and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, in a specific variation, after the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed once, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped without being displayed again.

[Pending number linked image display effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number linked image display performance B. The reserved number linked image display performance is a performance in which, during a specific fluctuation, when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to a winning, the reserved number The suggestion image HSG is displayed. Figures 112(A) to 112(D) of the reserved number linked image display performance B are the same as Figures 111(A) to 111(D) of the reserved number linked image display performance A. ) As shown in FIG. 112(A) and FIG. 112(B), the decoration pattern is stopped and the reserved pattern is consumed, and the next new variation starts. In the case of the "1st special symbol" in the normal game state, the lottery result is a miss, and the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped at the "567" pattern. In conjunction with this fixed stop, the reserved icon (variable icon ) 9C disappears (reservation is consumed). In addition, two reserved icons 9A corresponding to the first special pattern are displayed (reservation number 2).

In FIG. 112(B), the two reserved icons 9A are shifted, and the older reserved icon 9A (on the right) that was displayed first is moved to the reserved icon display area and becomes the reserved icon. Here, the reserved icon display area is arranged so that the position of the area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two reserved icons 9A (on the right) becomes the reserved icon, the decorative pattern change effect is started. The decorative pattern change shown in FIG. 112(B) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. Here, whether or not the change corresponds to the "specific change" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific change may be executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a big win game), or may be executed when the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). Whether or not it corresponds to a specific effect can be any condition. An image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or it may not be displayed.

After that, as shown in Figure 112 (C), one more reserved icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special pattern, bringing the total to two. Next, as shown in Figure 111 (D), the winning of the first special pattern further brings the total to three reserved icons 9A. In conjunction with this, a reserved number indication image HSG is displayed, which reads "3 reserved now!!" In other words, the reserved number indication image HSG is an image that notifies you when the reserved number becomes three, and is not displayed when the reserved number is two or less. The reserved number indication image HSG disappears after a predetermined time has passed.

After that, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the specific variation, and the next variation begins. Figure 112 (E) illustrates the state during the next variation after the specific variation. Here, one reserved icon 9A is consumed and two (reserved number 2) are displayed. Figure 112 (F) shows the state during this variation where one reserved icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special pattern, making a total of three. At this time, even though the reserved number has become three, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, in the variation after the specific variation, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed even if the reserved number satisfies the predetermined condition (reserved number becomes three). In other words, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed only during the specific variation. This allows the player to get a sense of excitement as to whether the reserved number suggestion image HSG will be displayed or not.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(G), in the next variation after the specific variation, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation starts. FIG. 112(H) illustrates the state during the next variation after the specific variation. Here, one reserved icon 9A is consumed and two (reserved number 2) are displayed. FIG. 112(I) shows a state in which one reserved icon 9A is added to a total of three due to the winning of the first special pattern during this variation. At this time, even though the reserved number has become three, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, in the next variation after the specific variation, even if the reserved number satisfies the predetermined condition (reserved number becomes three), the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed only during a specific variation. This allows the player to get a sense of excitement as to whether the reserved number suggestion image HSG will be displayed or not. After that, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the next variation after the specific variation.

[Image display performance linked to number of reservations C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number linked image display performance C. The reserved number linked image display performance is a performance in which, during a specific fluctuation, when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to a winning, the reserved number This is the effect in which the suggestion image HSG is displayed. Figure 113 (A) of the reserved number linked image display effect C is the same as Figure 111 (A) of the reserved number linked image display effect A. That is, Figure 112 (A As shown in FIG. 112(A), the decorative symbol is fixed, the reserved symbol is consumed, and the next new variation starts. In FIG. 112(A), the game state is normal and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a miss. The decorative pattern is fixed at the "567" symbol. In conjunction with this fixed stop, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (reserved consumption). Also, Two hold icons 9A (two holds) are displayed.

In FIG. 113(B), the two reserved icons 9A are shifted, and the older reserved icon 9A (on the right) that was displayed first is moved to the reserved icon display area and becomes the reserved icon. Here, the reserved icon display area is arranged so that the position of the area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two reserved icons 9A (on the right) becomes the reserved icon, the decorative pattern change performance is started. The decorative pattern change shown in FIG. 113(B) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. Here, whether or not the change corresponds to the "specific change" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific change may be executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a big win game), or may be executed when the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). Whether or not it corresponds to a specific performance can be any condition. An image indicating whether or not the change corresponds to a specific change may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or it may not be displayed. During this particular change, a timer image TM1 is displayed. Here, the timer image TM1 displays "10 seconds left" and begins counting down after it is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(C), one reserved icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special pattern, making the total number two. The timer image TM1 continues counting down, and here it is shown as "8 seconds remaining". Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), the winning of the first special pattern furthermore makes the total number three reserved icons 9A. In conjunction with this, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed, which states "3 reserved now!!" That is, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies you when the reserved number becomes three, and is not displayed when the reserved number is two or less. While the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues counting down. Then, as shown in FIG. 113(E) and FIG. 113(F), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the reserved number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in Figure 113 (G), the decorative pattern stops at the specific variation and the next variation begins. The state during the next variation after the specific variation is the same as Figure 113 (G) to Figure 112 (J) of the reserved number linked image display performance B, so the explanation is omitted.

Figures 113 (H) to 113 (J) show a state in which, as shown in Figure 113 (C), one reserved icon 9A is added after a specific change, making the total two, and then no first special pattern is won. In other words, after a specific change, a specific time (change time) has passed and the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", after which the timer image TM1 disappears and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if there is a specific change, if the reserved number does not reach the specified value (here, 3), the reserved number indication image HSG is not displayed and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped.

[Number of reserved images displayed]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number linked image display performance D. The reserved number linked image display performance is a performance in which the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) by winning during a specific fluctuation. In FIG. 114(A) of the reserved number linked image display performance D, it is notified that the time-saving game will start after the big win game. Specifically, "Time-saving mode started!!" is displayed. Here, the time-saving number is 1 time, and it will be explained as returning to the normal state after one lottery of the second special pattern. In addition, since the reserved number linked image display performance D does not display the reserved icon, the current reserved number is displayed in the lower right of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 114(A), the reserved number of the second special pattern becomes 1 from 0 by hitting the right, and becomes 0 with the start of the lottery of the second special pattern in FIG. 114(B).

In FIG. 114(B), one reserved second special symbol is consumed, the remaining number is 0, and the decorative symbol variation effect is being executed. The variation of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 114(B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. Here, the "specific variation" refers to the first variation of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state after the big win game. In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times is one second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery is not included in the number of time-saving times. The number of time-saving times can be any number. In addition to the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery may also be counted in the number of time-saving times. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. A timer image TM1 is displayed during this specific variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is written as "10 seconds left", and the countdown starts after the display. In Figure 114 (B), the number of reserved second special symbols increases from 0 to 2 as a result of continued right-hand hits.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(C), by continuing to hit the right, the reserved number of the second special symbol goes from 2 to 3. In conjunction with this, the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed, saying "Now 3 reserved!!" In other words, the reserved number indication image HSG is an image that notifies you when the reserved number becomes 3, and is not displayed when the reserved number is 2 or less. While the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Here, it says "5 seconds left". Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D) and FIG. 114(E), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of the timer image TM1 disappears. At the same time, the reserved number indication image HSG also disappears.

After that, as shown in Figure 114 (F), in a specific variation, the decorative pattern stops at "789", and the number of reserved second special patterns becomes 2 from 3. Then, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state, and a lottery for the second special pattern in the normal state is executed. At this time, before the variation display, "Normal mode started!!" is displayed, as shown in Figure 114 (G). After that, the variation display is made.

In FIG. 114(H), a timer image TM2 is displayed together with the change display during the next change after a specific change. This timer image TM2 simply shows the timer content of "10 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time has passed without counting down. In this case, such an image is also called a timer image. After the fixed stop, the reserved number becomes 1 from 2, and the next change begins. At this time, a timer image TM3 is displayed. This timer image simply shows the timer content of "5 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time has passed without counting down. After that, as shown in FIG. 114(J), the fixed stop occurs. The reserved number of the second special pattern becomes 0 from 1. In FIG. 114(H) to FIG. 114(J), the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed in each change, as in FIG. 112(G) to FIG. 112(J) of the reserved number linked image display performance B.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the image display linked to the number of reserved balls.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 111 to 114, during a specific change, a first effect is displayed when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning, and a second effect is displayed when the reserved number indication image HSG disappears after the first effect is executed during the same change. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 111 to 114, in the first presentation, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the reserved number reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more (for example, 3), and is not displayed before the reserved number reaches the predetermined number (for example, 3). With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 111 and Fig. 113, if the reserved number does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3) during a specific change, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. With this configuration, since there are cases where the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed, it is possible to enhance the impression when it is displayed. In this way, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 113 and 114, a timer image is displayed at the start of a specific change, and if the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed during the specific change, the reserved number suggestion image HSG disappears together with the timer image. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 111 to 114, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is an image showing content suggesting that the reserved number has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3). With this configuration, a predetermined image that itself represents the reserved number is suddenly displayed, which is an unprecedented and novel presentation that visually entertains the player and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved number suggestion image HSG is not displayed during the next change after a specific change, as shown in Fig. 112. With this configuration, the player is surprised by the unprecedented and novel presentation in which the reserved number becomes the predetermined number in the next change, but the predetermined image does not appear, and the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114, the specific variation is executed in the time-saving state, and the variation executed next to the specific variation is executed in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are modified examples of the image display linked to the number of pending balls.
[Modification 1]
The number of reserved items for which the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed is not limited to 3, and may be any number. It is preferable that the reserved number for which the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed is more than one. The reserved number for which the reserved number indication image HSG is displayed may be more than one. For example, it may be configured to be displayed when the reserved number is 2 and 4.

[Modification 2]
The content represented by the reserved number indication image HSG is not limited to the above. For example, it may be "It's an even number now", "There aren't any yet", "It's full", etc.

[Modification 3]
The timer image described above only needs to show the contents of the timer, such as "10 seconds left" or "3:00". It does not necessarily have to count down. For example, even if "100 seconds left" is displayed in the first variation and then disappears, and "10 seconds left" is displayed in the next variation and then disappears, it is still called a timer image.

[Modification 4]
The configurations of the reserved number linked image display performances A to D can be appropriately combined. In addition, the specific change does not have to be a specially limited change, and all changes may fall under the "specific change."

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Embodiment E1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
A first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number due to winning during a specific fluctuation;
A second effect in which the predetermined image disappears during the same change in which the first effect is executed after the first effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first performance, the predetermined image is displayed when the reserved number becomes a predetermined number of 2 or more, and is not displayed before the reserved number becomes the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
If the reserved number does not reach the predetermined number during the particular fluctuation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image;
the timer image is displayed at the start of the specific variation, and disappears when the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value;
If the predetermined image is displayed during the specific variation, the predetermined image disappears together with the timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The predetermined image is an image showing content suggesting that the reserved number has reached a predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
During a variation executed next to the specific variation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E1-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The specific variation is executed during a time-saving state, and the variation executed next to the specific variation is executed during a normal state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reserved number change linked effects A to D are explained below using Figures 115 to 118. These reserved number change linked effects can be executed after a big win or during a decorative pattern change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command or the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command to execute the reserved number change linked effect is included and the reserved number changes as specified, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Reserved number change linked performance A]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number change linked performance A. The reserved number change linked performance is a performance in which, when a "specific performance" is being executed and the reserved number undergoes a "predetermined change," a "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that begins after the specific performance ends. Here, the "specific performance" is a display performance of the decorative pattern change during normal operation, and the "predetermined change" in the reserved number is an increase of three or more during the specific performance, and the "predetermined image" is an expectation indication image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be a timer image TM1.

In the pending number change linked performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. This decorative pattern change performance corresponds to the "specific performance" in the claims. Here, whether or not this change corresponds to the "specific performance" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific performance may be a change performance executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (e.g., the 100th time after a jackpot game), or may be a change performance executed when the game state changes (e.g., from a time-saving state to a normal state). An image indicating whether or not the change performance corresponds to a specific performance may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the game state is normal, and the reserved number is reserved for the first special symbol lottery. During this variation (specific performance), as shown in FIG. 115(B), if the reserved number changes (increases) from 1 to 4 due to three winnings, the reserved number will have undergone a "predetermined change" when the "specific performance" is being executed. Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 115(C), the expectation suggestion image KSG will always be displayed in the next variation as shown in FIG. 115(D). Here, the expectation suggestion image KSG is written as "chance," suggesting the expectation of a win in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 115(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that if the reserved number has not undergone a predetermined change in the previous variation shown in FIG. 115(A) to FIG. 115(B), the expectation suggestion image KSG will not be displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 115(D), the expectation indication image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed as soon as the variation starts. The timer image TM1 states "5 seconds left" and, once it is displayed, the countdown begins. As shown in FIG. 115(E), the expectation indication image KSG shrinks at a predetermined timing after it is displayed (for example, 2 seconds after it is displayed) and moves to the bottom right of the display screen 7a. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0", both the reduced expectation indication image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear, as shown in FIG. 115(F).

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(G), in the same variation, a timer image TM2 is always displayed. The timer image TM2 has "3 seconds left" written on it, and after it is displayed, a countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 115(H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 115(I). Furthermore, in the next variation (the variation after the specific performance) shown in FIG. 115(J), a timer image TM3 is always displayed. The next variation shown in FIG. 115(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may simply show the timer content of "3 seconds left" and disappear after a predetermined time has passed without counting down. In this case, both are called timer images. Then, it is fixed and stopped.

[Number of reserved changes linked performance B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number change linked performance B. The reserved number change linked performance is a performance in which, when the reserved number undergoes a "predetermined change" during the execution of a "specific performance", a "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that starts after the end of the specific performance. Here, the "specific performance" is a performance in which the first special symbol changes in a normal state, and the "predetermined change" in the reserved number is that the reserved number of the second special symbol increases from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol during the specific performance, and the "predetermined image" is described as the expectation indication image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be a timer image TM1.

In the reserved number change linked performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A) and FIG. 116(B), after the first special symbol is fixed and stopped, the reserved icon corresponding to the next first special symbol shifts and becomes the reserved icon 9C as the reserved symbol is consumed, and the next change begins. This decorative symbol change performance corresponds to the "specific performance" in the claims. Here, whether or not this change corresponds to the "specific performance" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The specific performance may be a change performance that is executed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a big win game), or may be a change performance that is executed when the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). Whether or not it corresponds to a specific performance can be any condition. An image indicating whether or not the change performance corresponds to a specific performance may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or it may not be displayed.

Here, the game state is normal, and the reserved number is reserved for the first special symbol drawing. During this variation (specific performance), as shown in FIG. 116(B), if the reserved number changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, the reserved number will have undergone a "predetermined change" while the "specific performance" is being executed. Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 116(C), the expectation suggestion image KSG will always be displayed in the next variation in which the second special symbol is drawn, as shown in FIG. 116(D). Here, the expectation suggestion image KSG is written as "chance," suggesting the expectation of a win in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 116(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that if the second special symbol does not win in the previous variation shown in FIG. 116(B) to FIG. 116(C), the expectation suggestion image KSG will not be displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in Figure 116 (D), the expectation indication image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed as soon as the variation starts. The timer image TM1 states "5 seconds left" and after it is displayed, the countdown begins. As shown in Figure 116 (E), the expectation indication image KSG is reduced in size at a predetermined timing after it is displayed and moves to the bottom right of the display screen 7a. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0", then, as shown in Figure 116 (F), both the reduced expectation indication image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(G), in the same variation, a timer image TM2 is always displayed. The timer image TM2 has "3 seconds left" written on it, and after it is displayed, a countdown starts. As shown in FIG. 116(H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 116(I). Furthermore, in the next variation (the variation after the specific performance) shown in FIG. 116(J), a timer image TM3 is always displayed. The next variation shown in FIG. 116(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may simply show the timer content of "3 seconds left" and disappear after a predetermined time has passed without counting down. In this case, both are called timer images. Then, it is fixed and stopped.

[Number of reserved changes linked performance C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number change linked performance C. The reserved number change linked performance is a performance in which, when the reserved number undergoes a "predetermined change" during the execution of a "specific performance", a "predetermined image" is displayed in the change that starts after the end of the specific performance. Here, the "specific performance" is a display performance of the first special symbol during the time-saving state, and the "predetermined change" in the reserved number is that the reserved number of the second special symbol increases from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol during the specific performance, and the "predetermined image" is the expectation indication image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be a timer image TM1.

In the reserved number change linked performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), it is notified that the time-saving game will start after the big win. Specifically, "Time-saving mode started!!" is displayed. Here, the time-saving count is one, and it will be explained that the normal state is restored after one drawing of the second special pattern. In FIG. 117(A) and FIG. 117(B), a variable performance corresponding to the reservation of the first special pattern obtained by winning before the big win is performed. This decorative pattern variable performance corresponds to the "specific performance" of the claims. In other words, here, the change of the first special pattern during the time-saving state corresponds to the "specific performance". During this specific performance, if the second special pattern wins by hitting the right, the reserved icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(B). During this variable performance (specific performance), if the reserved number changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. 117(B), the reserved number will have undergone a "predetermined change" while the "specific performance" is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 117(C), after the fixed stop, a variable performance of the second special symbol will be performed in the time-saving state.

In the next variation of a specific presentation, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the game state is in the time-saving state, and a variation presentation is executed by consuming the reserved second special symbol lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the expectation suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next variation. Here, the expectation suggestion image KSG is written as "chance," indicating the expectation of a win in that variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 117(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that if the second special symbol does not win in the previous variation shown in FIG. 117(B) to FIG. 117(C), the expectation suggestion image KSG will not be displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 117(D), the expectation indication image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed as soon as the variation starts. The timer image TM1 says "5 seconds left," and after it is displayed, the countdown begins. As shown in FIG. 117(E), the expectation indication image KSG is reduced at a predetermined timing after it is displayed and moves to the bottom right of the display screen 7a. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0," both the reduced expectation indication image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear, as shown in FIG. 117(F). In FIG. 117(F), a right hit results in the winning of the second special pattern, and a new reserved icon 9B is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed in the same variation. The timer image TM2 has "3 seconds left" written on it, and after it is displayed, the countdown starts. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 117(H). After that, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state, and "Normal mode starts!!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(I), and the variation of the second special pattern starts in the normal state. After that, in the next variation (the variation after the specific performance) shown in FIG. 117(J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed along with the variation performance of the decorative pattern. The next variation shown in FIG. 117(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. The timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may just represent the timer content of "3 seconds left" and disappear after a predetermined time has passed without counting down. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it will stop for certain.

[Number of reserved changes linked performance D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the reserved number change linked performance D. The reserved number change linked performance is a performance in which, when the reserved number undergoes a "predetermined change" during the execution of a "specific performance", a "predetermined image" is displayed in the variation that begins after the end of the specific performance. Here, the "specific performance" is a performance when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol during the time-saving state, and the "predetermined change" in the reserved number is that the reserved number of the second special symbol increases from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol during the specific performance, and the "predetermined image" is described as the expectation indication image KSG. In this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be a timer image TM1.

In the reserved number change linked performance D, first, as shown in Fig. 118 (A) to Fig. 118 (C), it is notified that the time-saving game will start after the big win game. Specifically, "Time-saving mode start!!" is displayed. Here, the time-saving count is one, and it will be explained as returning to the normal state after one drawing of the second special symbol. In Fig. 118 (A), a state in which neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is reserved after the big win game is shown. Here, the performance when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the big win game corresponds to the "specific performance" of the claims. In other words, here, the state in which no change is made in the time-saving state or the display of "Time-saving mode start!!" corresponds to the "specific performance". If the winning of the second special symbol occurs by hitting the right during this specific performance, the reserved icon 9B is displayed as shown in Fig. 118 (B). While this "Time-saving mode begins!!" is displayed (specific effect), if the reserved number changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to the winning of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the reserved number will have undergone a "predetermined change" while the "specific effect" is being executed. After the fixed stop, a variable effect of the second special symbol in the time-saving state will be performed.

In the next variation of the specific presentation, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the game state is in the time-saving state, and a variation presentation is executed by consuming the reserved second special symbol lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 118(D), in the next variation of the specific presentation, the expectation suggestion image KSG is always displayed. Here, the expectation suggestion image KSG is written as "chance," and indicates the expectation of a win in the variation. The next variation shown in FIG. 118(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that if the second special symbol does not win in the previous variation shown in FIG. 118(B) to FIG. 118(C), the expectation suggestion image KSG will not be displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 118(D), the expectation indication image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed as soon as the variation starts. The timer image TM1 says "5 seconds left," and after it is displayed, the countdown begins. As shown in FIG. 118(E), the expectation indication image KSG is reduced at a predetermined timing after it is displayed and moves to the bottom right of the display screen 7a. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0," both the reduced expectation indication image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear, as shown in FIG. 118(F). In FIG. 118(F), a right hit results in the winning of the second special pattern, and a new reserved icon 9B is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed in the same variation. The timer image TM2 has "3 seconds left" written on it, and after it is displayed, the countdown starts. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 118(H). After that, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state, and "Normal mode started!!" is displayed as shown in FIG. 118(I), and the variation of the second special pattern starts in the normal state. After that, in the next variation (the variation after the specific performance) shown in FIG. 118(J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed along with the variation performance of the decorative pattern. The next variation shown in FIG. 118(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. The timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may just represent the timer content of "3 seconds left" and disappear after a predetermined time has passed without counting down. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it will stop for certain.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the linked presentation of changes in the number of reserved balls.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 115 to 118, when the reserved number changes in a predetermined manner while a specific performance is being performed, a first performance can be performed in which a predetermined image (expectation indication image KSG or timer image TM1) is displayed in the first variation that starts after the specific performance ends. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the predetermined image may be a timer image TM1, as shown in Figures 115 to 118. With this configuration, the timer image is always displayed whenever the reserved number changes in a predetermined manner while a specific effect is being executed, which is an unprecedented and novel effect that can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 115 to 118, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the start of the first variation, and in the first variation, after the first timer image TM1 disappears, a second effect can be executed in which a second timer image TM2 is displayed during the same variation. With this configuration, it is predetermined that the timer image is always displayed twice in the same variation, and this unprecedented and novel effect can visually entertain the player and increase the interest of the player.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect can be executed in which a third timer image TM3 is displayed, as shown in Figures 115 to 118. According to this configuration, it is predetermined that the timer image will always be displayed in the next variation as well, and this unprecedented and novel effect can visually entertain the player and increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 115 to 118, the predetermined image (expectation suggestion image KSG) is displayed at the start of the first variation and changes in size during the same variation. According to this configuration, the expectation suggestion image KSG, which is always displayed in the first variation, always changes in size, which is an unprecedented and novel presentation that can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 117, the specific effect is a variation effect of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first variation is a variation of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is displayed in the variation of the other symbol when the reserved number of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes by a predetermined amount (here, 0 → 1) during the variation of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and to increase the interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific effect and the first variation are executed in the time-saving state, and the second variation is executed in the normal state, as shown in Figures 117 and 118. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are some variations of the hold number change linked presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is displayed as the predetermined image, but the predetermined image is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined image may be a timer image TM1, a character image, or an image showing a place to aim the game ball.

[Modification 2]
The specific presentation of FIG. 117 is a variation presentation of the first special symbol, the first variation is a variation of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is displayed in the variation of the second special symbol when the reserved number of the second special symbol changes by a predetermined amount (here, 0 to 1) during the variation of the first special symbol. However, the specific presentation of FIG. 117 may be reversed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the specific presentation is a variation presentation of the second special symbol, the first variation is a variation of the first special symbol, and the predetermined image is displayed in the variation of the first special symbol when the reserved number of the first special symbol changes by a predetermined amount (here, 0 to 1) during the variation of the second special symbol.

[Modification 3]
The timer image in the above embodiment has been described as counting down. However, the timer image is not limited to a digital display, and may show the remaining time until the end point by needles or area. Also, the timer image does not necessarily have to be moving as long as it is an image that represents a timer. For example, a timer image that is displayed multiple times and the remaining time until the end point decreases each time it is displayed is also included in the timer image. Also, as long as it is clear that the image represents a timer, it is included in the timer image even if it is not moving.

[Modification 4]
The expectation degree suggestion image KSG is reduced in size at a predetermined timing after being displayed and moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a. However, the expectation degree suggestion image KSG may be enlarged or may not move.

[Modification 5]
The contents of the hold number change linked effects A to D may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Embodiment E2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
When a specific performance is being performed and the reserved number changes in a specific manner, a first performance in which the specific image is displayed in a first variation that starts after the specific performance is completed can be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined image is a first timer image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E2-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
the first timer image is displayed at the start of the first variation;
In the first variation, after the first timer image disappears, a second performance can be executed in which a second timer image is displayed during the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-4]
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
In a second variation executed after the first variation, a third performance in which a third timer image is displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E2-5]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined image is displayed at the start of the first variation and changes in size during the same variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The specific effect is a variation effect of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The first variation is a variation of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The predetermined image is displayed during the variation of the other symbol when the reserved number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes in a predetermined manner during the variation of the other symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-7]
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The specific effect and the first variation are executed during a time-saving state,
The second variation is performed during a normal state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon movement and change performances A to D are explained below using Figures 119 to 122. This pending icon movement and change performance can be executed during the decorative pattern change performance, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon movement and change performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending icon movement change performance A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon movement change performance A. The reserved icon movement change performance is a performance in which multiple reserved icons are displayed during a specific change, and the reserved icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the reserved icon movement change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), four reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed during the change of the decorative pattern. The four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a row horizontally, and each corresponds to each change after the next change, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each change after the next change. Here, the reserved icon 9A can suggest the expected degree by color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the reserved icon 9C disappears with the decorative pattern being stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the next change starts. The change shown in FIG. 119(C) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the four reserved icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of the change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost reserved icon (mesh pattern) among the four reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. In other words, the four reserved icons 9A are in the same state as at the time of the previous change. After a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, the four reserved icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119(D). At this time, the rightmost reserved icon (mesh pattern) moves to the area where the reserved icon is displayed and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the number of reserved icons 9A becomes three.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(E), the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped, and the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the next change starts. When the next change starts, the three reserved icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost reserved icon (white) among the three reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon corresponding to that change does not move. After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, the three reserved icons 9A shift to the right, as shown in FIG. 119(G). At this time, the rightmost reserved icon (white) moves to the area where the reserved icon is displayed, becomes the reserved icon 9C, and there are two reserved icons 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped, and the reserved icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), the next change starts. When the next change starts, the two reserved icons 9A do not move. In other words, at the start of the change corresponding to the rightmost reserved icon (black) of the two reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon corresponding to that change does not move. After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, the two reserved icons 9A shift to the right, as shown in FIG. 119(J). At this time, the rightmost reserved icon (black) moves to the area where the reserved icon is displayed, becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icons 9A become one.

[Pending icon movement change performance B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon movement change performance B. The reserved icon movement change performance is a performance in which multiple reserved icons are displayed during a specific change, and the reserved icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the reserved icon movement change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), four reserved icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative pattern. The four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a row horizontally, and each corresponds to each change after the next change, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each change after the next change. Here, the reserved icon 9A can suggest the expected degree by the color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The four reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), the next change starts. The change shown in FIG. 120(C) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the four reserved icons 9A are not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, the four reserved icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(D). At this time, the four reserved icons 9A are in the same state as when they were displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, among the four reserved icons 9A, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the reserved icon (mesh pattern) on the far right, the reserved icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A were displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) moves to the right and frames out of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 120(E). The other three hold icons 9A do not move. This reduces the number of hold icons 9A to three.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the fixed pattern is stopped. After that, the next change starts. When the next change starts, the three hold icons 9A are not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, the three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(G). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as when they were displayed during the previous change. In other words, during the current change corresponding to the hold icon (white) on the far right of the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to that change does not move. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The three reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next change starts. When the next change starts, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, two reserved icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(I). At this time, the two reserved icons 9A are in a state where one is less than when they were displayed at the previous change. On the other hand, of the two reserved icons 9A, at the time of the current change corresponding to the reserved icon (black) on the far right, the reserved icon corresponding to the change does not move. After that, the two reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 120(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The two reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next change corresponding to the reserved icon 9A (white) on the far left starts.

[Pending icon movement change performance C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon movement change performance C. The reserved icon movement change performance is a performance in which multiple reserved icons are displayed during a specific change, and the reserved icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the reserved icon movement change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), four reserved icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative pattern. The four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a row horizontally, and each corresponds to each change after the next change, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each change after the next change. Here, the reserved icon 9A can suggest the expected degree by color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the character image CHA is displayed and one of the reserved icons 9A (here, the third from the right) changes to a reserved state. Specifically, the color of the reserved icon 9A changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of a win in the variation corresponding to the reserved state that has changed to a reserved state has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(C), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The four reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the next change starts. The change shown in FIG. 121(D) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the four reserved icons 9A are not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, the four reserved icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121(E). At this time, the four reserved icons 9A are in the same state as when they were displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, among the four reserved icons 9A, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost reserved icon (mesh pattern), the reserved icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A were displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moves to the left, as shown in FIG. 121(F). Then, as shown in FIG. 121(G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position where it overlaps with another hold icon 9C. After that, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and is not displayed when it is fixed and stopped. After that, the next change starts. When the next change starts, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121(I). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as when they were displayed during the previous change. In other words, of the three hold icons 9A, during the current change corresponding to the hold icon on the far right (white), the hold icon corresponding to that change does not move. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The reserved icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. FIG. 121(J) corresponds to FIG. 120(H) of the reserved icon movement and change performance B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120(I) and (J) of the reserved icon movement and change performance B are executed.

[Pending icon movement change performance D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon movement change performance D. The reserved icon movement change performance is a performance in which multiple reserved icons are displayed during a specific change, and the reserved icon corresponding to the specific change moves after the start of the specific change. In the reserved icon movement change performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), four reserved icons 9A are displayed during the change of the decorative pattern. The four reserved icons 9A are displayed in a row horizontally, and each corresponds to each change after the next change, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each change after the next change. Here, the reserved icon 9A can suggest the expected degree by the color. In FIG. 122 (A), the reserved icon 9A is not yet in a state of suggesting the expected degree.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the character image CHA is displayed and two of the reserved icons 9A (here, the rightmost and the third from the right) change to a reserved state. Specifically, the color of one reserved icon 9A changes from white to a mesh pattern, and the other changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of a win in the variation corresponding to the reserved state that has changed has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The four reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), the next change starts. The change shown in FIG. 122(D) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the next change (specific change) starts, the four reserved icons 9A are not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, the four reserved icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122(E). At this time, the four reserved icons 9A are in the same state as when they were displayed at the time of the previous change. That is, among the four reserved icons 9A, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost reserved icon (mesh pattern), the reserved icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the four hold icons 9A were displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moves to the left, as shown in FIG. 122(F). Then, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position where it overlaps with another hold icon 9C. After that, these hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and is not displayed when it is fixed and stopped. After that, the next change starts. When the next change starts, the hold icon 9A is not displayed. After that, after a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the change, three hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122(I). At this time, the three hold icons 9A are in the same state as when they were displayed during the previous change. In other words, of the three hold icons 9A, during the current change corresponding to the hold icon on the far right (white), the hold icon corresponding to that change does not move. After that, the three hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The reserved icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. FIG. 122(J) corresponds to FIG. 120(H) of the reserved icon movement and change performance B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120(I) and (J) of the reserved icon movement and change performance B are executed.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the pending icon movement and change presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 119(C)-(E), a first effect can be executed in which a plurality of predetermined images (four reserved icons 9C) are displayed during a specific change, and each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each change after the specific change, and can indicate the expected probability of a win in each change, and among the plurality of predetermined images, a predetermined image corresponding to a specific change can execute a second effect in which a predetermined movement starts after the specific change starts. According to this configuration, the unprecedented novel effect of shifting after the start of the change can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 120-122.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 119(C), in the first performance, a plurality of predetermined images (four reserved icons 9C) are displayed in a line. According to this configuration, the unprecedented and novel performance of the reserved icons shifting after the start of the fluctuation can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 120 to 122.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 119(C), the predetermined image (reserved icon 9C) indicates the degree of expectation by color. With this configuration, the reserved icon that shifts after the start of the fluctuation is an unprecedented and novel presentation, which can visually entertain the player and increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 120 to 122.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 119(A), a plurality of predetermined images (four reserved icons 9C) are displayed during the change before a specific change. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 120 to 122.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 121(F)-(G) and 122(F)-(G), in the second presentation, the predetermined image corresponding to a specific change moves to a position where it overlaps with another predetermined image. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 119(F), 120(G), 121(I), and 122(I), during the next variation after a specific variation, a third effect can be executed in which, of the multiple predetermined images, predetermined images other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation are displayed. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.

[Modification]
Below are some modified examples of the pending icon movement and change presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, four reserved icons 9A are displayed side by side as the predetermined image at the time of a specific change. However, the reserved icons 9A as the predetermined image do not necessarily have to be configured to be displayed in four as long as they are configured to be capable of displaying multiple (two or more) reserved icons at the time of a specific change.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern is exemplified as a predetermined image that corresponds to each of the following variations and indicates the expected degree of winning in each of the following variations, but the predetermined image is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined image may be the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern, or may be another image. In other words, any image that corresponds to each of the following variations and indicates the expected degree of winning in each of the following variations can be used as the predetermined image.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the reserved icon movement change performances A to D may be appropriately combined. In addition, the specific change does not have to be a particularly limited change, and all changes may fall under the "specific change."

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Embodiment E3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
During a specific variation, a first performance can be executed in which a plurality of the predetermined images are displayed,
The plurality of predetermined images each correspond to a variation subsequent to the specific variation, and are capable of indicating an expected probability of winning in each variation;
Among the plurality of predetermined images, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific change can execute a second performance in which a predetermined movement is started after the specific change starts.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E3-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first performance, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed in a row.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E3-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The predetermined image indicates the degree of expectation by a color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
During a fluctuation before the specific fluctuation, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
In the second performance, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific change moves to a position where it overlaps with another predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
During a variation following the specific variation, a third performance can be executed in which a predetermined image other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation among the plurality of predetermined images is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, the next mode start display effects A to D during the change will be explained using Figures 123 to 126. These next mode start display effects during the change can be executed during the change display of the decorative pattern, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change display start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the next mode start display effect during the change, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Next mode start display during fluctuation A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the next mode start display performance A during a change. The next mode start display performance during a change is a performance that notifies the start of the mode to be advanced when the special drawing result corresponding to the specific change (the change in question) is a miss during a specific change, even before the end (confirmation stop) of the change in question. Here, the "specific change" refers to a change in which a progress mode selection performance is executed in which the mode to be advanced after the change is determined (selected) according to the drawing result (win or miss) of the change in question. Here, the "mode" refers to a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined performance is executed.

In the next mode start display performance A during a change, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), four reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The change shown in FIG. 123(A) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the change in FIG. 123(A) is being executed, the game state is normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the change ends, and then the game enters the "success mode" of the time-saving game. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a miss, the game state remains normal and enters the "failure mode". In both the success mode and the failure mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

After the change display in FIG. 123(A) has elapsed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five lines), the change display disappears, as shown in FIG. 123(B), and a mode image MDG with the words "Success Mode" written in text is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, a different effect is executed depending on whether the change is a hit or a miss.

If the variation is a miss, a failure mode entry image LMG with the words "Entering failure mode" written on it is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 123 (C). This notifies the player that they have entered failure mode. In other words, even before the end (confirmation stop) of this specific variation, the start of the mode to be entered when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a miss is notified. Together with the display of this failure mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a specified background image. In this case, it is switched to a background image of diagonal lines. The background image here includes not only those composed of videos of specific character images, etc., but also solid colors and patterns.

After that, the failure mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 123(D), the change display, the four hold icons 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed again. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the hold icon 9C disappears along with the final stop (the end of the specific change). Here, the final stop is at "567". At this point, since the game has already entered the failure mode, the background image etc. is already in the failure mode, and this continues. Then, after the hold icon 9A shifts, the next change (the change after the specific change) begins, as shown in FIG. 123(F). The game state for the next change is also normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in the failure mode.

After that, as shown in Figure 123 (G), the reserved icon 9C disappears along with the confirmation stop. Here, it is confirmed and stopped at "721". Then, after the reserved icon 9A shifts, the next change (the change after the specific change) starts as shown in Figure 123 (H). The game state for the next change is also normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is executed. The background image continues to be that of the failure mode.

Returning to FIG. 123(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 123(A) is a jackpot, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 123(I), in response to the operation of the performance button 63. Here, it is fixed and stopped at "333". Then, the jackpot game starts. After the jackpot game ends, the game state switches to a time-saving state, and as shown in FIG. 123(J), a success mode entry image WMG with the words "Entering success mode" written in text is displayed. This notifies the player that the success mode has been entered. Together with the display of this success mode entry image WMG, the background image switches to a specified background image. Here, it switches to a background image with many fine cross patterns. After this, the variation display of the second special pattern lottery is executed.

[Next mode start display during fluctuation B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the next mode start display performance B during a change. The next mode start display performance during a change is a performance that notifies the start of the mode to proceed when the special drawing result corresponding to the specific change (the change in question) is a miss during a specific change, even before the end (confirmation stop) of the change in question. Here, the "specific change" refers to a change in which a progress mode selection performance is executed in which the mode to proceed after the change is determined (selected) according to the drawing result (win or miss) of the change in question. Here, the "mode" refers to a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined performance is executed.

In the next mode start display performance B during the change, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), four reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The change shown in FIG. 124(A) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the change in FIG. 124(A) is being executed, the game state is normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the change ends, and then the game enters the "time-saving mode" for time-saving play. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a miss, the game state remains normal and enters the "battle mode". In both the time-saving mode and the battle mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

After the change display in FIG. 124(A) has elapsed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five lines), the change display disappears, as shown in FIG. 124(B), and a mode image MDG with the words "Time-saving mode" written in text is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, a different effect is executed depending on whether the change is a hit or a miss.

If the variation is a miss, a battle mode entry image LMG with the words "Enter battle mode" written on it is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 124 (C). This notifies the player that they have entered battle mode. In other words, even before the end (confirmation stop) of this specific variation, the start of the mode to be entered when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a miss is notified. Together with the display of this battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a specified background image. In this case, it is switched to a background image of diagonal lines. The background image here includes not only those composed of videos of specific character images, etc., but also solid colors and patterns.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and a movie image of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battling is displayed as shown in FIG. 124(D). In addition, four reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 124(E), the ally character CRA is defeated, the game stops as a miss, and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be. At this time, since the game has already entered the battle mode, the background image, etc., is already in the battle mode and continues to be in the battle mode. Then, after the reserved icon 9A shifts, the next change (the next change after the specific change) starts as shown in FIG. 124(F). The game state for the next change is also normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is executed. The background image continues to be that of the battle mode.

After that, as shown in Figure 124 (G), the ally character CRA is defeated, the game stops as a confirmed miss, and the reserved icon 9C disappears. Then, after the reserved icon 9A shifts, the next change (the change after the specific change) begins as shown in Figure 124 (H). The game state for the next change is also normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be that of the battle mode.

Returning to FIG. 124(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 124(A) is a jackpot, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the form of a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 124(I), in response to the operation of the performance button 63. Here, it is fixed and stopped at "333". After that, the jackpot game starts. After the jackpot game ends, the game state switches to the time-saving state, and as shown in FIG. 124(J), a time-saving mode entry image WMG with the words "Enter time-saving mode" is displayed. This notifies the player that the time-saving mode has been entered. Together with the display of the time-saving mode entry image WMG, the background image switches to a specified background image. Here, it switches to a background image with many fine cross patterns. After this, the variation display of the second special pattern lottery is executed.

[Next mode start display during fluctuation C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the next mode start display performance C during a change. The next mode start display performance during a change is a performance that notifies the start of the mode to proceed when the special drawing result corresponding to the specific change (the change in question) is a miss during a specific change, even before the end (confirmation stop) of the change in question. Here, the "specific change" refers to a change in which a progress mode selection performance is executed in which the mode to proceed after the change is determined (selected) according to the drawing result (win or miss) of the change in question. Here, the "mode" refers to a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined performance is executed.

In the next mode start display effect C during a change, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), four reserved icons 9B and the reserved icon 9C are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The change shown in FIG. 125(A) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. The game state when the change in FIG. 125(A) is being executed is the time-saving state, and the second special pattern lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the change ends, and then the game enters the "time-saving mode" for time-saving gameplay. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game enters the normal "battle mode". In both the time-saving mode and the battle mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

After the change display in FIG. 125(A) has been displayed, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., five lines) has elapsed, the change display disappears, as shown in FIG. 125(B), and a mode image MDG with the words "Time-saving mode" written in text is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, a different effect is executed depending on whether the change (specific change) is a hit or a miss.

If the variation is a miss, a battle mode entry image LMG with the words "Enter battle mode" written on it is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 125 (C). This notifies the player that they have entered battle mode. In other words, even before the end (confirmation stop) of this specific variation, the start of the mode to be entered when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a miss is notified. Together with the display of this battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a specified background image. In this case, it is switched to a background image of diagonal lines. The background image here includes not only those composed of videos of specific character images, etc., but also solid colors and patterns.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 125(D), an expectation image KG showing the expectation of a jackpot after the next variation is displayed. Here, since there are four reserved (reserved icon 9B) for the second special pattern lottery during the relevant variation (specific variation), four expectation levels are displayed. The one corresponding to the first reserved to be executed next is "First round... 10%", suggesting that the probability of a jackpot in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second reserved to be executed after the next is "Second round... 15%", suggesting that the probability of a jackpot in the next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third reserved is "Third round... 18%", and the one corresponding to the fourth reserved is "Fourth round... 21%". When this expectation image KG is displayed, the specific variation ends and the pattern is fixed and stopped. After the fixed stop, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state. Since you have already entered battle mode, the background image etc. is already in battle mode and continues to be in that state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(E), when the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) starts, the words "First round begins!" are displayed, and a movie image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battling is displayed. The game state is normal (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), ally character CRA is defeated, and the pattern stops as a confirmed miss. A decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(G), the next variation (the variation after the one specified variation) begins, the words "Round 2 begins!" are displayed, and a movie image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battling is displayed. The game state is normal (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 125(H), ally character CRA is defeated, and the pattern stops as a confirmed miss. A decorative pattern is not displayed, but may be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(I), the next variation (the variation after the one after the specific variation) begins, the words "Third round begins!" are displayed, and a movie image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battling is displayed. The game state is normal (non-time-saving state). Here, as shown in FIG. 125(J), ally character CRA wins, and the symbols stop at a fixed jackpot. No decorative symbols are displayed, but they may be. The background image continues to be that of the battle mode.

Returning to FIG. 125(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 125(A) is a jackpot, the same effects as those in FIG. 124(I) and FIG. 124(J) of the mid-variation next mode start display effect B described above are executed.

[Next mode start display during fluctuation D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the next mode start display performance D during a change. The next mode start display performance during a change is a performance that notifies the start of the mode to proceed when the special drawing result corresponding to the specific change (the change in question) is a miss during a specific change, even before the end (confirmation stop) of the change in question. Here, the "specific change" refers to a change in which a progress mode selection performance is executed in which the mode to proceed after the change is determined (selected) according to the drawing result (win or miss) of the change in question. Here, the "mode" refers to a state in which an image such as a background, a decorative pattern, or a character is displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined performance is executed.

In the next mode start display effect D during a change, first, as shown in FIG. 126(A), four reserved icons 9B and the reserved icon 9C are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The change shown in FIG. 126(A) corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. The game state when the change in FIG. 126(A) is being executed is the time-saving state, and the second special pattern lottery is being executed. In this change, if the lottery result is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed after the change ends, and then the game enters the "time-saving mode" for time-saving gameplay. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a miss, the game enters the normal "battle mode". In both the time-saving mode and the battle mode, the background image is switched to a dedicated screen.

After the change display in FIG. 126(A) has been displayed, when a predetermined period of time (e.g., five lines) has elapsed, the change display disappears, as shown in FIG. 126(B), and a mode image MDG with the words "Time-saving mode" written in text is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the effect button 63, a different effect is executed depending on whether the change (specific change) is a hit or a miss.

If the variation is a miss, a battle mode entry image LMG with the words "Enter battle mode" written on it is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 126 (C). This notifies the player that they have entered battle mode. In other words, even before the end (confirmation stop) of this specific variation, the start of the mode to be entered when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a miss is notified. Together with the display of this battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a specified background image. In this case, it is switched to a background image of diagonal lines. The background image here includes not only those composed of videos of specific character images, etc., but also solid colors and patterns.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 126(D), an expectation image KG showing the expectation of a jackpot from the next variation onwards and a timer image TM1 are displayed. Here, since there are four reserved second special symbol lotteries (reservation icons 9B) at the time of the relevant variation (specific variation), four expectation levels are displayed in the expectation image KG. The one corresponding to the first reserved to be executed next is "First Round...10%", suggesting that the probability of a jackpot in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second reserved to be executed next is "Second Round...15%", suggesting that the probability of a jackpot in the lottery after that is 15%. The one corresponding to the third reserved is "Third Round...18%", and the one corresponding to the fourth reserved is "Fourth Round...21%". When the timer value reaches "0" due to the countdown of the timer image TM1, both the expectation image KG and the timer image TM1 disappear from the screen, and then the symbols are fixed and stopped (the specific variation ends). After the fixed and stopped patterns are fixed, the game state switches from the time-saving state to the normal state. Since the game has already entered the battle mode, the background image, etc. is already in the battle mode and continues to be in that state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(E), when the next variation (the variation following the specific variation) begins, the words "First round begins!" are displayed, and a movie image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battling is displayed. The game state is normal (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the expectation image KG is displayed again. Here, the same four expectation levels are shown as in the previous variation (specific variation). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(G), the portion that corresponds to this variation, "First round...10%", moves to the right and frames out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the ally character CRA is defeated and the pattern stops as a confirmed miss. No decorative pattern is displayed, but it may be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(I), the next variation (the variation after the one following the specific variation) begins, the words "Round 2 begins!" are displayed, and a movie image of ally character CRA and enemy character CRB battling is displayed. The game state is normal (non-time-saving state). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the expectation image KG is displayed again. Here, unlike the previous variation, three expectation levels are shown, with "Round 1... 10%" no longer included. After that, the portion of "Round 2... 15%" that corresponds to the current variation may move to the right and go out of the frame, or it may not move.

Returning to FIG. 126(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 126(A) is a jackpot, the same effects as those in FIG. 124(I) and FIG. 124(J) of the variation next mode start display effect B described above are executed.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the display showing the start of the next mode during fluctuation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123(C), if the lottery result corresponding to a specific variation is a miss during the variation, the first effect (display of a failure mode entry image LMG) can be executed to notify the start of the mode (failure mode) to be entered when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is a miss, even before the end of the variation. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, and interest can be increased. Also, with this configuration, the sense of unity of the effect spanning multiple variations can be further enhanced. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 123(B), in a specific variation, before the notification, an operation means image (button image BTN) is displayed. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figs. 124 to 126.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 123(B), before the notification, an image (mode image MDG) representing the mode (success mode) to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the particular variation is successful is displayed. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest. The same is true for Figs. 124 to 126.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 125(D), after a notification in a specific variation, a specific image (expectation image KG) is displayed, which indicates the expectation of a win in each variation executed after the specific variation. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 126.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 125, the game state (time-saving state) at the time of a specific change and the game state (normal state) in the mode that advances when a win occurs are different from each other, and the game state at the time of the specific change is more advantageous for the player. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Fig. 126.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 125, the game state (time-saving state) at the time of a specific change and the game state (time-saving state) in the mode in which the game advances when the player wins are the same game state, and both are more advantageous to the player than the game state (normal state) in the mode in which the game advances when the player loses. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Fig. 126.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the display indicating the start of the next mode during fluctuation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, an image LMG displayed as "Entering failure mode" (instance A of next mode start during variation) or "Entering battle mode" (instance B to D of next mode start during variation) is displayed as an effect to notify the start of the mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is a miss. However, the content of the image LMG is not limited to these and may be any content. Also, the characters "enter" or "start" are not necessarily required to notify the start of the mode, and only the mode name may be used. Even in this case, the start of the mode can be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the portion where the decorative pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, or may be displayed in a different size (for example, small). If the decorative pattern is small or not displayed, it is difficult to know whether the change is continuing at the start of the mode, and the sense of unity of the performance spanning multiple changes can be further enhanced.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the next mode start display effects A to D during the change may be appropriately combined. In addition, the specific change does not have to be a particularly limited change, and all changes may fall under the "specific change."

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Embodiment E4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When a lottery result corresponding to a specific variation is a miss during the specific variation, a first performance is executed to notify the start of a mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the specific variation is a miss, even before the end of the specific variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E4-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 further comprises:
The game machine is provided with an operating means operable by a player,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image representing the operation means;
In the specific variation, the operation means image is displayed before the notification.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E4-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
In the specific variation, before the notification, an image showing a mode to be advanced when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is won is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the specific variation, after the notification, a specific image is displayed indicating the probability of winning each variation executed after the specific variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The game state at the time of the specific variation and the game state in the mode in which the game advances when the player loses are different from each other, and the game state at the time of the specific variation is more advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The game state at the time of the specific variation and the game state in the mode in which the game advances when the player wins are the same game state, and both of them are more advantageous to the player than the game state in the mode in which the game advances when the player loses.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D using Figures 127 to 130. These predetermined image continuous display effects can be executed after a big win or during a decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start or command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a predetermined image continuous display effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect A]
127 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display performance A. The predetermined image continuous display performance is a performance in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a number of changes, and when a specific change starts after the number of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, the description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the specified image continuous display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the reserved icon 9C is displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. When the change in FIG. 127(A) is being executed, the game state is normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 127(B), the first special pattern wins during this change, and a new reserved icon 9A is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(C), the first special pattern wins again during this change, and a new reserved icon 9A is displayed, bringing the total to two. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(D), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "567", and the reserved icon 9C disappears.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the reserved icons 9A shift one by one to the right, and the oldest reserved icon 9A located at the far right moves to the reserved display area and becomes the reserved icon 9C. Also, as shown in FIG. 127(E), a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed at the start of this change. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiling face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract haze such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Whether or not this predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a big win game), or may be displayed when the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). The conditions for whether or not to display the specified image CHA can be any conditions.

Naturally, this change corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the specified image CHA is displayed. Here, the specified image CHA continues to be displayed during the change corresponding to the hold due to winning before the specified image CHA is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the change ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The specified image CHA continues to be displayed. In other words, the specified image CHA is displayed when the change begins and continues to be displayed even when the change is fixed and stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 127(G), the reserved icon 9A moves to the reserved display area on the right and becomes the reserved icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. This change also corresponds to the reserved (reserved icon 9A) due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed during the change corresponding to the reserved due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 127(H), during this change, a new reserved icon 9A is displayed due to the winning of the first special pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(I), the change ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA is displayed when the change starts and continues to be displayed when the change stops.

As shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next change also begins. This change corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the next change (specific change) begins, the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right and becomes the hold icon 9C. The specified image CHA disappears at the same time as this change begins. This is because this change (specific change) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to a winning prize after the specified image CHA is displayed.

[Continuous display of a specified image effect B]
128 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display performance B. The predetermined image continuous display performance is a performance in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a number of changes, and when a specific change starts after the number of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, the description will be given assuming that the predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), the reserved icon 9C is displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. When the change in FIG. 128(A) is being executed, the game state is normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 128(B), the first special pattern wins during this change, and a new reserved icon 9A is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128(C), the first special pattern wins again during this change, and a new reserved icon 9A is displayed, bringing the total to two. After that, as shown in FIG. 128(D), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "567", and the reserved icon 9C disappears.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 128(E), the reserved icons 9A shift one by one to the right, and the oldest reserved icon 9A located at the far right moves to the reserved display area and becomes the reserved icon 9C. Also, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed at the start of this change. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiling face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract haze such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. Whether or not this predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. The predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of changes reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a big win game), or may be displayed when the game state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). The conditions for whether or not to display the specified image CHA can be any conditions.

Naturally, this change corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the specified image CHA is displayed. Here, the specified image CHA continues to be displayed during the change corresponding to the hold due to winning before the specified image CHA is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), the change ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "789", and the hold icon 9C disappears. The specified image CHA continues to be displayed. In other words, the specified image CHA is displayed when the change begins and continues to be displayed even when the change is fixed and stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 128(G), the reserved icon 9A moves to the reserved display area on the right and becomes the reserved icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. This change also corresponds to the reserved (reserved icon 9A) due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed during the change corresponding to the reserved due to the winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 128(H), during this change, a new reserved icon 9B is displayed due to the winning of the second special pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 128(I), the change ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA is displayed when the change starts and continues to be displayed when the change stops.

As shown in FIG. 128 (J), the next change begins. This change corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. When the next change (specific change) begins, the hold icon 9B moves to the hold display area on the left and becomes the hold icon 9C. The specified image CHA disappears at the same time as this change begins. This is because this change (specific change) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to a winning prize after the specified image CHA is displayed.

[Continuous display of a specified image C]
Fig. 129 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display performance C. The predetermined image continuous display performance is a performance in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a number of changes, and when a specific change starts after the number of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, the description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the specified image continuous display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), two reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. When the change in FIG. 129(A) is being executed, the game state is normal (non-time-saving state), and the first special pattern lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 129(B), the decorative pattern stops at the jackpot result (pattern) of "333", and the reserved icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), the opening performance of the jackpot starts. Here, a text image of "jackpot game starts" is displayed. After that, the jackpot game is played. When the predetermined jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 129(D), the ending performance of the jackpot is played. Here, a text image of "jackpot game ends" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiling face. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects. When the jackpot game ends, the game state is switched to a time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), the display of the decorative pattern changes begins. At this time, one reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed. The game state when the change in FIG. 129(E) is being executed is the time-saving state, and a first special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 129(B) is executed. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed during the change corresponding to the reserved that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 129(B).

After that, as shown in FIG. 129(F), the variation ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "789", and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The specified image CHA continues to be displayed. In other words, the specified image CHA is displayed before the variation starts, and continues to be displayed when the variation is fixed and stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 129(G), the reserved icon 9A moves to the reserved display area on the right and becomes the reserved icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. This change also corresponds to the reserved that was won before the big win in FIG. 129(B). As described above, the predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed during the change corresponding to the reserved due to the winning before the big win in FIG. 129(B). As shown in FIG. 129(H), during this change, a new reserved icon 9B is displayed due to the winning of the second special pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 129(I), the change ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA continues to be displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the change of this change starts, and continues to be displayed when it is fixed and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 129(J), the next change begins. This change corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. The game state continues in the time-saving state. When the next change (specific change) begins, the reserve icon 9B moves to the reserve display area on the left and becomes the reserve icon 9C. The specified image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this change. This is because this change (specific change) corresponds to the reserve (reserve icon 9B) due to a win before the big win in FIG. 129(B).

[Continuous display of a specified image D]
130 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display performance D. The predetermined image continuous display performance is a performance in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a number of changes, and when a specific change starts after the number of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, the description will be given assuming that the predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the specified image continuous display performance D, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the first special pattern lottery, and then, as shown in Figure 130 (A), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at the jackpot result (pattern) of "333", and the reserved icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), the opening performance of the jackpot begins. Here, a text image of "Jackpot game begins" is displayed. After that, the jackpot game is played. When the specified jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 130(C), the ending performance of the jackpot is played. Here, a text image of "Jackpot game ends" and a specified image CHA representing a character are displayed. This specified image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiling face. The specific object is not limited to a character, living thing, or object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

After the predetermined image CHA is displayed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a specific image CHB is displayed, covering a portion of the predetermined image CHA. Here, the specific image CHB, like the predetermined image CHA, is an image representing a specific object, and here is configured as a character image representing a smiling face wearing sunglasses. After that, the big win game ends, and here the game state is switched to a time-saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), the display of the decorative pattern changes begins. At this time, one reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed. The game state when the change in FIG. 130(E) is being executed is the time-saving state, and a first special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A) is executed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB continue to be displayed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB continue to be displayed during the change corresponding to the reserved that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 130(F), the variation ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "789", and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB continue to be displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the variation starts, and continue to be displayed when the variation is fixed and stopped.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 130(G), the reserved icon 9A moves to the reserved display area on the right and becomes the reserved icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB continue to be displayed. This change also corresponds to the reserved that was won before the big win in FIG. 130(A). As described above, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB continue to be displayed during the change corresponding to the reserved due to the winning before the big win in FIG. 130(A). As shown in FIG. 130(H), during this change, a new reserved icon 9B is displayed due to the winning of the second special pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 130(I), the change ends, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the reserved icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB continue to be displayed. In other words, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the change of this change starts, and continue to be displayed when it is fixed and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 130(J), the next change begins. This change corresponds to the "specific change" in the claims. The game state continues in a time-saving state. When the next change (specific change) begins, the reserve icon 9B moves to the reserve display area on the left and becomes the reserve icon 9C. The specified image CHA and the specific image CHB disappear at the same time as the change begins. This is because this change (specific change) corresponds to the reserve (reserve icon 9B) due to a win before the big win in FIG. 130(A).

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the continuous display of a specific image is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 127(E)-(I), a first effect in which the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed over a number of variations, and as shown in Fig. 127(J), a second effect in which the predetermined image CHA disappears when a specific variation starts after a number of variations, can be executed. With this configuration, a novel and unprecedented effect can be provided to visually entertain the player, and interest can be enhanced. The same is true for Fig. 128-Fig. 130.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 127, the multiple changes are changes corresponding to multiple reserved winnings before the predetermined image CHA is displayed, and the specific change is a change corresponding to a reserved winning during the multiple changes. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Figs. 128 to 130.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 129, multiple variations are executed after a winning game, and the predetermined image CHA is displayed during the winning game and continues to be displayed during multiple variations after the winning game. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 130.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 130, during a winning game, a predetermined image CHA is displayed, and then a specific image CHB is displayed superimposed on the predetermined image CHA, and continues to be displayed for multiple variations after the winning game. According to this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 129, the multiple variations are variations of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the specific variations are variations of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. With this configuration, a novel presentation that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 130.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the predetermined image continuous display effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, a character image is displayed as the predetermined image CHA. However, the predetermined image CHA may have any content. For example, the predetermined image CHA may be a text image expressing a specific content, an image for calling attention to ball removal, or an image for encouraging the ball to land in a specific position. Or, it may be a right-hitting image.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined image continuous display performance C, the multiple variations shown in Fig. 129(E)-(I) are variations of the first special symbol lottery, and the specific variation shown in Fig. 129(J) is a variation of the second special symbol lottery. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reversed. That is, the multiple variations shown in Fig. 129(E)-(I) may be variations of the second special symbol lottery, and the specific variation shown in Fig. 129(J) may be variations of the first special symbol lottery.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Embodiment E5-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
A first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of variations;
A second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when a specific change after the multiple changes starts.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The multiple variations are variations corresponding to multiple reserved winnings before the predetermined image is displayed,
The specific fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a winning reservation during the multiple fluctuations.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The multiple fluctuations are performed after a winning game,
The predetermined image is displayed during the winning game, and is continuously displayed during the multiple variations after the winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-4]
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image;
During the winning game, the predetermined image is displayed, and then the specific image is displayed superimposed on the predetermined image, and after the winning game, the specific image is continuously displayed during the multiple variations.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The multiple variations are variations of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The specific variation is the variation of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Embodiment E5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The predetermined image is an image that prompts the player to put the ball in a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, background image switching effects A to D will be explained using Figures 131 to 134. These background image switching effects can be executed after a big win or during a decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start or command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a background image switching effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Background image switching effect A]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching performance A. The background image switching performance is a performance in which the background image (background display) is switched with the fixed stop of the pattern, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R). Four reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The game state is the normal state (non-time-saving state).

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA that represents a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image that represents a smiling face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. A background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes images that are composed of a video of a specific character image, as well as monochromatic objects and patterns. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed in the same position without moving, or the position where it is displayed may change due to movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented in monochromatic color, but it may also have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, a timer image TM1 is displayed, as shown in Figure 131 (B). Here, it says "3 seconds left." At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0" as shown in Figure 131 (C), the fluctuation of the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) then slows down and temporarily stops at "789" as shown in Figure 131 (D). "Temporary stop" here refers to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side with a slight upward and downward movement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(E), the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by diagonal lines across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, the decorative patterns that are fixed and stopped disappear, and as shown in FIG. 131(F), a telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "Coming soon". As shown in FIG. 131(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The pattern is fixed and stopped. As shown in FIG. 131(E) to (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the pattern is fixed and stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next change. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented in a single color, but may also have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next change, the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are displayed in a changing manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), the text image MLG "It's spring" is displayed during the change. The text content of this text image MLG is configured to correspond to the text content of the caption image TRP. Here, the caption image TRP is "Soon," and the text image MLG is "Spring," which together form the single sentence "Spring is coming soon." The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are maintained in a changing display.

[Background image switching effect B]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching performance B. The background image switching performance is a performance in which the background image (background display) is switched with the fixed stop of the pattern, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), the background image is the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R). Here, the pattern (8l, 8c, 8r) is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 7a. In addition, four reserved icons 9A and the reserved icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The game state is a time-saving state.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA that represents a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image that represents a smiling face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. A background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes images that are composed of a video of a specific character image, as well as monochromatic objects and patterns. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed in the same position without moving, or the position where it is displayed may change due to movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented in monochromatic color, but it may also have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, a timer image TM1 is displayed, as shown in Figure 132 (B). Here, it says "3 seconds left." At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0" as shown in Figure 132 (C), the fluctuation of the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) slows down and then temporarily stops at "789" as shown in Figure 132 (D). "Temporary stop" here refers to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side with a slight upward and downward movement. The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to display fluctuations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(E), the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by diagonal lines over the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) that are fixed and stopped disappear, and the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 132(F). The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "Coming soon". At this time, the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in the fixed and stopped state. As shown in FIG. 132(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are not yet confirmed. The patterns are not yet confirmed. As shown in Figures 132 (E) to (H), while the patterns are not yet confirmed, the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next change. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented in a single color, but may also have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next change, the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a changing manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(J), the text image MLG "It's spring" is displayed while changing. The text content of this text image MLG is configured to correspond to the text content of the caption image TRP. Here, the caption image TRP is "Almost there" and the text image MLG is "Spring", which together form the single sentence "Spring will soon be here". The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a changing display.

[Background image switching effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching performance C. The background image switching performance is a performance in which the background image (background display) is switched with the fixed stop of the pattern, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the pattern (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, the game state is the time-saving state, and the second special pattern lottery is being executed. The decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R), the reserved icon 9B, and the reserved icon 9C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA that represents a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image that represents a smiling face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. A background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes images that are composed of a video of a specific character image, as well as monochromatic objects and patterns. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed in the same position without moving, or the position where it is displayed may change due to movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented in monochromatic color, but it may also have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, a timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in Figure 133 (B). Here, it says "3 seconds left." At this time, the first background image HG1 continues to be displayed. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0" as shown in Figure 133 (C), the predetermined image CHA then disappears from the first background image HG1 as shown in Figure 133 (D). The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to display fluctuations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(E), the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by diagonal lines across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, as shown in FIG. 133(F), a telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "Coming soon". At this time, the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. As shown in FIG. 133(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped. The patterns are fixed and stopped. As shown in Figures 133 (E) to (H), while the pattern determination is stopped, the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next variation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented in a single color, but may also have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a varying manner. From this variation, the game state switches to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(J), the text image MLG "Spring is coming" is displayed while changing. The text content of this text image MLG is configured to correspond to the text content of the caption image TRP. Here, the caption image TRP is "Soon," and the text image MLG is "Spring is coming," which together form the single sentence "Spring is coming soon." The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a changing display.

[Background image switching effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the background image switching performance D. The background image switching performance is a performance in which the background image (background display) is switched with the fixed stop of the pattern, and the display of the switched background image is maintained during the fixed stop. In the background image switching performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the pattern (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, a reserved promotion image of "Save reserved!!" and a reserved number image showing the reserved number of the current second special pattern of "reserved number 0" are displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. The game state is a time-saving state, and the second special pattern lottery is being executed. The decorative pattern (8L, 8C, 8R), the reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9C are not displayed.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA that represents a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image that represents a smiling face as an example. The specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, but also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as monochromatic objects, patterns, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. A background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes images that are composed of a video of a specific character image, as well as monochromatic objects and patterns. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed in the same position without moving, or the position where it is displayed may change due to movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, the first background image HG1 has other parts of the predetermined image CHA represented in monochromatic color, but it may also have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a specified period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, a timer image TM1 is displayed, as shown in Figure 134 (B). Here, it says "3 seconds left." Due to the winning of the second special pattern, the reserved number image becomes "reserved number 2." As shown in Figure 134 (C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0," an ending image saying "That's it!!" and an expectation indication image saying "First reserve... 10%" and "Second reserve... 20%" are displayed. The expectation indication image shows the expectation of a jackpot for each of these two reserves. Specifically, it shows that the expectation of the next fluctuation is 10%, and the expectation of the fluctuation after that is 20%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the specified image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. Then, a text image saying "It's finally starting" is displayed. This suggests that the fluctuations corresponding to the two pending events will start soon. The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to display the fluctuations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Here, the second background image HG2 is represented by diagonal lines across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific object. After that, as shown in FIG. 134(F), a telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP is composed of the characters "Coming soon". At this time, the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. As shown in FIG. 134(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side to the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped. The patterns are fixed and stopped. As shown in Figures 134 (E) to (H), while the pattern determination is stopped, the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next variation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star. The third background image HG3 has other parts of the specific image CHB represented in a single color, but may also have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a varying manner. From this variation, the game state switches to the normal state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(J), a text image MLG of "You might win" is displayed while it is changing. The text content of this text image MLG is configured to correspond to the text content of the caption image TRP. Here, the caption image TRP is "Soon" and the text image MLG is "You might win", which together form one sentence "You might win soon". The patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a changing display.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of background image switching effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 131 (A) to (D), a first effect is performed in which the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) are changed while the first background image HG1 is displayed, and after the first effect, as shown in Fig. 131 (E), a second effect is performed in which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, and after the second effect, as shown in Fig. 131 (E) to (H), a third effect is performed in which the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertained by the player, and an interest can be increased. The same is true for Figs. 132 to 134.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 131(I), after the third effect, a fourth effect can be executed in which the background image is switched from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 when the next change of the decorative pattern starts. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest of the player. The same is true for Figs. 132 to 134.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 131(B), in the first effect, a timer image TM1 is displayed while the first background image HG1 is being displayed, and when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (here, 0), the second effect is executed. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the player's interest. The same is true for Figs. 132 to 134.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 131(F)-(H), in the third effect, a fifth effect can be executed in which the telop image TRP frames in and out while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Fig. 132-Fig. 134.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 131(F)-(H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP is displayed while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, and the interest can be enhanced. The same is true for Fig. 132-Fig. 134.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 131(J), in the fourth effect, the text image MLG is displayed while the third background image HG3 is displayed, and the text displayed by the telop image TRP in the third effect and the text displayed by the text image MLG in the fourth effect are continuous so as to form a single sentence when combined. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect, and the interest can be increased. The same is true for Figs. 132 to 134.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of background image switching effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, the background image may be switched completely in an instant, or may be switched partially and gradually. Also, both background images may be displayed in a superimposed manner for a predetermined period of time.

[Modification 2]
The configurations of the background image switching effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
some of the plurality of types of images are a plurality of types of background images;
A first effect of varying the decorative pattern while displaying a first background image;
A second effect in which the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped after the first effect, and a background image is switched from the first background image to a second background image;
A third effect that maintains the display of the second background image while the decorative pattern is being determined and stopped after the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
After the third performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which the background image is switched from the second background image to a third background image together with the start of the next change of the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a timer image;
In the first effect, the timer image is displayed while the first background image is being displayed,
When the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
one of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image;
In the third performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the predetermined image is framed in and framed out while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-5]
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4,
the predetermined image is a telop image,
In the third effect, the caption image is displayed while the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-6]
A gaming machine according to claim 5 dependent on claim 2,
one of the plurality of types of images is a character image;
In the fourth effect, the character image is displayed while the third background image is being displayed,
the characters represented by the telop image in the third effect and the characters represented by the character image in the fourth effect are continuous so as to form one sentence when combined;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Image blurring effects A to D are explained below using Figures 135 to 138. In Figures 135 to 138, the various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing, and the first movable props 14 and second movable props 15 arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This image blurring effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to vary to when it stops). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the image blurring effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission state of the left movable part 14L and right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain image blurring effect A, then image blurring effect B, image blurring effect C, and image blurring effect D in that order.

[Image Blur Effect A]
First, the image blurring effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 135. Fig. 135 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect A. The image blurring effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In image blurring effect A, as shown in FIG. 135(A), first, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad described below moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A is no longer present at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and even when they start to change, they do not become semi-transparent, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and are always in focus and clear. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, reserved icons can be displayed in four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon is the same as the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no hold icons stored that have not been consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the changing display of the decorative symbol, the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, with the blue number "0" on the left, and the second special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero, with the red number "0" on the right, and they are displayed at a distance from each other on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, a black spherical reserved icon, a smiling spherical reserved icon, and a white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical reserved icon is further set to have a high expectation of winning in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 135(A).

The display of the decorative pattern in FIG. 135(A) starts to change, and as shown in FIG. 135(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a pattern (number) (here, the number "3" is displayed as a temporary stop). This left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop is clearly in focus, and is displayed large in the left half of the display screen 7a just before the temporary stop is displayed (or when the machine slows down to display the temporary stop). At this time, the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 135(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop with a pattern (number) (here, the number "2" is displayed as a temporary stop). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop is clear and in focus, and is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a just before it is displayed as a temporary stop (or when it decelerates to display it as a temporary stop) at the same (or nearly the same) size as the left decorative pattern 8L already displayed as a temporary stop. Because the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop is in focus, the left decorative pattern 8L already displayed as a temporary stop is out of focus and blurred (so-called "out of focus") and unclear.

The clearly focused right decorative pattern 8R, which is displayed in a provisionally stopped state, is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the unclear, out-of-focus left decorative pattern 8L, which is displayed in a provisionally stopped state (approximately the right-hand portion of the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3")).

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 135(B). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 135(B).

The out-of-focus, unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which uses a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or the sprites that make up the image), or on the target layer out of multiple layers. In other words, the out-of-focus, unclear image is not stored in ROM 103 in advance, but is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time from a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from ROM 103. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus, unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(D), the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed as a temporary stop returns to the size at the time of the change and becomes smaller and clearer in focus, and the left decorative pattern 8L starts to move into its own variable display area and is displayed as a temporary stop again. Also, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop returns to the size at the time of the change and becomes smaller and clearer in focus (the size of the right decorative pattern 8R and the size of the left decorative pattern 8L become the same size, and both the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L become clear and in focus), and the right decorative pattern 8R starts to move into its own variable display area and is displayed as a temporary stop again. Also, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 135(C). Additionally, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 135 (E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned and arranged parallel to the upper edge of the display screen 7a and are displayed as temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter simply referred to as the "upper left decorative pattern 8La"; here, the number "3") is displayed as temporarily stopped within the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 8L on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as the "upper right decorative pattern 8Ra"; here, the number "2") is displayed as temporarily stopped within the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 8R on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned and arranged parallel to the bottom edge of the display screen 7a and are displayed temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter simply referred to as the "lower left decorative pattern 8Lb") is displayed temporarily stopped with the same pattern as the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra (here, the number "2") in the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 8L on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as the "lower right decorative pattern 8Rb") is displayed temporarily stopped with the same pattern as the upper left decorative pattern 8La (here, the number "3") in the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 8R on the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

As a result, the right-upward pattern alignment line L1 connecting the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb and the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra becomes the same pattern (here, the number "2") to form a first reach, and the right-downward pattern alignment line L2 connecting the upper left decorative pattern 8La and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb becomes the same pattern (here, the number "3") to form a second reach. In other words, the right-upward pattern alignment line by the first reach and the right-downward pattern alignment line by the second reach form a so-called "double reach." Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C is still fluctuating at high speed in a semi-transparent state within its own variable display area. Also, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, respectively, continue to be displayed in FIG. 135 (D). In addition, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as shown in FIG. 135 (D).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in its own variable display area at a slower rate of change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and the variable display continues, and the middle decorative pattern 8C (here, the number "1") is displayed in a variable manner at a slow speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner at a slow speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and disappears from the bottom of the number "9" toward the bottom side of the display screen 7a, while the number "2" following the number "1" is displayed in a variable manner at a slow speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the bottom of the number "2" appears from the top side of the display screen 7a. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably behind the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display positions 9Cd, so that even if the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed variably, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display positions 9Cd are not covered by the middle decorative pattern 8C and visibility is not hindered.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 135(E). In addition, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(E).

As shown in Fig. 135(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in its own variable display area as a number "2" following the number "1" slowly varying in a display mode in which the reel rotates from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and is temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, and the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra are lined up on the pattern alignment line that rises to the right due to the first reach, with the same pattern (here, the number "2") lined up. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, respectively, are continuously displayed in Fig. 135(F). In addition, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as shown in FIG. 135 (F).

As shown in FIG. 135(H), the upper left decorative pattern 8La and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb on the pattern alignment line sloping downward to the right due to the second reach become out of focus and unclear (so-called "out of focus"). Also, the numbers HMG (here "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 135(G). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 135(G).

A jackpot is reached when the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra line up with the same pattern (here, the number "2") on the pattern alignment line that rises to the right due to the first reach, and as shown in Figure 135 (I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8c, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each enlarged in size and displayed stopped in a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, the variable display ends, and then the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 135 (H). Also, the state in which the four reservation display positions 9Ad and the reservation display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 135 (H). Also, with the end of the variable display, the reservation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The size of the middle decorative pattern 8C in Figs. 135(F) and (G) is the same as the size during fluctuation (for example, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 135(D)), and is therefore larger than the size of the upper left decorative pattern 8La, the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra, and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb. Also, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 135(I) is larger than the size during normal times (for example, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in Fig. 135(D)), but is smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L in Figs. 135(B) and (C) and the size of the right decorative pattern in Fig. 135(C).

In this way, in image blurring effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R is a clear, in-focus image, and the left decorative pattern 8L is an unclear, out-of-focus image, creating an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the decorative patterns, which provides visual entertainment for the player and increases their interest.

It can also help communicate to the player the images that the designer wants the player to focus on as the presentation progresses (in other words, the order of images that the designer wants the player to focus on by first focusing on the left decorative pattern 8L and then the right decorative pattern 8R (the intention of the designer of the presentation)).

In addition, in the image blurring effect A, for example, the right decorative pattern 8R is a clear, focused image, and the left decorative pattern 8L is an unclear, out-of-focus image, giving the decorative patterns a sense of depth, whereas in Figures 135(A) to 135(I), the numbers HMG are always clear and in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to understand the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21.

[Image Blur Effects B]
Next, the image blurring effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Fig. 136 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect B. The image blurring effect B is performed during the decorative pattern variation effect.

In image blurring effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 136(A), the effect is performed when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad described below moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, causing the hold icon 9A to no longer exist at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and even when they start to change, they do not become semi-transparent, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and are always in focus and clear. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, reserved icons can be displayed in four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon is the same as the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no hold icons stored that have not been consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the changing display of the decorative symbol, the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, with the blue number "0" on the left, and the second special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero, with the red number "0" on the right, and they are displayed at a distance from each other on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 136 (A).

The display of the decorative pattern in FIG. 136(A) starts to change, and as shown in FIG. 136(B), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state (here, white flashing). The part of the effect button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. This effect button image BTN is clearly in focus and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, respectively, continue to be displayed in FIG. 136(A).

The "predetermined light emission pattern" is set based on the likelihood of a jackpot (variable performance start command), and the likelihood of a jackpot is set to be high in the following order: flashing white light → flashing blue light → flashing green light → flashing red light → flashing gold light (flashing yellow light) → flashing seven colors (rainbow light (high likelihood of jackpot)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), in order to encourage the player to operate (push) the sword member 64, a sword image KG modeled after the sword member 64 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state (here, flashing white). At this time, the already-displayed effect button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left, and the sword image KG is displayed in focus and clear in the central area of the display screen 7a. Because the sword image KG is in focus, the already-displayed effect button image BTN is out of focus and unclear (so-called "out of focus").

The clearly focused sword image KG is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the blurred and out-of-focus performance button image BTN (the right-hand side of the performance button image BTN).

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136(B). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136(B).

The out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and emits light in a predetermined manner (it flashes in the video, so in the still image it appears either lit or off). Furthermore, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, there is no change in the size of the effect button image BTN.

The out-of-focus, unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which uses a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or the sprites that make up the image), or on the target layer out of multiple layers. In other words, the out-of-focus, unclear image is not stored in ROM 103 in advance, but is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time from a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from ROM 103. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus, unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the effect button image BTN, which is displayed out of focus, changes (or changes) into a clear, in-focus image and is moved from the left side of the display screen 7a back to the center, and is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a specified light-emitting mode. At this time, the sword image KG already displayed is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, and the effect button image BTN is clear and in focus and displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. Because the effect button image BTN is in focus, the sword image KG already displayed is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out-of-focus") and unclear.

The clearly focused performance button image BTN is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the unclear and out-of-focus sword image KG (the left side of the tsuba of the sword image KG).

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136(C). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136(C).

The out-of-focus and unclear sword image KG is a still image, and emits light in a predetermined manner (it flashes in the video, so in the still image it is either lit or off). Furthermore, when the sword image KG is moved from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(B), or may be changed to one that increases the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, from flashing white to flashing blue).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the sword image KG that is displayed out of focus changes (or changes) to a clear, in-focus image and is moved from the right side of the display screen 7a back to the center, and is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a specified light-emitting mode. At this time, the already-displayed performance button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, and the sword image KG is a clear, in-focus image and is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. Because the sword image KG is in focus, the already-displayed performance button image BTN is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out-of-focus") and unclear.

The clearly focused sword image KG is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the blurred and out-of-focus performance button image BTN (the left side portion of the performance button image BTN).

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136 (D). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136 (D).

The out-of-focus and unclear effect button image BTN is a still image, and emits light in a predetermined manner (it flashes in the video, so in the still image it appears either lit or off). Also, when the effect button image BTN is moved from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a, there is no change in the size of the sword image KG.

The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(E) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(D), or may be changed to one that increases the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, from flashing blue to flashing green).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the effect button image BTN displayed in a blurred state changes (or changes) to a clear, focused image and moves from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state. Also, the sword image KG displayed in a clear, focused state moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136(E). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136(E).

The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(E), or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, from flashing green to flashing red). The predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(E), or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, from flashing green to flashing red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), the effect button image BTN, which is displayed in a clearly focused state, is moved from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. A downward arrow image, which encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of the effect button image BTN, and a timer bar TB, which indicates the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63, is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the effect button image BTN. In addition, a message MG saying "Press it!" is displayed above the effect button image BTN, which encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. At this time, the sword image KG, which is displayed in a clearly focused state, disappears from the display screen 7a. Also, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136(F). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136(F).

The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(G) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(F), or may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, from flashing red to flashing gold (flashing yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 has elapsed (e.g., 3 seconds), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), and the variable display ends. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped and displayed as the number "1," the middle decorative pattern is displayed stopped and displayed as the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "3," resulting in a miss.

Even after the variable display has ended, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136 (G). Also, when the variable display has ended, the four reservation display positions 9Ad and the reservation display positions 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the reservation icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a with the end of the variable display.

On the other hand, following FIG. 136(F), as shown in FIG. 136(I), the sword image KG, which is displayed in a clearly focused state, is moved from the right side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed on the front left of the sword image KG in a manner that moves in small vertical movements, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, a message MG saying "Push!!" that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the front of the sword image KG. At this time, the effect button image BTN, which is displayed in a clearly focused state, disappears from the display screen 7a. Also, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136(F). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136(F).

The predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(F), or may be changed to one with a higher probability of a jackpot (for example, from flashing red to flashing gold (flashing yellow) or flashing seven colors (flashing rainbow (high probability of jackpot)).

When the player operates (pushes down) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 136(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, and the variable display ends. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern is displayed stopped at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped at the number "1", resulting in a jackpot, and then the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins.

Even after the variable display has ended, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 136 (I). Also, even after the variable display has ended, the state in which the four reservation display positions 9Ad and the reservation display positions 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 136 (I). Furthermore, when the variable display has ended, the reservation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In addition, when the effect button image BTN and sword image KG are displayed in FIG. 136(F), there are cases where the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(G) is selected and displayed, and cases where the sword image KG in FIG. 136(I) is selected and displayed, and the probability of a jackpot game (jackpot effect) occurring is higher when the sword image KG in FIG. 136(I) is selected and displayed compared to when the effect button image BTN in FIG. 136(G) is selected and displayed.

In this way, in the image blurring effect B, the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are clear images that are in focus, and the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are unclear images that are out of focus (blurred images), which allows for an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, thereby providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing the player's interest.

It can also help communicate to the player the images that the creator wants the player to focus on as the presentation progresses (in other words, the order of images that the creator wants the player to focus on (the intention of the creator of the presentation) by first focusing on the presentation button image BTN, then the sword image KG, then the presentation button image BTN, and then the sword image KG).

In addition, in the image blurring effect B, for example, the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are clear and in focus, while the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG are unclear and out of focus, creating an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the effect button image BTN and the sword image KG, whereas in Figures 136(A) to 136(J), the numbers HMG are always clear and in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to understand the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21.

[Image Blur Effects C]
Next, the image blurring effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect C. The image blurring effect C is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In image blurring effect C, as shown in FIG. 137(A), first, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad described below moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A is no longer present at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as tentatively stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, tentatively stopped with the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and even when they start to change, they do not become semi-transparent, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and are always in focus and clear. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, reserved icons can be displayed in four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon is the same as the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no hold icons stored that have not been consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the changing display of the decorative symbol, the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, with the blue number "0" on the left, and the second special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero, with the red number "0" on the right, and they are displayed at a distance from each other on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in Figure 137 (A).

When a reach is formed in FIG. 137(A), as shown in FIG. 137(B), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state (here, flashing white light) as shown in FIG. 137(B). The part of the effect button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. This effect button image BTN is clearly in focus and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of the effect button image BTN, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the effect button image BTN. At this time, the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(A).

The "predetermined light emission pattern" is set based on the likelihood of a jackpot (variable performance start command), and the likelihood of a jackpot is set to be high in the following order: flashing white light → flashing blue light → flashing green light → flashing red light → flashing gold light (flashing yellow light) → flashing seven colors (rainbow light (high likelihood of jackpot)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the upper body of the character CRA holding a sword is arranged and displayed almost entirely in the right-hand area of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(C). This character CRA is clearly in focus and is displayed large almost entirely in the right-hand area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and timer bar TB, which were clearly in focus, disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, respectively, continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(B). In addition, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is still maintained as shown in FIG. 137(B). Note that the character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(D), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 is placed again in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. The part of the effect button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. At this time, the effect button image BTN is placed in front of the already displayed character CRA, is clearly in focus, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a (displayed in the same position as shown in FIG. 137(B)). Because the effect button image BTN is in focus, the already displayed character CRA is out of focus and unclear (so-called "out of focus").

The clearly focused performance button image BTN is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the character CRA (the character CRA's right shoulder, right arm, and sword) which is out of focus and unclear.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(C). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(C).

The out-of-focus, unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which uses a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or the sprites that make up the image), or on the target layer out of multiple layers. In other words, the out-of-focus, unclear image is not stored in ROM 103 in advance, but is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time from a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from ROM 103. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus, unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time.

A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments, overlapping the upper front part of the effect button image BTN, and a timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting operation of the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) is displayed overlapping the lower front part of the effect button image BTN. Note that the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image. The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137(D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 137(B), or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a jackpot (e.g., from white flashing to blue flashing or gold flashing (yellow flashing)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), the upper body of the character CRB holding a sword is displayed facing the character CRA in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(E). This character CRB is clearly in focus, and is displayed large and occupies the entire left side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and timer bar TB, which were clearly in focus, have disappeared from the display screen 7a. Also, because the character CRB is in focus, the character CRA, which is already displayed, is still out of focus and unclear (so-called "out of focus").

The in-focus, clear character CRB is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of character CRA) in front of it.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(D). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(D). Note that the character CRB may be a still image or a video.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the character CRA, which was displayed in an unclear and out-of-focus state, changes to a clear and focused one, and the clear character CRA is displayed in focus in almost the entire right area of the display screen 7a, while the clear character CRB is displayed in focus in almost the entire left area of the display screen 7a (that is, the character CRB is displayed moving from almost the center of the display screen 7a to the left side to keep a distance from the character CRA). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(E). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(G), a vertically written message MG saying "Battle Begins" is displayed in an area extending from the center to the top edge of the display screen 7a. This vertically written message MG is clearly in focus, whereas the two characters CRA and CRB already displayed are out of focus and unclear (so-called "out of focus").

The clearly focused vertically written message MG saying "Battle Begins" is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (the sword portion of character CRA) in front of the character, and at least a portion of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRB (the right shoulder and sword portion of character CRB) in front of the character.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(F). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the two characters CRA and CRB that were displayed out of focus are changed to be clearly in focus and displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action scene (battle scene) featuring the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(G). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(G).

In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the ally character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(I), an expanding motion blur is displayed in which the letter V approaches from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front. The expanding motion blur of the remaining letter V is also created as an unclear image with a shifted focus (so-called "out of focus"). This out-of-focus, unclear image is created by expanding motion blur image processing, which blurs the target image (or the sprites that make up the image), or the target layer among multiple layers, in a direction that spreads from the center, and the blur becomes stronger from the center toward the periphery as the distance dimension from the center increases. In other words, the out-of-focus, unclear image is not stored in ROM 103 in advance, but is created by image control microcomputer 101 performing real-time blur image processing on a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from ROM 103.

When the player sees the image of the letter V that has been subjected to the enlarged motion blur image processing, the player is given the impression that he is moving toward the image of the letter V, and can get a sense of speed moving toward the center of the image of the letter V, suggesting that the friendly character CRA will soon defeat the enemy character CRB. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(H). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(J), an action presentation (battle presentation) unfolds (starts), and at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), a presentation is performed to announce the victory of ally character CRA, with ally character CRA displayed in the center and a message MG saying "Victory" positioned to the left of ally character CRA. Note that, if a presentation is performed to announce the victory of enemy character CRB at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and a message MG saying "Defeat" positioned to the left of enemy character CRB.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(I). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(I).

After that, although not shown, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same pattern (here, the number "1") stopped, and when the variable display ends, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player. Even after the variable display ends, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137 (J). Even after the variable display ends, the state in which the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137 (J). Incidentally, when the variable display ends, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In response to this, the left decorative pattern 8L on the display screen 7a is the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "1", and the same patterns (here, the number "1") are not displayed together, and when the changing display ends, a miss is confirmed. When the changing display ends, the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the changing display ends.

In this way, in the image blurring effect C, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN are clear, in focus, and the character CRB is an unclear, out-of-focus image (a blurry, out-of-focus image), creating an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA, CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing interest.

It can also help communicate to the player the images that the creator wants the player to focus on as the presentation progresses (in other words, the order of images that the creator wants the player to focus on (the intention of the creator of the presentation) by first focusing on the presentation button image BTN, then the character CRA, then the presentation button image BTN, and then the character CRB).

In addition, in the image blurring effect C, for example, the character CRA and the effect button image BTN are clearly in focus, and the character CRB is an unclear image (out-of-focus image) to create an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB and the arrangement of the character CRA and the effect button image BTN, whereas in Figures 137(A) to 137(J), the numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to understand the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21.

[Image Blur Effects D]
Next, the image blurring effect D will be described with reference to Fig. 138. Fig. 138 is a diagram for explaining the image blurring effect D. The image blurring effect D is performed by selecting from a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In image blurring effect D, as shown in FIG. 138(A), first, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad described below moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A is no longer present at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as tentatively stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, tentatively stopped with the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and even when they start to change, they do not become semi-transparent, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and are always in focus and clear. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, reserved icons can be displayed in four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon is the same as the size of the reserved icon immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no hold icons stored that have not been consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the changing display of the decorative symbol, the first special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, with the blue number "0" on the left, and the second special chart reserve based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero, with the red number "0" on the right, and they are displayed at a distance from each other on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in Figure 138 (A).

When a reach is formed in FIG. 138(A), the upper body of the character CRA holding a sword is displayed and positioned over almost the entire right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 138(B). This character CRA is clearly in focus and is displayed large over almost the entire right side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(A). The character CRA may be a still image or a video.

Next, as shown in Figure 138 (C), the upper body of character CRB holding a sword is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, positioned close to and facing character CRA. This character CRB is clearly in focus, and is displayed large and occupies almost the entire left side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, because character CRB is in focus, character CRA, which is already displayed, is out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus").

The in-focus, clear character CRB is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword of character CRA) in front of it.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(B). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138(B).

The character CRB, which is in focus and clear, may be a still image or a video. The character CRA, which is out of focus and unclear, is a still image.

The out-of-focus, unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which uses a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation to blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or the sprites that make up the image), or on the target layer out of multiple layers. In other words, the out-of-focus, unclear image is not stored in ROM 103 in advance, but is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time from a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from ROM 103. Hereinafter, the out-of-focus, unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(D), the character CRB moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the left to put some distance between it and the character CRA, and the character CRA, which was displayed out of focus, becomes clearly in focus, and almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action performance (battle performance) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 137(C). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 137(C).

In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB unfolds, and if the ally character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(E), a message MG stating "Your friendly character wins, it's a big win!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(D). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138(D).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(F), the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation) is performed. In the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand, and the presentation is performed in which the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(E). Also, the state in which the reserved icon 9C, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(G), in the middle of the action presentation (battle presentation), the ally character CRA gains the upper hand and drives the enemy character CRB to the left. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(F). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 138 (H), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (closer to each other) an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a predetermined light-emitting state (for example, a white light-emitting state), and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a white light-emitting state, and the English letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable part 14L and the front of the right movable part 14R, respectively, to perform a performance suggesting the victory of the ally character CRA. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R will have a different light emission pattern (e.g., a red light emission pattern) from a predetermined light emission pattern (e.g., a white light emission pattern), so although the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R will have a red light emission pattern, the letter "V" will not appear and no effect suggesting a victory for the friendly character CRA will be produced.

The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), on which the letter "V" is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged to surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate except for the front and back sides thereof emit light (e.g., white light), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is diffusely reflected by the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate, and the letter "V" appears. In addition, when a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back side of the light guide plate emit light (e.g., red light) on the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, the light passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(G). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138(G).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(I), at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), a presentation is performed to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, with the ally character CRA displayed in the center and the message MG "Victory" positioned to the left of the ally character CRA. Note that, if a presentation is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "Defeat" positioned to the left of the enemy character CRB.

The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138 (H). Also, the state in which the reservation icon 9C, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same pattern (here, the number "1"), and when the variable display ends, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is played in which a jackpot is won and a profit is awarded to the player. Even after the variable display ends, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 138(I). Even after the variable display ends, the state in which the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display positions 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained in FIG. 138(I). Incidentally, when the variable display ends, the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In contrast, when an effect is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect) to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB, the left decorative pattern 8L on the display screen 7a will be the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C will be the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R will be the number "1", and the same patterns (here, the number "1") will not be displayed in a consistent manner (here, the number "1"), and when the variable display ends, a miss will be displayed as a confirmed result. When the variable display ends, the four reserved display positions 9Ad and the reserved display position 9Cd will reappear on the display screen 7a, but the reserved icon 9C will disappear from the display screen 7a as the variable display ends.

In this way, in image blurring effect D, character CRB (enemy character CRB) is a clear, focused image, and character CRA (ally character CRA) is an unclear, out-of-focus image, creating an expression that gives a sense of depth to the positioning of the two characters CRA and CRB, providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing interest.

It can also help convey to the player the images that the creator wants the player to focus on as the presentation progresses (in other words, the order of images that the creator wants the player to focus on, focusing on character CRA (ally character CRA) and then character CRB (enemy character CRB) (the intention of the creator of the presentation)).

In addition, in the image blurring effect D, for example, the character CRB (enemy character CRB) is a clear image that is in focus, and the character CRA (ally character CRA) is an unclear image (out-of-focus image) to create an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the two characters CRA and CRB, whereas in Figures 138(A) to 138(J), the numbers HMG are always clear and in focus, regardless of the game state of the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to understand the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of blurring images.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 135(B) to 135(C) of the image blurring effect A, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images can be executed, which includes a first effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 135(B) which is a clear first image is displayed, a second effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 135(B) which is the first image clearly displayed by the first effect is displayed unclearly like the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 135(C), and a third effect in which the right decorative pattern 8R of Figure 135(C) which is the second image is clearly displayed in a position different from the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 135(C) which is the first image unclearly displayed by the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image by using the right decorative pattern 8R of Figure 135 (C), which is the clear second image, and the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 135 (C), which is the unclear first image, thereby providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing the player's interest.
In the image blurring effect B of Figures 136(B) to 136(C), the sword image KG of Figure 136(C) which is a clear second image, and the effect button image BTN of Figure 136(C) which is an unclear first image, an expression is realized which gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first and second images, thereby providing visual entertainment to the player and increasing the player's interest.
In the image blurring effect C of Figures 137(C) to 137(E), for example, a clear second image, character CRB of Figure 137(E), and an unclear first image, character CRA of Figure 137(E), are used to create an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first and second images, thereby providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing their interest.
In the image blurring effect D of Figures 138(B) to 138(C), the character CRB of Figure 138(C) is a clear second image, and the character CRA of Figure 138(C) is an unclear first image, thereby creating an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first and second images, thereby providing visual entertainment for the player and increasing their interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135(C) of the image blurring effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(C), which is the clear second image clearly displayed by the third effect, overlaps at least a part of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is the first image unclearly displayed by the second effect. Specifically, in FIG. 135(C), the focused and clear right decorative pattern 8R displayed temporarily stopped is displayed in a state where it overlaps at least a part (approximately the right part of the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3")) in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, which is out of focus and unclear, displayed temporarily stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to express it as if it were an image taken with a shallow depth of field by a single-lens reflex camera.
In the image blurring effect B of Fig. 136(C), the second image, a clear sword image KG in focus, is displayed overlapping at least a part (the right part of the effect button image BTN) of the first image, a blurred and unclear effect button image BTN. With this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of Fig. 137 (E), the character CRB, which is a clear, in-focus image, is displayed overlapping at least a part (the character CRA's right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword) of the character CRA, which is a blurred, in-focus image, in front of the character CRA. With this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of Fig. 138(C), the character CRB, which is a clear, in-focus image, is displayed overlapping at least a part (the character CRA's right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword) of the character CRA, which is a blurred, in-focus image, in front of the character CRA. With this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 135(A) to Fig. 135(C) of the image blurring performance A, the image display device 7 (display means) is capable of displaying the reserved icon 9C, and when the third performance is executed, the reserved icon 9C is not displayed in Fig. 135(C). According to this configuration, the visibility of the left decorative pattern 8L of Fig. 135(C), which is the unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of Fig. 135(C), which is the clear second image, due to the third performance is not obstructed by the reserved icon 9C, so that the left decorative pattern 8L of Fig. 135(C), which is the unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of Fig. 135(C), which is the clear second image, can be displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means). This allows the player to be presented with an impressive presentation using the left decorative pattern 8L in Figure 135(C), which is an unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R in Figure 135(C), which is a clear second image.
In the image blurring effect B of Fig. 136(A) to Fig. 136(C), the visibility of the unclear first image, the effect button image BTN of Fig. 136(C), and the clear second image, the sword image KG of Fig. 136(C), due to the third effect is not obstructed by the reserved icon 9C, so the unclear first image, the effect button image BTN of Fig. 136(C), and the clear second image, the sword image KG of Fig. 136(C), can be displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means). This makes it possible to provide the player with an impressive effect using the unclear first image, the effect button image BTN of Fig. 136(C), and the clear second image, the sword image KG of Fig. 136(C).
In the image blurring effect C of Fig. 137(A) to Fig. 137(E), the visibility of the unclear first image, character CRA of Fig. 137(E), and the clear second image, character CRB of Fig. 137(E), due to the third effect is not hindered by the reserved icon 9C, so the unclear first image, character CRA of Fig. 137(E), and the clear second image, character CRB of Fig. 137(E), can be displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means). This allows the player to be provided with an impressive effect of the unclear first image, character CRA of Fig. 137(E), and the clear second image, character CRB of Fig. 137(E).
In the image blurring effect D of Fig. 138(A) to Fig. 138(C), the visibility of the unclear first image character CRA of Fig. 138(C) and the clear second image character CRB of Fig. 138(C) due to the third effect is not hindered by the reserved icon 9C, so the unclear first image character CRA of Fig. 138(C) and the clear second image character CRB of Fig. 138(C) can be displayed large on the image display device 7 (display means). This allows the player to be provided with an impressive effect of the unclear first image character CRA of Fig. 138(C) and the clear second image character CRB of Fig. 138(E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 135(A) to Fig. 135(I) of the image blurring effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) always displays the number HMG (here, "0 0"), which is a numerical image indicating the number of reserved icons, and even when the second effect is executed, the numerical image HMG (here, "0 0") is clearly displayed. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L in Fig. 135(C) is displayed as being unclear from a clear state due to the second effect, whereas the numerical image HMG (here, "0 0") is always displayed as being clear, so that the player can easily grasp the number of reserved icons.
The same is true for image blurring effect B of Figures 136(A) to 136(J), image blurring effect C of Figures 137(A) to 137(J), and image blurring effect D of Figures 138(A) to 138(J).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 135(A) to 135(D) of the image blurring effect A, after the third effect, the left decorative pattern 8L of the first image, Figure 135(C), which was displayed unclearly by the second effect, is made clear again like the left decorative pattern 8L of Figure 135(D), and further, a fourth effect can be executed in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the first image, Figure 135(D), and the right decorative pattern 8R of the second image, Figure 135(D), are displayed so that they do not overlap. According to this configuration, when the left decorative pattern 8L of the first image, Figure 135 (D), and the right decorative pattern 8R of the second image, Figure 135 (D), are arranged, they do not overlap with each other and are displayed as clear images, thereby suggesting to the player that a performance relating to the left decorative pattern 8L of the first image, Figure 135 (D), and the right decorative pattern 8R of the second image, Figure 135 (D), will now be developed.
In the image blurring effect B of Figures 136(A) to 136(F), for example, when the first image, the effect button image BTN of Figure 136(F), and the second image, the sword image KG of Figure 136(F), are arranged, they do not overlap with each other and are displayed as clear images, thereby suggesting to the player that an effect relating to the first image, the effect button image BTN of Figure 136(F), and the second image, the sword image KG of Figure 136(F), will now be unfolded.
In the image blurring presentation C of Figures 137(A) to 137(F), for example, when the character CRA of Figure 137(F), which is the first image, and the character CRB of Figure 137(F), which is the second image, are positioned, they do not overlap with each other and are displayed as clear images, thereby suggesting to the player that a presentation relating to the character CRA of the first image, Figure 137(F), and the character CRB of Figure 137(F), which is the second image, will now be developed.
In the image blurring effect D of Figures 138(A) to 138(D), for example, when the character CRA of Figure 138(D), which is the first image, and the character CRB of Figure 138(D), which is the second image, are positioned, they do not overlap with each other and are displayed as clear images, thereby suggesting to the player that a performance relating to the character CRA of Figure 138(D), which is the first image, and the character CRB of Figure 138(D), which is the second image, will now be developed.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 135(B) to Fig. 135(D) of the image blurring effect A, the left decorative pattern 8L of Fig. 135(B) and (D), which is the first image displayed clearly, and the right decorative pattern 8R of Fig. 135(C) and (D), which is the second image, are focused images, and the left decorative pattern 8L of Fig. 135(C), which is the first image displayed unclearly, is an unfocused image. With this configuration, it is possible to express it as if it were an image taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect B of Fig. 136(B) to Fig. 136(F), for example, the clearly displayed first image, the effect button image BTN of Fig. 136(B) and (F), and the second image, the sword image KG of Fig. 136(C) and (F), are focused images, and the unclearly displayed first image, the effect button image BTN of Fig. 136(C), is an unfocused image. With this configuration, it is possible to express an image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect C of Fig. 137(A) to Fig. 137(F), for example, the character CRA of Fig. 137(C) and (F), which is the first image displayed clearly, and the character CRB of Fig. 137(E) and (F), which is the second image, are focused images, and the character CRA of Fig. 137(E), which is the first image displayed unclearly, is an image that is not focused. With this configuration, it is possible to express an image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blurring effect D of Fig. 138(A) to Fig. 138(D), the first image, character CRA of Fig. 138(B) and (D), which is clearly displayed, and the second image, character CRB of Fig. 138(C) and (D), which is clearly displayed, are focused images, and the first image, character CRA of Fig. 138(C), which is unclearly displayed, is an unfocused image. With this configuration, it is possible to express an image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 135 (A) of the image blurring effect A, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed when there is no reserved icon when the pattern change display based on the reserved icon 9C starts. In other words, in the image blurring effect A, as shown in Fig. 135 (A), the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon is no longer present at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad.
The same is true for image blurring effect B in Figure 136 (A), image blurring effect C in Figure 137 (A), and image blurring effect D in Figure 138 (A).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of image blurring effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the image blurring effect A of Fig. 135, the image blurring effect B of Fig. 136, the image blurring effect C of Fig. 137, and the image blurring effect D of Fig. 138, the effect is performed when the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as the first special reserved icon moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon no longer exists at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. However, the effect may be performed when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position as the second special reserved icon moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9B no longer exists at the first reserved display position to the fourth reserved display position. To briefly explain the first to fourth reserved display positions where the reserved icon 9B is displayed as the second special reserved, the reserved icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the second special reserved is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the second special reserved in the area of the display screen 7a to the right of the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9B can be displayed at each of the four reserved display positions (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom side of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position, the second reserved display position, the third reserved display position, and the fourth reserved display position, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the first image arranged at the back side is made unclear and out of focus (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image arranged at the front side is made clear and in focus (in focus), so that it can be expressed as if it was an image taken with a shallow depth of field by a single-lens reflex camera. This is because the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which uses a Gaussian function to vary the standard deviation and blur the image). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer of multiple layers. Therefore, the depth of field may be freely adjusted to make the image shallow or deep. This allows for a wider range of expression.

[Modification 3]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the first image arranged on the back side is made unclear and out of focus (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image arranged on the front side is made clear and in focus (in focus). However, as a completely opposite relationship, the first image arranged on the back side may be made clear and in focus (in focus), and the second image arranged on the front side may be made unclear and out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). It is possible to provide the player with an effect in which the player focuses on one subject from among images that are multiple subjects in the depth direction using a so-called zoom lens, thereby increasing the variety of effects. The out-of-focus, unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which is a process of blurring an image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image), or on the target layer among multiple layers. In other words, the out-of-focus, unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time from a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from the ROM 103; the out-of-focus, unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time.

[Modification 4]
In the image blurring effect A of FIG. 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137, and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138, the first image arranged at the back side is made unclear and out of focus (so-called "out of focus"), and the second image arranged at the front side is made clear and in focus (in focus). However, among the multiple subjects existing in the depth direction, some images of subjects having different distance dimensions in the depth direction may be made clear and in focus (in focus), and other images of subjects may be made unclear and out of focus (out of focus). In this way, an image with a sense of incongruity is created, providing the player with a sense of incongruity, and suggesting to the player that there is a high chance of winning. The out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which is a process of blurring an image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurred image processing is performed in real time on a target image (or sprites constituting the image), or on a target layer out of multiple layers, by image control microcomputer 101. In other words, the out-of-focus and unclear image is not stored in ROM 103 in advance, but is created by image control microcomputer 101 performing blurred image processing in real time on a clear, in-focus image (image data) read from ROM 103;

[Modification 5]
In the image blurring effect A in Fig. 135, the image blurring effect B in Fig. 136, the image blurring effect C in Fig. 137, and the image blurring effect D in Fig. 138, the effect is performed when the reserved icon displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as the first special reserved icon moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon is no longer present at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. However, the game state may be in a time-saving state and a number of times may be limited. For example, the number of times that the special pattern is changed during the time-saving state may be limited to one time, or up to seven times.

[Modification 6]
In the image blurring effect A of Fig. 135, the image blurring effect B of Fig. 136, the image blurring effect C of Fig. 137, and the image blurring effect D of Fig. 138, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which is a process of blurring an image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function), and this blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image) or on the target layer out of multiple layers. However, in addition to the clear image (image data) in focus, the out-of-focus and unclear image (image data) may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and read out from the ROM 103 as necessary. In this case, if there is sufficient free capacity in the ROM 103, in addition to clear, in-focus images (image data), it is possible to store unclear, out-of-focus images (image data), eliminating the need for the image control microcontroller 101 to perform blurring image processing in real time, thereby contributing to reducing the load on the image control microcontroller 101.

[Modification 7]
In the image blurring effect A in Fig. 135, the image blurring effect B in Fig. 136, the image blurring effect C in Fig. 137, and the image blurring effect D in Fig. 138, the out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring, which is a process of blurring an image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function), and this blurred image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on the target image (or sprites constituting the image), or on the target layer out of multiple layers. This blurred image processing may be, for example, a countdown effect in which numbers are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this countdown performance, for example, when the numbers "5" → "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a in sequence, the number "5" is displayed first as a clear image in focus, and then the number "4" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in focus on the front side of the number "5" as an unclear image with the number "5" out of focus. Next, the number "5" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "3" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in focus on the front side of the number "4" as an unclear image with the number "4" out of focus. Next, the number "4" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the number "3" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear image in focus on the front side of the number "3" as an unclear image with the number "3" out of focus. Next, the number "3" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "2" is displayed as an unclear image with the number "2" out of focus, and the number "1" is displayed as a clear image with the front side of the number "2" in focus on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "2" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "1" is displayed as an unclear image with the number "1" out of focus, and the number "0" is displayed as a clear image with the front side of the number "1" in focus on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "1" is erased from the display screen 7a, and then the number "0" is erased from the display screen 7a, and the game progresses to the Super Reach performance.

[Modification 8]
In the image blurring effect B of Fig. 136 and the image blurring effect C of Fig. 137, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63, an effect button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the same effect can be achieved by operating (pressing or pushing) the sword button 65 as by operating (pushing) the effect button 63.

[Modification 9]
In the image blurring effect A in Figure 135, the image blurring effect B in Figure 136, the image blurring effect C in Figure 137 and the image blurring effect D in Figure 138, the effect is performed when the reserve icon displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad as the first special chart reserve moves to the reserve display position 9Cd and becomes the reserve icon 9C, and therefore there are no reserve icons at the first reserve display position 9Ad to the fourth reserve display position 9Ad. However, when the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special hold moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and there are no hold icons at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable display of the left decorative pattern 9L, the middle decorative pattern 9C and the right decorative pattern 9R begins, and the image blurring effect A of 135, the image blurring effect B of FIG. 136, the image blurring effect C of FIG. 137 and the image blurring effect D of FIG. 138 are not performed, and the left decorative pattern 9L, the middle decorative pattern 9C and the right decorative pattern 9R may stop and be displayed without aligning to the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), resulting in a miss. In this case, a miss may occur through another reach effect (for example, a so-called "normal reach" which has the lowest expected probability of winning (big win, small win)) different from the image blurring effect A in Figure 135, the image blurring effect B in Figure 136, the image blurring effect C in Figure 137, and the image blurring effect D in Figure 138, or a miss may occur without going through this other reach effect.

[Modification 10]
Image blurring effect A in Figure 135, image blurring effect B in Figure 136, image blurring effect C in Figure 137, and image blurring effect D in Figure 138 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first presentation that clearly displays a first image;
A second effect that displays the first image clearly in the first effect in an unclear manner; and
and a third effect of clearly displaying the second image at a position different from the first image that is unclearly displayed by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1,
The second image clearly displayed by the third effect overlaps at least a part of the first image unclearly displayed by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E7-1 or E7-2,
The display means is capable of displaying the hold icon,
When the third performance is executed, the reserved icon is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3,
The display means always displays a numerical image indicating the number of hold icons,
The numerical image is clearly displayed even when the second effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-4,
After the third performance, the first image that has been unclearly displayed by the second performance is made clear again, and a fourth performance is executed in which the first image and the second image are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-5,
the first image and the second image that are clearly displayed are in-focus images;
the first image being displayed indistinctly is an out-of-focus image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E7-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-6,
The first performance, the second performance, and the third performance are executable when there is no reserved icon when the pattern change display based on the reserved icon is started.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing notification effects A to D are explained below using Figures 139 to 142. These winning/losing notification effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the winning/losing notification effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7. The winning/losing notification effect is executed for a predetermined period across multiple changes.

[Winning or Losing Notification A]
Figure 139 is a diagram to explain the winning/losing notification display A.
First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), a miss notification effect is executed. The miss notification effect is an effect that notifies that the change is a miss. This miss notification effect is executed when the final change is a miss when the game state is in a time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). In the miss notification effect, a message image MSG saying "miss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(B), a right-hit promotion effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to make a so-called "right hit." Here, a message image MSG saying "right hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the miss notification effect, and is executed in the final change when the game state is in the time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). When the player "hits right," the second special chart reserve increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserve images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reserve are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(C), the final battle preview performance is executed. The final battle preview performance is executed in the change corresponding to the first hold of the second special chart reserve described above. In the final battle preview performance, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that up until the defeat performance described later, the performance is in the change corresponding to the first hold of the second special chart reserve, and is a look-ahead performance that includes the three holds corresponding to the reserve image 9B.

Next, as shown in Fig. 139(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that will be an opponent of the friendly character appears. Here, the enemy character CRD appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 139 (E), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and if the friendly character wins the battle performance, a win (big win or small win) is confirmed. In this example, the performance is a battle between friendly character CRA and enemy character CRD.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that occurs when the change and all three pending results are losses. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the word "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), a reserved lottery display is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Looking forward to next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a display pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the first reserved lot of the remaining three reserved lots is confirmed and stopped at "565", resulting in a miss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(H), a reserved lottery display is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Looking forward to next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a display pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the last reserved lottery is shown to have stopped at "565", resulting in a loss. After the defeat display is executed, the remaining reserved lottery, which is a loss, is quickly consumed.

[Winning or Losing Notification Performance B]
Figure 140 is a diagram to explain the winning/losing notification display B.
First, as shown in FIG. 140(A), a miss notification effect is executed. The miss notification effect is an effect that notifies that the change is a miss. This miss notification effect is executed when the final change is a miss when the game state is in a time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). In the miss notification effect, a message image MSG saying "miss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(B), a right-hit promotion effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to make a so-called "right hit." Here, a message image MSG saying "right hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the miss notification effect, and is executed in the final change when the game state is in the time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). When the player "hits right," the second special chart reserve increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserve images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reserve are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the final battle preview performance is executed. The final battle preview performance is executed in the change corresponding to the first hold of the second special chart reserve described above. In the final battle preview performance, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that up until the defeat performance described later, the performance is in the change corresponding to the first hold of the second special chart reserve, and is a look-ahead performance that includes the three holds corresponding to the reserve image 9B.

Next, as shown in Fig. 140(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character that will be an opponent of the friendly character appears. Here, the enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 140 (E), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight each other, and if the friendly character wins the battle performance, a win (big win or small win) is confirmed. In this example, the performance is a battle between friendly character CRA and enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect when there is a winning combination among the variation and the three reserved combinations. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the word "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), a reserved-lot consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, an effect pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the first of the remaining three reserved lots is confirmed and stopped at "565", resulting in a loss. It is assumed that the next reserved lot is a winning reserved lot AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), the reserved ball consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the effect pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Here, the fluctuation corresponding to the winning reserved ball AT is confirmed and stopped at "555", resulting in a winning ball. Note that the last reserved ball is not consumed.

[Winning or Losing Notification Presentation C]
Figure 141 is a diagram to explain the winning/losing notification display C.
First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), a miss notification effect is executed. The miss notification effect is an effect that notifies that the change is a miss. This miss notification effect is executed when the final change is a miss when the game state is in a time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). In the miss notification effect, a message image MSG saying "miss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(B), a right-hit promotion effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to make a so-called "right hit." Here, a message image MSG saying "right hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the miss notification effect, and is executed in the final change when the game state is in the time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). When the player "hits right," the second special chart reserve increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserve images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reserve are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(C), the first battle performance is executed. The first battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that an ally character CRA fights an enemy character CRB, and that ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the first battle performance is a performance with a change corresponding to the first reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the second battle presentation is executed. The second battle presentation is a presentation in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the ally character CRA fights the enemy character CRD, and that the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the second battle presentation is a presentation with a change corresponding to the second reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the third battle performance is executed. The third battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the ally character CRA fights the enemy character CRC, and that the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the third battle performance is a performance with a change corresponding to the third reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), the fourth battle performance is executed. The fourth battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that an ally character CRA fights an enemy character CRD, and that ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the fourth battle performance is a performance with a change corresponding to the last reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that indicates that a defeat has occurred in the fourth battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the word "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect that causes a confirmed stop of the variation. Here, a message image MSG saying "Sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the performance pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the variation corresponding to the last reserved number of the second special chart has been confirmed and stopped at "565", resulting in a miss.

[Winning or Losing Notification Presentation D]
Figure 142 is a diagram to explain the winning/losing notification presentation D.
First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), a miss notification effect is executed. The miss notification effect is an effect that notifies that the change is a miss. This miss notification effect is executed when the final change is a miss when the game state is in a time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). In the miss notification effect, a message image MSG saying "miss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation are displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(B), a right-hit promotion effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to make a so-called "right hit." Here, a message image MSG saying "right hit" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The right-hit promotion effect is an effect that is executed following the miss notification effect, and is executed in the final change when the game state is in the time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"). When the player "hits right," the second special chart reserve increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserve images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reserve are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(C), the first battle performance is executed. The first battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that an ally character CRA fights an enemy character CRB, and that ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the first battle performance is a performance with a change corresponding to the first reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the second battle presentation is executed. The second battle presentation is a presentation in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the ally character CRA fights the enemy character CRD, and that the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the second battle presentation is a presentation with a change corresponding to the second reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the third battle performance is executed. The third battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that the ally character CRA fights the enemy character CRC, and that the ally character CRA is defeated. Note that the third battle performance is a performance with a change corresponding to the third reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), the fourth battle performance is executed. The fourth battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character. In the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that an ally character CRA fights an enemy character CRD, and that ally character CRA wins. Note that the fourth battle performance is a performance with a change corresponding to the last reservation of the second special chart reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation indicating that a victory has been achieved in the fourth battle presentation. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the word "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect that brings the variation to a fixed stop. Here, a message image MSG saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the performance pattern is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a. Here, the variation corresponding to the last reserved number in the second special chart reservation has been fixed and stopped at "555", resulting in a win.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effectiveness of the winning/losing notification presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there are a predetermined number (four) of reserved second special symbols, a pre-read is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning combination in the reserved second special symbols, and whether or not there is a winning combination is notified as a pre-read performance (FIG. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the results of winning or losing in multiple variations can be executed as a series of performances, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there are a predetermined number (four) of reserved second special symbols, a pre-read is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning combination in the reserved second special symbols, and whether or not there is a winning combination in the variation corresponding to the first reserved second special symbol is notified as a pre-reading effect (FIG. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the winning/losing combination in a plurality of variations can be executed as a series of effects, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there are a predetermined number (four) of reserved second special symbols, whether there is a winning symbol in the reserved second special symbols and whether there is a winning symbol in each variation corresponding to the reserved second special symbols are notified (FIG. 141 (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H), FIG. 142 (C) (D) (E) (F) (G) (H)). According to this configuration, whether there is a winning symbol in the reserved number of symbols is revealed in order, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the game state is in the time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"), the right-hit promotion performance is executed, and the second special chart reservation is increased to the upper limit (four) (FIG. 139 (B), FIG. 140 (B), FIG. 141 (B), FIG. 142 (B)). With this configuration, it is easy to create a state in which a predetermined number of reservations exist, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a win is notified by a look-ahead performance, and after the win is notified, the reserved amount that has not been consumed is consumed from the reserved amount that became the win (FIG. 140 (G) (H)). With this configuration, the player does not feel uncomfortable after a series of performances, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a miss is notified in a pre-reading performance, and after the miss is notified, the unconsumed reserved amount is consumed (FIG. 139 (G) (H)). With this configuration, after a series of performances, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the winning/losing notification presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy character that appears after the final battle preview performance may be selected according to the likelihood of winning (Figure 139 (D), Figure 140 (D)).

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters that appear in the first, second, third, and fourth battles may be selected according to the expected probability of being a hit (Figures 141 (C) (D) (E) (F), Figures 142 (C) (D) (E) (F)).

[Modification 3]
In the above, a defeat effect, a victory effect, a confirmed stop effect (miss), or a confirmed stop effect (win) was executed for the fourth battle effect (FIGS. 141(G)(H), 142(G)(H)). In contrast, a defeat effect, a victory effect, a confirmed stop effect (miss), or a confirmed stop effect (win) may also be executed for the first battle effect, the second battle effect, and the third battle effect.

[Modification 4]
In the above, an example was given in which an ally character wins in the fourth battle performance, but cases are conceivable in which an ally character wins in the first battle performance, in which an ally character wins in the second battle performance, and in which an ally character wins in the third battle performance. If an ally character wins in the first battle performance, it is conceivable to execute a victory performance and a fixed stop performance (hit) following the first battle performance. Similarly, if an ally character wins in the second battle performance, it is conceivable to execute a victory performance and a fixed stop performance (hit) following the second battle performance, and if an ally character wins in the third battle performance, it is conceivable to execute a victory performance and a fixed stop performance (hit) following the third battle performance.

[Modification 5]
Although the above has been given as an example of a presentation for the second special chart reservation, the same may also be used for a presentation for the first special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E8-1]
A gaming machine capable of withholding a lottery for a winning result that is to be performed when a ball enters a starting hole, performing a pre-reading to determine in advance whether or not a winning result will be obtained when the ball enters the starting hole, and executing a pre-reading performance based on the result of the pre-reading before the reserved lottery is consumed,
When a predetermined number of reserved balls exist, a pre-reading notification performance can be executed to notify whether or not there is a winning ball among the predetermined number of reserved balls as the pre-reading performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1,
The pre-reading notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not there is a winning combination among the predetermined number of reserved combinations in the variation of consuming the first reserved combination when the predetermined number of reserved combinations exist.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E8-1 or E8-2,
When a predetermined number of reserved balls exist, a variation notification effect can be executed to notify whether or not there is a winning ball among the predetermined number of reserved balls in each variation corresponding to the predetermined number of reserved balls.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-3,
The predetermined number of reserved balls is generated by a ball entering the starting hole in an advantageous game in which the ball is easily entered into the starting hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-4,
If there is a winning combination among the predetermined number of reserved combinations, the winning combination is notified by the pre-reading notification performance, and the unconsumed reserved combinations that have not been consumed in the past before the winning combination are consumed after the notification of the winning combination.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-5,
If there is no winning among the predetermined number of reserved prizes, the loss is notified by the pre-reading notification performance, and the unconsumed reserved prizes are consumed after the loss is notified.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern display area effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figures 143 to 146. These decorative pattern display area effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the decorative pattern display area effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Decorative pattern display area presentation A]
Fig. 143 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area performance A. In the decorative symbol display area performance A, first, as shown in Fig. 143 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a losing state (losing symbol "128") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The decorative symbol includes the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped symbols.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) that is larger than the first display area R11. In this embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

A specific image TG1 (specific image) is also displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of specific objects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), the left decorative pattern 8L (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down in its moving speed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(E), the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moving from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11, and while a portion of the pattern overlaps with the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop and be displayed in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(H), the center decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the center decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11, and while a part of it overlaps with the first display area R11, the center decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode. The center decorative pattern 8C changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" pattern, which is one pattern before the winning pattern of the number "3", and corresponds to a specific pattern among the center decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, pushing the middle decorative pattern 8C downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed while expanding so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (J), an enlarged left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R in the reach state are displayed enlarged compared to when displayed in the first display area R11. The left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed so that a portion of them overlaps with the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative design display area presentation B]
Fig. 144 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area performance B. In the decorative symbol display area performance B, first, as shown in Fig. 144 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a losing state (losing symbol "128") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The decorative symbols include the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped symbols.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) that is larger than the first display area R11. In this embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move quickly in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down in its moving speed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

When the decorative pattern reaches a winning state, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, creatures, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of objects in which the number of specific objects can be determined when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moving from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically, above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11, and while a portion of the pattern overlaps with the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop and be displayed in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(H), the center decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the center decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11, and while a part of it overlaps with the first display area R11, the center decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode. The center decorative pattern 8C changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" pattern, which is one pattern before the winning pattern of the number "3", and corresponds to a specific pattern among the center decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, pushing the middle decorative pattern 8C downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed while expanding so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. Then, on the display screen 7a, the display of the first display area R11 disappears (the first display area R11 becomes non-display).

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (J), the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R in the reach state are displayed enlarged compared to when displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area presentation C]
Fig. 145 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area performance A. In the decorative symbol display area performance A, first, as shown in Fig. 143 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a losing state (losing symbol "128") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The decorative symbol includes the symbol images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped symbols.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) that is larger than the first display area R11. In this embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

A specific image TG (specific image) is also displayed in the upper right-hand corner of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of objects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move quickly in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down in its moving speed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed moving from a position in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a to a position in the upper center. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11. In addition, the first display area R11 and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the reach state displayed in the first display area R11 are displayed in an enlarged manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11, and while a portion of the pattern overlaps with the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop and be displayed in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(H), the center decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the center decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11, and while a part of it overlaps with the first display area R11, the center decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode. The center decorative pattern 8C changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" which is one pattern before the winning pattern of the number "3", and corresponds to a specific pattern among the center decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 cannot push the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom and change it, and instead the specific image TG1 is pushed back from bottom to top by the middle decorative pattern 8C in the first display area R11. As a result, in the first display area R11, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern "323").

[Decorative pattern display area production D]
Fig. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol display area performance D. In the decorative symbol display area performance D, first, as shown in Fig. 146 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a stop state (a stop pattern "128") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The decorative symbol includes the pattern images of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is a set of symbols that can inform whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stop symbols.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area (first area) R11 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Also, a second display area (second area) R21 surrounded by a rectangular frame is displayed on the display screen 7a. The second display area R21 is larger than the first display area R11. The second display area R21 is located at the top of the display screen 7a.

A specific image (particular image) TG is displayed in the upper right-hand portion of the display screen 7a, in the second display region R21. The specific image TG1 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of objects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move quickly in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner in which it moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down in its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down in its moving speed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(E), in the second display region R21 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is displayed moving from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display region R11, more specifically, above the middle decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display region R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11, and while a portion of the pattern overlaps with the first display area R11, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will stop and be displayed in a losing mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "1") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(H), the center decorative pattern 8C is changed by the specific image TG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the center decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11, and while a part of it overlaps with the first display area R11, the center decorative pattern 8C is pushed from top to bottom to change. This creates a provocative effect as to whether the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode. The center decorative pattern 8C changed by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" pattern, which is one pattern before the winning pattern of the number "3", and corresponds to a specific pattern among the center decorative patterns 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 pushes the middle decorative pattern 8C (image of the number "2") in the first display area R11 from top to bottom, pushing the middle decorative pattern 8C downward (outside) of the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R from being displayed stopped in a losing state. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed while expanding so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (J), the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R in the reach state are displayed enlarged compared to when displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined effect such as a reach effect is performed.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the decorative pattern display area presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 143 to 146, it is possible to execute a first effect in which decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (a set of decorative symbols) displayed in a variable manner form a ready-to-win state in the first display region R11 (first region) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7, and a second effect in which the middle decorative symbol 8C among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready-to-win state in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is varied by a specific image TG1 (specific image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 143, 144, and 146, when a specific symbol (a symbol image of the number "2" in this embodiment) among the middle decorative symbols 8C in the first display region R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is changed by the specific image TG1, it is possible to further execute a third performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready state are displayed in the second display region R21 (second region) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to increase the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 143, 144, and 146, in the third performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed so as to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 143, 144, and 146, in the third performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state displayed in the second display area R21 are enlarged compared to when displayed in the first display area. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 143, 144, and 146, in the third presentation, when 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed in the second display area R21, the first display area R11 is not displayed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 145, in the first performance, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state in the first display region R11, the first display region R11 and the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready-to-win state displayed in the first display region R11 are enlarged and displayed. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 143 to 145, the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included in the second display area R21. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the decorative pattern display area presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In Figures 143 to 146, of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by a specific image TG1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but it is also possible to change all of the decorative patterns, rather than just a portion of the set of decorative patterns, by a specific image.
[Modification 2]
143 to 146, the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed by pushing it from top to bottom by the specific image TG1, but for example, the decorative pattern may be changed by crushing it, by lifting it from bottom to top, or by colliding with it and breaking it. In other words, the decorative pattern may be changed in any manner by the specific image.
[Modification 3]
In Figures 143, 144, and 146, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed moving from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21, but for example, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the first display area R11 may be temporarily hidden and then displayed in the second display area R21.
[Modification 4]
In Fig. 143 to Fig. 146, the specific pattern among the middle decorative patterns 8C is an image of the number "2" which is one pattern before the winning pattern of the number "3", but another pattern may be the specific pattern here. For example, it may be a pattern of another number, or it may be a special pattern other than a number.
[Modification 5]
143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready state displayed in the second display area R21 are displayed larger than when displayed in the first display area, but for example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready state displayed in the second display area R21 may be displayed in a manner different from that displayed in the first display area. For example, they may be displayed in a different color, shape, or type of symbol.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns;
A first effect in which the set of decorative symbols displayed in a variable manner form a ready-to-win state in a first area of the display means;
and a second performance in which at least one of the set of decorative symbols in a ready-to-win state in the first area of the display means is changed by a specific image displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
When a specific symbol among the at least one decorative symbol in the first area of the display means is changed by the specific image, a third performance can be further executed in which the set of decorative symbols in a ready-to-win state is displayed in a second area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
In the third performance, the set of decorative symbols in a reach state is displayed so as to move from the first area to the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect F1-2 or F1-3,
In the third performance, the set of decorative symbols in a ready-to-win state displayed in the second area is displayed larger than when displayed in the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-4,
In the third performance, when the set of decorative symbols in a reach state is displayed in the second area, the first area is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-5,
In the first performance, when the set of decorative symbols in the first area form a ready-to-win state, the set of decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state displayed in the first area and the first area are enlarged and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6,
The first area of the display means is included in the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Hereinafter, the hold-responsive image effects A to D will be explained using Figures 147 to 150. These hold-responsive image effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold-responsive image performance, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Hold-response image production A]
Figure 147 is a diagram to explain hold response image presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 147(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7". In addition, the reserved image 9C changes from white to blue (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in Fig. 147(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies the player that the expectation of a win has increased. Here, a message image MSG saying "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 147(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (shown with hatching). For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 147 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect to notify the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A and the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the ally character has won the battle presentation. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is displayed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect pattern stops at a confirmed number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". In addition, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT and pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. Note that when the effect pattern stops at a confirmed number, the reserved image 9C is hidden.

[Hold Response Image Production B]
Figure 148 is a diagram to explain hold response image presentation B.
First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7". In addition, the reserved image 9C changes from white to blue (shown with hatching).

Next, as shown in Fig. 148(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies the player that the expectation of a win has increased. Here, a message image MSG saying "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 148(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (shown with hatching). For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 148 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect to notify the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(F), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A, the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the ally character has won the battle presentation. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is displayed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect pattern stops at a confirmed number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". In addition, a reserved image 9A and a base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. When the effect pattern stops at a confirmed number, the reserved image 9C is hidden.

[Hold-response image production C]
Figure 149 is a diagram to explain hold response image presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed. In addition, the base image 9AT is a horizontally long image that corresponds to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in Fig. 149(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies the player that the expectation of a win has increased. Here, a message image MSG saying "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 149 (D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change effect is an effect in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (shown with hatching). For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 149 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect to notify the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the reserved image 9A and the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and only the reserved image 9C and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that the ally character has won the battle presentation. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is displayed. A confirmed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect pattern is a repeated number and stops confirmed. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". In addition, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. Note that the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C become hidden almost simultaneously with the effect pattern and the confirmed stop.

[Hold-response image production D]
Figure 150 is a diagram for explaining hold response image presentation D.
First, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed. In addition, the base image 9AT is a horizontally long image that corresponds to the four reserved images 9A.

Next, as shown in Figure 150 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in Fig. 150(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up effect is an effect that notifies the player that the expectation of a win has increased. Here, a message image MSG saying "chance up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 150(D), a pedestal change presentation is executed. The pedestal change presentation is a presentation in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is blue (shown with hatching). The change in the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is performed based on the expectation of a win. For example, blue has a higher expectation than white, and red has a higher expectation than blue.

Next, as shown in Fig. 150 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect to notify the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A, the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9C are not displayed, and only the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect that notifies the player that an ally character has been defeated in a battle effect. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is displayed. A confirmed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect patterns stop in a miss mode. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both "7", and the center effect pattern 8C is "8". In addition, a reserved image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are displayed. Note that the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden at almost the same time as the effect patterns and the confirmed stop.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of image presentation when a call is on hold.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the base images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved images (reserved images 9A and 9C). The display colors of the base images 9AT and 9CT can be changed based on the expectation of a win (FIGS. 147(D), 148(D), 149(D), and 150(D)). This configuration can surprise the player and increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the base images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved images (reserved images 9A and 9C). This configuration makes it easier to recognize the reserved images 9A and 9C, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the base images 9AT and 9CT changes based on the expectation of a win in the corresponding variation. This configuration can make the player feel a sense of expectation of a win, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the base images 9AT and 9CT is changed when the chance-up effect is executed (FIGS. 147(C), 148(C), 149(C), and 150(C)). This configuration increases the expectation of the chance-up effect, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the battle performance, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are not displayed, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed (Figures 147 (F) and 149 (F)). With this configuration, the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT stand out, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle performance, the reserved image 9A, the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image are hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed (FIG. 148(F)). With this configuration, the reserved image 9C stands out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle performance, the reserved image 9A, the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the reserved image 9C are hidden, and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed (FIG. 150(F)). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable, and to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the victory or defeat presentation, the reserved image 9A, the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed (FIG. 147(G), FIG. 148(G), FIG. 149(G), FIG. 150(G)). With this configuration, it is highly likely that the player will be drawn to the victory or defeat of the friendly character, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of image presentation in response to a hold are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the pedestal change effect in which the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT changes is executed following the chance-up effect. In contrast, the pedestal change effect may be executed in response to another effect. Also, the pedestal change effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the other effects.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is changed as the pedestal change effect. Instead of or in addition to such a change in display color, the shape of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT may be changed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a reserved image and changing the reserved image to another reserved image based on a winning expectation,
A hold corresponding image that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the hold image can be displayed in correspondence with the display position of the hold image,
A hold corresponding image change effect can be executed in which the hold corresponding image is changed to another hold corresponding image based on the expectation degree of the hit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The hold corresponding image is a pedestal image displayed at the bottom of the hold image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or G1-2,
The hold-corresponding image change performance is executed based on the expectation of the winning in the current variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3,
The hold-response image change effect is executed in response to the execution of a specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-4,
The reserved image includes a reserved image corresponding to the current change and a reserved memory image indicating the number of reserved changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect G1-5,
The on-hold corresponding image includes a on-hold corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold image and a on-hold memory corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold memory image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6,
In a predetermined performance, a first display performance can be executed in which the reserved memory image and the reserved memory corresponding image are not displayed, and the reserved image and the reserved corresponding image are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-8]
A gaming machine according to aspect G1-6 or G1-7,
In a predetermined performance, a second display performance can be executed in which the reserved memory image, the reserved memory corresponding image, and the reserved corresponding image are not displayed, and the reserved image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-9]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-8,
In a predetermined performance, the reserved memory image, the reserved memory corresponding image, and the reserved image are hidden, and a third display performance is executed in which the reserved corresponding image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-10]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-9,
In a predetermined performance, a fourth display performance can be executed in which the reserved memory image, the reserved memory corresponding image, the reserved image, and the reserved corresponding image are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending image effects A to D are explained below using Figures 151 to 154. These pending image effects can be executed during the performance of the varying performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the varying performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending image performance, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Reserved image production A]
Figure 151 is a diagram to explain pending image presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 151 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (C), a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is an effect that announces the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG saying "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to change at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation is hidden, and only the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (F), a battle performance is executed. A battle performance is a performance in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle is waged between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB. Here too, reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation is hidden, and only reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), a victory performance is executed. The victory performance is a performance that notifies the player that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, both the reserved image 9A related to the first special chart reservation and the reserved image 9C are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect pattern is a double number and fixed stop. Here, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R are all "7". Here, both the reserved image 9A related to the first special pattern reservation and the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

[Reserved image production B]
Figure 152 is a diagram to explain pending image presentation B.
First, as shown in FIG. 152(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (C), a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is an effect that announces the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG saying "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 152 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to change at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (F), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle unfolds between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB. Here too, reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation and pedestal image 9AT corresponding to reserved image 9A are hidden, and reserved image 9C and pedestal image 9CT corresponding to reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (H), a confirmed stop performance (win) is executed. A confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols stop at a confirmed number. Here, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all "7". Here too, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special symbol reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

[Reserved image production C]
Figure 153 is a diagram to explain pending image presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 153 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in Fig. 153(C), a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is an effect that announces the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG saying "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 153 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to change at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reserved, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are hidden, and the reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (F), a battle presentation is executed. A battle presentation is one in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle unfolds between ally character CRA and enemy character CRB. Here too, reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation, pedestal image 9AT corresponding to reserved image 9A, and pedestal image 9CT corresponding to reserved image 9C are hidden, and reserved image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153 (H), a confirmed stop performance (win) is executed. A confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols stop at a confirmed number. Here, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all "7". Here too, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special symbol reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

[Reserved image production D]
Figure 154 is a diagram to explain pending image presentation D.
First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed. Furthermore, a base image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved, and a base image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (C), a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is an effect that announces the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive. Here, a message image MSG saying "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in Fig. 154 (D), a re-changing performance is executed. The re-changing performance is a performance in which the left performance pattern 8L and the right performance pattern 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to change at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (E), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A are hidden, and the reserved image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (F), a ring effect is executed. The ring effect is an effect that is performed during a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Specifically, a band-shaped ring image RG rotates around the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB as shown by the arrow YG. Here, the word "Super hot" is displayed on the ring image RG, and as the ring image RG rotates, the word "Super hot" also moves. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the front side of the ring image RG. Meanwhile, the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is displayed behind the ring image RG and is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (G), a victory presentation is executed. The victory presentation is a presentation that announces that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed. Here, in particular, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special chart reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (H), a confirmed stop performance (win) is executed. A confirmed stop performance (win) is a performance in which the performance symbols stop at a confirmed number. Here, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are all "7". Here too, the reserved image 9A relating to the first special symbol reservation, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C are not displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the on-hold image presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation of the performance symbols includes a first period (FIG. 151 (A) (B) (C) (D)) in which the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed, and a second period (FIG. 151 (E) (F)) in which the reserved image 9A is not displayed and only the reserved image 9C is displayed. With this configuration, the reserved image can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation of the performance symbols includes a third period (FIG. 151 (G) (H)) in which both the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player does not need to pay attention to the reserved information during this period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the base image 9AT is displayed in correspondence with the reserved image 9A, and the base image 9CT is displayed in correspondence with the reserved image 9C (FIGS. 152, 153, and 154). This configuration makes it easy to recognize the display positions of the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the first period in which the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed, the base image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A and the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed (FIGS. 152(A)(B)(C)(D), 153(A)(B)(C)(D), 154(A)(B)(C)(D)). With this configuration, the display positions of the reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C can be easily recognized, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the second period in which the reserved image 9A is not displayed and only the reserved image 9C is displayed, the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C can be displayed (FIGS. 152(E)(F), 154(E)). With this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made to stand out, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the second period in which the reserved image 9A is not displayed and only the reserved image 9C is displayed, the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C is not displayed and only the reserved image 9C can be displayed (FIGS. 153(E)(F), 154(F)). With this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made to stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a ring effect in which a ring image RG is displayed behind the reserved image 9C and in front of the base image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C (FIG. 154(F)). With this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made even more noticeable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the reserved image presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the order is the first period, the second period, and the third period, but each period may appear in any order during the variation performance. Also, each period may be included two or more times during the variation performance.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was possible to execute a ring effect in which a ring image RG is displayed behind the reserved image 9C and in front of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the reserved image 9C. In this ring effect, the reserved image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the reserved image 9A may be displayed. In this case, it is conceivable to display the ring image behind the reserved image 9A and in front of the pedestal image 9AT.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G2-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a reserved image corresponding to the current change and a reserved memory image indicating the number of reserved items as a reserved image,
During the change of the performance pattern, a reserved image change performance including a first period in which both the reserved image and the reserved memory image are displayed, and a second period in which only the reserved image is displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1,
The reserved image change performance further includes a third period in which both the reserved image and the reserved memory image are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G2-1 or G2-2,
A hold corresponding image that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the hold image can be displayed in correspondence with the display position of the hold image,
The on-hold corresponding image includes a on-hold corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold image and a on-hold memory corresponding image corresponding to the on-hold memory image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
The hold corresponding image is a pedestal image displayed at the bottom of the hold image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect G2-3 or G2-4,
During the first period, the on-hold corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the on-hold image, and the on-hold memory corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the on-hold memory image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-5,
During the second period, the hold corresponding image can be displayed in correspondence with the hold image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-6,
During the second period, only the reserved image can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-7,
A special image display effect can be executed in which a special image is displayed behind the reserved image when it overlaps with the reserved image, and is displayed in front of the reserved corresponding image when it overlaps with the reserved corresponding image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the disappearance effects A to D of the reserved icon using Figures 155 to 158. In Figures 155 to 158, the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, and the first movable role piece 14 and the second movable role piece 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This disappearance effect of the reserved icon can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to vary to when it stops varying). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the disappearance effect of the reserved icon is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission state of the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain the reserved icon disappearance effect A, then explain the reserved icon disappearance effect B, the reserved icon disappearance effect C, and the reserved icon disappearance effect D in that order. Note that in the reserved icon disappearance effects A through D, the reserved icon disappears (disappears) as described below, creating an unnatural display, providing the player with an unnatural effect and suggesting to the player that there may be a high chance of a win.

[Disappearance of the reserved icon A]
First, the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon will be described with reference to Fig. 155. Fig. 155 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon. The disappearance performance of the reserved icon is performed during the change performance of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, first, as shown in FIG. 155(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, although this is not shown in the figure. The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and even if they start to change, they do not become semi-transparent, and they do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and at the same time when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed in each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, the pending icon 9C in the shape of a smiling sphere (here, blue) is displayed at the non-display pending display position 9Cd, a white spherical pending icon is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad and the second pending display position 9Ad, and no pending icon is displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the display of the changing decorative pattern, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed as two with the blue number "2" on the left, and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed as zero with the red number "0" on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in Figure 155 (A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 155(A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 155(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3"), and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop, forming a reach. The reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C continue to be displayed in FIG. 155(A), the reserved display position 9Ad also continues to be displayed in FIG. 155(A), and the reserved display position 9Cd also continues to be hidden in FIG. 155(A). In addition, the numbers HMG (here "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, respectively, continue to be displayed in FIG. 155(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(C), the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 155(A) and (B), and the two reservation icons 9A, the reservation icon 9C, and the four reservation display positions 9Ad displayed in FIG. 155(A) and (B) disappear, and the reservation display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. In other words, with regard to the reservation, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reservation display position 9Cd are displayed, and the reservation icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear, causing the reservation display position 9Cd to appear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(D), a message MG stating "Your friendly character wins and it's a big win!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, followed by the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved display position 9Cd in FIG. 155(C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 155(E), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action scene (battle scene) featuring the two characters CRA and CRB unfolds (starts). In the action scene (battle scene), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a jackpot is awarded.

Here, the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation) is taking place. In the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown cornering the ally character CRA to the right, and regarding the reserved item, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved item display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 155 (D).

Next, as shown in Figure 155 (F), in the middle of the action presentation (battle presentation), the ally character CRA gains the upper hand and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left, and the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved display position 9Cd are displayed as shown in Figure 155 (E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(G), at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), a presentation is made to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, with the ally character CRA displayed in the center and the message MG "Victory" displayed to the left of the ally character CRA, and for the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed in FIG. 155(F), while the hold display position 9Cd is not displayed (disappears). Note that, when a presentation is made to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG "Defeat" displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 155(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same pattern (here, the number "3"), resulting in a big win and a big win game (big win presentation) in which the player is awarded a profit is played. As for the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 155(G), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (is hidden).

In addition, when an effect is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action effect (battle effect), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3" on the display screen 7a, and if the same patterns (here, the number "3") are not displayed, a miss is confirmed. In this case, for the reserved, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed as in FIG. 155 (G), and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again, and a white spherical reserved icon is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad and the second reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. Furthermore, with the confirmation of a miss, the reserved display position 9Cd becomes hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a as the reserved icon is consumed.

In this way, in the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a period of time after the decorative pattern begins to change (Figs. 155 (A) and (B)), but during the period when a specific performance is being performed (Figs. 155 (C) to (G)), the reserved icon 9C is hidden, providing the player with a novel performance of the reserved icon being displayed/hidden, which has not been seen before, and thus increasing the interest.

[Disappearance of the reserved icon B]
Next, the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon will be described with reference to Fig. 156. Fig. 156 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon. The disappearance performance of the reserved icon is performed during the change performance of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon, first, as shown in FIG. 156(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly up and down in small movements.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and at the same time when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, the corresponding small decorative patterns are also all displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed in each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, the pending icon 9C in the shape of a smiling sphere (here, blue) is displayed at the non-display pending display position 9Cd, a white spherical pending icon is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad and the second pending display position 9Ad, and no pending icon is displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the display of the changing decorative pattern, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed as two with the blue number "2" on the left, and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed as zero with the red number "0" on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 156 (A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 156(A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 156(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3"), and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop, forming a reach. The reserved icon 9A continues to be displayed in FIG. 156(A), the reserved display position 9Ad also continues to be displayed in FIG. 156(A), and the reserved display position 9Cd also continues to be hidden in FIG. 156(A). In addition, the numbers HMG (here "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, respectively, continue to be displayed in FIG. 156(A). The hold icon 9C continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 156(A), and is displayed in such a way that light is emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the hold icon 9C.

The reserved icon 9C in FIG. 156(B) may be the same as the reserved icon 9C in FIG. 156(A) (here, blue), or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, from blue to green).

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(C), the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 156(A) and (B), the two reservation icons 9A and the four reservation display positions 9Ad displayed in FIG. 156(A) and (B) disappear, and the reservation icon 9C and the light emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the reservation icon 9C continue to be displayed in FIG. 156(B). In other words, with regard to the reservation, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reservation display positions 9Cd and the light emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the reservation icon 9C are displayed.

The reserved icon 9C in FIG. 156(C) may be the same as the reserved icon 9C in FIG. 156(B) (here blue or green), or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, from blue to green, or from green to red).

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(D), the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed continuously in FIG. 156(C), and the reserved icon 9C displayed in FIG. 156(C) and the light emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the reserved icon 9C are displayed in a manner in which the size increases as they move from the reserved display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a (or are displayed in a manner in which the size increases as they move from the reserved display position to the display screen 7a and rotate back and forth). In addition, in the center of the inner area of the outer periphery of the reserved icon 9C displayed large, a performance button image BTN simulating the performance button 63 is arranged so as to overlap with the front of the reserved icon 9C in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, and is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner (here, flashing white). The part of the effect button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. In addition, within the inner area of the outer frame of the large-displayed reserved icon 9C and below the effect button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the reserved icon 9C. In addition, the "predetermined light emission mode" is set based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of jackpot)).

Furthermore, in FIG. 156(D), the reserved display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. In other words, for reserved items, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0"), the large reserved icon 9C, and the light emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the reserved icon 9C continue to be displayed as in FIG. 156(C), and the reserved display position 9Cd appears and is displayed anew. In other words, the reserved display position 9Cd and the reserved icons 9C that correspond to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 156 (E), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (approach each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape, consisting of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

In addition, in FIG. 156(E), for reservations, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0"), the reservation display position 9Cd, the reservation icon 9C displayed enlarged, and the light emitted in all directions from the outer periphery of the reservation icon 9C continue to be displayed as in FIG. 156(D), and the reservation display position 9Cd and the reservation icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as a "circular area") 14D, as shown in FIG. 156 (F). The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D already has the reserved icon 9C of a large smiling sphere displayed in FIG. 156 (D) arranged thereon, and the reserved icon 9C becomes an image expressing the emotion of a smile on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in relation to the circular area 14D of the combined part (i.e., the reserved icon 9C disappears and becomes an image expressing the emotion of the combined part), so that the combined part can have an emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined part.

In addition, in FIG. 156(F), for reserved items, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as in FIG. 156(E), and the reserved icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear and become images expressing the emotions of the combined reels.

In addition, when the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) toward (closer to each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the combined part covers part of the reserved display position 9Cd displayed on the display screen 7a (the upper part of the reserved display position 9Cd), making it difficult for the player to see the reserved display position 9Cd.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R move, the reserved display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figures 156 (E) and (F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(G), a message MG stating "Your friendly character will win and it's a big win!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and as for the reserved item, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved item display position 9Cd are still displayed as shown in FIG. 156(F).

After that, as shown in FIG. 156(H), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action scene (battle scene) featuring the two characters CRA and CRB unfolds (starts). In the action scene (battle scene), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a jackpot is awarded.

Here, the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation) is taking place. In the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown cornering the ally character CRA to the right, and regarding the reserved item, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved item display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 156 (G).

Next, although not shown, in the middle of the action presentation (battle presentation), the friendly character CRA gains the upper hand and drives the enemy character CRB to the left, and here too, regarding the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in Figure 156 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(I), at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), a presentation is made to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB, with the enemy character CRB displayed in the center and a message MG saying "Defeat" positioned to the left of the enemy character CRB, and as for the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed in the middle of the action presentation (battle presentation) (not shown). Note that when a presentation is made to announce the victory of the ally character CRA at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message MG saying "Victory" positioned to the left of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 156(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3" on the display screen 7a. If the same pattern (here, the number "3") is not aligned and stopped and displayed, a miss is confirmed. At this time, for the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed as in FIG. 156(I), and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed again, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Furthermore, with the confirmation of the miss, the hold display position 9Cd becomes hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the consumption of the hold icon.

When an effect is performed at the end of the action effect (battle effect) to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in the display screen 7a in the same pattern (here, the number "3"), resulting in a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which the player wins and receives a profit. In this case, for the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 156 (I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (is hidden).

In this way, in the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon, the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a period of time after the decorative pattern begins to change (Fig. 156 (A) to (E)), but during the period when a specific effect is being performed (Fig. 156 (F) to (I)), the reserved icon 9C is hidden, providing the player with a novel effect of the reserved icon being displayed/hidden, which has not been seen before, and thus increasing the interest.

[Disappearance of the reserved icon C]
Next, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon will be described with reference to Fig. 157. Fig. 157 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon. The disappearance performance of the reserved icon is performed during the change performance of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon, first, as shown in FIG. 157(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and at the same time when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, the corresponding small decorative patterns are also all displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed in each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the two hold icons 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the display of the changing decorative pattern, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed as two with the blue number "2" on the left, and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed as zero with the red number "0" on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in Figure 157 (A).

When the decorative pattern in Fig. 157(A) starts to change, as shown in Fig. 157(B), light is emitted in all directions from the center of the white spherical reserved icon 9C, flashing a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times), a flashing image FH is displayed, and the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in Fig. 157(A), and the two reserved icons 9A, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in Fig. 157(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped with the same pattern (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the number "3"), and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(B), and the two reservation icons 9A and the four reservation display positions 9Ad displayed in FIG. 157(B) are newly hidden, and the reservation icon 9C continues to be hidden in FIG. 157(B). In other words, for reservations, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reservation display positions 9Cd are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (closer to each other) an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a smiling face with eyes wide open is displayed, and then switches to an image of a smiling face with narrowed eyes (not shown). By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined part with an image expressing an emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to give the combined part emotion. This makes it possible to realize a wide variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined part.

In addition, in FIG. 157(D), for the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed as in FIG. 157(C), and when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R each start to move to form a combined part, the hold display position 9Cd that was displayed in FIG. 157(C) is now hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(E), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R move away from each other, and the left movable role 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R start to move to release the formed combined role, the reserved display position 9Cd, which was not displayed in FIG. 157(D), reappears. Note that in FIG. 157(E), the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(D) for reserved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(F), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state (here, flashing white). The part of the effect button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed so that it overlaps with the lower front part of the effect button image BTN. At this time, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157(E) disappears (disappears) again. Also, in FIG. 157(F), for the reserved, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are displayed continuously from FIG. 157(E). The "predetermined light emission pattern" is set based on the likelihood of a jackpot (variable performance start command), and the likelihood of a jackpot is set to be high in the following order: flashing white light → flashing blue light → flashing green light → flashing red light → flashing gold light (flashing yellow light) → flashing seven colors (rainbow light (high likelihood of jackpot)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 157 (G), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) toward (approach each other) the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, and an image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D formed within the ring shape. Here, an image of a smiling face wearing sunglasses is displayed. The combined part can be made to have an emotion by supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined part with an image expressing an emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of effects depending on the emotions of the combined part.

In addition, in FIG. 157(G), for the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed as in FIG. 157(F), and the hold display position 9Cd continues to be hidden as in FIG. 157(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(H), the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R move away from each other, and the left movable role 14L retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R retreats (moves) from the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R start to move to release the formed combined role, the reserved display position 9Cd, which was hidden in FIG. 157(G), reappears. Note that in FIG. 157(H), the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(G) for reserved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 157(I), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN that imitates the effect button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state. The part of the effect button image that corresponds to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. This effect button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so that it overlaps with the lower front part of the effect button image BTN. At this time, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157(H) disappears (disappears) again. Also, in FIG. 157(I), for reserved, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(H). The predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157(I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the effect button image BTN in FIG. 157(F), or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a jackpot (for example, from flashing white to flashing blue or gold (flashing yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the valid period for accepting operations on the effect button 63 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in Figure 157 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L will be the number "3," the middle decorative pattern 8C will be the number "4," and the right decorative pattern 8R will be the number "3" on the display screen 7a, and if the same pattern (here, the number "3") is not displayed and stopped, a miss will be confirmed. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(I), and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed again, with white spherical hold icons being displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons being displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and furthermore, the hold display position 9Cd appears again. With the confirmation display of a miss, the hold icon 9C is consumed and becomes invisible (disappears).

In FIG. 157(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same pattern (here, the number "3"), and if a jackpot occurs, a jackpot game (jackpot presentation) will be played in which the player will be awarded a profit. In this case, with regard to the reservation, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed in FIG. 157(J) following FIG. 157(I), and the reservation display position 9Cd disappears (disappears) following FIG. 157(I).

In this way, in the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon, the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a period of time after the decorative pattern begins to change (Fig. 157 (A) to (B)), but during the period when a specific effect is being performed (Fig. 157 (C) to (I)), the reserved icon 9C is hidden, providing the player with a novel effect of the reserved icon being displayed/hidden, which has not been seen before, and thus increasing the player's interest.

[Disappearance of the reserved icon D]
Next, the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon will be described with reference to Fig. 158. Fig. 158 is a diagram for explaining the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon. The disappearance performance of the reserved icon is performed during the change performance of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon, first, as shown in FIG. 158(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

At the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and at the same time when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, the corresponding small decorative patterns are also all displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed in each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the two hold icons 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the display of the changing decorative pattern, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed as two with the blue number "2" on the left, and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed as zero with the red number "0" on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in Figure 158 (A).

When the decorative pattern in Fig. 158(A) starts to change, as shown in Fig. 158(B), a flashing image FH is displayed in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in Fig. 158(A), and the two reserved icons 9A, the four reserved display positions 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in Fig. 158(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, the number "3"), and the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, forming a reach. At this time, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 158(B), and the two reservation icons 9A, the four reservation display positions 9Ad, and the reservation display positions 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 158(B).

Next, as shown in Fig. 158(D), the area of the display screen 7a goes into a pseudo-abnormal display mode. Examples of "pseudo-abnormal display modes" include a display mode like a sandstorm, a display mode where the screen is distorted by noise, a display mode where an image is not displayed normally due to a processing delay, and a display mode where a message is displayed to show an alternative effect because the original screen cannot be returned to.

In FIG. 158(D), when the area of the display screen 7a is in a pseudo-abnormal display mode, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 continue to be displayed in FIG. 158(C), and the two reservation icons 9A and the four reservation display positions 9Ad displayed in FIG. 158(C) are newly hidden, and further, the reservation display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158(C) is newly hidden. In other words, with regard to the reservation, only the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are displayed. In addition, in the pseudo-abnormal display mode, the position where the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are displayed and the surrounding area may be avoided. This ensures visibility of the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (E), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (closer to each other) an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advanced position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An image expressing an emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with eyes wide open is displayed, and then switches to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes (not shown). By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined part with an image expressing an emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to give the combined part emotion. This makes it possible to realize a wide variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined part.

In addition, in FIG. 158(E), for pending orders, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are displayed as in FIG. 158(D).

After that, although not shown, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R move away from each other, and the left movable role 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable role 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R each start to move to release the formed combined role, the reserved display position 9Cd, which had been hidden, reappears, although not shown. In other words, for the reserved, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved display position 9Cd are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(F), a message MG stating "Your friendly character will win and it's a big win!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and regarding the reserved item, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved item display position 9Cd are displayed as shown in FIG. 158(E).

After that, as shown in FIG. 158(G), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action scene (battle scene) featuring the two characters CRA and CRB unfolds (starts). In the action scene (battle scene), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a jackpot is awarded.

Here, the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation) is taking place. In the initial stage of the action presentation (battle presentation), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown cornering the ally character CRA to the right, and regarding the reserved item, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the reserved item display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 158 (F).

Next, although not shown, in the middle of the action presentation (battle presentation), the ally character CRA gains the upper hand and drives the enemy character CRB to the left, and here too, regarding the hold, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as in Figure 156 (F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(H), at the end of the action presentation (battle presentation), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the presentation button 63, a presentation button image BTN simulating the presentation button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state (here, flashing white). The part of the presentation button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the presentation button 63 has the English word "PUSH" engraved on it. This presentation button image BTN is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. A timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the presentation button 63 is displayed so that it overlaps with the lower front part of the presentation button image BTN. At this time, the reserved display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158(G) disappears (disappears) again. Also, in FIG. 158(H), for the reserved, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") are displayed continuously from FIG. 158(G). The "predetermined light emission pattern" is set based on the likelihood of a jackpot (variable performance start command), and the likelihood of a jackpot is set to be high in the following order: flashing white light → flashing blue light → flashing green light → flashing red light → flashing gold light (flashing yellow light) → flashing seven colors (rainbow light (high likelihood of jackpot)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), an effect is performed to notify the victory of the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 158(I), with the ally character CRA displayed in the center and the message "Victory" MG displayed to the left of the ally character CRA, and for the reserved character, the numbers HMG (here, "2 0") continue to be displayed in FIG. 158(H), and the reserved display position 9Cd remains hidden (disappears) in FIG. 158(H). Note that, if an effect to notify the victory of the ally character CRA is not performed and an effect to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message "Defeat" MG displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 158(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the same pattern (here, the number "3"), resulting in a big win and a big win game (big win presentation) in which the player is awarded a profit is played. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed as in FIG. 158(I), and the hold display position 9Cd continues to disappear (is not displayed) as in FIG. 158(I).

In addition, when a performance is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB without a performance to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the center decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3" on the display screen 7a, and if the same patterns (here, the number "3") are not aligned and stopped and displayed, a miss is confirmed. In this case, for the reservation, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed as in FIG. 158(I), and the first reservation display position 9Ad, the second reservation display position 9Ad, the third reservation display position 9Ad, and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad are displayed again, and a white spherical reservation icon is displayed at the first reservation display position 9Ad and the second reservation display position 9Ad, and no reservation icon is displayed at the third reservation display position 9Ad and the fourth reservation display position 9Ad. Furthermore, with the confirmation of a miss, the reserved display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a as the reserved icon 9C is consumed.

In this way, in the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon, the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a period of time after the decorative pattern begins to change (Figs. 158 (A) and (B)), but during the period when a specific effect is being performed (Figs. 158 (C) to (I)), the reserved icon 9C is hidden, providing the player with a novel effect of the reserved icon being displayed/hidden, which has not been seen before, and thus increasing the player's interest.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the pending icon disappearing.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 155 (A) to 155 (H) of the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and when a changing display of multiple decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) based on the reserved icon 9C is started, the reserved icon 9C is displayed, and then, when a specific performance in Figures 155 (C) to 155 (G) is started before the changing display of multiple decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped, a first performance can be executed in which the reserved icon 9C is not displayed. According to this configuration, the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a certain period of time (Figures 155 (A) and (B)) after the decorative pattern begins to change, but during the period when the specific effects in Figures 155 (C) to 155 (G) are performed, the reserved icon 9C is made invisible, thereby providing the player with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the reserved icon, which has not been seen before, and thereby increasing the player's interest.
In the disappearance presentation B of the reserved icon in Figures 156 (A) to 156 (J), the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a certain period of time (Figures 156 (A) to 156 (E)) after the decorative pattern begins to change, but during the period in which a specific presentation in Figures 156 (F) to 156 (I) is performed, the reserved icon 9C is made invisible, thereby providing the player with a novel presentation of the reserved icon being made to disappear on/off, which has not been seen before, and thereby increasing the player's interest.
In the disappearance presentation C of the reserved icon in Figures 157 (A) to 157 (J), the reserved icon 9C is displayed for a certain period of time after the decorative pattern begins to change (Figures 157 (A) to 157 (B)), but during the period when a specific presentation is being performed (Figures 157 (C) to 157 (I)), the reserved icon 9C is made invisible, thereby providing the player with a novel presentation of the reserved icon being made to disappear on/off, which has not been seen before, and thereby increasing the player's interest.
In the disappearance presentation D of the reserved icon in Figures 158 (A) to 158 (J), the reserved icon 9C is displayed, but during the period when a specific presentation is being performed (Figures 158 (C) to 158 (I)), the reserved icon 9C is made invisible, thereby providing the player with a novel presentation of the reserved icon being made to disappear on/off, which has not been seen before, and thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 155(A) to Fig. 155(H) of the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, the reserved display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9A can be displayed, and the first performance displays the reserved display position 9Ad in Fig. 155(A) to Fig. 155(B) when the variable display by the multiple decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) starts, and hides the reserved display position 9Ad during the period from the start to the end of the specific performance in Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(G). According to this configuration, the reserved display position 9Ad is hidden during the period in which the specific performance is performed (Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(G)), so that the visibility of the specific performance is not hindered by the reserved display position 9Ad, and the impact of the specific performance can be suppressed from being impaired.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon in Figures 156 (F) to 156 (I), the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in Figures 157 (C) to 157 (I), and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in Figures 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 155(H) of the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, the first performance notifies a win as a win or loss in a specific lottery when a variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is started and stopped (the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "3")). When the same pattern is displayed, as shown in FIG. 155(C) to FIG. 155(C) to 155(G), the reserved display position 9Ad continues to be hidden in FIG. 155(H), while when a loss is notified as a win or loss in a specific lottery in FIG. 155(C) to FIG. 155(G) (the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same patterns (here, the number "3") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed), the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed after the specific lottery is ended, although not shown. According to this configuration, when a win is notified as a win or loss in a specific lottery after the specific lottery is ended and a winning game (winning performance) is started, the winning game (winning performance) is not obstructed by the reserved display position 9Ad, and therefore it is possible to prevent the impact of the winning game (winning performance) from being impaired. Furthermore, even if a player becomes disappointed when he or she is informed that he or she has lost a particular lottery, the reserve display position 9Ad is displayed, so that, for example, if there is a reserve icon 9A displayed at the reserve display position 9Ad, the color and shape of the reserve icon 9A can quickly convey to the player the expected probability of winning, which can contribute to increasing motivation to play.
The same is true for the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon in Figure 156 (J), the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in Figure 157 (J), and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in Figure 158 (J).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(H) of the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, the first performance also hides the reserved display position 9Ad during the period from the start of the variable display by the multiple decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) to the stop display during which the reserved display position 9Ad is hidden. According to this configuration, since it is the period during which the specific performance in Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(G) is performed, the reserved icon 9A is displayed at the reserved display position 9Ad, and by hiding the reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A, the visibility of the specific performance is not obstructed by the reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A, so that the impact of the specific performance can be further suppressed from being impaired.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon in Figures 156 (F) to 156 (I), the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in Figures 157 (C) to 157 (I), and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in Figures 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(G) of the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, the reserved display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9C can be displayed, and the first performance can display the reserved display position 9Cd during the period from the start of the variable display by the multiple decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) to the stop display during which the reserved icon 9C is not displayed (period of Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(F)). According to this configuration, even though the variable display by the multiple decorative patterns of the reserved icon 9C has started, the reserved icon 9C is not displayed, while the reserved display position 9Cd displaying the reserved icon 9C is displayed, resulting in an unnatural display, which provides the player with an unnatural performance and suggests to the player that there is a high chance of winning.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon in Figures 156 (F) to 156 (I), the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in Figures 157 (C) to 157 (I), and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in Figures 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 155(A) to Fig. 155(G) of the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon, the specific performance in Fig. 155(C) to Fig. 155(G) can be executed after the variable display of multiple decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) is started and a reach is formed. According to this configuration, the player can find out by himself that the strange feeling performance in which the reserved icon 9C is hidden is performed by the first performance, triggered by the formation of a reach as the time of playing is extended, so that the player can expect the strange feeling performance to occur every time a reach occurs, and it is possible to suppress the pain even if the time of playing is extended.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the reserved icon in Figures 156 (F) to 156 (I), the disappearance effect C of the reserved icon in Figures 157 (C) to 157 (I), and the disappearance effect D of the reserved icon in Figures 158 (C) to 158 (I).

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the disappearance presentation of the pending icon are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in FIG. 158, the reserved icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, a dedicated sound may be played from the speaker 67 to inform the player that the reserved icon 9C has been hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. In this way, the player can be prevented from accidentally overlooking that the reserved icon 9C has been hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. This makes it possible to inform the player that the reserved icon 9C has been hidden (disappeared), which is a strange display.

[Modification 2]
In the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon in FIG. 155, the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon in FIG. 156, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in FIG. 158, the reserved icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the reserved icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, a countdown performance may be performed on the display screen 7a. As the countdown performance, for example, the numbers "5", "4", "3", "2", "1", and "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the sound of the numbers being read aloud (announcement) may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can grasp the timing when the reserved icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally missing it. This makes it possible to inform the player of the time when the reserved icon 9C will be hidden (disappeared) and will be displayed in a strange way.

[Modification 3]
In the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon in FIG. 156(D) and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in FIG. 158(H), in order to encourage the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. However, instead of the BTN followed by the performance button, in order to encourage the player to operate (push) the sword member 64, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner, or the performance button image BTN and the sword image may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner. In this way, it is possible to provide variation to the performance by varying the type of operation method, so that even if the time spent playing is long, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to operate.

[Modification 4]
In the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon in Fig. 156, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon in Fig. 157, and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in Fig. 158, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63, a performance button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 can be achieved by operating (pressing operation) the sword button 65.

[Modification 5]
In the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon in Fig. 155, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon in Fig. 157, and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in Fig. 158, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably to form a reach, the reserved display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A, the reserved display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, when a reach is formed, only the reserved display position 9Cd may be always displayed on the display screen 7a.
[Modification 6]
In the disappearance performance A of the reserved icon in Fig. 155, the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon in Fig. 156, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon in Fig. 157, and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in Fig. 158, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably, the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, either one or both of the reserved display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9A and the reserved display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the reserved icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
The disappearance performance A of the reserved icon in Figure 155, the disappearance performance B of the reserved icon in Figure 156, the disappearance performance C of the reserved icon in Figure 157, and the disappearance performance D of the reserved icon in Figure 158 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When a variable display based on the reserved icon using a plurality of decorative patterns is started, the reserved icon is displayed, and when a specific performance is started before the variable display based on the plurality of decorative patterns is stopped, a first performance is executed to hide the reserved icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1,
A hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon can be displayed,
The first performance displays the reserved display position when the variable display by the plurality of decorative patterns is started, and does not display the reserved display position during a period from the start to the end of the specific performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or G3-2,
In the first performance, when the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols is started and stopped, if a win is notified as a win or loss in a specific lottery, the reserved display position is continuously hidden after the specific performance ends, whereas if a loss is notified as a win or loss in a specific lottery, the reserved display position is displayed after the specific performance ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect G3-2 or G3-3,
The first performance is to hide the reserved icon during a period during which the reserved display position is hidden during a period from when the variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns is started to when the decorative patterns are stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4,
The hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon can be displayed,
The first performance is capable of displaying the reserved display position during a period in which the reserved icon is not displayed during a period from when the variable display by the plurality of decorative patterns is started to when the variable display is stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5,
The specific performance can be executed after the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols is started and a reach is formed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon image display effects A to D are explained below using Figures 159 to 162. These pending icon image display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon image display effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending icon image display effect A]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon image display performance A. In the reserved icon image display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stopped patterns. The reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a diamond-shaped reserved icon 9C. Four diamond-shaped reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be erased, and the subsequent performance may be performed while they remain displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, a specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed to the right of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiling face. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of aspects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), a hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, similar to the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed moving within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around in a clockwise direction, drawing an ellipse, within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that during the hold icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after it is displayed, or may disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in Figures 159(F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in Figure 159(F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed as if it is moving to the right. Then, as shown in Figure 159(G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed as if it is popping out to the outside of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 159(H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears from the display screen 7a as if it is popping out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 159(I) and (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in Figure 159(I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is jumping into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving to the right. Then, as shown in Figure 159(J), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed in a position at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

[Reserved icon image display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon image display performance B. In the reserved icon image display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stopped patterns. The reserved icon 9C in a diamond shape is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four reserved icons 9A in a diamond shape are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern "128") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the change in the decorative pattern, and the next change begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160 (D), a hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, similar to the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed moving within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around in a clockwise direction, drawing an ellipse, within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that during the hold icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after it is displayed, or may disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in Figures 160(F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in Figure 160(F), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed as if it is moving to the right. Then, as shown in Figure 160(G), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed as if it is popping out to the outside of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 160(H), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears from the display screen 7a as if it is popping out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 160(I) and (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in Figure 160(I), the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is jumping into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving to the right. Then, as shown in Figure 160(J), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed in a position at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon image display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon image display performance C. In the reserved icon image display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 161 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stopped patterns. The reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a displays the diamond-shaped reserved icon 9C. Four diamond-shaped reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be erased, and the subsequent performance may be performed while they remain displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, a specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed to the right of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiling face. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of aspects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in Figs. 161(D) and (E), a hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, similar to the hold icon 9C. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 161(D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move upward from the position of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to pop out upward from behind (the back side of) the hold icon 9C. Then, as shown in Fig. 161(E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position at the top center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed moving within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around in a clockwise direction, drawing an ellipse within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that during the hold icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after it is displayed, or may disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in Figures 161(G) to (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in Figure 161(G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed as if it is moving to the right. Then, as shown in Figure 161(H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed as if it is popping out to the outside of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 161(I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears from the display screen 7a as if it is popping out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, the crest image EG imitating a circular emblem including the diamond-shaped hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is jumping into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving to the right.

[Hold icon image display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon image display performance D. In the reserved icon image display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 162 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stopped patterns. The reserved icon 9C in a diamond shape is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four reserved icons in a diamond shape are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be erased, and the subsequent performance may be performed while they remain in the variable display state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, a specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed to the right of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG2 represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiling face. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of aspects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in Fig. 162 (D) and (E), a hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right in the first hold display area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image, similar to the hold icon 9A. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 162 (D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move diagonally upward to the right from the position of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right in the first hold display area. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to pop out diagonally upward to the right from behind (the back side of) the hold icon 9A. Then, as shown in Fig. 162 (E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position at the top center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed in a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at that hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed moving within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates around in a clockwise direction, drawing an ellipse, within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 on the display screen 7a has disappeared. Note that during the hold icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after it is displayed, or may disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in Figures 162(G) to (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, as shown in Figure 162(G), the hold icon image HAG displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed as if it is moving to the right. Then, as shown in Figure 162(H), the hold icon image HAG moves further to the right and is displayed as if it is popping out to the outside of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 162(I), the display of the hold icon image HAG disappears from the display screen 7a as if it is popping out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is moving from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Specifically, the crest image EG imitating a circular emblem including the diamond-shaped hold icon image HAG is displayed as if it is jumping into the display screen 7a from outside while moving to the right.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the hold icon image display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 159 to 162, a first effect is executed in which the reserved icon 9A (reserved icon 9C) is displayed at the reserved display position (reserved display position) on the display screen 7a, and a second effect is executed in which the reserved icon image HAG imitating the reserved icon 9A (reserved icon 9C) displayed at the reserved display position (reserved display position) is displayed on the display screen 7a after the first effect. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 161 and 162, in the second performance, the reserved icon image HAG is displayed moving from the reserved icon 9A (reserved icon 9C) displayed at the reserved display position (reserved display position). This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 159 to 162, after the second performance, a third performance can be further executed in which the reserved icon image HAG is displayed to move within the display screen 7a. This configuration can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 159 to 162, after the third performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which the reserved icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from inside the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 159 to 162, after the fourth performance, a fifth performance can be executed in which the reserved icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from the outside of the display screen 7a to the inside of the display screen 7a. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 159 to 161, the reserved display position is the reserved display position, and the reserved icon is the reserved icon 9C. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 159 to 162, the second effect is executed when a specific effect (for example, the display of a specific image TG2, the start of the next change of a decorative pattern, etc.) is performed. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the hold icon image display presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is a diamond shape, but the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) may be of various other shapes, patterns, colors, etc. The same is true for the hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Variation 2]
159 to 162, when a specific effect (for example, the display of the specific image TG2, the start of the next change of the decorative pattern, etc.) is performed, the reserved icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a, but the specific effect may be various other effects. For example, it may be when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach state, when a specific image is displayed, when a movable member or the like operates, etc.
[Variation 3]
159 to 162, one hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed on the display screen 7a, but the number of hold images HAG displayed may be multiple. Also, a hold icon image HAG of the same size as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed, but it may be larger or smaller than the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C), or may be displayed at a different size.
[Variation 4]
In Figures 159 to 162, the hold icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a moves around in a clockwise direction in an ellipse on the display screen 7a, but the manner in which the hold icon image HAG moves on the display screen 7a is not limited to this, and the hold icon image HAG may move in various manners. For example, the hold icon image HAG may move while rotating.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect G4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed at a predetermined hold display position in the display means;
After the first performance, a second performance is executed in which a hold icon image imitating the hold icon displayed at the hold display position is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-1,
In the second performance, the reserved icon image is displayed so as to move from the position of the reserved icon displayed at the reserved display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect G4-1 or aspect G4-2,
After the second performance, a third performance can be further executed in which the hold icon image is displayed so as to move within the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-3,
After the third performance, a fourth performance can be further executed in which the hold icon image is displayed as if moving from within the display means to the outside of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect G4-4,
After the fourth performance, a fifth performance can be further executed in which the hold icon image is displayed as if moving from outside the display means to inside the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-5,
The hold display position is the hold display position,
The hold icon is the hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-6,
The second effect is executed when a specific effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation state suggestion effects A to D are explained below with reference to Figs. 163 to 166. These operation state suggestion display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute an operation state suggestion effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Operation state suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion performance A. In the operation unit state suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been obtained by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern "835") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the current change in the decorative pattern, and the next change begins. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which they move quickly up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(E), the center decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "6") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 163 (F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a variable manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in Fig. 163 (F), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, approaches the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Then, as shown in Fig. 163 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position in a miss mode. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative pattern 8R in this embodiment) of the missing decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R).

In this embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) that shows the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that shows a state in which the effect button 63 is inside a capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests a state in which the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is inside a capsule, that is, a state in which operation of the effect button 63 is invalid (first aspect). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (H), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the current change in the decorative pattern and starts the next change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (I), an operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that indicates that the capsule covering the performance button 63 has broken, exposing the performance button 63. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that, because the capsule covering the performance button 63 has broken, the performance button 63 will switch from a state in which it cannot be pressed to a state in which it can be pressed, that is, from a state in which operation of the performance button 63 is invalid to a state in which operation of the performance button 63 is valid (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 163 (J), an operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the performance button 63 is not inside a capsule and therefore can be pressed, i.e., operation of the performance button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the performance button 63 is actually pressed, that operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation status suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid. The timer bar TB is displayed in a position below the button image BG. Note that in addition to the button image BG and timer bar TB, the operation status suggestion image SSG may also include an operation prompting image (for example, a text image of "PRESS!!!") that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63.

[Operation state suggestion display B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion performance B. In the operation unit state suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 164 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern "835") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the current change in the decorative pattern, and the next change begins. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which they move quickly up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down in its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(E), the center decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "6") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 164 (F) and (G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the stop display position. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a variable manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in Fig. 164 (F), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, approaches the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Then, as shown in Fig. 164 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position in a miss mode. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative pattern 8R in this embodiment) of the missing decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R).

In this embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a sword image KG (operation unit image) that represents the appearance of the sword member 64 (operation unit), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG that represents the appearance of the sword button 65. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG shows a state in which the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen). The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests a state in which the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen), that is, a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is invalid. At this time, even if the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (H), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the change in the decorative pattern and starts the next change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(I), an operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that indicates that the ice covering the surface of the sword member 64 has melted, causing the sword member 64 to become exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that, because the ice covering the sword member 64 has melted, the sword member 64 will switch from a state in which it cannot be pushed in to a state in which it can be pushed in, in other words, from a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is invalid to a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is valid (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (J), an operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the surface of the sword member 64 is not covered with ice and therefore the sword member 64 can be pushed in, i.e., the operation of the sword member 64 is valid (third mode). At this time, if the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a sword image KG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation status suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the period during which the operation of the sword member 64 is valid. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. Note that the operation status suggestion image SSG may include, in addition to the sword image KG and the timer bar TB, an operation prompting image (for example, a text image of "Push it in!!!") that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64.

[Operation state suggestion display C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion performance C. In the operation unit state suggestion performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern "835") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the current change in the decorative pattern, and the next change begins. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which they move quickly up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(D), the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving at high speed from top to bottom, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(E), the center decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "6") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 165 (F) and (G), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a variable manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in Fig. 165 (F), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, approaches the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Then, as shown in Fig. 165 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position in a miss mode. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative pattern 8R in this embodiment) of the missing decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R).

In this embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) that shows the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that shows a state in which the effect button 63 is inside a capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests a state in which the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is inside a capsule, that is, a state in which operation of the effect button 63 is invalid (first aspect). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (H), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, a specific image TG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is displayed to the right of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG represents a specific object. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiling face. Note that specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, or objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manner of aspects in which the number of specific objects can be identified when there are multiple specific objects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(I), after a specific image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that indicates that the capsule covering the performance button 63 has broken, exposing the performance button 63. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that, because the capsule covering the performance button 63 has broken, the performance button 63 will switch from a state in which it cannot be pressed to a state in which it can be pressed, that is, from a state in which the operation of the performance button 63 is invalid to a state in which the operation of the performance button 63 is valid (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165 (J), an operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the performance button 63 is not inside a capsule and therefore can be pressed, i.e., operation of the performance button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the performance button 63 is actually pressed, that operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation status suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid. The timer bar TB is displayed in a position below the button image BG. Note that in addition to the button image BG and timer bar TB, the operation status suggestion image SSG may also include an operation prompting image (for example, a text image of "PRESS!!!") that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63.

[Operation state suggestion display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit state suggestion performance D. In the operation unit state suggestion performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed variably on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. The decorative pattern includes the pattern images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has been won by the combination of these stopped patterns. A white spherical reserved icon 9C is displayed at the reserved display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical reserved icons 9A are displayed in the first reserved display area to the left of the reserved display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a losing mode (losing pattern "835") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the current change in the decorative pattern, and the next change begins. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a changing manner in which they move quickly up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(D), the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "3") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the pattern image of the number, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the pattern image of the number "3" is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(E), the center decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, a pattern image of the number "6") is displayed stopped at the stopped display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8C, is displayed in a fluctuating manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image is displayed stopped at the stopped display position while slowly slowing down its moving speed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 166 (F) and (G), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a variable manner moving from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in Fig. 166 (F), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R and is a special pattern image that is not a normal number pattern image, approaches the stop display position while slowly decreasing the moving speed. Then, as shown in Fig. 166 (G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the stop display position in a miss mode. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (right decorative pattern 8R in this embodiment) of the missing decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R).

In this embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation unit image) that shows the appearance of the effect button 63 (operation unit), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the effect button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that shows a state in which the effect button 63 is inside a capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests a state in which the effect button 63 cannot be pressed because the effect button 63 is inside a capsule, that is, a state in which operation of the effect button 63 is invalid (first aspect). At this time, even if the effect button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (H), the display of the reserved icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A in the first reserved display area moves to the reserved display position and is displayed as the reserved icon 9C. The remaining reserved icons 9A also shift one by one to the right. This ends the change in the decorative pattern and starts the next change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the center decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner in which they move up and down at high speed. Meanwhile, the right decorative pattern 8R displays an operation state suggestion image SSG following the previous variation. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image that indicates that the capsule covering the performance button 63 has broken and the performance button 63 is now exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that, because the capsule covering the performance button 63 has broken, the performance button 63 will switch from a state in which it cannot be pressed to a state in which it can be pressed, that is, from a state in which the operation of the performance button 63 is not valid to a state in which the operation of the performance button 63 is valid (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the performance button 63 is not inside a capsule and therefore can be pressed, i.e., operation of the performance button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the performance button 63 is actually pressed, that operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation status suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the period during which the operation of the effect button 63 is valid. The timer bar TB is displayed in a position below the button image BG. Note that in addition to the button image BG and timer bar TB, the operation status suggestion image SSG may also include an operation prompting image (for example, a text image of "PRESS!!!") that prompts the player to operate the effect button 63.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the operation status indication display.
[Effect 1]
163 to 166, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes operation unit images (button images BG, sword image KG) representing the operation unit (operation buttons 63, sword member 64), and can execute a first effect in which an operation state suggesting image SSG suggesting the operation state of the operation unit (operation buttons 63, sword member 64) is displayed in a first manner, a second effect in which the operation state suggesting image SSG is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner after the first effect, and a third effect in which the operation state suggesting image SSG is displayed in a third manner different from the first and second manners after the second effect. This configuration can provide visual entertainment to the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
163 to 166, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a first state of the operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the operation of the operation unit (operation buttons 63, sword member 64) is in an invalid state, a second state of the operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the operation of the operation unit (operation buttons 63, sword member 64) will switch from an invalid state to an valid state, and a third state of the operation state suggesting image SSG suggests that the operation of the operation unit (operation buttons 63, sword member 64) is in an valid state. This configuration provides visual entertainment to the player, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 163 to 166, the first effect is displayed in a first manner in which the operation state suggestion image SSG is at least a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the losing state. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are executed across the current change and the next change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in Figures 163, 164, and 166. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the interest of the player.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 163, 164, and 166, the first effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change, and the second and third effects are executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change next time. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest of the player.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second effect is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts, as shown in Figures 163, 164, and 166. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the operation state indication display.
[Modification 1]
163 to 166, the operation part images are button images BG and sword images KG representing the operation buttons 63 and sword members 64, but they may also be images representing other operation parts (levers, handles, touch panels, etc.).
[Variation 2]
In Figures 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the missing state, but it may also be displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L or the middle decorative pattern 8C.
[Variation 3]
In Figures 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in the missing state, but it may be displayed as multiple decorative patterns, such as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, or it may be displayed as all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
[Variation 4]
In Figures 163 to 166, the three types of operation state suggesting image SSG are types that suggest the validity of the operation of the operating unit (a state in which the operation is not valid, switching from a state in which the operation is not valid to a valid state, and a state in which the operation is valid), but it may also be a type that suggests, for example, how to operate the operating unit, the direction of operation, etc.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect H1-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation state suggesting image that includes an operation unit image representing the operation unit and suggests an operation state of the operation unit;
A first effect in which the operation state suggesting image is displayed in a first manner;
A second effect in which the operation state suggesting image is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner after the first effect;
After the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1,
the first aspect of the operation state suggesting image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is in an invalid state;
the second aspect of the operation state suggesting image suggests switching from a state in which the operation of the operation unit is invalid to a state in which the operation of the operation unit is valid;
The third aspect of the operation state suggesting image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is in a valid state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect H1-1 or H1-2,
In the first performance, the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first manner as at least a part of the decorative pattern in a losing state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects H1-1 to H1-3,
The first performance, the second performance, and the third performance are executed across the change of the decorative pattern to the next change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-4,
The first performance is executed at the time of the change of the decorative pattern,
The second effect and the third effect are executed at the next variation of the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-5,
The second performance is executed when the next variation of the decorative pattern is started.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, operation image stock effects A to D are explained using Figures 167 to 170. In Figures 167 to 170, the various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, some drawings of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing, and some first movable role pieces 14 and second movable role pieces 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This operation image stock effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to vary to when it stops). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the operation image stock effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission state of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain operation image stock effect A, then operation image stock effect B, operation image stock effect C, and operation image stock effect D in that order.

[Operation image stock effect A]
First, the operation image stock effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 167. Fig. 167 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect A. The operation image stock effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In operation image stock performance A, after the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (starts) as shown in FIG. 167(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance is developed in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle is waged between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 167(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been obtained, and one of the button images BG has a text image of "long press" attached to it. The two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the button image BG with the text image of "long press" attached being placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(C), the action scene (battle scene) unfolds (starts) again. Here, a scene unfolds in which an attack by friendly character CRA hits enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 167(C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword component 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG become the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. The handle of the sword image KG has a text image of "sword" attached to it. In contrast, the normal button image BG and the button image BG with the text image of "long press" attached to it do not have the text image of "button" attached to them at all. Here, a regular button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom above the button image BG with the text image "long press" attached, which is placed second from the bottom and is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a sword image KG is placed as the fourth from the bottom above this regular button image BG.

In this way, three button images BG (two normal button images BG and one button image BG with the text image "long press") and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked (i.e. the total number of various images stocked (stock number)) indicates the expectation of a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked (i.e. the total number of various images stocked (stock number)), the higher the expectation of a win (big win or small win).

The button image BG with the text image "long press" is set to have a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) than a normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63). Also, the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) than a button image BG with the text image "long press". In other words, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) set for the sword image KG is higher than that set for the normal button image BG, and is further higher than that for the button image BG with the text image "long press" which is set higher than the normal button image BG. Furthermore, the three button images BG (two normal button images BG and one button image BG with the text image "long press") and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are illuminated in a predetermined manner (here, lit in white). The "predetermined light emission pattern" is based on the expectation of a hit (big or small win) (variable performance start command), and is set to a high expectation of a hit (big or small win) in the following order: white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven colors light (rainbow light (high probability of hit)). In addition, the expectation of a hit (big or small win) is set to a high expectation in the following order: flashing white light → flashing blue light → flashing green light → flashing red light → flashing gold light (yellow flashing) → seven colors flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of hit)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167(E) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue) or a green light (flashing green)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 167(F), the button image BG with the text image "long press" stored on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed, and when the button image BG with the text image "long press" disappears from the display screen 7a, the button image BG with the text image "long press" is displayed in a predetermined light emission manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments on the upper left of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part. In addition, a message MG "long press" that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 for a long time (continue pressing) is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167(F) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the button image BG with the text image "long press" attached when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)).

When a player presses and holds (continues to press) the effect button 63 during the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds), the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is played continuously from the speaker 67 as a long press operation sound.

When the player presses and holds the effect button 63 (continuing the pressing operation) during the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds), or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 167(G), the normal button image BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167(G) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue) or a green light (flashing green)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 167(H), the sword image KG stocked (arranged on the top row) on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed on the front left of the sword image KG in a manner that moves up and down in small increments, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, a message MG saying "Push it in!!" that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 167(H) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a higher expectancy of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)).

When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), a specific sound that is different from the first normal operation sound (push operation sound) and notifies the player of a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and further, as shown in FIG. 167(I), a seven-colored image BKH (a so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and a confirmed win effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. This confirmed win effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that notifies the player of a confirmed win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "7", the center decorative pattern is displayed as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed as a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) will start.

In addition, when the player operates (push operation) the sword member 64 in Figure 167 (H), or when the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, and the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in Figure 167 (I) and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, when the player operates (push operation) the sword member 64, a second normal operation sound (push operation sound) is played from the speaker 67, and following Figure 167 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are each lined up on a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display area, and are displayed as stopped patterns (here, the number "7") that do not line up, and a miss is displayed as a confirmed miss. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (press operation sound), or it may be a different sound (and of course a different sound from the specific sound).

In this way, in operation image stock performance A, in addition to button images BG (normal button images BG and button images BG with the text image "long press"), sword images KG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and when using these one by one, the player can operate the performance button 63 or the sword member 64, and further, the result of whether or not a win (big win or small win) will occur (a win confirmation performance is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby increasing interest.

[Operation image stock effect B]
Next, the operation image stock effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect B. The operation image stock effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In operation image stock performance B, after the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (starts) as shown in FIG. 168 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, a performance is developed in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle is waged between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 168(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been obtained, and the two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) being placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(C), the action scene (battle scene) unfolds (starts) again. Here, a scene unfolds in which an attack by friendly character CRA hits enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 168(C). In the button get effect, two button images BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword part 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button images BG and sword images KG become the rewards for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG and sword images KG are piled up and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a and are stocked. One of the two obtained button images BG has a text image of "continuous hit" attached to it. Also, the handle of the obtained sword image KG has a text image of "sword" attached to it. In contrast, the normal button image BG and the button image BG with the text image of "continuous hit" attached to it have no text image of "button" attached to them at all. Here, a normal button image BG is placed third from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and placed second from the bottom, a button image BG with a text image of "repeated hits" is placed above this normal button image BG, and a sword image KG is placed fourth from the bottom above this button image BG with the text image of "repeated hits" added.

In this way, four button images BG (three normal button images BG and one button image BG with the text image "Continuous hit") and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked (i.e. the total number of various images stocked (stock number)) indicates the expectation of a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked (i.e. the total number of various images stocked (stock number)), the higher the expectation of a win (big win or small win).

The button image BG with the text image "continuous hit" is set to have a higher expectation level for a win (big win or small win) than a normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63), and is set to the same expectation level or the same expectation level as the expectation level for a win (big win or small win) set for the button image BG with the text image "continuous hit" shown in FIG. 167(B) (a slightly lower or slightly higher expectation level than the expectation level for a win (big win or small win) set for the button image BG with the text image "continuous hit"). Also, the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation level for a win (big win or small win) than the button image BG with the text image "continuous hit". In other words, the expectation level for a win (big win or small win) set for the sword image KG is higher than that set for a normal button image BG, and is also higher than the button image BG with the text image "continuous hit" which is set higher than the normal button image BG. Furthermore, the four button images BG (three normal button images BG and one button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit") and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white light). As the "predetermined light emission mode", the expectation of a hit (big hit or small hit) is set high based on the expectation of a hit (big hit or small hit) (variable performance start command), for example, in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of hit)), and also in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of hit)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 168(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168(E) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue light)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(F), the normal button image BG stocked (second from the bottom) on the right side in FIG. 168(D) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168(F) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue light)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(G), the normal button image BG stocked (positioned third from the bottom) on the right side in FIG. 168(D) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168(G) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue light)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(H), the button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit" stored on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed, and when the button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit" disappears from the display screen 7a, the button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit" is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG "Continuous Hit" that prompts the player to perform the continuous operation (continuous pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168(H) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit" attached when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue) or green light (flashing green)).

When a player repeatedly presses (continuously presses) the effect button 63 during the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds), a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67 as a repeated operation sound each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed).

When the player repeatedly taps the effect button 63 (continuous pressing operation), or when the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(I), the sword image KG stocked (arranged on the top row) on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64 (push operation) is displayed on the front left of this sword image KG in a manner that moves up and down in small increments, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64 (e.g., 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, a message MG saying "Push it in!!" that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64 (push operation) is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168(I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)).

When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67. The second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound), or it may be a different sound (a sound different from the specific sound that notifies the player of a confirmed win).

When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up on a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas, as shown in FIG. 168(J). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped and lined up as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped and lined up as the number "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed stopped and lined up as the number "7", so that the same pattern (here, the number "7") is displayed without being aligned, and a miss is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 168(I), when the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), a specific sound different from the first normal operation sound (push operation sound) that notifies the player of a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and further, a winning confirmation effect may be performed in which an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. This winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies the player of a confirmed win. When the rainbow image and ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are then displayed in their own variable display areas lined up on a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a to the midpoint of the right side, all of which are stopped and aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), indicating that a win (big win or small win) has been confirmed. After that, the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) begins.

In this way, in the operation image stock effect B, in addition to button images BG (normal button images BG and button images BG with the text image "rapid hit"), sword images KG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and when using these one by one, the player can operate the effect button 63 or the sword member 64, and further, the result of whether or not a win (big win or small win) will occur (a win confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby increasing the interest.

[Operation image stock effect C]
Next, the operation image stock effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 169. Fig. 169 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect C. The operation image stock effect C is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In operation image stock performance C, after the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) unfolds (starts) as shown in FIG. 169 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance unfolds in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in Fig. 169(B), the button get effect unfolds (starts) when the attack of ally character CRA hits enemy character CRB in Fig. 169(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles effect button 63 is displayed in the center of display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG have been obtained, and a normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the very bottom, and a normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed third from the bottom above the second normal button image BG from the bottom, with the three button images BG being stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(C), an action scene (battle scene) is played out (starts) again. Here, a scene is played in which an attack from ally character CRA hits enemy character CRB. Note that there may also be a scene in which ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(D), the button get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the ally character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169(C). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword component 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG become the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. The handle part of the sword image KG has a character image "sword" attached to it. In contrast, the normal button image BG does not have a character image "button" attached to it at all. Here, a normal button image BG is placed as the fourth from the bottom above the normal button image BG placed as the third from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a sword image KG is placed as the fifth from the bottom above this normal button image BG. In addition, in FIG. 169(C), when the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB and the button loss effect described below unfolds (starts), the button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 and the sword image KG that imitates the sword component 64 that have already been obtained (acquired) are lost, and one or more of the various images (button images BG and sword images KG) that are piled up and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a disappear from the display screen 7a, starting from the bottom row to the top row.

In this way, four button images BG (four normal button images BG and one sword image KG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked (i.e. the total number of various images stocked (stock number)) indicates the expectation of a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked (i.e. the total number of various images stocked (stock number)), the higher the expectation of a win (big win or small win).

The sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) than the normal button image BG. Furthermore, the four button images BG (four normal button images BG) and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light-emitting state (here, white light). As the "predetermined light-emitting state", the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set high in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of win)), for example, based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), and the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set high in the order of white light flashing → blue light flashing → green light flashing → red light → gold light flashing (yellow light flashing) → seven-color light flashing (rainbow light flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(E), an action scene (battle scene) is played out (starts) again. Here, an attack from the enemy character CRB causes the ally character CRA to retreat.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(F), the button loss effect unfolds (starts) as ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from enemy character CRB in FIG. 169(E). In the button loss effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and the sword image KG imitating the sword component 64 obtained (acquired) in the button get effect are lost, and one or more of the various images (button images BG and sword images KG) piled up and displayed on the right side of display screen 7a disappear from display screen 7a from the bottom to the top, and are forcibly consumed. Here, the button image BG located in the bottom row in FIG. 169(D) and the button image BG located second from the bottom disappear.

In FIG. 169(E), the action presentation (battle presentation) may not be displayed again. In this case, the pressing promotion presentation is displayed (started). In the pressing promotion presentation, the two button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the presentation button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the presentation button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the presentation button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to prompt the player to operate (press) the presentation button 63. The predetermined illumination state of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined illumination state of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white light to white flashing, from white light to blue light (blue flashing) or green light (green flashing)). When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the above-mentioned press promotion effect is deployed (started) again, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to FIG. 169 (G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(G), an action scene (battle scene) is played out (starts) again. Here, a scene is played in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB. Note that there may also be a scene in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(H), a button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169(G). Here, the third button image BG from the bottom in FIG. 169(D) and the fourth button image BG from the bottom disappear and are forcibly consumed. After that, the sword image KG located at the top in FIG. 169(D) changes from a predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from a white light to a seven-color light or a seven-color flash). Note that if an effect is developed in FIG. 169(G) in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started) accordingly.

In addition, in FIG. 169(H), the sword image KG may not change from a predetermined light-emitting state to another light-emitting state (for example, from white light to seven-color light or seven-color flashing), and the push-down promotion effect may be developed (started). In this case, when the sword image KG stocked (arranged on the top row) on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. On the left side of the front of this sword image KG, a downward arrow image is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments, encouraging the player to operate (push) the sword member 64, and a timer bar indicating the operation acceptance valid period of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front of the sword image KG. Also, the message "Push it in!!" is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the front of the sword image KG, encouraging the player to operate (push) the sword member 64. The predetermined illumination state of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined illumination state of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed (for example, from white illumination to seven-color illumination or seven-color flashing) to one with a higher probability of winning (big win or small win). When the player operates (pushes in) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), the screen advances to FIG. 169 (I).

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(I), an image BKH having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and a winning confirmation effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67 to notify the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that notifies the player that a winning has been confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 169(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "7", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed as a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) will start.

When the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in Fig. 167(I) and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, that is, when the sword image KG in Fig. 169(H) does not change from a predetermined light-emitting state to another light-emitting state (for example, from white light to seven-color light or seven-color flashing), and the sword image KG stocked (arranged on the top row) on the right side of the display screen 7a disappears from the display screen 7a, the specific sound announcing a win is not heard from the speaker 67 at all, and the sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting state as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed on the front left of the sword image KG in a manner that moves up and down in small increments, and a timer bar that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front of the sword image KG. Moreover, the message "PUSH IT IN!!" is displayed so as to overlap the upper front part of the sword image KG, encouraging the operation (pushing operation) of the sword member 64. The predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or may be changed to one with a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)). When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 has elapsed, the second normal operation sound (pushes) is played from the speaker 67, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, and are displayed without being aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and a miss is displayed. The second normal operation sound (pushes) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) in the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167 and the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168, or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound).

In this way, in operation image stock presentation C, in addition to button images BG (normal button images BG), sword images KG (the light emission mode of the sword image KG changes from white light to seven-color light or seven-color flashing) are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and when using these one by one, the player can operate the presentation button 63 or the sword member 64, and further, the result of whether or not a win (big win or small win) will occur (a win confirmation presentation is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, thereby increasing the interest.

In addition, in the operation image stock performance C, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) can be obtained through the button get performance to increase the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (i.e., the total number of various images stocked (stock number)), and button image BG and sword image KG can be lost through the button loss performance. In other words, in the operation image stock performance C, the number of various images stocked (button image BG and sword image KG) (i.e., the total number of various images stocked (stock number)) can be increased or decreased. This makes it possible to change the expectation of a win (big win or small win) in relation to the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (i.e., the total number of various images stocked (stock number)), thereby eliminating monotony.

[Operation Image Stock Performance D]
Next, the operation image stock effect D will be described with reference to Fig. 170. Fig. 170 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect D. The operation image stock effect D is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In operation image stock performance D, after the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (starts) as shown in FIG. 170 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance is developed in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle is waged between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately wins against the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 170(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been obtained, and the two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) being placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the bottom.

In this way, two button images BG (two normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The two stocked button images BG indicate the expectation of a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more stocked button images BG (i.e. the total number of stocked button images BG (stock number)), the higher the expectation of a win (big win or small win).

The two button images BG (normal button images BG are lit in white here) arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, lit in white). The "predetermined light emission mode" is based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), and the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set high in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven colors light (rainbow light (high probability of win)), for example. In addition, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set high in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven colors flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the two button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170(C) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue) or a green light (flashing green)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 170(D), the normal button image BG stocked (second from the bottom) on the right side in FIG. 170(B) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170(D) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 170(E), an action effect (battle effect) is developed (not shown), and the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG become the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG and sword image KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 170(F). The handle of the sword image KG has a text image of "sword" attached to it. In contrast, the normal button image BG does not have any text image of "button" attached to it. In this case, the two button images BG that were already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a have been used up, so the sword image KG is placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is placed at the bottom.

In addition, in FIG. 170(E), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), the action effect (battle effect) is not deployed, and a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 and a sword image KG that imitates the sword component 64 are each displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, and may be displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 170(F).

In this way, one normal button image BG and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The various images stored (button image BG and sword image KG) indicate the degree of expectation of a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stored (i.e. the total number of various images stored (number of stocks)), the higher the expectation of a win (big win or small win).

The sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) than the normal button image BG. Furthermore, the normal button image BG and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are set to a predetermined light-emitting state (here, white light). As the "predetermined light-emitting state", based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), for example, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set to be high in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of win)), and the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is also set to be high in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 170(G), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started) again. In the pressing promotion effect, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170(G) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a red light (flashing red) or a yellow light (flashing yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 170(H), the sword image KG stocked (arranged on the top row) on the right side of the display screen 7a is consumed, and when this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed on the front left of the sword image KG in a manner that moves in small vertical movements, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, a message MG saying "Push it in!!" that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap with the upper part of the front of the sword image KG. In addition, the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 170 (H) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one with a higher expectancy of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a yellow light (flashing yellow) or a rainbow light (flashing rainbow)).

When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), a specific sound that is different from the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) and notifies the player that a win has been confirmed is played from the speaker 67, and then a winning confirmation presentation is performed, as shown in FIG. 170 (I). Here, to confirm the winning, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (closer to each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) with a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a predetermined light-emitting state (for example, a white light-emitting state), and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a white light-emitting state, and the English letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable part 14L and the front of the right movable part 14R, respectively, to perform a performance suggesting the victory of the ally character CRA. When the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R will have a different light emission pattern (e.g., a red light emission pattern) from a predetermined light emission pattern (e.g., a white light emission pattern), so although the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R will have a red light emission pattern, the letter "V" will not appear and no effect suggesting a victory for the friendly character CRA will be produced.

The left movable prop 14L and the right movable prop 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), on which the letter "V" is shaped. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multiple colors) arranged to surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate except for the front and back surfaces of the light guide plate emit light (e.g., white), the light entering from the periphery of the light guide plate is diffusely reflected by the letter "V" shaped on the light guide plate, causing the letter "V" to appear. In other words, the front side of the left movable prop 14L and the right movable prop 14R is a display screen on which the letter "V" appears due to the light guide plate. In addition, when multiple second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate so as to face the rear surface of the light guide plate on the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R emit light (e.g., red), the light passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "7", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed as a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) will start.

In addition, when the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64 in FIG. 170 (H), or when the operation acceptance valid period for the sword member 64 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), and the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R in FIG. 170 (I) do not form a single decorative part (combined part) having a ring shape, and the ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, a second normal operation sound (pushes) is played from the speaker 67, and following FIG. 170(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their own variable display areas, and are displayed as not aligned with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), and a miss is displayed. The second normal operation sound (pushes) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (pressing sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound).

In this way, in the operation image stock performance D, in addition to the button images BG (normal button images BG), sword images KG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and when these are consumed one by one, the player can operate the performance button 63 or the player can operate the sword component 64, and further, the result of whether or not a win (big win or small win) has occurred can be displayed on the display screen 7a (only when a win occurs, as a win confirmation performance, an ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D formed by the combination of the left decorative part of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable role 14R). This can increase the interest.

In addition, in the operation image stock effect D, even if the various images (button image BG and sword image KG) obtained (acquired) in the button get effect are consumed in the press promotion effect, it is possible to increase the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) again in the button get effect, so that the various images that are stocked again can give the player joy and contribute to the expectation of a win (big win or small win).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the operation image stock presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figs. 167(A) to 167(J) of the operation image stock presentation A, a presentation button 63 (first operation means) that can be operated by the player and a sword member 64 (second operation means) that can be operated by the player are provided, and a first presentation in which a button image BG (first operation means image) that imitates the presentation button 63 (first operation means) is stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a second presentation in which a sword image KG (second operation means image) that imitates the sword member 64 (second operation means) is stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a third effect in which the button image BG (first operation means image) stocked in the first effect is consumed by operating the effect button 63 (first operation means); a fourth effect in which the sword image KG (second operation means image) stocked in the second effect is consumed by operating the sword member 64 (second operation means); and a fifth effect in which the result of a specific lottery (whether or not a win (big win or small win) occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the third or fourth effect. According to this configuration, the button images BG and the sword images KG are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when these are consumed, the player can operate the effect button 63 or the sword member 64, and further, the result of a specific lottery (whether or not a win (big win or small win) occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, thereby improving interest.
The same is true for operation image stock presentation B in Figures 168 (A) to 168 (J), operation image stock presentation C in Figures 169 (A) to 169 (J), and operation image stock presentation D in Figures 170 (A) to 170 (J).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167(A) to FIG. 167(J) of the operation image stocking performance A, the first performance and the second performance can be executed simultaneously. According to this configuration, in addition to the button image BG (first operation means image), the sword image KG (second operation means image) is further stocked on the display screen, so that the number of objects that the player can operate can be increased (in other words, the number of objects that reflect the player's will can be increased), which can contribute to improving the player's motivation to operate. Note that the expectation of transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of a win (big win or small win)) set in the sword image KG (second operation means image) is preferably higher than that set in the button image BG (first operation means image). According to this configuration, even if the player becomes disappointed when the button image BG is stocked and there is no expectation of a transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of a win (jackpot or small win)), when the sword image KG is stocked, the player can expect the expectation of a transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of a win (jackpot or small win)) set in the sword image KG, which can contribute to increasing the player's motivation to play.
The same is true for operation image stock presentation B in Figures 168 (A) to 168 (J), operation image stock presentation C in Figures 169 (A) to 169 (J), and operation image stock presentation D in Figures 170 (A) to 170 (J).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167(I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a winning confirmation effect that notifies the winning confirmation, and displays a rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image) as a background image and an ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) different from the rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image) as a background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, it is possible to give an impact to the player and notify the winning confirmation by suddenly switching to a winning confirmation effect by the rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image). As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the combination of the rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) as an effect that has an impact on the player. For this reason, the player will actively operate the effect button 63 (first operation means) and the sword member 64 (second operation means) in order to see the impactful winning confirmation effect. The winning confirmation effect using the rainbow image BKH (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) can contribute to improving the player's motivation to play.
The same applies to operation image stock presentation B in Figures 168 (A) to 168 (J) and operation image stock presentation C in Figures 169 (A) to 169 (J).
In the operation image stock performance D of FIG. 170(A) to FIG. 170(J), the front side of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R suddenly switches to a winning confirmation performance with the alphabet "V" (first winning confirmation image) that appears by the light guide plate and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) that is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which gives an impact to the player and notifies the player of the winning confirmation. As a result, the combination of the alphabet "V" (first winning confirmation image) that appears by the light guide plate on the front side of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) can be impressed on the player as an impactful performance. Therefore, the player will actively operate the performance button 63 (first operation means) and the sword member 64 (second operation means) because he wants to see the winning confirmation performance with an impact. The front side of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R is displayed by a light guide plate to display the letter "V" (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image), which can contribute to increasing the player's motivation to play.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 167 (I) of the operation image stock effect A, one of the rainbow image BKH (first win confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second win confirmation image), the rainbow image BKH (first win confirmation image) is a background image and is therefore positioned backward, while the other, the ally character CRA (second win confirmation image), is positioned forward and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the sudden switch to the win confirmation effect of the rainbow image BKH (first win confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second win confirmation image) can give an impact to the player and notify him of the win confirmation.
The same applies to operation image stock presentation B in Figures 168 (A) to 168 (J) and operation image stock presentation C in Figures 169 (A) to 169 (J).
In the operation image stock performance D of Figures 170 (A) to 170 (J), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R appear and combine in front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the front sides of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are displayed by a light guide plate, and one of the letter "V" (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image), the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image), is positioned backward and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the other letter "V" (first winning confirmation image) is positioned forward and the front sides of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are displayed by the light guide plate. According to this configuration, the front side of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R suddenly switches to a winning confirmation presentation in which the letter "V" (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) appear through the light guide plate, thereby making an impact on the player and informing him of the winning confirmation.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 167(A) to Fig. 167(J) of the operation image stock effect A, the button image BG (first operation means image) includes a text image (operation instruction image) of "long press" which instructs the "long press operation (specific operation)" of the effect button 63 (first operation means). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of the operation method of the effect button 63 (first operation means), and it is possible to contribute to increasing the player's motivation to operate the effect button 63 (first operation means) by making the operation of the effect button 63 (first operation means) less monotonous.
In the operation image stock presentation B of Figures 168(A) to 168(J), some button images BG (first operation means images) include a text image (operation instruction image) of "repeated taps" which instructs a "repeated tap operation (specific operation)" on the presentation button 63 (first operation means). This configuration can increase the variety of the operation method of the presentation button 63 (first operation means), which can contribute to increasing the player's motivation to operate the presentation button 63 (first operation means) by making the operation of the presentation button 63 (first operation means) less monotonous.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 167 (H) to 167 (I) of the operation image stock presentation A, the fifth presentation outputs a specific sound to notify the player of a confirmed win when the result of a specific lottery (the result of whether or not a win (jackpot or small win) will occur) is a win (jackpot (jackpot or small win)). With this configuration, the specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, so that the player can be informed of the fact that he or she has won (jackpot (jackpot or small win)) and the player can feel a sense of superiority.
The same is true for operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and operation image stock effect D in FIG.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the operation image stock effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167(D), the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168(D), the operation image stock performance C of FIG. 169(D), and the operation image stock performance D of FIG. 170(E), the sword image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the button image BG (simultaneously with the button image BG). However, only the sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked, or multiple sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked. Since the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) than the button image BG, the player can expect a higher expectation of a transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of a win (big win or small win)) due to the sword image KG being displayed alone on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the operation image stock effect A of Fig. 167, the operation image stock effect B of Fig. 168, the operation image stock effect C of Fig. 169, and the operation image stock effect D of Fig. 170, a winning confirmation notification sound may be continuously played from the speaker 67 while the winning confirmation effect is being performed. In this way, the winning confirmation notification sound continues to be played from the speaker 67, and it is possible to inform those around the player that the winning confirmation effect is being performed, so that the player can be immersed in a sense of superiority. The winning confirmation notification sound may be the same as the specific sound that notifies the winning confirmation, or may be a different sound (naturally, a sound different from the first normal operation sound (pressing operation sound) and the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound)).

[Modification 3]
The operation image stock effect A in Fig. 167, the operation image stock effect B in Fig. 168, the operation image stock effect C in Fig. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in Fig. 170 notify the player of the expectation of transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of a win (jackpot or small win)). However, for example, when notifying the result of a lottery for the number of rounds in a jackpot effect (jackpot game), the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the number of rounds, which is the result of the win or loss, or when notifying the result of a lottery for transition to a high probability state after a jackpot effect (jackpot game), the operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the presence or absence of a transition to a high probability state, which is the result of the win or loss.

[Modification 4]
In the operation image stock performance A of Fig. 167(D), the operation image stock performance B of Fig. 168(D), the operation image stock performance C of Fig. 169(D), and the operation image stock performance D of Fig. 170(E), one sword image KG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (simultaneously with one button image BG). However, multiple sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (simultaneously with one button image BG), or one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with multiple button images BG (simultaneously with multiple button images BG). In this way, multiple button images BG and sword images KG are displayed on the display screen 7a at once, and by increasing the number of stocks, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) can be increased as a result of a specific lottery.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image stock performance A of Fig. 167(D), the operation image stock performance B of Fig. 168(D), the operation image stock performance C of Fig. 169(D), and the operation image stock performance D of Fig. 170(E), the button images BG and the sword images KG are consumed one by one in order from the bottom to the top stored on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the button images BG and the sword images KG may be consumed one by one in order from the top to the bottom stored on the right side of the display screen 7a, or the button images BG and the sword images KG arranged at any position from the top to the bottom stored on the right side of the display screen 7a may be consumed arbitrarily, or a combination of these may be used to consume the button images BG and the sword images KG.

[Modification 6]
In the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock performance C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock performance D of FIG. 170, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked on any of the upper side, the left side, and the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, on the upper side or the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in a strip-shaped area extending in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button image BG and the sword image KG are stocked in a strip-shaped area extending in the up-down direction of the display screen 7a. Also, the button image BG and the sword image KG may be stocked in a strip-shaped area extending in the up-down direction in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the strip area in which the button images BG and sword images KG are stocked is not fixed to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and for example, the display position is determined by lottery each time the operation image stock presentation is started, which helps the player to discover (find) for himself the relationship between the stocked display position and the expectation of transition to a game state advantageous to the player (expectation of a win (jackpot or small win)), and therefore makes it less likely that the operation image stock presentation will lose its freshness.

[Modification 7]
In the operation image stock performance D of Figures 170(B) to 170(G), a plurality of normal button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, among the plurality of normal button images BG, one or more button images BG with a text image of "long press" attached thereto may be obtained and stocked by the button get performance, or one or more button images BG with a text image of "repeated hit" attached thereto may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 8]
In the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167(B), two button images BG are obtained and stocked in the button get performance, and one of the button images BG has a text image "long press" attached to it. However, instead of this, only one or more normal button images BG may be obtained and stocked in the button get performance, or only one or more button images BG with a text image "long press" attached to it may be obtained and stocked. Also, in the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168(B), two normal button images BG are obtained and stocked in the button get performance. However, instead of this, only one or more button images BG with a text image "continuous hit" attached to it may be obtained and stocked in the button get performance.

[Modification 9]
In the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock performance C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock performance D of FIG. 170, the button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are consumed by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, and the sword images KG are consumed by operating (pushing) the sword member 64, so that the button images BG and the sword images KG disappear one by one from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the remaining number of the stocked button images BG and the sword images KG, that is, the stock number, may be displayed in a large manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode, as a message saying "X pieces remaining (X is the stock number)". At this time, the announcement "X pieces remaining (X is the stock number)" may be made to sound from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the remaining stock number. The "predetermined display mode" is, for example, in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of winning)), and the expected probability of the appearance of a specific sound and a specific image, and the expected probability of the appearance of a special sound and a special image are each set to be high.

[Modification 10]
In the operation image stock performance A of Fig. 167(D), the operation image stock performance B of Fig. 168(D), the operation image stock performance C of Fig. 169(D), and the operation image stock performance D of Fig. 170(E), a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the performance button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation of the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pushing operation) can achieve the same effect as the operation of the performance button 63 (pushing operation).

[Modification 11]
Operation image stock performance A in Figure 167, operation image stock performance B in Figure 168, operation image stock performance C in Figure 169, and operation image stock performance D in Figure 170 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine including a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player,
a first effect in which a first operation means image imitating the first operation means is stored on a display screen;
a second effect in which a second operation means image imitating the second operation means is stored on a display screen; and
a third effect in which the first operation means image stored in the first effect is consumed by operating the first operation means;
a fourth effect in which the second operation means image stored in the second effect is consumed by operating the second operation means;
and a fifth effect capable of displaying the result of a specific lottery on a display screen during the third effect or the fourth effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1,
The first performance and the second performance can be executed simultaneously.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect H2-1 or H2-2,
The fifth effect is a winning confirmation effect for announcing a winning confirmation, and a first winning confirmation image and a second winning confirmation image different from the first winning confirmation image are displayed on a display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-3,
one of the first winning confirmation image and the second winning confirmation image is arranged backward and the other is arranged forward and displayed on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-4,
The first operation means image may include an operation instruction image instructing a specific operation to the first operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-5,
The fifth effect is to output a specific sound when the result of the specific lottery is a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing announcement possible effects A to D are explained below using Figures 171 to 174. In Figures 171 to 174, the various pending images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, some drawings of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing, and some first movable role pieces 14 and second movable role pieces 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This winning/losing notification effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to vary to when it stops varying). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission state of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain the winning/losing notification possible effect A, then explain the winning/losing notification possible effect B, the winning/losing notification possible effect C, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in that order.

[Winner/Loss Notification Possible Effects A]
First, the winning/losing notification possible performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible performance A. The winning/losing notification possible performance A is performed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In the winning/losing notification performance A, after the display of the decorative patterns begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) unfolds (starts) as shown in FIG. 171 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance unfolds in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in Fig. 171(B), the button get effect unfolds (starts) when the attack of ally character CRA hits enemy character CRB in Fig. 171(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles effect button 63 is displayed in the center of display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of display screen 7a. Here, four button images BG have been obtained, and a normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) placed at the bottom row, a normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed third from the bottom above the second from the bottom normal button image BG, and a normal button image BG (i.e. a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed fourth from the bottom above the third from the bottom normal button image BG, with the four button images BG being stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

In this way, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button images BG indicate the likelihood of a win (big win or small win).

The four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white light). The "predetermined light emission mode" is based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), and is set to a high expectation of a win (big win or small win) in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of win)), for example. In addition, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set to a high expectation in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 171(C), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171(C) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue) or a green light (flashing green)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (D), a confirmed win effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in which an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image BKH"). This confirmed win effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is the background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In Fig. 171(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in Fig. 171(B) (placed second from the bottom) disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to urge the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171(D) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound, which notifies the display of the premium image, is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (E), the premium image PMG1, which has a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap with the front of the rainbow image BKH, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premium image PMG1. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is being performed. This premium image PMG1 is a special image that can be displayed after the specific image, the rainbow image BKH, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is one of the rare images (images that appear in rare effects) with an extremely low appearance rate. Here, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premium image PMG1, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the premium image PMG1, which has a rectangular shape. The ally character CRA, which is displayed prominently in the center of the rectangular premium image PMG1, may be a still image or a video.

The conditions for the premium image PMG1 to appear are as follows: the first condition is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 171(C) begins and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63; and the second condition is that the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(D) is displayed on the display screen 7a and the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.

After that, the premium image PMG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(F), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. 171(B) (positioned third from the bottom) disappears from the display screen 7a, and accordingly, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply simulating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front surface of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front surface of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171(F) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a red light (flashing red) or a yellow light (flashing yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound is played from the speaker 67 to notify the display of a premium image, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(G), the premium image PMG2, which has a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap with the front of the rainbow image BKH, and a rainbow effect is performed using the premium image PMG2. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is being performed. This premium image PMG2 is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) that have an extremely low appearance rate. Here, a different rainbow image is displayed as the background image of the premium image PMG2 between the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a and the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the premium image PMG1 in FIG. 171(E), and text images of "Victory" are displayed one after the other in a continuous fashion from the right side to the left side of the rectangular premium image PMG2. The text images of "Victory" are displayed in multiple rows (two rows each in this case) on both the top and bottom sides of the rectangular premium image PMG2. The external size of the rectangular premium image PMG2 is the same as the external shape of the premium image PMG1 in FIG. 171(E).

The conditions for the premium image PMG2 to appear are as follows: the first condition is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 171(C) starts and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63; the second condition is that the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(D) is displayed on the display screen 7a and the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63; and the third condition is that the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(F) is displayed on the display screen 7a and the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.

It should be noted that the premium image PMG1 appearing in FIG. 171(E) and the premium image PMG2 appearing in FIG. 171(G) may be interchanged. In this case, the conditions for the premium image PMG2 to appear in FIG. 171(E) are as follows: the first condition is that the press-prompt effect shown in FIG. 171(C) is started, and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, and then, as the second condition, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(D) displayed on the display screen 7a. The conditions for the premium image PMG1 to appear in FIG. 171(G) are as follows: the first condition is that the press-prompt effect shown in FIG. 171(C) is started, and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63, and then, as the second condition, The press-prompt effect shown in FIG. 171 is started, and the condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 must be met, then as a second condition, the condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (D) displayed on the display screen 7a must be met, and then as a third condition, the condition that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171 (F) displayed on the display screen 7a must be met.

After that, the premium image PMG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. 171(B) (placed fourth from the bottom, i.e. placed on the top row) disappears from the display screen 7a, and accordingly, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply simulating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (H) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a yellow light (flashing yellow) or a rainbow light (flashing rainbow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171 (I), the rainbow image BKH disappears from the display screen 7a, but as a winning confirmation effect, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) toward (approach each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) with a ring shape, consisting of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a predetermined light-emitting state (for example, a white light-emitting state), and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a white light-emitting state, and the English letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable part 14L and the front of the right movable part 14R, respectively.

The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), on which the letter "V" is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged to surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate except for the front and back sides thereof emit light (e.g., white light), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is diffusely reflected by the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate, and the letter "V" appears. In addition, when a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back side of the light guide plate emit light (e.g., red light) on the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, the light passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 171(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "7", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed as a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) begins.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH in FIG. 171 (D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (big win or small win) has occurred (i.e., after the win confirmation effect has been performed), if the number of times the effect button 63 has been operated has not reached the upper limit of operations and there is still remaining, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63, which gives the player a sense of expectation that something more beneficial to the player may be announced, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 171 (D) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 at a specified timing, the premium images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate, can be made to appear, which can contribute to increasing the motivation to operate the performance button 63.

Furthermore, in the winning/losing notification performance A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 171(D) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing, premium images, which are rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping. For this reason, in the past, when it was confirmed that a winning (big win or small win) would occur, the player simply watched the performance progress without having to operate (press) the performance button 63, but in the winning/losing notification performance A, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the performance during the change in the state in which it was confirmed that a winning (big win or small win) would occur is less likely to lose its novelty.

[Winner/Loser Notification Possible Effects B]
Next, the winning/losing notification possible performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 172. Fig. 172 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible performance B. The winning/losing notification possible performance B is performed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In the winning/losing notification performance B, after the display of the decorative patterns begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) unfolds (starts) as shown in FIG. 172 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance unfolds in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 172(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been obtained, and four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) being placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(C), an action scene (battle scene) is played out (starts) again. Here, a scene is played in which an attack by friendly character CRA hits enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 172(C). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two more button images BG have been obtained, and a normal button image BG is placed third from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and placed second from the bottom, and a normal button image BG is placed fourth from the bottom above this normal button image BG.

In this way, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button images BG indicate the likelihood of a win (big win or small win).

The four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white light). The "predetermined light emission mode" is based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), and is set to a high expectation of a win (big win or small win) in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of win)), for example. In addition, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set to a high expectation in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 172(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(E) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue) or a green light (flashing green)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 172 (F), a confirmed win effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in which an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image BKH"). This confirmed win effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is the background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In Fig. 172(F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in Fig. 172(D) (placed second from the bottom) disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the effective period for accepting operation of the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to urge the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light (flashing green) or a red light (flashing red)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound, which notifies the display of the premium image, is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 172(G), the premium image PMG, which has a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a, is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap with the front of the rainbow image BKH, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premium image PMG. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is being performed. This premium image PMG is a special image that can be displayed after the specific image, the rainbow image BKH, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is one of the rare images (images that appear in rare effects) with an extremely low appearance rate. Here, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premium image PMG, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the premium image PMG, which has a rectangular shape. The ally character CRA, which is displayed prominently in the center of the rectangular premium image PMG, may be a still image or a video.

The conditions for the premium image PMG to appear are as follows: the first condition is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 172 (E) begins and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63; and the second condition is that the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 172 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a and the player again operates (presses) the effect button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63.

After that, the premium image PMG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 172(H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. 172(D) (positioned third from the bottom) disappears from the display screen 7a, and accordingly, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply simulating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front surface of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front surface. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172 (H) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a red light (flashing red) or a yellow light (flashing yellow)).

In Fig. 172(H), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in Fig. 172(I), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in Fig. 172(D) (placed fourth from the bottom, i.e., placed on the top row) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG stating "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the effect button 63. The predetermined illumination state of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(I) may be the same as the predetermined illumination state of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or may be changed to one with a higher probability of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white light to white flashing, or from white light to yellow light (yellow flashing) or rainbow light (rainbow flashing)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 172(H), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) that has an extremely low appearance rate, will then be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed in FIG. 172(G) will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the display will proceed to FIG. 172(I) described above.

In FIG. 172(I), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 172(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in line along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed and a win (big win or small win) occurs, and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) starts.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 172 (I), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) that has an extremely low appearance rate, will then be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed in Figure 172 (G) will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the display will proceed to Figure 172 (J) described above.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH in FIG. 172 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (big win or small win) has occurred (i.e., after the win confirmation effect has been performed), if the number of times the effect button 63 has been operated has not reached the upper limit of operations and there is still remaining, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63, which gives the player a sense of expectation that something more beneficial to the player may be announced, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, if the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the performance button 63 in FIG. 172(H) or FIG. 172(I), no premium images other than the premium image PMG that appeared in FIG. 172(G) will appear. In other words, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, the player can be given the opportunity to see a rare image (an image that appears in a rare performance) with an extremely low appearance rate by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, which can contribute to increasing the motivation to operate the performance button 63.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the performance button 63 in FIG. 172(H) or FIG. 172(I), premium images such as the premium image PMG2 in the winning/losing notification performance A shown in FIG. 171(G) and other premium images (premium images that are different from the premium image PMG2 in the winning/losing notification performance A in FIG. 171(G) and the premium image in the winning/losing notification performance B in FIG. 172(G)) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping.

In this way, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the performance button 63 in FIG. 172(H) or FIG. 172(I), premium images, which are rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping. For this reason, in the past, when it was confirmed that a winning (big win or small win) would occur, the player simply watched the progress of the performance without having to operate (press) the performance button 63, but in the winning/losing notification performance B, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the performance during the change in the state in which it was confirmed that a winning (big win or small win) would occur is less likely to lose its novelty.

[Winner/Loser Notification Possible Effects C]
Next, the winning/losing notification possible performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 173. Fig. 173 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible performance C. The winning/losing notification possible performance C is performed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In the winning/losing notification performance C, after the display of the decorative patterns begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) unfolds (starts) as shown in FIG. 173 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance unfolds in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 173(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been obtained, and the two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) being placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(C), the action scene (battle scene) unfolds (starts) again. Here, a scene unfolds in which an attack by friendly character CRA hits enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 173(C). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three more button images BG have been obtained, and a normal button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and above this normal button image BG, a normal button image BG is placed as the fourth from the bottom, and above this normal button image BG, a normal button image BG is placed as the fifth from the bottom.

In this way, five button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button images BG indicate the degree of expectation of a win (big win or small win).

The five button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white light). The "predetermined light emission mode" is based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), and is set to a high expectation of a win (big win or small win) in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven colors (rainbow light (high probability of win)), for example. In addition, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set to a high expectation in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven colors flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 173(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the five button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(E) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a blue light (flashing blue light)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 173 (F), a confirmed win effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in which an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image BKH"). This confirmed win effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is the background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In Fig. 173(F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in Fig. 173(D) (placed second from the bottom) disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that urges the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG to urge the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, changing from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a green light).

In FIG. 173(F), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 173(G), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. 173(D) (arranged third from the bottom) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (G) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a red light (flashing red)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in FIG. 173(F), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) that has an extremely low appearance rate, will then be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the game will proceed to the above-mentioned FIG. 173(G).

In FIG. 173(G), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 173(H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. 173(D) (placed fourth from the bottom) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173 (H) may be the same as the predetermined illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or it may be changed to one that has a higher expectation of a win (big win or small win) (for example, from a white light to a flashing white light, or from a white light to a yellow light (flashing yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 173 (G), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, will then be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 173 (F) and a premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process will proceed to Figure 173 (H) described above.

In Fig. 173(H), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in Fig. 173(I), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in Fig. 173(D) (arranged fifth from the bottom, i.e. arranged on the top row) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. Also, above the button image BG, a message MG stating "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the effect button 63. The predetermined illumination state of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(I) may be the same as the predetermined illumination state of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, or may be changed to one with a higher probability of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white light to white flashing, or from white light to rainbow light (rainbow flashing)).

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 173 (H), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, will then be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 173 (F) or Figure 173 (G) and a premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process will proceed to Figure 173 (I) described above.

In FIG. 173(I), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 173(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in line along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed and a win (big win or small win) occurs, and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) starts.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 173 (I), a premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, will then be displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 in Figure 173 (F), Figure 173 (G) or Figure 173 (H) and a premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a, a premium image different from the premium image already displayed will be displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, the process will proceed to Figure 173 (J) described above.

In this way, after the rainbow image BKH in FIG. 173 (F) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (big win or small win) has occurred (i.e., after the win confirmation effect has been performed), if the number of times the effect button 63 has been operated has not reached the upper limit of operations and there is still remaining, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63, which gives the player a sense of expectation that something more beneficial to the player may be announced, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, if the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the performance button 63 in FIG. 173(F) to FIG. 173(I), the premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate, will not appear at all. In other words, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, the player can be given the opportunity to see the premium image, which is a rare image (image that appears in rare performance) with an extremely low appearance rate, by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, which can contribute to increasing the motivation to operate the performance button 63.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the performance button 63 in FIG. 173(G) to FIG. 172(I), premium images such as the premium images PMG1, PMG2 in the winning/losing notification performance A shown in FIG. 171(E) and (G) and other premium images (premium images different from the premium images PMG1, PMG2 in the winning/losing notification performance A in FIG. 171(E) and (G)) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping.

In this way, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, in FIG. 173(G) to FIG. 172(I), if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance valid period of the performance button 63, premium images, which are rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate, without overlapping, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For this reason, in the past, when it was confirmed that a winning (big win or small win) would occur, the player did not need to operate (press) the performance button 63 at all and merely watched the progress of the performance, but in the winning/losing notification performance C, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the performance during the change in the state in which it was confirmed that a winning (big win or small win) would occur is less likely to lose its novelty.

[Winning or Losing Notification Possible Performance D]
Next, the winning/losing notification possible performance D will be described with reference to Fig. 174. Fig. 174 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification possible performance D. The winning/losing notification possible performance D is performed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns decelerate just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In the winning/losing notification performance D, after the display of the decorative patterns begins to change, an action performance (battle performance) unfolds (starts) as shown in FIG. 174 (A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA with a sword and an enemy character CRB with a sword appear. Here, a performance unfolds in which the ally character CRA's attack hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and if the ally character CRA ultimately triumphs over the enemy character CRB, a win (big win or small win) is achieved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(B), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174(A). In the button get effect, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG have been obtained, and the two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) being placed second from the bottom above the normal button image BG (i.e., the button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) that is placed at the bottom.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(C), an action scene (battle scene) is played out (starts) again. Here, a scene is played in which an attack by friendly character CRA hits enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(D), the button get effect is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174(C). In the button get effect, a button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the action effect (battle effect). The obtained button image BG is displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two more button images BG have been obtained, and a normal button image BG is placed as the third from the bottom above the normal button image BG that is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a and is placed as the fourth from the bottom above this normal button image BG.

In this way, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button images BG indicate the likelihood of a win (big win or small win).

The four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a are in a predetermined light emission mode (here, white light). The "predetermined light emission mode" is based on the expectation of a win (big win or small win) (variable performance start command), and is set to a high expectation of a win (big win or small win) in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of win)), for example. In addition, the expectation of a win (big win or small win) is set to a high expectation in the order of white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of win)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 174(E), the pressing promotion effect is developed (started). In the pressing promotion effect, the four button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a are consumed in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the performance button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB that indicates the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that overlaps with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. Note that the specified illumination mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(E) is the same as the specified illumination mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (here, it is lit in white).

In FIG. 174(E), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 174(F), the normal button image BG stocked (arranged second from the bottom) on the right side in FIG. 174(D) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination pattern of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(F) changes from the predetermined illumination pattern of the button image BG (illuminated in white) to illuminated in blue in FIG. 174(E), indicating to the player that there is a high probability of winning (a big win or a small win).

The reason why the specified light emission mode of the button image BG changes from white to blue is that in Figure 174 (E), the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, so an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") cannot be made to appear as a background image, that is, a rainbow image cannot be displayed on the display screen 7a to perform a win confirmation effect. This win confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In FIG. 174(F), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 174(G), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in FIG. 174(D) (arranged third from the bottom) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light-emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. In addition, a message MG saying "Press" that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image BG. In addition, the predetermined illumination pattern of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(G) changes from blue illumination, which is the predetermined illumination pattern of the button image BG in FIG. 174(F), to green illumination, indicating to the player that there is a high probability of winning (a big win or a small win).

The reason why the specified light emission mode of the button image BG changes from blue to green is that in Figure 174 (F), the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, so that an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") cannot be made to appear as a background image, that is, a rainbow image cannot be displayed on the display screen 7a to perform a win confirmation effect. This win confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In Fig. 174(G), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has elapsed, then, as shown in Fig. 174(H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side in Fig. 174(D) (placed fourth from the bottom, i.e., placed on the top row) is consumed, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (i.e., a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined luminous manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. A downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves up and down in small increments so as to overlap with the upper front part of this button image BG, and a timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (e.g., 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed so as to overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. Additionally, a message MG stating "Press" is displayed above the button image BG, encouraging the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. Note that the predetermined illumination pattern of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(H) changes from green illumination to red illumination in FIG. 174(G), indicating to the player that there is a high probability of winning (a big win or a small win).

The reason why the specified light emission mode of the button image BG changes from green to red is that in FIG. 174 (G), the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, so that an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") cannot be made to appear as a background image, that is, a rainbow image cannot be displayed on the display screen 7a to perform a win confirmation effect. This win confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image is a background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In FIG. 174(H), if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and the operation acceptance valid period for the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, then, as shown in FIG. 174(I), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) toward (approach each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape, consisting of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area") 14D. An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a predetermined light-emitting state (for example, a white light-emitting state), and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R become a white light-emitting state, and the English letter "V" appears from the front of the left movable part 14L and the front of the right movable part 14R, respectively.

The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are provided with a light guide plate (not shown), on which the letter "V" is formed. When a plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged to surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate except for the front and back sides thereof emit light (e.g., white light), the light incident from the periphery of the light guide plate is diffusely reflected by the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate, and the letter "V" appears. In addition, when a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting single or multiple colors) arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to face the back side of the light guide plate emit light (e.g., red light) on the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, the light passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, but the letter "V" does not appear.

Next, as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, the left movable part 14L retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R retreats (moves) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "7", the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same pattern is displayed as a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) will start.

In this way, in the winning/losing notification effect D, if the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 at the specified timing, the predetermined illumination pattern of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is changed in Figures 174 (E) to 174 (H) to suggest to the player that there is a high probability of winning (a big win or a small win), encouraging the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. This gives the player an opportunity to make the rainbow image appear, which is the background image that confirms a win (a big win or a small win), thereby increasing the player's interest.

In Figures 174(E) to 174(H), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and a confirmed win effect is performed in which an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a. This confirmed win effect is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur later. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is the background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed. Also, for example, in FIG. 174(E), if a player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning is played from the speaker 67, and a winning confirmation effect is performed in which a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and in FIG. 174(F), if a player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a special sound different from the specific sound announcing the display of a premium image is played from the speaker 67, and a premium image having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap with the front of the rainbow image, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premium image. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning confirmation effect is being performed. This premium image is a special image, which can be displayed after the rainbow image, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is one of the rare images (images that appear in rare effects) with an extremely low appearance rate. Here, as the background image of the premium image, another rainbow image different from the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character is displayed large in the center of the rectangular premium image. The ally character displayed large in the center of the rectangular premium image may be a still image or a moving image. In addition, if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 after the winning confirmation effect is performed, other premium images (other premium images different from the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in the winning/losing notification effect A in FIGS. 171(E) and (G)) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without overlapping, in addition to the premium images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images that appear in rare effects) with an extremely low appearance rate in the winning/losing notification effect A shown in FIGS. 171(E) and (G).

In this way, in Figures 174 (E) to 174 (H), if a player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and a winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a in which an image having seven colors as the background image (a so-called "rainbow image"), and if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a specified timing, a premium image, which is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare effect) with an extremely low appearance rate, can be made to appear, which can contribute to increasing the motivation to operate the effect button 63.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance D in Figures 174 (E) to 174 (H), if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and after the winning confirmation performance in which an image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing, premium images, which are rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, without any overlapping. For this reason, in the past, when it was confirmed that a win (big win or small win) would occur, the player did not need to operate (press) the performance button 63 at all and could simply watch the performance progress; however, with the win/loss notification performance D, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that when it is confirmed that a win (big win or small win) will occur, the performance during the change is less likely to lose its novelty.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of blurring images.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example,

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the winning/losing announcement display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 171 (A) to 171 (J) of the winning/losing notification performance A, a performance button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and in a winning confirmation performance in which a winning result (winning (jackpot or small winning)) of a specific lottery is notified by operating the performance button 63 (operation means), a first performance can be executed in which a rainbow image BKH (specific image) of Figure 171 (D) notifying the winning result (winning (jackpot or small winning)) by operating the performance button 63 (operation means) in 171 (C) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the number of times the performance button 63 (operation means) has been operated has not reached the upper limit number of times and there is still remaining, a second performance can be executed in which the player is prompted to operate the performance button 63 (operation means), for example, as shown in Figures 171 (D) and 171 (F). According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (a big win or a small win) has occurred, if the number of times the effect button 63 (operation means) has been operated has not reached the upper limit of operations and there is still remaining, the player is prompted to operate the effect button 63 (operation means), so that it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that something more beneficial to the player may be announced, thereby increasing the player's interest.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification possible effect C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in Figure 174.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figs. 171(A) to 171(J) of the winning/losing notification possible performance A, before the first performance is executed, a third performance is executed in which a button image BG (operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) in Fig. 171(B) is stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in Fig. 171(B), four button images BG (normal button images BG are arranged and stocked) are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the upper limit number of operations is four, which is the number of button images BG (operation means images) stocked. According to this configuration, the stock number of four is the number of times the performance button 63 (operation means) can be operated, so that it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that a rainbow image BKH (specific image) notifying the winning result (a win (a big win or a small win)) will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 within this number of times.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification possible effect C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in Figure 174.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 171(D) to Fig. 171(G) of the winning/losing notification possible performance A, when the performance button 63 (operation means) is operated while the second performance is being executed, a fourth performance can be executed in which the premium image PMG1 (special image) of Fig. 171(E) or the premium image PMG2 (special image) of Fig. 171(G) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player of the occurrence of a win (big win or small win), when the number of operations of the performance button 63 (operation means) has not reached the upper limit number of operations and there is still remaining, if the performance button 63 (operation means) is operated, the premium image PMG1 (special image) or the premium image PMG2 (special image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This causes the player to actively operate the effect button 63 (operation means) in order to see the special images, namely the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2, displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, in the past, when it was confirmed that a win (big win or small win) would occur, the player simply watched the progress of the effect without having to operate the effect button 63 (operation means), but the win/loss notification possible effect A incorporates an effect that makes the player want to further operate the effect button 63 (operation means) even when it was confirmed that a win (big win or small win) would occur.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification possible effect C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in Figure 174.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 171(A) to Fig. 171(J) of the winning/losing notification possible performance A, the special images are the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2. According to this configuration, the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2 are one of the rare images (images that appear in a rare performance) with an extremely low appearance rate, and the player will actively operate the performance button 63 (operation means) in order to see this premium image, which can contribute to increasing the player's motivation to operate the performance button 63 (operation means).
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification possible effect C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in Figure 174.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 171 (E) and Fig. 171 (G) of the winning/losing notification possible performance A, the third performance outputs a special sound to notify the display of a premium image, which corresponds to a special image such as premium image PMG1 or premium image PMG2, which is one of rare images (images that appear in rare performances) with an extremely low appearance rate. If the special sound is not played, even if the special image such as premium image PMG1 or premium image PMG2 is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player may recognize it as a normal image that is simply displayed automatically (sequentially) as the performance progresses, but by playing the special sound, the player can recognize the special image as a rare image (an image that appears in a rare performance), and it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally overlooking it without noticing.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification possible effect C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in Figure 174.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 171 (D) of the winning/losing notification possible presentation A, the first presentation outputs a specific sound that notifies the player of the confirmed win, corresponding to a specific image called a rainbow image BKH. If the specific sound is not played, even if the specific image called a rainbow image BKH suddenly appears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player may recognize it as a normal image that is simply displayed automatically (sequentially) as the presentation progresses. However, by playing the specific sound, the player can recognize the specific image as an image that notifies the player of the confirmed win, and it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally missing it without noticing.
The same applies to the winning/losing notification possible effect B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification possible effect C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification possible effect D in Figure 174.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the winning/losing notification presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the winning/losing notification possible performance A in FIG. 171, the winning/losing notification possible performance B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notification possible performance C in FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notification possible performance D in FIG. 174, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning confirmation is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a special sound announcing the display of a premium image as a specific image is played from the speaker 67, and a premium image is displayed as a special image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the performance button 63, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 may be used as appropriate. In this case, it is preferable that the expectation of a winning result by a specific lottery set in the sword image (i.e., the expectation of a win (big win or small win) set in the sword image) is higher than that set in the button image BG. Since the button image BG is set to have a low expectation of a win (big win or small win), the player may be disappointed because the button image BG is displayed on the display screen 7a and cannot expect to win (big win or small win). However, since the sword image is set to have a high expectation of a win (big win or small win) compared to the button image BG, the player can expect to win (big win or small win) because the sword image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In the winning/losing notification possible performance A of FIG. 171, the winning/losing notification possible performance B of FIG. 172, the winning/losing notification possible performance C of FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notification possible performance D of FIG. 174, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a specific sound notifying the winning confirmation is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a specific image notifying the winning confirmation. However, it is also possible to make the specific sound notifying the winning confirmation be played from the speaker 67 by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and to display a rainbow image as a specific image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the variety of performances by the operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 can be increased.

[Modification 3]
In the winning/losing notification possible performance A of FIG. 171, the winning/losing notification possible performance B of FIG. 172, the winning/losing notification possible performance C of FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notification possible performance D of FIG. 174, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a special sound announcing the display of a premium image as a special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premium image is displayed as a special image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it is also possible to make the special sound announcing the display of a premium image as a special image be played from the speaker 67 by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), and to display the premium image as a special image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the variety of performances by the operation (pressing) of the performance button 63 can be increased.

[Modification 4]
The premium image PMG1 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in the winning/losing notification possible performance A of FIG. 171(E), and the premium image PMG2 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in the winning/losing notification possible performance A of FIG. 171(G). In other words, a different premium image was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 each time. However, the same premium image may be displayed in the winning/losing notification possible performance A to the winning/losing notification possible performance D. For example, either the premium image PMG1 or the premium image PMG2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a as a common premium image. This can contribute to reducing the images (image data) stored in the ROM 103, and can also contribute to reducing the cost of the ROM 13 by reducing the capacity of the ROM 103.

[Modification 5]
In the winning/losing notification possible performance A in FIG. 171, the winning/losing notification possible performance B in FIG. 172, the winning/losing notification possible performance C in FIG. 173, and the winning/losing notification possible performance D in FIG. 174, the button images BG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are consumed by operating (pressing) the performance button 63, and the button images BG disappear one by one from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the remaining number of the stocked button images BG, that is, the stock number, may be displayed in a large message on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode, such as "X pieces remaining (X is the stock number)". At this time, the announcement "X pieces remaining (X is the stock number)" may be made to sound from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can accurately grasp the remaining stock number. The "predetermined display mode" is, for example, in the order of white light → blue light → green light → red light → gold light (yellow light) → seven-color light (rainbow light (high probability of winning)), and the expected probability of the appearance of a specific sound and a specific image, and the expected probability of the appearance of a special sound and a special image are each set to be high.

[Modification 6]
In the winning/losing notification possible performance A of Fig. 171, the winning/losing notification possible performance B of Fig. 172, the winning/losing notification possible performance C of Fig. 173, and the winning/losing notification possible performance D of Fig. 174, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the performance button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the operation (pressing operation or pushing operation) of the sword button 65 can produce the same effect as the operation (pushing operation) of the performance button 63.

[Modification 7]
The winning/losing notification performance A in Figure 171, the winning/losing notification performance B in Figure 172, the winning/losing notification performance C in Figure 173, and the winning/losing notification performance D in Figure 174 may not have some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect H3-1]
A gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player,
In a performance in which a winning result of a specific lottery is notified by operating the operating means,
A first effect of displaying a specific image notifying the winning result on a display screen;
a second effect that prompts the user to operate the operation means when the number of times the operation means is operated has not reached the upper limit number of times and is still remaining following the first effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-1,
before the first effect is executed, a third effect is executed in which an image of an operation means simulating the operation means is stocked on a display screen;
The upper limit of the number of operations is a stock number of the operation means image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect H3-1 or H3-2,
When the operation means is operated while the second performance is being executed, a fourth performance of displaying a special image on a display screen can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3,
The special image is a premium image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect H3-3 or H3-4,
The third effect is to output a special sound corresponding to the special image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects H3-1 to H3-5,
The first effect is to output a specific sound corresponding to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific target display effects A to D are explained below using Figures 175 to 178. These specific target display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation performance, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific target display performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variation timing change performance, it drives the second movable role 15, etc.

[Specific target display performance A]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display performance A. In the specific target display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 175(A), the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located in a retreat position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable role 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction and the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" in the specific target display section TH emits light in blue. The color of the light emitted by the specific target display section TH may be any color.

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed at a position below the second movable role device 15. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15 performs a predetermined performance (operation). Specifically, the second movable part 15 (specific target display section TH) located in the retracted position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (D), the second movable part 15 rotates further to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, a display unit image HG imitating the specific object display unit TH of the second movable part 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the characters "OARO" in the specific object display unit TH. The character image of "OARO" is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific object display unit TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is jumping out diagonally downward to the left from behind (the back side of) the second movable part 15 from the position of the tilted second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (E), with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward a position at the lower left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed at a position on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed at a tilt similar to that of the second movable part 15. The display unit image HG is displayed at a tilt at the same angle as the second movable part 15. In other words, the letters "OARO" in the specific target display part TH in the second movable part 15 and the letter image of "OARO" in the display unit image HG are arranged parallel to each other and tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (G), with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if it is moving diagonally upward to the right, specifically toward the position of the tilted second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable prop 15. Specifically, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were jumping in behind (the back side of) the tilted second movable prop 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable part 15, and at the same time, the second movable part 15, which is tilted at a predetermined angle, moves back to its original position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 rotates left to return to its original position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(J), the second movable part 15 rotates further to the left and returns to its original position, the retreated position (home position). In other words, the second movable part 15 returns from a state tilted at a predetermined angle to a horizontal state.

[Specific target display performance B]
FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display performance B. In the specific target display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 176 (A), the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located in a retreat position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable role 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction and the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" in the specific target display section TH emits light in blue. The color of the light emitted by the specific target display section TH may be any color.

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed at a position below the second movable role device 15. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(C), of the letters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable role device 15, the last two letters "RO" that had been illuminated disappear, and only the first two letters "OA" remain illuminated. Also, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear. Then, the second movable role device 15 performs a predetermined performance (operation). Specifically, the second movable role device 15 (specific target display section TH) located in the retracted position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), the second movable part 15 rotates further to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, a display unit image HG that imitates the specific object display unit TH of the second movable part 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters "OA" that are part of the specific object display unit TH. The character image of "OA" is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific object display unit TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is jumping out diagonally downward to the left from behind (the back side of) the second movable part 15 from the position of the tilted second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(E), with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted in the same way as the second movable part 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted at the same angle as the second movable part 15. In other words, the illuminated letters "OA" of the specific target display part TH in the second movable part 15 and the letter image of "OA" of the display unit image HG are arranged parallel to each other, tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), the display of the "OA" character image in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15, which has been tilted at a predetermined angle, performs an operation to return to its original position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 rotates left to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). In other words, the second movable part 15 returns to a horizontal state from a state tilted at a predetermined angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (G), of the letters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable role piece 15, the first two letters "OA" that had been illuminated disappear, and the last two letters "RO" that had disappeared begin to illuminate. Then, the second movable role piece 15 performs a predetermined performance (operation). Specifically, the second movable role piece 15 (specific target display section TH) located in the retracted position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (H), the second movable part 15 rotates further to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, a display unit image HG that imitates the specific target display unit TH of the second movable part 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display unit image HG is a character image that imitates the characters "RO" that are part of the specific target display unit TH. The character image of "RO" is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific target display unit TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is jumping out diagonally downward to the left from behind (the back side of) the second movable part 15 from the position of the tilted second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(I), with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted in the same way as the second movable part 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted at the same angle as the second movable part 15. In other words, the illuminated letters "RO" on the specific target display part TH on the second movable part 15 and the letter image of "RO" on the display unit image HG are arranged parallel to each other, tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (J), the character image "RO" disappears from the display unit image HG on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15, which has been tilted at a predetermined angle, performs an operation to return to its original position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 rotates left to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). In other words, the second movable part 15 returns to a horizontal state from a state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display performance C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display performance C. In the specific target display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 177(A), the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located in a retreat position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable role 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction and the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" in the specific target display section TH emits light in blue. The color of the light emitted by the specific target display section TH may be any color.

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed at a position below the second movable role device 15. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15 performs a predetermined performance (operation). Specifically, the second movable part 15 (specific target display section TH) located in the retreated position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(D), the second movable role 15 rotates further to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the first two illuminated letters "OA" of the letters "OARO" in the specific object display section TH of the second movable role 15 disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display section image HG that imitates the specific object display section TH of the second movable role 15 is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image that imitates the letters "OA", which are part of the specific object display section TH. The "OA" character image is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific object display section TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is jumping out diagonally downward to the left from behind (the back side of) the second movable part 15 from the position of the tilted second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(E), with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted in the same way as the second movable part 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted at the same angle as the second movable part 15. In other words, the illuminated letters "OA" of the specific target display part TH in the second movable part 15 and the letter image of "OA" of the display unit image HG are arranged parallel to each other, tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (F), the display of the "OA" character image in the display unit image HG disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15, which has been tilted at a predetermined angle, performs an operation to return to its original position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 rotates left to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). In other words, the second movable part 15 returns to a horizontal state from a state tilted at a predetermined angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(G), the second movable part 15 performs a predetermined performance (operation). Specifically, the second movable part 15 (specific target display section TH) located in the retreated position (home position) rotates to the right and tilts from the horizontal position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(H), the second movable part 15 rotates further to the right and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the last two illuminated letters "RO" of the letters "OARO" in the specific object display section TH of the second movable part 15 disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display section image HG that imitates the specific object display section TH of the second movable part 15 is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image that imitates the letters "RO" that are part of the specific object display section TH. The "RO" character image is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific object display section TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the second movable part 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is jumping out diagonally downward to the left from behind (the back side of) the second movable part 15 from the position of the tilted second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(I), with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move diagonally downward to the left, specifically toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, with the second movable part 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, the display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted in the same way as the second movable part 15. The display unit image HG is displayed in a state tilted at the same angle as the second movable part 15. In other words, the illuminated letters "RO" on the specific target display part TH on the second movable part 15 and the letter image of "RO" on the display unit image HG are arranged parallel to each other, tilted at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177 (J), the character image "RO" disappears from the display unit image HG on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable part 15, which has been tilted at a predetermined angle, performs an operation to return to its original position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 rotates left to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). In other words, the second movable part 15 returns to a horizontal state from a state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display performance D]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining the specific target display performance D. In the specific target display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 178(A), the second movable role (movable member) 15 is located in a retreat position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable role 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction and the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" in the specific target display section TH emits light in blue, but at this stage, each character does not emit light. The color of the light emitted by the specific target display section TH may be any color.

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed at a position below the second movable role device 15. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(B), the changing left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role device 15 performs a predetermined performance (light emission). Specifically, of the letters "OARO" in the specific target display section TH of the second movable role device 15, only the second letter from the front, "A," lights up in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(C), the illuminated letter "A" of the letters "OARO" in the specific target display section TH of the second movable role piece 15 goes out of illumination. Then, a display section image HG that imitates the specific target display section TH of the second movable role piece 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display section image HG is a character image that imitates the letter "A" that is part of the specific target display section TH. The character image of "A" is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific target display section TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (a letter image imitating the letter "A") is displayed so as to pop out downward from behind (the back side of) the second movable part 15 from the position of the letter "A" on the specific target display part TH of the second movable part 15. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly smaller than the size of the letter "A" on the specific target display part TH of the second movable part 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (D), the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to expand and move downward. The display unit image HG is displayed at a size similar to the size of the letter "A" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable prop 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(E), the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to further expand and move downward. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the letter "A" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable prop 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (F), the display unit image HG disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable role piece 15 performs a predetermined performance (light emission). Specifically, of the letters "OARO" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable role piece 15, only the third letter "R" from the front lights up in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (G), the illuminated letter "R" of the letters "OARO" in the specific target display section TH of the second movable role piece 15 goes out of illumination. Then, a display section image HG that imitates the specific target display section TH of the second movable role piece 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display section image HG is a character image that imitates the letter "R" that is part of the specific target display section TH. The character image of "R" is blue, but it can be any color. It can also be the same color as the illuminated specific target display section TH, or a different color.

In this embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it were moving from the second movable prop 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, the display unit image HG (a character image imitating the character "R") is displayed so as to pop out downward from behind (the back side of) the second movable prop 15 from the position of the character "R" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable prop 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (H), the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to expand and move downward. The display unit image HG is displayed at a size similar to the size of the letter "R" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable prop 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(I), the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to further expand and move downward. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the letter "R" in the specific target display unit TH of the second movable prop 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the display unit image HG disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of specific target display effects.
[Effect 1]
175 to 178, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment executes a first effect in which the specific target display section TH representing a specific target performs a predetermined effect, and a second effect in which a display section image HG that imitates at least a part of the specific target display section TH is displayed on the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7 based on the predetermined effect of the specific target display section TH. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 175 and Fig. 176, the second movable gadget 15 (movable member) including the specific target display part TH and configured to be movable performs a predetermined operation, and in the second performance, the display part image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the predetermined operation of the second movable gadget 15. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 175 and 176, the second movable part 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, and in the first performance, the second movable part 15 performs an action of tilting at a predetermined angle, and in the second performance, the display section image HG is displayed as if it moves from the second movable part 15 to the display screen 7a based on the action of the second movable part 15. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 175 and 176, after the second performance, a third performance is executed in which the second movable role 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle and the display image HG is displayed in a state in which it is tilted in the same manner as the second movable role 15. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the interest of the player.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 175 and 176, after the second performance, the display unit image HG is displayed as if it is moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable role 15, and the second movable role 15, which is tilted at a predetermined angle, returns to its original position, in a fourth performance. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 177 and 178, in the first performance, the specific target display section TH emits light, and in the second performance, the display section image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emitted from the specific target display section TH. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 177 and 178, in the second performance, the display section image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a as if it were moving from the specific object display section TH to the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific object display section TH. This configuration can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific target display presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
175 to 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on a predetermined effect (here, an effect in which the specific target display unit TH moves or emits light) of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable role piece 15, but the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH is not limited to an effect of movement or light emission, and may be various other effects. For example, the specific target display unit TH may be transformed, moved in a predetermined direction, or turned off.
[Variation 2]
175 to 178, the specific target display section TH is provided on the movable member (second movable part 15), but it may be provided on a fixed member or may be displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, it may be in any form as long as it displays a specific target.
[Variation 3]
In Fig. 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable role piece 15, but the display unit image HG may be displayed on the display screen 7a based on the blinking of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable role piece 15. The display unit image HG may also be displayed so as to alternate between display and non-display, so as to blink.
[Variation 4]
In Fig. 178, a blue display image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display section TH of the second movable gadget 15, and for example, the expectation of a big win may be suggested by the state of the display image HG displayed on the display screen 7a. For example, the expectation of a big win may be suggested by the color, size, number of times displayed, number of times blinking, etc. of the display image HG displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I1-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a specific object display unit that displays a specific object,
A first effect in which the specific target display unit performs a predetermined effect;
and a second performance in which a display unit image imitating at least a part of the specific target display unit is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined performance of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-1,
A movable member including the specific target display unit and configured to be movable,
In the first performance, the movable member performs a predetermined action,
In the second performance, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined movement of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-2,
The movable member is disposed adjacent to the display means,
In the first performance, the movable member is tilted at a predetermined angle,
In the second performance, the display unit image is displayed as if it is moving from the movable member to the display means based on the movement of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-3,
After the second performance, a third performance can be further executed in which the movable member is tilted at a predetermined angle and the display image is displayed in a state in which the movable member is tilted in the same manner as the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-3 or I1-4,
After the second performance, a fourth performance can be further executed in which the display unit image is displayed as if it is moving from the display means to the movable member, and the movable member tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect I1-1,
In the first performance, the specific target display unit emits light,
In the second performance, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects I1-6,
In the second performance, the display unit image is displayed on the display means as if the display unit image were moving from the specific target display unit to the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The multiple reel combination performances A to D are explained below using Figures 179 to 182. This multiple reel combination performance can be executed during the decorative pattern change performance, etc. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a multiple reel combination performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a change timing change performance, it drives the first movable reel 14, the second movable reel 15, etc.

[Multiple role combination performance A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the multiple role combination performance A. In the multiple role combination performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 179(A), among the first movable role 14, the left fixed role 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the entirety is in a visible state. Also, although not shown in FIG. 179(A), among the first movable role 14, the right movable role 14R (second movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the retracted position, the right movable role 14R is in a state where the entirety is hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

In addition, the second movable part 15 (first movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable part 15 has a lower part 151 (first part) that is visible, and an upper part 152 (second part) described below that is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. In other words, the second movable part 15 is positioned in the retracted position so that a part of it is visible (a part of it is difficult to see).

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed on the right side of the left fixed role object 14L. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent performance may be performed while they are still displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves leftward from a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2 toward near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (E), the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 are combined in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable part 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R are combined to form a ring-shaped decorative member. In addition, the second movable part 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable part 15 become visible. Then, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. In other words, the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 are combined in a partially overlapping state. In this context, merging includes direct merging, indirect merging, being placed in close proximity but not in contact, and being combined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a facial image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. As a result, the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, the second movable part 15, and the facial image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (G), the facial image 14G disappears (becomes invisible) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the retreat position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retreat position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (H), the right-side movable part 14R and the second movable part 15 return to their retracted positions in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right-side movable part 14R is entirely hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. In addition, in the retracted position, the second movable part 15 has a lower part 151 that is visible, and an upper part 152 that is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

[Multiple role combination performance B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the multiple role combination performance B. In the multiple role combination performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 180(A), among the first movable role 14, the left fixed role 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the entirety is in a visible state. Also, although not shown in FIG. 180(A), among the first movable role 14, the right movable role 14R (second movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the retracted position (home position), the right movable role 14R is in a state where the entirety is hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

In addition, the second movable part 15 (first movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the retracted position (home position), the second movable part 15 is positioned so that its entirety can be seen without being hidden by the upper part of the game board 2.

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed on the right side of the left fixed role object 14L. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent performance may be performed while they are still displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves leftward from a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2 toward near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(E), the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 are combined in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable part 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R are combined to form a ring-shaped decorative member. The second movable part 15 also moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable part 15 is in a state in which it covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. In other words, the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R are combined with the second movable part 15 in a partially overlapping state. Note that the combination here includes direct combination, indirect combination, being placed in a position close to but not in contact, and being combined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a facial image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. As a result, the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, the second movable part 15, and the facial image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), the facial image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(H), the right-side movable part 14R and the second movable part 15 return to their retracted positions in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right-side movable part 14R is entirely hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. In addition, in the retracted position, the second movable part 15 is not hidden by the upper part of the game board 2 and is stationary in a state where it can be seen entirely.

[Multiple role combination performance C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining the multiple role combination performance C. In the multiple role combination performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 181(A), among the first movable role 14, the left fixed role 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the entirety is in a visible state. Also, although not shown in FIG. 181(A), among the first movable role 14, the right movable role 14R (second movable member) is located in a retreat position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the retreat position (home position), the right movable role 14R is in a state where the entirety is hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

In addition, the second movable part 15 (first movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable part 15 has a lower part 151 (first part) that is difficult to see, and an upper part 152 (second part) described below that is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and difficult to see. In other words, the second movable part 15 is arranged in a retracted position (home position) such that a part of it is visible (a part of it is difficult to see).

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed on the right side of the left fixed role object 14L. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be hidden, and subsequent performances may be performed while they are still displayed. Then, a suggestion image SG is displayed, suggesting that a performance will be performed in which the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 combine. Specifically, a suggestion image SG that resembles a lightning bolt connecting the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (D), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves leftward from a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2 toward near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (E), the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 are combined in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable part 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R are combined to form a ring-shaped decorative member. In addition, the second movable part 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable part 15 become visible. Then, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. In other words, the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 are combined in a partially overlapping state. In this context, merging includes direct merging, indirect merging, being placed in close proximity but not in contact, and being combined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a facial image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. As a result, the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, the second movable part 15, and the facial image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (G), the facial image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181 (H), the right-side movable part 14R and the second movable part 15 return to their retracted positions in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right-side movable part 14R is entirely hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. In addition, in the retracted position, the second movable part 15 has a lower part 151 that is visible, and an upper part 152 that is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

[Multiple role combination performance D]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the multiple role combination performance D. In the multiple role combination performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 182(A), among the first movable role 14, the left fixed role 14L (fixed member) is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the entirety is in a visible state. Also, although not shown in FIG. 182(A), among the first movable role 14, the right movable role 14R (second movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the retracted position (home position), the right movable role 14R is in a state where the entirety is hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

In addition, the second movable part 15 (first movable member) is located in a retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second movable part 15 has a lower part 151 (first part) that is difficult to see, and an upper part 152 (second part) described below that is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and difficult to see. In other words, the second movable part 15 is arranged in a retracted position (home position) such that a part of it is visible (a part of it is difficult to see).

In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in which they move vertically at high speed on the right side of the left fixed role object 14L. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of patterns that can notify whether or not a win has occurred based on the combination of these stopped patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in a winning state (winning pattern "777") at the stopped display position. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped and lined up along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up along the horizontal direction" includes not only those lined up strictly horizontally, but also those lined up roughly horizontally. In other words, anything that a person skilled in the art can recognize as lined up in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a is included in those lined up along the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(C), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may not be hidden, and the subsequent performance may be performed while they are still displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (D), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves leftward from a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2 toward near the center of the display screen 7a. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (E), the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the second movable part 15 are combined in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable part 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the right movable part 14R is positioned at a predetermined distance from the left fixed part 14L. Also, the second movable part 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable part 15 become visible. Then, the second movable part 15 covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. That is, the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R are partially overlapped and combined with the second movable part 15. In this context, merging includes direct merging, indirect merging, being placed in close proximity but not in contact, and being combined.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(F), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a pair of movable members 14LP that were hidden behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed part 14L move and protrude to the right toward the right movable part 14R. Note that the movable members 14LP that are hidden behind the upper end of the left fixed part 14L are not shown here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(G), a pair of movable members 14LP protrude from the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the pair of movable members 14LP form a ring-shaped decorative member. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a facial image 14G is displayed in the opening of the ring-shaped decorative member formed by combining the left fixed part 14L and the right movable part 14R. As a result, the left fixed part 14L, the right movable part 14R, the second movable part 15, the movable members 14LP, and the facial image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(H), the facial image 14G disappears (becomes hidden) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the pair of movable members 14LP move leftward so as to return to their positions behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed part 14L, respectively. After that, as shown in FIG. 182(I), the pair of movable members 14LP return to their positions behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed part 14L, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (J), in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right-side movable part 14R moves rightward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position (retracted position) behind the right side of the game board 2. Also, the second movable part 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable part 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Then, in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right-side movable part 14R and the second movable part 15 return to their retracted positions. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right-side movable part 14R is entirely hidden behind the right part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see. In addition, in the retracted position, the second movable part 15 has a lower part 151 that is visible, and an upper part 152 that is hidden behind the upper part of the game board 2 and is difficult to see.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of combining multiple gadgets.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 179 to 182, the left fixed part 14L (fixed member) is arranged so that the whole part can be seen, the second movable part 15 (first movable member) is arranged so that a part can be seen, and the right movable part 14R (second movable member) is arranged so that the whole part cannot be seen. The left fixed part 14L, the second movable part 15 that has moved to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7, and the right movable part 14R that has moved to a predetermined position (advance) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are combined to perform a combined performance that represents a specific target. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 179, 181, and 182, the second movable gadget 15 includes a lower part 151 (first part) arranged to be visible and an upper part 152 (second part) arranged to be difficult to see. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the game, and increases the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 179, 181, and 182, in the combined performance, the second movable role 15 moves to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable role 15 are arranged so as to be visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 181, it is possible to further execute a combination suggestion effect (in this embodiment, a suggestion SG is displayed) that suggests that a performance in which the left fixed part 14L, the second movable part 15, and the right movable part 14R will combine will be performed before the combination performance. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 182, a movable member 14LP (third movable member) is further provided, which is arranged to be difficult to see by the left fixed part 14L, and in the combined performance, the movable member 14LP moves to a visible position in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and combines with the left fixed part 14L, the second movable part 15, and the right movable part 14R to represent a part of a specific target. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 179 to 182, in the combined performance, a facial image 14G representing a part of a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of multiple gimmick combination performances are shown.
[Modification 1]
In Figures 179 to 182, the left fixed part 14L, the second movable part 15, and the right movable part 14R are combined to show a human face as a specific object, but the specific object is not limited to a character, a living thing, or an object, and also includes abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unclear. In other words, the specific object here includes all manners in which the number of specific objects can be specified when there are multiple specific objects.
[Variation 2]
In Figures 179 to 182, the second movable part 15 and the right-side movable part 14R are combined with the left-side fixed part 14L in an advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but they may also be combined at a position other than the advanced position.
[Variation 3]
In Figure 181, a suggestion image SG is displayed as a combination suggestion effect suggesting that the left fixed part 14L, the second movable part 15, and the right movable part 14R will combine, but the combination suggestion effect may be something other than an image display, and for example, it may be an effect in which the parts move together or emit light.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I2-1]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A fixing member arranged so as to be entirely visible;
A first movable member arranged so that at least a portion of the first movable member is visible;
A gaming machine including a second movable member arranged so that the entirety of the second movable member is difficult to see,
At least the fixed member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the second movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means are combined to perform a combined performance showing a specific target.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect I2-1,
The first movable member includes a first portion arranged to be visibly recognizable and a second portion arranged to be less visibly recognizable.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect I2-2,
In the combined performance, the first movable member is moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, so that the first part and the second part of the first movable member are arranged to be visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-3,
Before the combination performance, a combination suggestion performance that suggests that a performance in which the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member are combined can be further executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-4,
The device further includes a third movable member arranged to be difficult to see by the fixed member,
In the combined performance, the third movable member moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means combines with the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member to represent a part of the specific target.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-5,
In the combined performance, an image representing a part of the specific target is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing announcement promotion effects A to D are explained below using Figures 183 to 186. In Figures 183 to 186, the various pending images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, some drawings of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing, and some first movable props 14 and second movable props 15 arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This winning/losing notification effect can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a change effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a change effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission state of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain the winning/losing result announcement prompt A, then explain the winning/losing result announcement prompt B, winning/losing result announcement prompt C, and winning/losing result announcement prompt D in that order.

[Winners announcement promotion A]
First, the winning/losing notification flash performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Fig. 183 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification flash performance A. The winning/losing notification flash performance A is performed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern.

In the winning/losing notification performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 183(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

At the top center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed in each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the display of the changing decorative pattern, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed as four with the blue number "4" on the left, and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed as zero with the red number "0" on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in Figure 183 (A).

A selection section SEL that allows the selection of a presentation mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that has reached a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode. In this case, the presentation mode selected before the winning/losing announcement promotion presentation A was B mode, which will be described later, so the theme image of this B mode (here, an image that resembles a "cloud") is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although this is not shown in the figure.

The period during which the selection mode can be selected is the period when, as the decorative patterns begin to change, a message "Change mode with effect button" is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) in a predetermined position (e.g., on the lower left side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to inform the user that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63. However, when the winning/losing notification shot effect A is being performed, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning/losing notification shot effect A is performed, the effect mode selected before the winning/losing notification shot effect A is performed will continue in the winning/losing notification shot effect A as well.

Here we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When A mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing D mode, which is located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, which is located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In B mode, a "cloud" themed presentation is played, and a theme image resembling a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while B mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing A mode located below B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from the bottom up, and C mode located above B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from the top towards the specific area.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while C mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode located below C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode located above C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, and a theme image resembling "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and C mode located below D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area.

Note that the winning/losing notification shot effect A is a shot that is performed in all three (multiple) presentation modes (modes B, C, and D) except for mode A, out of the three presentation modes that make up the presentation modes: mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D. In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect B, which will be described later, is a shot that is performed in only one presentation mode (single presentation mode), mode A.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 183(A) starts to change and there is a winning (big win or small win) among the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, a winning indication image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a winning (big win or small win) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that whether there is a winning (big win or small win) among the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

The winning indication image ASG is first displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a so that its front side faces the front of the gaming machine 1, and then the left and right sides of the winning indication image ASG repeatedly swing and sway back and forth around a straight line passing through the midpoint of each of the upper and lower sides of the winning indication image ASG (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG"). When the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG is suddenly stopped, a winning confirmation effect is performed in which the winning indication image ASG repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while emitting a flash of light and pops out. This winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG starts, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that the player can be excited about the expectation of a winning (big win or small win).

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a number "3", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop and a miss is confirmed, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG can be used to stir up the player's sense of expectation that a win confirmation performance may be performed and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will all be the same pattern, resulting in a win (big win or small win).

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A at the fourth hold display position 9Ad disappears. Furthermore, the numbers HMG for the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively change to the blue number "3" when the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 becomes three, and remain the red number "0" when the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becomes zero.

Even when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues, and a winning confirmation performance can suddenly occur, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(D), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a number "4", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop and a miss is confirmed, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG can be used to stir up the player's sense of expectation that a win confirmation performance may be performed and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will all be the same pattern, resulting in a win (big win or small win).

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(E), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappears at the third reserved display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively change to the blue number "2" when the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 becomes two, and the red number "0" continues to be displayed when the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becomes zero.

Even when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues, and a winning confirmation performance can suddenly occur, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a number "5", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop and a miss is confirmed, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG can be used to stir up the player's sense of expectation that a win confirmation performance may be performed and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will all be the same pattern, resulting in a win (big win or small win).

Next, as shown in FIG. 183(G), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9A disappears from the second reserved display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively change to the blue number "1" when the first special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 becomes one, and the red number "0" remains when the second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becomes zero.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, as shown in FIG. 183(H), a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the change, and the winning indication image ASG repeatedly flashes and moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front and pops out. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad and the reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in the sub-variable area in which small decorative patterns (not shown) are displayed in a variable manner in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative patterns do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the numbers HMG (here, the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, are not disappeared from the display screen 7a.

After that, the winning indication image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 183(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in line along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same patterns are displayed stopped and a winning (big win or small win) occurs, and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) begins.

In Figure 183 (I), the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG (here, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is one and is shown as a blue number "1", and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero and is shown as a red number "0"), which are continued in Figure 183 (H). Also, in FIG. 183(I), the state where the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are all disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 183(H), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd are also disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 183(H). Also, in FIG. 183(I), the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode is disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 183(H).

In this way, a win indication image ASG that suggests the presence of a win in the win/loss information of the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the swinging movement of the win indication image ASG is repeated. This makes it possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur as the swinging movement of the win indication image ASG begins, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, even if the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad each display a white spherical hold icon, which has the lowest probability of winning (a big win or a small win), when the swinging movement of the win suggestion image ASG begins, a win confirmation effect can suddenly occur to inform the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur after the swinging movement has ended, thereby building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.

In addition, the winning/losing notification shot effect A is a performance that is performed in three performance modes (multiple performance modes) of the A, B, C, and D modes that make up the performance modes, excluding A mode, namely B, C, and D modes, so the display mode of the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is a common display mode in the three performance modes (multiple performance modes). In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect B, which will be described later, is a performance that is performed only in one performance mode (single performance mode), namely A mode, so the display mode of the expanding movement of the winning suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode that differs from the common display mode in the single performance mode (single performance mode).

[Winners announcement promotion B]
Next, the winning/losing notification flash performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 184. Fig. 184 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification flash performance B. The winning/losing notification flash performance B is performed during the variation performance of the decorative pattern.

In the winning/losing notification performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 184(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly up and down in small increments.

At the top center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is hidden in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed in each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the display of the changing decorative pattern, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed as four with the blue number "4" on the left, and the second special pattern reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed as zero with the red number "0" on the right, spaced apart from each other, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

For ease of explanation, the following explanation is based on the assumption that no game balls enter the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 after the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 184 (A).

A selection section SEL that allows the selection of a presentation mode is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed as the reels are rotated, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that reaches a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode. In this case, since the presentation mode selected before the winning/losing announcement promotion presentation A was the A mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this A mode (here, an image of the "sun") is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

The period during which the selection mode can be selected is the period when, as the decorative pattern begins to change, a message "Change mode with effect button" is displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., the lower left side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. However, when the winning/losing notification flashing presentation B is being performed, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning/losing notification flashing presentation B is performed, the presentation mode selected before the winning/losing notification flashing presentation B is performed will continue in the winning/losing notification flashing presentation B.

Here we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When A mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing D mode, which is located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, which is located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In B mode, a "cloud" themed presentation is played, and a theme image resembling a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while B mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing A mode located below B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from the bottom up, and C mode located above B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from the top towards the specific area.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while C mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode located below C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode located above C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, and a theme image resembling "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and C mode located below D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area.

Note that the winning/losing notification shot effect B is an effect that is only performed in one presentation mode (single presentation mode), that is, A mode, out of the presentation modes that make up the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect A described above is an effect that is performed in all three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes), that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 184(A) starts to change and there is a winning (big win or small win) among the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, a winning indication image ASG with a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a winning (big win or small win) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. Note that whether there is a winning (big win or small win) among the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A is determined based on the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

The winning indication image ASG is first displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing the front of the gaming machine 1, and then during the change, the winning indication image ASG expands and returns to its original size repeatedly (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG"). If the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG is suddenly stopped, a winning confirmation effect is performed in which the winning indication image ASG repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while emitting a flash of light and pops out. This winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the change ends. For this reason, when the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG begins, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that the player can be excited about the expectation of a winning (big win or small win).

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) that connects the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "3", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped, the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed, so even if the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped and a miss is confirmed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started, and a winning confirmation performance is then performed, which can arouse the player's anticipation that a performance in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and result in a win (big win or small win) will unfold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A at the fourth hold display position 9Ad disappears. Furthermore, the numbers HMG for the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively change to the blue number "3" when the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 becomes three, and remain the red number "0" when the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becomes zero.

Even when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern change starts, the winning indication image ASG continues to be displayed.

During this change, as shown in FIG. 184(D), the winning indication image ASG starts to expand. This allows a winning confirmation effect to suddenly occur during this change, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a winning event (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "4," resulting in a miss. Note that by the time the decorative patterns are displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG has finished and the winning suggestion image ASG has returned to its original size. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary and a miss is confirmed, the winning indication image ASG is displayed, so the winning indication image ASG starts to expand, and a winning confirmation effect is then performed, which can build up a sense of anticipation in the player that a winning effect (big win or small win) may develop in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all line up as the same pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184(F), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappears at the third reserved display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively change to the blue number "2" when the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 becomes two, and the number of the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 remains the red number "0" when the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becomes zero.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad in Fig. 184(F) moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern change begins, the winning indication image ASG expands from Fig. 184(F) to Fig. 184(H). This allows a winning confirmation performance to suddenly occur during the change, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a winning (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(I), during the change, a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the winning indication image ASG flashes and moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front, repeatedly appearing in a display mode. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in the sub-variable area in which small decorative patterns (not shown) are displayed in a variable manner in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative patterns do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, do not disappear from the display screen 7a either (here, the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is two, so the blue number "2", and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero, so the red number "0").

Then, the winning indication image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 184(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in line along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same patterns are displayed stopped and a winning (big win or small win) occurs, and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) begins.

In Figure 184 (J), the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG (here, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is two, so the blue number "2", and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is zero, so the red number "0"), which are displayed in succession to Figure 184 (I). Also, in FIG. 184(J), the state where the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are all disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 184(I), and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd are also disappeared as in FIG. 184(I). Also, in FIG. 184(J), the state where the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode is disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 184(I).

In the A mode, even if the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 184(A) and the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A have a winning (big winning or small winning) result, the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a winning (big winning or small winning) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is not played at all from the speaker 67. In other words, no effect is performed to encourage the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. However, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and reaches a predetermined number of times, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and a "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed in which a character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" can be performed by generating a so-called "hidden command" when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) a predetermined number of times in a state where no effect is being performed to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. This "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur in the future. The rainbow image is a specific image, and is a background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

The "predetermined number of times" can be 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23, and is set by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101). In other words, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 23 times but the "performance to confirm a win by using the performance button" is not performed, the player will lose. For example, when the reserved icon 9A is displayed at each of the first reserve display position 9Ad to the fourth reserve display position 9Ad, if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad (won/lost information is a miss) becomes the reserved icon 9C, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed and a miss occurs, whereas if the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad (won/lost information is a win (big win or small win)) becomes the reserved icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) draws 17 times, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 17 times, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed and a win (big win or small win) occurs.

The "Win Confirmation Effect by Effect Button" is a special effect that is only performed when A mode is selected, and may be performed when the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 184(A), and even if there is a win (big win or small win) in the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, the winning indication image ASG with a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a win (big win or small win) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, or when the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are consumed as the reserved icons 9C, and the game ball enters the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21.

In other words, in A mode, even if the decorative pattern in FIG. 184(A) starts to change and the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A have a winning potential (big win or small win), if the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of a winning potential (big win or small win) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a "winning confirmation performance by the performance button" is performed, whereas when the decorative pattern in FIG. 184(A) starts to change and the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A have a winning potential (big win or small win) and the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of a winning potential (big win or small win) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, no matter when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the "winning confirmation performance by the performance button" is prevented and the winning/losing notification spurt performance B proceeds.

In addition, in the C mode, when the decorative pattern starts to change in FIG. 184(A) and there is a winning (big win or small win) in the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, a winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of a winning (big win or small win) may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or even if it is not displayed at all, an effect is performed in which an effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern is changing (not shown), encouraging the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. In this respect, it differs from the A mode. When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and a "winning confirmation effect by the effect button" may be performed in which a character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In this "winning confirmation effect by the effect button", the player is notified that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after that. The rainbow image is a special image and a background image that notifies you that you have won.

In this way, a win indication image ASG that suggests the presence of a win is displayed in the win/loss information of the reserved icon 9A in the center of the display screen 7a, and the expansion movement of the win indication image ASG is repeated. This makes it possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur as the expansion movement of the win indication image ASG begins, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, even if the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad each display a white spherical hold icon, which has the lowest probability of winning (a big win or a small win), when the win indication image ASG starts to expand, a win confirmation effect can suddenly occur to inform the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur after the expansion movement ends, thereby building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.

As described above, the winning/losing notification effect A shown in FIG. 183 is an effect that is performed in common in three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes) of the A, B, C, and D modes that make up the presentation modes, excluding A mode, namely B, C, and D modes, and therefore the display mode of the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG is a common display mode in the three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes). In contrast, the winning/losing notification effect B is an effect that is performed only in one presentation mode (single presentation mode) of A mode, and therefore the display mode of the expanding movement of the winning indication image ASG in the single presentation mode (single presentation mode) is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode.

[Winners announcement promotion C]
Next, the winning/losing notification flash performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 185. Fig. 185 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification flash performance C.

In the winning/losing notification performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 185(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the end of the game performance period by performing the performance of each round game in the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and accordingly, when the notification period begins, a message MG saying "Continue hitting right" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to continue hitting right. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is zero with the blue number "0" on the left, and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is four with the red number "4" on the right, spaced apart from each other, and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 after the display in FIG. 185(A) begins.

In Figure 185 (A), when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed comes to an end and the specific period begins, as described above, there are zero first special chart reservations based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, which is the number "0," and there are four second special chart reservations based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. Therefore, if there is a win (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special chart reservations based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, as shown in Figure 185 (B), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in Figure 185 (C), a win indication image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the presence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The winning indication image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing the front of the gaming machine 1. Whether or not there is a winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is determined based on the big win pre-determination result (in the case of a big win, the big win type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

If there is no winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special reserved patterns based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 during the specific period, the flash image FH shown in FIG. 185(B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the winning suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 185(C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (i.e., if there is no winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special reserved patterns based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 during the specific period), the winning/losing notification effect C is not performed, and the decorative pattern starts to change.

After that, when the specific period ends, as shown in FIG. 185(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly up and down in small movements.

When the display of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") starts to change in FIG. 185(D), the winning indication image ASG, which was displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 185(C), is displayed small in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical reserved icon 9C displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd, and smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the left and right sides of the winning indication image ASG repeatedly swing back and forth around the straight line passing through the midpoint of each of the upper and lower sides of the winning indication image ASG as the central axis (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG"). When the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG suddenly stops, the winning indication image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a winning confirmation effect is performed in which the winning indication image ASG repeatedly jumps out while emitting a flash and moving from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front. This winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the fluctuation ends. For this reason, when the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG starts, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that the player can be excited about the expectation of a winning (big win or small win) occurring.

At the top center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the second special reserved is consumed is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the second special reserved in the area of the display screen 7a to the right of the reserved display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9B can be displayed at each of the four reserved display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, and the fourth reserved display position 9Bd, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the right edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9B immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Bd moves to the third reserved display position 9Bd, when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the third reserved display position 9Bd moves to the second reserved display position 9Bd, or when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the second reserved display position 9Bd moves to the first reserved display position 9Bd, the size of each reserved icon 9B is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9B immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the three hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when displaying the changing decorative patterns, as described above, the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the numbers HMG for the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as blue numbers "0" indicative of the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 remaining at zero, and the number HMG for the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becoming three, changing to red numbers "3."

Here, briefly, reserved icon 9B and reserved icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icon") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, a black spherical reserved icon, a smiling spherical reserved icon, and a white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the display of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts to change in FIG. 185(D), a selection section SEL that allows the selection of a presentation mode is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, the presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed as the reels rotate, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that reaches a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode. Here, the presentation mode selected during the change of the decorative symbols before the winning/losing notification performance C is performed, that is, before the big win performance (big win game) is the B mode, which will be described later, so that the theme image of this B mode (here, an image that imitates a "cloud") is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

The period during which the selection mode can be selected is the period during which, as the decorative symbols start to change, a message "Change mode with effect button" is displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., the lower right side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the presentation mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. However, when the winning/losing notification performance C is being performed, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning/losing notification performance C is performed, the presentation mode selected during the decorative symbols' change before the winning/losing notification performance C is performed, that is, before the big win performance (big win game) occurs, will continue in the winning/losing notification performance C.

Here we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When A mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing D mode, which is located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, which is located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In B mode, a "cloud" themed presentation is played, and a theme image resembling a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while B mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing A mode located below B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from the bottom up, and C mode located above B mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from the top towards the specific area.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while C mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode located below C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode located above C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, and a theme image resembling "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and C mode located below D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area.

Note that the winning/losing notification shot effect C is a shot that is performed in all three (multiple) presentation modes (B mode, C mode, and D mode) of the presentation modes A, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode. In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect D, which will be described later, is a shot that is performed in only one presentation mode (single presentation mode), A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a number "3", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop and a miss is confirmed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG can be used to stir up the player's sense of expectation that a winning confirmation performance may be performed and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will all be the same pattern, resulting in a win (big win or small win).

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(F), when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9B displayed at the second reserved display position 9Bd moves to the first reserved display position 9Bd, and the reserved icon 9B displayed at the third reserved display position 9Bd moves to the second reserved display position 9Bd, and the reserved icon 9B disappears at the third reserved display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively, the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, so it remains the blue number "0", and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is two, so it changes to the red number "2".

Even when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues, and a winning confirmation performance can suddenly occur, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a number "4", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop and a miss is confirmed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG can be used to stir up the player's sense of expectation that a winning confirmation performance may be performed and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will all be the same pattern, resulting in a win (big win or small win).

Next, as shown in FIG. 185(H), when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9B displayed at the second reserved display position 9Bd moves to the first reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B disappears from the second reserved display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively, remain the blue number "0" as the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, and change to the red number "1" as the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is one.

Even when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the swinging motion of the win suggestion image ASG continues, and a winning confirmation performance can suddenly occur, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, as shown in FIG. 185(I), a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the change, and the winning indication image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the winning indication image ASG repeatedly jumps out while emitting a flash of light and moving from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd, and the reserved display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in the sub-variable area in which small decorative patterns (not shown) are displayed in a variable manner in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative patterns do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the numbers HMG (here, the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, are not disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Then, the winning indication image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 185(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in line on a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same patterns are displayed stopped and a winning (big win or small win) occurs, and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) begins.

In Figure 185 (J), the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG (here, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, so the blue number "0", and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is one, so the red number "1"), which are displayed in succession to Figure 185 (I). Also, in FIG. 185(J), the state where the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have all disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 185(I), and the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have also disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 185(I). Also, in FIG. 185(J), the state where the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode has disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 185(I).

In this way, the win indication image ASG, which indicates the presence of a win in the win/loss information of the reserved icon 9B, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and then is displayed small in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the swinging movement of the win indication image ASG is repeated. As a result, the swinging movement of the win indication image ASG starts in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, which can arouse the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, even if the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position 9Bd each display a white spherical hold icon, which has the lowest probability of winning (a big win or a small win), when the swinging movement of the win suggestion image ASG begins, a win confirmation effect can suddenly occur to inform the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur after the swinging movement has ended, thereby building up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur.

In addition, the winning/losing notification shot effect C is an effect that is performed in common in three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes) of the A, B, C, and D modes that make up the presentation modes, excluding A mode, namely B, C, and D modes, so the display mode of the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG is a common display mode in the three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes). In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect D, which will be described later, is an effect that is performed only in one presentation mode (single presentation mode), namely A mode, so the display mode of the expanding movement of the winning indication image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode that differs from the common display mode in the one presentation mode (single presentation mode).

[Winners announcement promotion D]
Next, the winning/losing notification prompt effect D will be described with reference to Fig. 186. Fig. 186 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification prompt effect D.

In the winning/losing notification performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 186(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the end of the game performance period by performing the performance of each round game in the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and accordingly, when the notification period begins, a message MG saying "Continue hitting right" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to continue hitting right. In addition, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is zero with the blue number "0" on the left, and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is four with the red number "4" on the right, spaced apart from each other, and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 after the display in FIG. 186(A) begins.

In Figure 186 (A), when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed comes to an end and the specific period begins, as described above, there are zero first special chart reservations based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, indicating the number "0," and there are four second special chart reservations based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. Therefore, if there is a win (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special chart reservations based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, as shown in Figure 186 (B), a flash image FH in which light is emitted in all directions from the center of the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in Figure 186 (C), a win indication image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the presence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. The winning indication image ASG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing the front of the gaming machine 1. Whether or not there is a winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special chart reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is determined based on the big win pre-determination result (in the case of a big win, the big win type pre-determination result) and the variation pattern pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command.

If there is no winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special reserved patterns based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 during the specific period, the flash image FH shown in FIG. 186(B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and the winning suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 186(C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (i.e., if there is no winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information corresponding to the four second special reserved patterns based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 during the specific period), the winning/losing notification effect D is not performed, and the decorative pattern starts to change.

After that, when the specific period ends, as shown in FIG. 186(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly up and down in small movements.

When the display of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") starts to change in FIG. 186(D), the winning indication image ASG, which was displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 186(C), is displayed small in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical reserved icon 9C displayed in the reserved display position 9Cd, and smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the winning indication image ASG is first displayed in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with its front side facing forward of the gaming machine 1, and then, during the change, the winning indication image ASG expands and returns to its original size repeatedly (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG"). When the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG suddenly stops, the winning indication image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a winning confirmation effect is performed in which the winning indication image ASG repeatedly jumps out while emitting a flash and moving from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front. This winning confirmation effect is an effect that notifies the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the change ends. For this reason, when the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG starts, the winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, so that the player can be excited about the expectation of a winning (big win or small win) occurring.

At the top center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small decorative patterns are always opaque and do not become translucent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and at the same time, all the corresponding small decorative patterns are also displayed in a stopped state. Even in a state where any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped (for example, a state where the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and a reach is formed), the corresponding small decorative patterns (for example, a small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, and a small decorative pattern corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R even if the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped) continue to be displayed in a variable state. Also, in a state where the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same pattern is not aligned and a miss occurs, each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be the same as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small decorative patterns corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the second special reserved is consumed is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided for the second special reserved in the area of the display screen 7a to the right of the reserved display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9B can be displayed at each of the four reserved display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9B can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Bd are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, and the fourth reserved display position 9Bd, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the right edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9B immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Bd moves to the third reserved display position 9Bd, when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the third reserved display position 9Bd moves to the second reserved display position 9Bd, or when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the second reserved display position 9Bd moves to the first reserved display position 9Bd, the size of each reserved icon 9B is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9B immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd, and no hold icon 9B is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the three hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B are stored without being consumed.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which were displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when displaying the changing decorative patterns, as described above, the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the numbers HMG for the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are displayed as blue numbers "0" indicative of the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 remaining at zero, and the number HMG for the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 becoming three, changing to red numbers "3."

Here, briefly, reserved icon 9B and reserved icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icon") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, a black spherical reserved icon, a smiling spherical reserved icon, and a white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the display of the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts to change in FIG. 186(D), a selection section SEL that allows the selection of the presentation mode is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, the presentation modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed as the reels rotate, and each time the presentation button 63 is operated (pressed), the presentation mode that reaches a specific area by the rotation of the reels is displayed larger than the other presentation modes. The presentation mode located in this specific area becomes the selected presentation mode. Here, the presentation mode selected during the change of the decorative symbols before the winning/losing notification performance D is performed, that is, before the big win performance (big win game) is the A mode, which will be described later, so that the theme image of this A mode (here, an image that imitates the "sun") is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, although not shown.

The period during which the selection mode can be selected is the period during which, as the decorative symbols start to change, a message "Change mode with the effect button" is displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., the lower right side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) to inform the user that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the effect button 63. However, when the winning/losing notification effect D is being performed, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning/losing notification effect D is performed, the effect mode selected during the change in the decorative symbols before the winning/losing notification effect D is performed, that is, before the jackpot effect (jackpot game) occurs, will continue in the winning/losing notification effect D.

Here we will briefly explain the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that make up the presentation modes.

In A mode, a "sun" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling the "sun" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When A mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL and the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63, A mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing D mode, which is located below A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and B mode, which is located above A mode, to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In B mode, a "cloud" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling a "cloud" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while B mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and A mode located below B mode is displayed with the reels spinning from the bottom up, and C mode located above B mode is displayed with the reels spinning from the top towards the specific area.

In C mode, a "rain" themed presentation is carried out, and a theme image resembling "rain" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while C mode is located in a specific area of the selection section SEL, C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, causing B mode located below C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and D mode located above C mode to be displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area.

In D mode, a "snow" themed presentation is performed, and a theme image resembling "snow" is displayed large on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 while D mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and C mode located below D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from bottom to top, and A mode located above D mode is displayed with the reels spinning from top to top toward the specific area, and A mode is again displayed in the specific area.

Note that the winning/losing notification shot effect D is an effect that is only performed in one presentation mode (single presentation mode), that is, A mode, out of the presentation modes that make up the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect C described above is an effect that is performed in all three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes), that is, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding A mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a number "3", resulting in a miss. Note that even when the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative patterns are displayed as a stop and a miss is confirmed, the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed, so the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG begins, and the winning confirmation performance is then performed, which can arouse the player's anticipation that a performance in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and a win (big win or small win) will be developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(F), when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9B displayed at the second reserved display position 9Bd moves to the first reserved display position 9Bd, and the reserved icon 9B displayed at the third reserved display position 9Bd moves to the second reserved display position 9Bd, and the reserved icon 9B disappears at the third reserved display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively, remain the blue number "0" for the first special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 being zero, and change to the red number "2" for the second special pattern reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 being two.

When the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the winning indication image ASG expands. This allows the winning confirmation performance to occur suddenly, building up the player's sense of anticipation that a winning (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in their own variable display areas, lined up along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as the number "2," the center decorative pattern 8C is displayed as the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "4," resulting in a miss. Note that by the time the decorative patterns are displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG has finished and the winning suggestion image ASG has returned to its original size. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is displayed stationary and a miss is confirmed, the winning indication image ASG is displayed, so the winning indication image ASG starts to expand, and a winning confirmation effect is then performed, which can build up a sense of anticipation in the player that a winning effect (big win or small win) may develop in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R all line up as the same pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 186(H), when the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the reserved icon 9B displayed at the second reserved display position 9Bd moves to the first reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9B disappears from the second reserved display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the numbers HMG representing the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 respectively, remain the blue number "0" as the first special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, and change to the red number "1" as the second special pattern reserved based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is one.

When the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, the winning indication image ASG expands. This allows the winning confirmation performance to occur suddenly, which can arouse the player's anticipation of a winning (big win or small win).

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the display of the decorative pattern begins to change, as shown in FIG. 186(I), a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs during the change, and the winning indication image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the winning indication image ASG repeatedly jumps out while emitting a flash of light and moving from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first reserved display position 9Bd, the second reserved display position 9Bd, the third reserved display position 9Bd, the fourth reserved display position 9Bd, and the reserved display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, and the reserved icon 9B displayed at the first reserved display position 9Bd and the reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode disappears from the display screen 7a. In contrast, in the sub-variable area in which small decorative patterns (not shown) are displayed in a variable manner in the upper center of the display screen 7a, the small decorative patterns do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the numbers HMG (here, the first special pattern reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, are not disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Then, the winning indication image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 186(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed stopped in line along a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed stopped as the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed stopped as the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as the number "7", so that the same patterns are displayed stopped and a winning (big win or small win) occurs, and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) due to the winning game (big win game or small win game) begins.

In Figure 186 (J), the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers HMG (here, the first special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is zero, so the blue number "0", and the second special chart reservation based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 is one, so the red number "1"), which are displayed in succession to Figure 186 (I). Also, in FIG. 186(J), the state where the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have all disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 186(I), and the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have also disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 186(I). Also, in FIG. 186(J), the state where the selection section SEL for selecting the performance mode has disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 186(I).

In addition, in A mode, when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" in Figure 186 (A) is displayed comes to an end and a specific period begins, even if there is a win (jackpot or small win) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special chart holds based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, the win indication image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a win (jackpot or small win) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a. In this case, while the decorative pattern is fluctuating, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is not played from the speaker 67 at all, that is, no effect is performed to encourage the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. However, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 and reaches a predetermined number of times, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and a "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed in which a character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed by generating a so-called "hidden command" when the number of operations (pressing operations) of the effect button 63 reaches a predetermined number of times in a state where no effect is performed to encourage the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. This "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after that. The rainbow image is a special image and a background image that notifies you that you have won.

The "predetermined number of times" can be 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23, and is set by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101). In other words, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 23 times but the "performance to confirm a win by using the performance button" is not performed, the player will lose. For example, when the reserve icon 9B is displayed at each of the first reserve display position 9Bd to the fourth reserve display position 9Bd, if the reserve icon 9B displayed at the first reserve display position 9Bd (won/lost information is a miss) becomes the reserved icon 9C, even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is not performed and a miss occurs, whereas if the reserve icon 9B displayed at the third reserve display position 9Bd (won/lost information is a win (big win or small win)) becomes the reserved icon 9C, the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) draws 17 times, and when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 17 times, the "win confirmation effect by the effect button" is performed and a win (big win or small win) occurs.

The "Win Confirmation by Effect Button" is a special effect that is only performed when A mode is selected, and when the notification period in which the message "Continue hitting to the right" MG is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) ends and a specific period begins, even if there is a win (big win or small win) in the reserved information (four reserved icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special reserved patterns based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, the winning indication image ASG with a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a win (big win or small win) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a, or it may be performed when the reserved information (four reserved icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special reserved patterns is consumed as the reserved icon 9C and the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21.

In other words, in A mode, when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed in FIG. 186(A) ends and the specific period begins, even if there is a win (big win or small win) in the reserved information (four reserved icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special chart reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, if the winning indication image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a win (big win or small win) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a "winning confirmation performance by the performance button" is performed, whereas in FIG. In (A), when the notification period during which the message MG "Continue hitting to the right" is displayed ends and the specific period begins, if there is a win (big win or small win) in the reserved information (four reserved icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special chart reserves based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, and if a win suggestion image ASG with a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the presence of a win (big win or small win) is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, no matter how often the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the "win confirmation performance by performance button" is prevented and the win/loss notification push performance D proceeds.

In addition, in the C mode, when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right hit" is displayed in FIG. 186 (A) ends and the specific period begins, if there is a win (big win or small win) in the reserved information (four reserved icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special reserved figures based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, a winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W shape suggesting the existence of a win (big win or small win) may be displayed on the display screen 7a, or even if it is not displayed at all, a performance is performed in which a performance button image imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a while the decorative pattern is changing, which is not shown. In this respect, it differs from the A mode. When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a seven-color image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and a "winning confirmation performance by the performance button" may be performed in which a character is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. This "win confirmation effect by effect button" is an effect that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur. The rainbow image is a special image and a background image that notifies the player that a win has been confirmed.

In this way, the win indication image ASG, which indicates the presence of a win in the win/loss information of the reserved icon 9B, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and then is displayed small in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the expansion movement of the win indication image ASG is repeated. As a result, the expansion movement of the win indication image ASG starts in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, which can arouse the player's anticipation of the occurrence of a win (big win or small win), thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, even if the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position 9Bd each display a white spherical hold icon, which has the lowest probability of winning (a big win or a small win), when the win indication image ASG starts to expand, a win confirmation effect can suddenly occur to inform the player that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur after the expansion movement ends, thereby building up the player's anticipation of a win (a big win or a small win).

As described above, the winning/losing notification shot effect C shown in FIG. 185 is an effect that is performed in common in three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes) of the presentation modes A, B, C, and D, excluding A, and therefore the display mode of the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG is a common display mode in the three presentation modes (multiple presentation modes). In contrast, the winning/losing notification shot effect D is an effect that is performed only in one presentation mode (single presentation mode) of A, and therefore the display mode of the expanding movement of the winning indication image ASG in the one presentation mode (single presentation mode) is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effectiveness of the winning/losing announcement promotion.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 183 (A) to Fig. 183 (I) of the winning/losing notification tailoring performance A, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) having a three-dimensional W-shape, which suggests the existence of a winning (including a winning) in the winning/losing information (pre-determination command) of the reserved icon 9A, is displayed in the center (predetermined position of the display means) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and after the first performance, a second performance is executed in which the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly changed (the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG is started). According to this configuration, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) suggesting the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly changed. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur as the win suggestion image ASG begins to oscillate in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, thereby increasing the player's interest.
In the winning/losing notification performance B in Fig. 184, a winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) suggesting the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the reserved icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly changed. This makes it possible to arouse the player's expectation that a winning (big winning or small winning) will occur by starting the expanding motion of the winning suggestion image ASG, thereby improving the interest.
In the winning/losing notification performance C of FIG. 185, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a winning (including a winning) in the winning/losing information (pre-determination command) of the reserved icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then displayed small (at a predetermined position of the display means) in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and after the first performance, a second performance is performed in which the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly changed (the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG is started). According to this configuration, a winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) suggesting the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the reserved icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then displayed small in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the win indication image ASG begins to oscillate in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which can heighten the player's sense of anticipation that a win (a big win or a small win) will occur, thereby increasing the player's interest.
In the winning/losing notification performance D in Fig. 186, a winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) suggesting the presence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the reserved icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then displayed small in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly changed. As a result, the expanding movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which can arouse the player's expectation that a winning (big winning or small winning) will occur, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning/losing notification shot effect A in FIG. 183 and the winning/losing notification shot effect B in FIG. 184, a player is provided with a shot effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player, and one of a plurality of types of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected by operating (pressing) the shot effect button 63 (operation means), and among the plurality of types of presentation modes (A mode), the display mode of the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second presentation in a specific presentation mode (A mode) (the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG in the winning/losing notification shot effect B in FIG. 184) is different from the display mode of the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second presentation in other presentation modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) excluding the specific presentation mode (A mode) (the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG in the winning/losing notification shot effect A in FIG. 183). According to this configuration, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second effect in other presentation modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) among the multiple types of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) is a common display mode that is used in common, whereas the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second effect in a specific presentation mode (A mode) is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode. As a result, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) can be a dedicated display mode only in a specific presentation mode among the multiple types of presentation modes, so that it can be provided to the player as a rare effect that rarely appears.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement indicator C in FIG. 185 and the winning/losing announcement indicator D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning/losing notification shot display A of FIG. 183 and the winning/losing notification shot display B of FIG. 184, the display mode of the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second display in a specific display mode (A mode) repeats an action of expanding in a predetermined direction and then returning to its original state as a specific action (the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG in the winning/losing notification shot display B of FIG. 184), and the display mode of the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second display in other display modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) repeats an action of rotating back and forth in a predetermined direction (swinging in small increments in a predetermined direction) as an action different from the specific action (the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG in the winning/losing notification shot display A of FIG. 183). According to this configuration, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) in a specific presentation mode (A mode) is a display mode in which the expanding movement (specific action) of the winning suggestion image ASG is repeated, so that the player can be given repeated opportunities to visually recognize the expanding movement (specific action) of the winning suggestion image ASG, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) in other presentation modes is a display mode in which the swinging movement (action different from the specific action) of the winning suggestion image ASG is repeated, so that the player can be given repeated opportunities to visually recognize the swinging movement (action different from the specific action) of the winning suggestion image ASG. This makes it easier for the player to check the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) in each selection mode.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement indicator C in FIG. 185 and the winning/losing announcement indicator D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in a specific presentation mode (A mode) in the winning/losing notification tilt presentation B of Figure 184, when the number of times the presentation button 63 (operation means) is operated reaches a predetermined number of times, a "winning confirmation presentation by presentation button" (third presentation) can be executed in which a rainbow image (specific image) announcing a winning confirmation is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and after the first presentation in which a winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the "winning confirmation presentation by presentation button" (third presentation) is prevented and the expansion movement of the winning indication image ASG (second presentation) is executed. According to this configuration, when a win indication image ASG (win/lose image) is displayed on the image display device 7 in a specific presentation mode (A mode), no matter how much the player operates (presses) the presentation button 63 (operation means), the "win confirmation presentation by presentation button" is not performed at all. Therefore, although this makes the player feel uneasy, the expansion movement (second presentation) of the win indication image ASG is executed, thereby stirring up the player's sense of anticipation that a win (big win or small win) will occur.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement promotional effect D in Figure 186.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning/losing notification performance A in Fig. 183, after the first performance in which the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the selection of one of the multiple types of performance modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by operating the performance button 63 (operation means) is prevented. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the change of the performance mode in the second performance in which the display mode of the winning/losing image is repeatedly changed, which is performed after the first performance.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement indicator B in Figure 184, the winning/losing announcement indicator C in Figure 185, and the winning/losing announcement indicator D in Figure 186.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning/losing notification shot effect A of Figure 183 and the winning/losing notification shot effect B of Figure 184, a fourth effect can be executed in which the winning/losing image changed by the second effect in a specific effect mode (A mode) in the winning/losing notification shot effect B of Figure 184, or the winning/losing image changed by the second effect in other effect modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) in the winning/losing notification shot effect A of Figure 183, is moved from a predetermined position on the image display device 7 (display means) to another position to change it to a winning notification display mode that notifies of a win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 183(H) of the winning/losing notification spurt performance A, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second performance in other performance modes (B mode (similar to C mode and D mode)) repeatedly performs a display mode in which it moves from the center (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (another position) while emitting a flash as a winning notification display mode, and pops out. As shown in FIG. 184(I) of the winning/losing notification spurt performance B, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is changed by the second performance in a specific performance mode (A mode) repeatedly performs a display mode in which it moves from the center (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (another position) while emitting a flash as a winning notification display mode, and pops out. With this configuration, the display mode can be set to a state in which a winning (big winning or small winning) has suddenly occurred, so that the player can feel a shock from the sudden display mode that notifies the winning (big winning or small winning).
In the winning/losing notification shot-style performance C of Figure 185 and the winning/losing notification shot-style performance D of Figure 186, as shown in Figures 185 (H) and 185 (I) of the winning/losing notification shot-style performance C, the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) which is changed by the second performance in other performance modes (B mode (similar to C mode and D mode)) repeatedly performs a winning notification display mode in which it jumps out from a rectangular area (first specified position) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and moves from the center (second specified position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (another position) while emitting a flash of light. As shown in Fig. 186(H) and Fig. 186(I) of the winning/losing notification spurt performance D, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) which is changed by the second performance in a specific performance mode (A mode) jumps out from a rectangular area (first predetermined position) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and repeats a display mode in which it jumps out while emitting a flash and moves from the center (second predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the player (another position). With this configuration, it is possible to make the display mode in which a winning (big winning or small winning) has suddenly occurred, so that the player can feel a shock from the sudden display mode that announces the winning (big winning or small winning).

[Modification]
Below, a modified example of the winning/losing announcement promotion is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the winning/losing notification prompt performance A of FIG. 183, the winning/losing notification prompt performance B of FIG. 184, the winning/losing notification prompt performance C of FIG. 185, and the winning/losing notification prompt performance D of FIG. 186, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) was repeatedly changed by the second performance. At this time, a period may be set in which the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) repeatedly changes its display mode while emitting a flash. Making the player constantly aware of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) may tire the player. In contrast, when the timing (time) for directing the gaze to the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) arrives, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) can repeatedly change its display mode while emitting a flash to suggest that to the player, so there is no need to constantly make the player aware of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image), and fatigue of the player can be suppressed.

[Modification 2]
In the winning/losing notification flash performance A in Fig. 183, the winning/losing notification flash performance B in Fig. 184, the winning/losing notification flash performance C in Fig. 185, and the winning/losing notification flash performance D in Fig. 186, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) changed by the second performance repeatedly moves from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front while emitting a flash as a winning notification display mode. However, even when a winning (big win or small win) is not notified, the display mode of moving from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front while emitting a flash and popping out may be performed once or multiple times (for example, 3 to 5 times) before returning to the original display mode. For example, in the winning/losing notification shot effect A of FIG. 183, the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 183(H) to FIG. 183(B) and the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG is resumed; in the winning/losing notification shot effect B of FIG. 184, the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 184(I) to FIG. 184(B) and the expanding movement of the winning indication image ASG is resumed; in the winning/losing notification shot effect C of FIG. 185, the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 185(I) to FIG. 185(D) and the swinging movement of the winning indication image ASG is resumed; and in the winning/losing notification shot effect D of FIG. 186, the winning indication image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 186(I) to FIG. 186(D) and the expanding movement of the winning indication image ASG is resumed. This makes the player think for a moment that it is a notice of a win (big win or small win).

[Modification 3]
In the winning/losing notification performance C of FIG. 185 and the winning/losing notification performance D of FIG. 186, when the variable display of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") starts, a selection section SEL that allows the selection of the performance mode is arranged and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, when the notification period in which the message MG "continue right hit" is displayed in FIG. 185(A) or FIG. 186(A) ends and the specific period begins, if there is a winning (big win or small win) in the reserved information (four reserved icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special pattern reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, the selection section SEL may be hidden so that the performance mode cannot be selected. When the winning/losing notification performance C of FIG. 185 and the winning/losing notification performance D of FIG. 186 are performed, the performance mode cannot be selected at all in the first place, so there is no problem in hiding the selection section SEL. In this case, only the currently selected presentation mode may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the winning/losing notification shot effect A of Fig. 183, the winning/losing notification shot effect B of Fig. 184, the winning/losing notification shot effect C of Fig. 185, and the winning/losing notification shot effect D of Fig. 186, one of the presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected by operating (pressing) the presentation button 63. However, the presentation button 63 may be replaced by the sword button 65 of the sword member 64. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the presentation button 63 can be achieved by operating (pressing or depressing) the sword button 65.

[Modification 5]
The winning/losing notification indicator A of Figure 183, the winning/losing notification indicator B of Figure 184, the winning/losing notification indicator C of Figure 185, and the winning/losing notification indicator D of Figure 186 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect J1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect of displaying a winning/losing image suggesting the presence of a winning ticket in the winning/losing information of the reserved icon;
After the first performance, a second performance is executed in which the display mode of the winning/losing image is repeatedly changed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-1,
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
A rendering mode can be selected from a plurality of rendering modes by operating the operating means;
Among the multiple types of presentation modes, a display mode of the winning/losing image changed by the second presentation in a specific presentation mode is different from a display mode of the winning/losing image changed by the second presentation in other presentation modes except the specific presentation mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2,
The display mode of the winning/losing image changed by the second performance in the specific performance mode repeats a specific action,
The display mode of the winning/losing image changed by the second performance in the other performance mode repeats an action different from the specific action.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect J1-2 or J1-3,
In the specific presentation mode, when the number of operations of the operation means reaches a predetermined number, a third presentation can be executed in which a specific image is displayed to notify a winning decision,
After the first performance, the third performance is blocked and the second performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects J1-2 to J1-4,
After the first performance, selection of one of the plurality of performance modes by operation of the operation means is prevented.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-5,
A fourth performance can be executed in which the winning/losing image, which is changed by the second performance in the specific performance mode, or the winning/losing image, which is changed by the second performance in the other performance mode, is changed from a predetermined position to another position to change to a winning notification display mode in which the winning/losing image is changed by the second performance in the other performance mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character selection effects A to D are explained below using Figures 187 to 190. These character selection effects can be executed during the performance of the changing effect of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the character selection effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Character selection presentation A]
Figure 187 is a diagram to explain character selection presentation A.
First, as shown in FIG. 187(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 187 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character appears who can become an opponent in the battle effect described below. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown with coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown with fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(E), an enemy character selection display is executed. An enemy character selection display is executed. The enemy character selection display is a display for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection display, information about the enemy characters CRB, CRC, CRD is displayed as an image in an area separate from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, CRD. Here, information images IB, IC, ID are displayed corresponding to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, CRD.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character, and a stamina information image IH indicating the stamina of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character by its display color. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRB is white. For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRC is blue (shown by coarse hatching). For example, the type information image IK relating to the enemy character CRD is red (shown by fine hatching).
The physical strength information image IH displays a bar extending from the left to the right. The longer this bar is, the greater the enemy character's physical strength is, indicating that it will be more difficult to win.

In the enemy character selection performance, the order of information images IB, IC, and ID is quickly swapped. In the figure, the order is information image IC, information image IB, and information image ID, but as time passes, the order becomes information image IB, information image ID, and information image IB, and as time passes further, the order becomes information image ID, information image IC, and information image IB, and this is repeated. The order is swapped by a so-called animation, with the top information image moving backwards and the second and third information images moving forward. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed larger than the other information images. After a certain amount of time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image that has stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that information image IC has stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(F), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is one in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection presentation, and a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. An information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and a presentation is performed in which the bar of the stamina information image IH decreases as the ally character CRA attacks. When the bar of the stamina information image IH reaches 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 187(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect to announce that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols are fixed and stop at a repeat number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection presentation B]
Figure 188 is a diagram to explain character selection presentation B.
First, as shown in FIG. 188(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 188 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character appears who can become an opponent in the battle effect described below. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown with coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown with fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(E), an enemy character selection display is executed. The enemy character selection display is a display for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection display, information about the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area separate from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character, and a stamina information image IH indicating the stamina of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character with its letter. For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRB is "B". Also, for example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRD is "D". Note that although an example of a single alphabetical character has been given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is possible to display that name.
The physical strength information image IH displays a bar extending from the left to the right. The longer this bar is, the greater the enemy character's physical strength is, indicating that it will be more difficult to win.

In the enemy character selection performance, the order of information images IB, IC, and ID is quickly swapped. In the figure, the order is information image IC, information image IB, and information image ID, but as time passes, the order becomes information image IB, information image ID, and information image IB, and as time passes further, the order becomes information image ID, information image IC, and information image IB, and this is repeated. The order is swapped by a so-called animation, with the top information image moving backwards and the second and third information images moving forward. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed larger than the other information images. After a certain amount of time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image that has stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that information image IC has stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (F), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is one in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection presentation, and a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. An information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and a presentation is performed in which the bar of the stamina information image IH decreases as the ally character CRA attacks. When the bar of the stamina information image IH reaches 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 188 (G), a victory effect is executed. The victory effect is an effect to announce that the ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop effect (win) is an effect in which the effect symbols are fixed and stop at a repeat number. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the center effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7".

[Character selection effect C]
Figure 189 is a diagram to explain character selection presentation C.
First, as shown in FIG. 189(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts changing. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 189 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character appears who can become an opponent in the battle effect described below. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown with coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown with fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(E), an enemy character selection display is executed. The enemy character selection display is a display for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection display, information about the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area separate from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed corresponding to each of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character, and a stamina information image IH indicating the stamina of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character with its letter. For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRB is "B". Also, for example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRD is "D". Note that although an example of a single alphabetical character has been given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is possible to display that name.
The physical strength information image IH displays five stars, and the more black stars there are, the greater the enemy character's physical strength is, indicating that it will be more difficult to win.

In the enemy character selection performance, the order of information images IB, IC, and ID is quickly swapped. In the figure, the order is information image IC, information image IB, and information image ID, but as time passes, the order becomes information image IB, information image ID, and information image IB, and as time passes further, the order becomes information image ID, information image IC, and information image IB, and this is repeated. The order is swapped by a so-called animation, with the top information image moving backwards and the second and third information images moving forward. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed larger than the other information images. After a certain amount of time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image that has stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that information image IC has stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(F), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection presentation, and a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. The information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 189(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect to notify the player that the friendly character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189(H), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols are fixed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the center effect symbol 8C is "8".

[Character selection effect D]
Figure 190 is a diagram to explain character selection presentation D.
First, as shown in FIG. 190(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C, and the right performance pattern 8R are shown starting to change. In addition, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the reserved image 9C corresponding to the change are displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 190 (B), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(C), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that announces the development from a normal reach to an SP reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance effect is an effect in which an enemy character appears who can become an opponent in the battle effect described below. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (shown with coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (shown with fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(E), an enemy character selection display is executed. The enemy character selection display is a display for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection display, information about the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as an image in an area separate from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, an information image IC corresponding to the enemy character CRC is displayed. An information image IB corresponding to the enemy character CRB and an information image ID corresponding to the enemy character CRD are not displayed.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character, and a stamina information image IH indicating the stamina of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character with its letter. For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRB is "B". Also, for example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK for the enemy character CRD is "D". Note that although an example of a single alphabetical character has been given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is possible to display that name.
The physical strength information image IH displays five stars, and the more black stars there are, the greater the enemy character's physical strength is, indicating that it will be more difficult to win.

In the enemy character selection presentation, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in sequence at high speed. In the figure, information image IC is displayed, but as time passes, information image IB is displayed, and as further time passes, information image ID is displayed, and this process is repeated. After a certain amount of time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent in the battle presentation. Here, the explanation will continue assuming that information image IC is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(F), a battle presentation is executed. The battle presentation is a presentation in which an ally character fights an enemy character, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time is the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection presentation, and a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. The information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 190(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat effect is an effect to notify the player that the friendly character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the word "Defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190(H), a fixed stop effect (miss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (miss) is an effect in which the effect symbols are fixed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "7", and the center effect symbol 8C is "8".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the character selection effects:
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy character appearance effect displays the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD who will be the opponents in the battle effect (Fig. 187(D), Fig. 188(D), Fig. 189(D), Fig. 190(D)). Then, the enemy character selection effect displays the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, and the enemy character who will be the opponent is selected by selecting the information image IB, IC, or ID (Fig. 187(E), Fig. 188(E), Fig. 189(E), Fig. 190(E)). With this configuration, the selection of the enemy character becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and a stamina information image IH indicating the stamina of the enemy character (Fig. 187(F), Fig. 188(F), Fig. 189(F), Fig. 190(F)). With this configuration, the selection of an opponent becomes more interesting, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed, and after a certain time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance (Fig. 187(E), Fig. 188(E), Fig. 189(E)). Alternatively, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed, and after a certain time has passed, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent in the battle performance (Fig. 190(E)). With this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes more interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include a stamina information image IH showing the stamina of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIGS. 187(E), 188(E), 189(E), and 190(E)). This configuration makes it more interesting to select an opponent, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include type information images IK that can identify enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIGS. 187(E), 188(E), 189(E), and 190(E)). This configuration makes it more interesting to select an opponent, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the character selection presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, the information images IB, IC, and ID each include two pieces of information, the type information image IK and the physical strength information image IH. However, the information images IB, IC, and ID may each include three or more pieces of information.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, an enemy character to be played against is selected from among the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, but the present invention is not limited to this example. It is sufficient if the selection target can be selected by selecting information about the selection target, and for example, it may be an example in which one is selected from a plurality of types of mini-games.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, the information images IB, IC, and ID are automatically selected. However, the information images IB, IC, and ID may be selected by the player pressing the effect button 63, for example.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect J2-1]
A gaming machine,
A performance for selecting one of a plurality of selection targets is performed by displaying the selection targets and displaying target information, which is information related to the selection targets, in an area separate from a display area of the selection targets, and a selection performance in which the selection target is selected by selecting the target information is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-1,
The target information is displayed as an information image representing a plurality of pieces of information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-2,
the information images as the target information are sequentially displayed, and then one information image is selected to select the selection target;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects J2-1 to J2-3,
The selection target is an opponent character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4,
The information image includes a graph image indicating the difficulty level of the character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect J2-4 or aspect J2-5,
The information image includes an image that identifies the character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, starting gate light-emitting effects A to D are explained using Figures 191 to 194. In Figures 191 to 194, some of the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing, and the first movable reels 14 and second movable reels 15 arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have also been omitted for ease of viewing.

This start port light-emitting effect is executed during the decorative pattern change performance (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern starts to change to when it stops changing). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a change performance start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the start port light-emitting effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a change performance start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and changes the light-emitting state of the first start port 20. In addition, the audio control board 106 analyzes various commands (for example, a change performance start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90 and executes an audio performance that outputs various sounds from the speaker 67.

The first starting hole 20 has a first starting hole decorative board mounted with one or more full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multiple colors mounted therein, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The first starting hole 20 emits light when the full-color LEDs mounted on the first starting hole decorative board emit light. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LEDs mounted on the first starting hole decorative board are controlled to light in white, causing the first starting hole 20 to emit light in white. Furthermore, even during the big win performance or demo performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LEDs mounted on the first starting hole decorative board are controlled to light in white, causing the first starting hole 20 to emit light in white.

The inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 is specially plated, and a full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is illuminated, allowing light to pass through the front surface of the first starting hole 20. The type with this specification is referred to as the special plating specification, and the normal type without this special plating specification is referred to as the normal specification and will be described below. The first starting hole 20 in both the special plating specification and the normal specification is molded from colored or colorless transparent resin, and is shaped in a way that is not shown. The first starting hole 20 in both the special plating specification and the normal specification is molded from colored or colorless transparent resin, but the surface may be shaped as a smooth surface (flat or curved).

In the special plating specification, a decorative member with a smiley face printed on its surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "decorative member shape (smiley face shape)") is placed in front of the decorative board for the first starting hole on the inside of the front of the first starting hole, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is illuminated, the shape of the decorative member (smiley face shape) placed inside the first starting hole 20 is visible through the front of the first starting hole 20, while when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is turned off, the shape of the decorative member (smiley face shape) placed inside the first starting hole 20 is difficult to see through the front of the first starting hole 20, and the color of the special plating (e.g., silver) is visible through the front of the first starting hole 20.

In the special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is turned off, and further, in the jackpot performance and the demo performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is turned off, and the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) is difficult to see through the front of the first starting hole 20. In the jackpot performance, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board may be illuminated, and the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) may be visible through the front of the first starting hole 20.

Here, we will first explain starting port light-emitting effect A, starting port light-emitting effect B, and starting port light-emitting effect C as the light-emitting effects of the first starting port 20 in the standard specification, and then explain starting port light-emitting effect D as the light-emitting effect of the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification.

[Starting Gate Lighting A]
First, the start gate light emitting performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 191. Fig. 191 is a diagram for explaining the start gate light emitting performance A. The start gate light emitting performance A is performed during the change of the decorative pattern from the start of the change to the end of the change.

In the start-up light-emitting performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 191(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed at each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 191(A) starts to change and no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 at the start of the change, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole 20 is controlled to light in white, as shown in FIG. 191(B), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to light in white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

After the start of the fluctuation (i.e., after the start of the fluctuation), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (C), a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stocked without being consumed, resulting in a full reserved state. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is already controlled to be lit in white and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is lit in white, in order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. 191 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then controlled to be lit in white again. As a result, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole becomes a light-emitting state in which it flashes white once, and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 becomes a state in which it flashes white once. At this time, a reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is played from the speaker 67 to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (reserved sound is turned ON).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, as shown in Fig. 191 (E), the reserved state is already full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad shown in Fig. 191 (C) do not change from the state in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed. Also, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the reserved state is full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the number of reserved balls does not increase, so as shown in Fig. 191 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be lit in white, and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in white. At this time, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, so the number of reserved balls does not increase, and therefore there is no need to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in Figure 191 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "1" and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not displayed as aligned and a miss is confirmed. Then, the fluctuation ends and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of this fluctuation, the reserved balls are already full, so as shown in FIG. 191 (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to remain lit in white, so that the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in white light, and because no game balls have entered the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (I), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, causing the hold icon at the fourth hold display position 9Ad to disappear. The decorative pattern begins to change, and if no game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 191 (J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light up in white, causing the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 to light up in white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

In this way, in starting hole light-emitting performance A, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light in white, causing the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 to light in white, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then controlled to light in white again, causing the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole to flash white once, causing the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 to flash white once. In contrast, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light in white, causing the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 to light in white and the reserved balls to be full, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, so the reserved balls do not increase. Therefore, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is not controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) but is controlled to remain lit in white, and the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 does not flash white once but remains lit in white.

As a result, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 can be changed from a white light on to an off state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then controlled to a white light on state again, where the light emission mode flashes white once, and when the number of reserved balls does not increase, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 can be maintained as a white light on, so that the presence or absence of an increase in reserved balls can be visually appealed to, thereby enhancing interest.

In addition, in the starting hole light-emitting effect A, by combining a visual effect of making the first starting hole 20 light-emitting in a flashing white state with an auditory effect of playing a "whoosh" sound effect from the speaker 67, it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of informing them of an increase in the number of reserved balls.

[Starting Gate Illumination Performance B]
Next, the start gate light emitting performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 192. Fig. 192 is a diagram for explaining the start gate light emitting performance B. The start gate light emitting performance B is performed during the change of the decorative pattern from the start of the change to the end of the change.

In the start-up light-emitting performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 192(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image, and the decorative patterns displayed as still are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. As the decorative patterns displayed as still are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing in speed from a low speed, changing at high speed, the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed.

Then, just before stopping, it slows down and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned and are displayed as stopped, indicating a miss. As a result, the variation ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The reserved icons corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the change as the first special reserved is consumed are displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icons 9A can be displayed at four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 192(A), the change has ended and the hold icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the fluctuation in Fig. 192(A) ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 at the end of such fluctuation, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole 20 is controlled to light in white, as shown in Fig. 192(B), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to light in white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned OFF). In addition, when the fluctuation in FIG. 192(A) ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the end of such fluctuation, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 in the starting hole light emission performance A shown in FIG. 191(D) will flash white once, and a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "whoosh", will be played from the speaker 67 to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (the reserved sound will be turned ON).

Next, as shown in FIG. 192(C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icons at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad disappear, and the decorative pattern When the fluctuation starts, regardless of whether or not a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to change from white to yellow (gold) so as to be the same color as the color of the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9C, that is, in conjunction with the color of the reserved icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 192 (D), so that the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 changes from white to yellow (gold). If a game ball does not enter the first starting hole 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

After the fluctuation has started (i.e. after the fluctuation has started), when game balls enter the first starting hole 20 one by one in succession (i.e. when two game balls enter the first starting hole 20 one by one in succession), as shown in FIG. 192 (E), a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad, and a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad, and the four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed, resulting in a full reserve state. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole has already been controlled to light up in yellow (gold), and the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 is in a yellow (gold) state, no control is performed to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. 192 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to keep lighting up in yellow (gold), so that the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a yellow (gold) state, and furthermore, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

As for the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20, as explained in the starting hole light-emitting performance A in FIG. 191, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole flashes once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191 (C) and (D)), causing the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 to flash once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191 (C) and (D)), and further, a reserved sound effect of "whoosh" is played from the speaker 67. However, in starting gate light-emitting performance B, unlike starting gate light-emitting performance A, as shown in FIG. 192(F), the full-color LED mounted on the first starting gate decorative board is controlled to remain lit in yellow (lit in gold) without flashing yellow (flashing in gold), so that the light-emitting state of the first starting gate 20 is maintained in a yellow (lit in gold) state, and further, the hold sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from speaker 67 (hold sound is turned OFF).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. 192(G), the reserved state is already full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 192(E) do not change from the state in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed. Also, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the reserved state is full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the number of reserved balls does not increase, so as shown in FIG. 192(H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold), and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in yellow (gold). At this time, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, so the number of reserved balls does not increase, and therefore there is no need to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 192(I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned and stopped and a miss is confirmed. Then, the change ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad each remain in a state where a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed. At the end of such a change, as shown in FIG. 192(J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, and the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, the reserved balls are already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

In this way, in starting hole light-emitting performance B, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light yellow (gold), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to light yellow (gold), even if the number of reserved balls increases due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20, no control is performed to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to remain lit yellow (gold), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to remain lit yellow (gold), and furthermore, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

As a result, when the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and has changed to a state in which it is lit in yellow (gold lighting), even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the maintained light emission mode of the first starting hole 20, that is, yellow lighting (gold lighting), can contribute to the performance as an additional light emission performance, thereby increasing the interest.

In addition, in the start port light-emitting performance B, when a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, which has the highest expectation of winning, is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd, no control is performed to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 (in other words, the control to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 is prevented), and the light-emitting state of the first start port 20 can be maintained in a yellow (gold) state. Therefore, the light-emitting state of the first start port 20 maintained in a yellow (gold) state can contribute as an additional light-emitting performance to the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the reserved sound from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a.

[Starting Gate Illumination Effects C]
Next, the start opening light emitting performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 193. Fig. 193 is a diagram for explaining the start opening light emitting performance C. The start opening light emitting performance C is performed during the change of the decorative pattern from the start of the change to the end of the change.

In the start-up light-emitting performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 193(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image. When the display of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image located behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed at each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern in Fig. 193(A) starts to change and no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 at the start of the change, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole 20 is controlled to light in white, as shown in Fig. 193(B), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to light in white. At this time, since no game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). In addition, when the decorative pattern in FIG. 193(A) starts to change, and a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the start of the change, the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 in the starting hole light emission performance A shown in FIG. 191(D) flashes white once, and a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "whoosh", is played from the speaker 67 to notify that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 and the reserved balls have increased (the reserved sound is turned ON).

After the fluctuation starts (i.e., after the fluctuation starts), as shown in FIG. 193(C), when the white spherical reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 193(D), the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is controlled from white to yellow (gold) so as to be the same color as the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9C, that is, in conjunction with the color of the reserved icon 9C, so that the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 changes from white to yellow (gold). If no game ball enters the first starting hole 20 after the fluctuation starts, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 before the white spherical reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd in FIG. 193(C) changes to a star-shaped reserved icon 9C, the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 in the starting hole light-emitting performance A shown in FIG. 191(D) will flash white once, and a reserved sound effect of "whoosh" will be played from the speaker 67 to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (the reserved sound will be turned ON).

When the reserved icon 9C changes to a reserved state (i.e., after the reserved state is changed) and a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. 193 (E), a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the four reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed, resulting in a full reserved state. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole has already been controlled to light up in yellow (gold), and the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 is in a yellow (gold) state, no control is performed to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. 193 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to keep lighting up in yellow (gold), so that the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a yellow (gold) state, and furthermore, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

As for the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20, as explained in the starting hole light-emitting performance A in FIG. 191, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole flashes once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191 (C) and (D)), causing the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 to flash once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191 (C) and (D)), and further, a reserved sound effect of "whoosh" is played from the speaker 67. (The hold sound is turned ON). However, in starting hole light-emitting performance C, unlike starting hole light-emitting performance A, as shown in FIG. 193(F), the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is controlled to remain lit in yellow (lit in gold) without flashing yellow (flashing in gold), so that the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a yellow (lit in gold) state, and furthermore, the hold sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned OFF).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. 193(G), the reserved state is already full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 193(E) do not change from the state in which the white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed. Also, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the reserved state is full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the number of reserved balls does not increase, so as shown in FIG. 193(H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be lit in yellow (gold), and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in yellow (gold). At this time, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, so the number of reserved balls does not increase, and therefore there is no need to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 193(I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned and stopped and a miss is confirmed. Then, the change ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad each remain in a state where a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed. At the end of such a change, as shown in FIG. 193(J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting, and the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the fluctuation, the reserved balls are already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

In this way, in starting hole light-emitting performance C, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light yellow (gold), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to light yellow (gold), even if the number of reserved balls increases due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20, no control is performed to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to remain lit yellow (gold), causing the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 to remain lit yellow (gold), and furthermore, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

As a result, when the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) and has changed to a state in which it is lit in yellow (gold lighting), even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold lighting), so that the maintained light emission mode of the first starting hole 20, that is, yellow lighting (gold lighting), can contribute to the performance as an additional light emission performance, thereby increasing the interest.

In addition, in the start port light-emitting performance C, when the white spherical reserved icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon with the highest expectation of winning, no control is performed to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 (in other words, control to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first start port 20 is prevented), and the light-emitting state of the first start port 20 can be maintained in a yellow (gold) state. Therefore, the light-emitting state of the first start port 20 maintained in a yellow (gold) state can contribute as an additional light-emitting performance to the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent the reserved sound from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a.

[Starting Gate Illumination Performance D]
Next, the start opening light emitting performance D will be described with reference to Fig. 194. Fig. 194 is a diagram for explaining the start opening light emitting performance D. The start opening light emitting performance D is performed during the change of the decorative pattern from the start of the change to the end of the change.

In the start-up light-emitting performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 194(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts displaying the decorative patterns (numbers "1" to "9") in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image, and the decorative patterns displayed as still are gradually increased in speed from a low speed to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed. The decorative patterns displayed as still are gradually increased in speed from a low speed to a semi-transparent state, changing at high speed, and the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns can be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed.

Then, just before stopping, it slows down and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

In this case, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same patterns are not displayed as they are stopped, and a miss is confirmed. As a result, the change ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The reserved icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the change as the first special reserved is consumed is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd, a reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved. In this reserved display area, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed at each of the four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reserved icons 9A can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the reserved display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

When the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the size of the reserved icon 9C becomes about 1.5 times the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, and the shape and color of the reserved icon 9C indicate to the player the expected probability of a win for the reserved icon 9C. In contrast, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad moves to the third reserved display position 9Ad, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad moves to the second reserved display position 9Ad, or when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad moves to the first reserved display position 9Ad, the size of each reserved icon 9A is the same as the size of the reserved icon 9A immediately before the movement, except when the shape of the reserved icon 9A changes to another shape.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 194(A), the change has ended and the reserved icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a at the reserved display position 9Cd, a green smiling sphere reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad, and because only one game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 at the end of the change, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, the three reserved icons 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed.

Here, briefly, the reserved icons 9A and 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "reserved icons") represent different expectations of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the reserved icon, depending on the difference in shape and color. For example, of the four reserved icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon, the black spherical reserved icon, the smiling spherical reserved icon, and the white spherical reserved icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical reserved icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical reserved icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical reserved icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical reserved icon, the expectation of winning is further set to be high in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the fluctuation in FIG. 194(A) ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 194(B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be kept off, which is the normal light-emitting mode, and the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 prevents light from passing through the front surface of the first starting hole 20, and the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 becomes the color of the special plating (for example, silver), which is the normal light-emitting mode. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 prevents light from passing through the front surface of the first starting hole 20, and the shape (smile shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 as the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 becomes difficult to see, and the smile shape becomes invisible. In other words, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is maintained in its normal light-emitting mode, the smiling face sculpture will remain hidden.

At this time (i.e., when the fluctuation in FIG. 194(A) ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 194(B)), a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "whoosh", is played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned ON) to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20.

Next, as shown in FIG. 194(C), the green smiling sphere reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the reserve display position 9Cd and becomes the reserve icon 9C. The reserve icon 9C may be the same green color as the smiling sphere reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad, or may change to another color with high expectations (e.g., red or rainbow). When the smiley face sphere-shaped hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icons at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad disappear.As shown in FIG. 194 (D), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light up in the same color as the smiley face sphere-shaped hold icon 9C, so that the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting hole 20, and the shape (smiley face shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 appears illuminated in the same color as the hold icon 9C, as the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 allows light to shine through the front surface of the first starting hole 20, making the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (the smiling face shape) easily visible as the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20, and the smiling face shape is displayed. In other words, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to light up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C of the smiling face sphere, the smiling face shape will remain displayed.

At this time (i.e., as shown in FIG. 194(C), the smiling sphere reserve icon 9A displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad moves to the reserve display position 9Cd and becomes the reserve icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 194(D)), if no game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the number of reserved balls will not increase, and the reserve sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", will not be played from the speaker 67 (the reserve sound will be turned OFF).

After the fluctuation has started (i.e. after the fluctuation has started), when game balls enter the first starting hole 20 one by one in succession (i.e. when two game balls enter the first starting hole 20 one by one in succession), as shown in FIG. 194 (E), a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad, and a white spherical reserve icon 9A is displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad, and the four reserve icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed, resulting in a full reserve state. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole 20 is already controlled to light up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, and the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting hole 20, causing the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) to appear lit in the same color as the reserved icon 9C as the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) is easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C), but a notification is made that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. No control is performed at all, and as shown in FIG. 194 (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained such that the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) appears lit in the same color as the hold icon 9C (i.e., the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C), and further, the hold sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As explained in starting hole light-emitting performance A of FIG. 191, the control for notifying that the number of reserved balls has increased due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is such that the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole flashes once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191(C) and (D)), causing the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 to flash once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191(C) and (D)), and further a reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is played from the speaker 67 (reserved sound is turned ON). However, in starting hole light-emitting performance D, unlike starting hole light-emitting performance A, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole flashes once in a predetermined color (white flashing in FIG. 191(C) and (D)). As shown in FIG. F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, so that the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained such that the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) appears lit in the same color as the hold icon 9C (i.e., the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C), and further, the hold sound, which is the "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

Thereafter, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, as shown in FIG. 194 (G), the reserve is already full, so there is no reserve display position to display a reserve icon, and the white spherical reserve icon 9A remains displayed at the first reserve display position 9Ad, the second reserve display position 9Ad, the third reserve display position 9Ad and the fourth reserve display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 194 (E). Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the reserved balls are full, so there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, and the number of reserved balls does not increase. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole is controlled to be maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, and the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting hole 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting hole 20, so that the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) appears illuminated in the same color as the reserved icon 9C as the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) is easily visible, and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C).

At this time (i.e., in FIG. 194(G) the reserved balls are already full), even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, there is no reserved display position to display the reserved ball icon, so the number of reserved balls does not increase, and so there is no need to notify the player that the number of reserved balls has increased, and the reserved ball sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved ball sound is turned off).

When the color of the hold icon 9C changes to another color with a higher expectation after the fluctuation starts, the color of the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting hole also changes to match the color of the hold icon 9C and becomes the same color as the changed color of the hold icon 9C, and as the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20, the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) changes to the same color as the hold icon 9C and appears lit up. In other words, the shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 194(I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and when the same patterns are not aligned and stopped and a miss is confirmed, the change ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad each remain in a state where a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed. At the end of such a change, as shown in FIG. 194(J), the full-color LED mounted on the first start hole decorative board is controlled to be turned off, which is the normal light-emitting mode, and the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first start hole 20 prevents light from passing through the front surface of the first start hole 20, and the light-emitting mode of the first start hole 20 becomes the color of the special plating (e.g., silver), which is the normal light-emitting mode, and the smiling face shape becomes invisible. At the end of the fluctuation, the reserved balls are already full, so even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the number of reserved balls does not increase, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

In this way, in the starting hole light-emitting performance D, when the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is controlled to be the same color as the reserved icon 9C, the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) is easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, even if the reserved balls increase due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20, no control is performed to notify the increase in reserved balls due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is controlled to be maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) is easily visible and the smiling face shape is maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, and further, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect "whoosh", is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off).

As a result, when the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 has changed from a non-display state to a light emission mode in which the smiling face shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 appears lit up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a light emission mode in which the smiling face shape arranged inside the first starting hole 20 appears lit up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, so that the maintained light emission mode of the first starting hole 20, in which the smiling face shape arranged inside the first starting hole 20 appears lit up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, can contribute to the presentation as an additional light emission presentation, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, in the starting hole light-emitting performance D, when the shape (smiling face shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, no control is performed to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (in other words, the control to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 is prevented), and the shape (smiling face shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C. Therefore, the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 in which the smiling face shape is maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C can contribute as an additional light-emitting performance to the performance unfolding on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, because the on-hold sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67, the on-hold sound does not interfere with the sound effects or music played in connection with the performance being played on the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the starting gate lighting.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 191(A) to 191(J) of the starting port light-emitting performance A, it has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive a game ball, and based on the game ball entering (being received by) the first starting port 20 (receiving port), it is possible to execute a first performance in which the light-emitting state of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed (in Figures 191(A) to 191(D), the light is controlled from a white light on to an off state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and then controlled to a white light on again, flashing white once), and a second performance in Figures 191(E) to 191(F) in which the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light-emitting state (white light on) of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) can be maintained. According to this configuration, when a game ball enters (is accepted by) the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 can be changed from a white light on to an off state for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then controlled to a white light on state again, whereby the light emission mode flashes white once; and when the number of reserved balls does not increase, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 can be maintained as a white light on, so that the presence or absence of an increase in reserved balls can be visually indicated, thereby increasing interest.
In starting port light-emitting performance B of Figures 192 (A) to 192 (J), there is a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive a game ball, and a first performance can be executed in which the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed based on the game ball entering (being accepted) the first starting port 20 (receiving port) (in Figures 192 (A) to 192 (D) the light-emitting mode is controlled from white light to yellow light (gold light) and lights up yellow (gold light)), and in Figures 192 (E) to 192 (H) the execution of the first performance can be prevented and the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) can be maintained (yellow light (gold light)). According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is controlled from white light to yellow light (gold light) and has changed to a state in which it is lit in yellow (gold light), even if a game ball enters (is accepted by) the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in yellow light (gold light), so that this maintained light emission mode of the first starting hole 20, that is, yellow light (gold light), can contribute to the presentation as an additional light emission presentation, thereby increasing interest.
In starting port light-emitting performance C of Figures 193 (A) to 193 (J), there is a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive a game ball, and a first performance can be executed in which the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed based on the game ball entering (being accepted) the first starting port 20 (receiving port) (in Figures 193 (A) to 193 (D), the light is controlled from white light to yellow light (gold light) and lights up yellow (gold light)), and in Figures 193 (E) to 193 (H), the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) (yellow light (gold light)) can be maintained. According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is controlled from white light to yellow light (gold light) and has changed to a state in which it is lit in yellow (gold light), even if a game ball enters (is accepted by) the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in yellow light (gold light), so that this maintained light emission mode of the first starting hole 20, that is, yellow light (gold light), can contribute to the presentation as an additional light emission presentation, thereby increasing interest.
In the starting port light-emitting performance D of Figures 194(A) to 194(J), there is a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive a game ball, and based on the game ball entering (being received by) the first starting port 20 (receiving port), a first performance can be executed in which the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed (in Figures 194(A) to 194(D), the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smiling face shape) becomes difficult to see and the smiling face shape goes from a hidden state to a state in which the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) appears emitting light in the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C), and a second performance can be executed in Figures 194(E) to 194(H) in which the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) can be maintained (a light-emitting state in which the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smiling face shape) appears emitting light in the same color as the reserved icon 9C). According to this configuration, when the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 has changed from a hidden state to a light-emitting mode in which the smiling face shape of the decorative member placed inside the first starting hole 20 appears illuminated in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, even if a game ball enters (is accepted) the first starting hole 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a light-emitting mode in which the smiling face shape placed inside the first starting hole 20 appears illuminated in the same color as the reserved icon 9C. Therefore, this maintained light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20, in which the smiling face shape placed inside the first starting hole 20 appears illuminated in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, can contribute to the presentation as an additional light-emitting presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 191 (A) to Fig. 191 (J) of the start port light-emitting performance A, the second performance allows the execution of the first performance until the number of reserved icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4), while preventing the execution of the first performance after the number of reserved icons 9A reaches the predetermined number (4). Specifically, in Fig. 191 (A) to Fig. 191 (D), the light-emitting mode of the first start port 20 (receiving port) can be changed (the light-emitting mode is changed from white light-on to off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), controlled to white light-on again, and blinks white once) until the number of reserved icons 9A reaches the predetermined number (4), while in Fig. 191 (E) to Fig. 191 (H), the light-emitting mode (white light-on) of the first start port 20 (receiving port) can be maintained after the number of reserved icons 9A reaches the predetermined number (4). With this configuration, the fact that the number of reserved icons 9A has reached a predetermined number (four) can be communicated to the player not only by the reserved icons 9A that have reached the predetermined number, but also by utilizing the lighting state of the first starting hole 20.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 192 (A) to 192 (J) of the starting port light-emitting performance B, in the second performance, a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon 9A (specific reserve icon), which has a higher expected probability of winning compared to the white spherical reserve icon 9A, becomes the reserve icon 9C, allowing the execution of the first performance and changing the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) to a specific light-emitting mode (from white light to yellow light (gold light)), and then preventing the execution of the first performance and maintaining the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) as yellow light ((gold light) (specific light-emitting mode)). Specifically, in Fig. 192(A) to Fig. 192(D), a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon 9A, which has a higher expected probability of winning compared to a white spherical reserve icon 9A, becomes the reserved icon 9C, and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole) is changed from white to yellow (gold), and then in Fig. 192(E) to Fig. 192(H), the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole) (yellow (gold)) is maintained. With this configuration, the state in which the expected probability of winning is high can be suggested to the player by the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole).
In the starting port light-emitting performance D of FIG. 194, the second performance allows the execution of the first performance by changing the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) to a specific light-emitting mode (after the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 becomes difficult to see and the smiling face shape changes from an invisible state to a state in which the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) appears lit up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C), and then prevents the execution of the first performance and maintains the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) in a light-emitting state (specific light-emitting mode) in which the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 appears lit up in the same color as the reserved icon 9C). Specifically, in Figures 194 (A) to 194 (D), the smiling spherical reserve icon 9A, which has a higher expected probability of winning compared to the white spherical reserve icon 9A, becomes the reserve icon 9C, and the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed from a state in which the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 is difficult to see and the smiling face shape is hidden to a state in which the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) appears illuminated in the same color as the reserve icon 9C, and then in Figures 194 (E) to 194 (H), the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is maintained (a light-emitting state in which the shape of the decorative member (smiling face shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 appears illuminated in the same color as the reserve icon 9C). With this configuration, the player can be informed that the likelihood of a win is increasing by the lighting pattern in which the decorative member's shape (smiling face shape) glows in the same color as the reserved icon 9C.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 193 (A) to 193 (J) of the starting port light-emitting performance C, the second performance allows the execution of the first performance when the reserved icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9C (a specific reserved icon), and after the first performance changes the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) to a specific light-emitting mode (from white light to yellow light (gold light)), the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is maintained as yellow light ((gold light) (specific light-emitting mode)). Specifically, in Fig. 193(A) to Fig. 193(D), the pattern change (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) of the white spherical reserved icon 9C is started, and when the white spherical reserved icon 9C changes to a star-shaped reserved icon 9C with a higher expected winning probability than the white spherical reserved icon 9A, the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole) is changed from white light to yellow light (gold light), and then in Fig. 193(E) to Fig. 193(H), the execution of the first performance is prevented and the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole) (yellow light (gold light)) is maintained. With this configuration, the light emission state of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole) can suggest to the player that the expected winning probability is high.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 191(A) to Fig. 191(J) of the starting hole light-emitting performance A, the first performance can further execute the output of a reserved sound (permissible sound) based on the game ball entering (being accepted) the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole), and the second performance further allows the output of the reserved sound (permissible sound) when the first performance is permitted, while preventing the output of the reserved sound (permissible sound) when the first performance is prevented. Specifically, in Fig. 191(C) to Fig. 191(D), in order to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, a reserved sound, which is a sound effect of "whoosh", is played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned ON). 191(E) to 191(H), even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, there is no reserved display position to display the reserved icon, so the reserved balls do not increase, and so there is no need to notify the player that the reserved balls have increased, and the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, does not play from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned off). With this configuration, the increase in reserved balls can be communicated to the player by combining a visual presentation in which the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 flashes white when a game ball enters (is accepted by) the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole), and an auditory presentation in which the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, plays from the speaker 67.
In the starting hole light-emitting performance B of Fig. 192(A) to Fig. 192(J), for example, when the fluctuation ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a in Fig. 192(A) to Fig. 192(B), if a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 at the end of such fluctuation, a reserved sound effect of "Shhh" is played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned ON). On the other hand, in Fig. 192(C) to Fig. 192(H), when a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd, no control is performed to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the reserved sound effect of "Shhh" is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned OFF). According to this configuration, when a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon, which has the highest expectation of a win, is displayed at the reserve display position 9Cd, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a yellow (gold) light-up state, which contributes to an additional light-emitting effect in the presentation, and by not playing the reserve sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent it from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the presentation.
In the start hole light-emitting performance C of Fig. 193(A) to Fig. 193(J), for example, in Fig. 193(A) to Fig. 193(D), when the decorative pattern starts to change and a game ball enters the first start hole 20 at the start of the change, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20 before the white spherical reserved icon 9C displayed at the reserved display position 9Cd changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9C, a reserved sound effect of "Shup" is played from the speaker 67 (reserved sound is turned ON). On the other hand, in Fig. 193(C) to Fig. 193(H), when the white spherical reserved icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon with the highest expectation of winning, no control is performed to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and the reserved sound effect of "Shup" is not played from the speaker 67 (reserved sound is turned OFF). According to this configuration, when the white spherical reserve icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon which has the highest expectation of a win, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20, and the light-emitting state of the first starting hole 20 is maintained in a yellow (gold) light state, which contributes to an additional light-emitting effect in the performance, and by not playing the reserve sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent it from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the performance.
In the start hole light-emitting performance D of Fig. 194(A) to Fig. 194(J), when the change ends and the reserved icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a in Fig. 194(A) to Fig. 194(B), if a game ball enters the first start hole 20 at the end of such change, a reserved sound effect of "Shhh" is played from the speaker 67 to notify that the reserved balls have increased (the reserved sound is turned ON). On the other hand, in Fig. 194(C) to Fig. 194(H), when the shape (smiley face shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first start hole 20 is easily visible and the smiley face shape is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, no control is performed to notify that the reserved balls have increased due to the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and the reserved sound effect of "Shhh" is not played from the speaker 67 (the reserved sound is turned OFF). According to this configuration, when the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is displayed in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to a game ball entering the first starting hole 20 (and since the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 (smiling face shape) becomes easily visible and the smiling face shape is maintained in the same color as the reserved icon 9C, it can contribute to the performance as an additional light-emitting performance, and by not playing the reserved sound, which is a "whoosh" sound effect, from the speaker 67, it can be prevented from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the performance.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the starting gate lighting effects.
[Modification 1]
In the starting hole light-emitting performance B in FIG. 192(C) to FIG. 192(H), the starting hole light-emitting performance C in FIG. 193(C) to FIG. 193(H), and the starting hole light-emitting performance D in FIG. 194(C) to FIG. 194(H), even if the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of "Shh-po", is not played from the speaker 67. However, the reserved sound, which is the sound effect of "Shh-po", may be played from the speaker 67. In this case, it is preferable that the volume of the reserved sound is adjusted to a level that does not interfere with the sound effects and music played in connection with the performance, for example, 50% to 90% of the volume of the sound effects and music played in connection with the performance.

[Modification 2]
In the start port light-emitting performance B of Fig. 192 (A) to Fig. 192 (H), the color of the reserved icon 9A that can be displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad in Fig. 192 (A) does not change when the reserved icon 9A shifts each time it is consumed, but it may change to a color that increases the expectation of winning (for example, from white to blue, or from white to green). In this case, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the color of the first start port 20 becomes the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C.

[Modification 3]
In the start hole light-emitting performance C of Fig. 193(A) to Fig. 193(H), when the white spherical reserved icon 9C in Fig. 192(A) to Fig. 192(D) is changed to a yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon with the highest probability of winning, the light-emitting mode of the first start hole 20 changes from white to yellow (gold), but it may also change from yellow (gold) to seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). In this case, the light-emitting mode of the first start hole 20 changes from yellow (gold) to seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)), and the color of the first start hole 20 becomes the same color as the color of the reserved icon 9C.

[Modification 4]
In the starting gate light-emitting performance A in Fig. 191, the starting gate light-emitting performance B in Fig. 192, the starting gate light-emitting performance C in Fig. 193, and the starting gate light-emitting performance D in Fig. 194, when a game ball enters the first starting gate 20, the light-emitting mode of the first starting gate 20 is changed, but this can also be applied to the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. In this case, a decorative board on which a single or multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (not shown) are mounted is disposed inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The full-color LEDs mounted on these decorative boards emit light, causing the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 to emit light. When the first starting port 20 is of standard specification, when power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to light up in white, causing the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 to light up in white, and further, even in the jackpot performance and the demo performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to light up in white, causing the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 to light up in white.

On the other hand, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29 is a specially plated specification, a decorative member is further arranged in front of the decorative substrate on the inside of the front surface of the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate is illuminated, the light emitted from the full-color LED is transmitted through the front surface of the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29 to the inside of the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29. On the other hand, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off, the shape (smiling face shape) of the decorative member placed inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29 is difficult to see through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29, and the color of the special plating (e.g., silver) is visible through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29. In addition, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are specially plated, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and further, in the big win performance and the demo performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and the shape (smiling face shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is made difficult to see. In addition, when the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are specially plated, in the big win performance, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is lit up, and the shape (smiling face shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 may be made visible through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29.

[Modification 5]
In the start port light-emitting performance B of FIG. 192(E) to FIG. 192(D), when the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the reserved display position 9Cd and becomes the reserved icon 9C, the light-emitting state of the first start port 20 changes from white to yellow (gold). The yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A has a higher expected winning rate than the white spherical reserved icon 9A. When the light-emitting state of the first start port 20 changes from white to yellow (gold), the yellow (gold) may be turned off for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) and then turned back to yellow (gold), and this may be repeated five times to cause the yellow to flash (gold). The reason for this (the change in the light emission mode to flash yellow (flash gold) five times) is to make it different from the change in the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole), which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 (receiving hole), is controlled to go from white light on to off for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds), then controlled to light white again and flash white once. In other words, the change in the light emission mode to flash yellow (flash gold) five times can suggest to the player that the expectation of a win is increasing, and the light emission mode of the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the change in the light emission mode to flash yellow (flash gold) five times) can inform the player that the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserve icon 9A has moved to the reserve display position 9Cd.

[Modification 6]
In the starting hole light-emitting performance A in Fig. 191, the starting hole light-emitting performance B in Fig. 192, the starting hole light-emitting performance C in Fig. 193, and the starting hole light-emitting performance D in Fig. 194, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the light-emitting mode of the first starting hole 20 is changed, but this can also be applied to the second starting hole 21. In this case, a decorative board on which a single or multiple full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted is placed inside the second starting hole 21, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The second starting hole 21 emits light when the full-color LEDs mounted on this decorative board emit light. When the first starting hole 20 is of standard specification, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to light in white, causing the second starting hole 21 to light in white light; and further, even in the case of a jackpot performance or a demo performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to light in white, causing the second starting hole 21 to light in white light.

In contrast, if the second starting opening 21 is of special plating specification, a decorative member is further arranged in front of the decorative board on the inside front side of the second starting opening 21, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is illuminated, the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting opening 21 (smiling face shape) is visible through the front side of the second starting opening 21, whereas when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off, the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting opening 21 (smiling face shape) is difficult to see through the front side of the second starting opening 21, and the color of the special plating (e.g., silver) is visible through the front side of the second starting opening 21. In addition, if the second starting hole 21 is of special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and further, in the big win performance and the demo performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting hole 21 (smiling face shape) is made difficult to see. In addition, if the second starting hole 21 is of special plating specification, in the big win performance, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board may be lit up, and the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the second starting hole 21 (smiling face shape) may be made visible through the front of the second starting hole 21.

[Modification 7]
In the starting hole light-emitting performance D of FIG. 194, a special plating is applied to the inside of the front of the first starting hole 20, and a decorative member is arranged in front of the first starting hole decorative board. When the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is illuminated, the shape (smile shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 is visible through the front of the first starting hole 20, while when the full-color LED mounted on the first starting hole decorative board is turned off, the shape (smile shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting hole 20 is difficult to see through the front of the first starting hole 20, and the color of the special plating (e.g., silver) is visible through the front of the first starting hole 20. However, a decorative part may be provided around the first starting hole 20 (e.g., the upper side, right side, lower side, left side, etc. of the first starting hole 20). The first starting hole 20 and the decorative part may be unitized, and if they are independent parts, it is preferable that the decorative part is arranged adjacent to the periphery of the first starting hole 20. Inside the decorative part, a decorative board on which a full-color LED is mounted and a decorative member arranged in front of the decorative board and shaped, for example, by printing a character (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "decorative member shaping (character shaping)" are housed. The back side of the decorative part, that is, the surface facing the decorative part, is specially plated, and the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board emits light, allowing light to pass through the front of the decorative part. The decorative part may be molded and shaped from a colorless and transparent resin, or its surface may be shaped as a smooth surface (flat or curved). When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is illuminated, the shape (character shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the decorative part can be seen through the front of the decorative part arranged around the first starting hole 20, whereas when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off, the shape (character shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the decorative part cannot be seen through the front of the decorative part arranged around the first starting hole 20, and the color of the special plating (e.g., silver) can be seen through the front of the decorative part.

[Modification 8]
Starting gate light-emitting performance A in Figure 191, starting gate light-emitting performance B in Figure 192, starting gate light-emitting performance C in Figure 193, and starting gate light-emitting performance D in Figure 194 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect K1-1]
A gaming machine having an inlet capable of receiving gaming balls,
A first effect of varying the light emission state of the receiving port based on the reception of a game ball into the receiving port;
and a second performance that allows the light-emitting state of the receiving entrance to be changed by executing the first performance, and then prevents the execution of the first performance and maintains the light-emitting state of the receiving entrance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect K1-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second performance allows execution of the first performance until the number of reserved icons reaches a predetermined number, and prevents execution of the first performance after the number of reserved icons reaches the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect K1-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
In the second performance, a specific reserved icon having a higher expected probability of winning than the reserved icon becomes the reserved icon, and the first performance is permitted to be executed, and the first performance changes the light-emitting state of the receiving port to a specific light-emitting state, and then the execution of the first performance is prevented, and the light-emitting state of the receiving port is maintained in the specific light-emitting state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect K1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The second performance allows the execution of the first performance when the pattern change due to the reserved icon is started and the reserved icon is changed to a specific reserved icon, and the first performance changes the light-emitting mode of the receiving port to a specific light-emitting mode, and then prevents the execution of the first performance and maintains the light-emitting mode of the receiving port in the specific light-emitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect K1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first performance may further include outputting an allowable sound based on the reception of a game ball in the reception opening;
The second performance allows output of the permissible sound when the first performance is permitted, and prevents output of the permissible sound when the first performance is prevented.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is configured as a so-called type 1/type 2 mixed machine, but the gaming machine 1 may have other configurations. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, etc. Also, the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, trigger, etc. may also be used as an operation unit operated by the player. Also, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect may be executed using an image representing the select button 68, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the image display device 7. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may be equipped with a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). At least a part of the display effects performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: gaming machine 3: playing area 5: board lamp 7: image display device 9A, 9B: reserved image (reserved icon)
9C…Relevant pending image (relevant pending icon)
14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 20 ... First starting hole (first ball entry hole)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Presentation control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that represents the same shape as the shape represented by the hold icon,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed in the display means;
a second effect in which the specific image is displayed at a predetermined display position of the display means after the first effect;
a third effect in which the specific image moves in a predetermined direction within the display means and becomes invisible after the second effect;
and a fourth performance in which, after the third performance, the specific image that has become invisible becomes visible in a different display mode from that in the third performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images